SR@N12.0 GUL - Interoperability - Guide

SRAN
GUL Multimode Collaboration

Solution Engineering Guide
Issue 01
Date 2016-07-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
SRAN
GUL Multimode Collaboration Solution Engineering
Guide Contents
Contents
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview of This Engineering Guide.............................................................................................................................1
1.2 Problems to be Solved by the Guide..............................................................................................................................1
2 Technological Foundation of Multi-RAT Collaboration.......................................................3

2.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................................3
2.2 Mode and Spectrum Development.................................................................................................................................3
2.3 Subscriber Distribution...................................................................................................................................................9
2.4 SRAN Feature Design Objectives..................................................................................................................................9
2.5 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN................................................................................................................15
2.5.1 SRAN8.0 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN.............................................................................................15
2.5.2 SRAN9.0 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN.............................................................................................16
2.5.3 SRAN10.0 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN...........................................................................................16
2.5.4 SRAN10.1 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN...........................................................................................17
2.5.5 RAN and CN Versions for SRAN11.0......................................................................................................................17
2.6 GUL Interoperability Feature Maturity........................................................................................................................19
2.7 Considerations for Choosing a Bearer Policy and Objectives......................................................................................19
2.8 Methodology.................................................................................................................................................................21
2.8.1 Scenario Analysis......................................................................................................................................................21
2.8.2 Requirement Identification........................................................................................................................................23
2.8.3 Bearer Policies...........................................................................................................................................................24
2.8.4 Feature Selection.......................................................................................................................................................26
2.8.5 Examples...................................................................................................................................................................26
3 Multi-RAT and MultiBand Collaborative Solution.............................................................29

3.1 Overall GUL Interoperability Solution.........................................................................................................................29
3.1.1 Overall Service Bearer Principles of Inter-RAT Interoperability..............................................................................29
3.1.2 General Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring Frequencies................................................................30
3.1.2.1 Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring Frequencies on the LTE Side................................................30
3.1.2.1.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring UMTS Frequencies on the LTE Side..................................................30
3.1.2.1.2 Neighboring GSM Frequency Configurations on the LTE Side.........................................................................32
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
3.1.2.2 Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring Frequencies on the UMTS Side............................................33
3.1.2.2.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring LTE Frequencies on the UMTS Side..................................................33
3.1.2.2.2 Principles for Configuring Neighboring GSM Frequencies on the UMTS Side.................................................34
3.1.2.3 Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring Frequencies on the GSM Side..............................................34
3.1.2.3.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring LTE Frequencies on the GSM Side.....................................................34
3.1.2.3.2 Principles for Configuring Neighboring UMTS Frequencies on the GSM Side.................................................35
3.1.3 GU Interoperability Networking Solution.................................................................................................................36
3.1.3.1 Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode...........................................................................................................36
3.1.3.1.1 I. Scenario Description........................................................................................................................................36
3.1.3.1.2 II. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network..................................................................37
3.1.3.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network...................................................................40
3.1.3.2 Solutions to Service Continuity..............................................................................................................................43
3.1.3.2.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Service Continuity..........................................................................................................44
3.1.3.2.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity...........................................................................................................54
3.1.3.3 Solutions to Load Balancing..................................................................................................................................77
3.1.3.3.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Load Balancing...............................................................................................................77
3.1.3.3.3 III. Solutions to GSM Load Balancing................................................................................................................85
3.1.3.4 Solutions to Service Steering..................................................................................................................................89
3.1.3.4.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Service Steering..............................................................................................................89
3.1.3.4.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Steering...............................................................................................................96
3.1.3.5 Solutions to Fast Return.......................................................................................................................................104
3.1.3.5.1 I. Scenario Description......................................................................................................................................104
3.1.3.5.2 II. Solutions to GSM-to-UMTS Fast Return.....................................................................................................105
3.1.4 GL Interoperability Networking Solution...............................................................................................................106
3.1.4.1 Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode.........................................................................................................106
3.1.4.1.2 II. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in an LTE Network..................................................................107
3.1.4.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network.................................................................114
3.1.4.2 Solutions to Service Continuity............................................................................................................................117
3.1.4.2.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Continuity............................................................................................................118
3.1.4.2.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity.........................................................................................................124
3.1.4.3 Solutions to Load Balancing................................................................................................................................129
3.1.4.3.2 II. Solutions to LTE Load Balancing.................................................................................................................129
3.1.4.3.3 III. Solutions to GSM Load Balancing..............................................................................................................134
3.1.4.4 Solutions to Service Steering................................................................................................................................138
3.1.4.4.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Steering................................................................................................................138
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
3.1.4.4.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Steering.............................................................................................................141

3.1.4.5 Solutions to Voice Services..................................................................................................................................142
3.1.4.5.1 I. Policies for 2G and 3G Voice Services..........................................................................................................142
3.1.4.5.2 II. CSFB.............................................................................................................................................................143
3.1.4.5.3 III. SRVCC........................................................................................................................................................153
3.1.4.5.4 IV. Processing of Combined Services...............................................................................................................154
3.1.4.6.2 II. Solutions to GSM-to-LTE Fast Return.........................................................................................................155
3.1.5 UL Interoperability Networking Solution...............................................................................................................158
3.1.5.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network..............................................................165
3.1.5.2.2 II. Solutions to Weak LTE Coverage.................................................................................................................173
3.1.5.2.3 III. Solutions to Weak UMTS Coverage...........................................................................................................179
3.1.5.3.2 II. Solutions to LTE Load Balancing.................................................................................................................183
3.1.5.3.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Load Balancing...........................................................................................................187
3.1.5.4.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Steering................................................................................................................193
3.1.5.4.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Service Steering..........................................................................................................196
3.1.5.5.2 II. CSFB.............................................................................................................................................................204
3.1.5.5.3 III. SRVCC........................................................................................................................................................215
3.1.5.6.1 Scenario Description.........................................................................................................................................215
3.1.5.6.2 Solutions to UMTS-to-LTE Fast Return...........................................................................................................216
3.1.5.7 Enhanced Solutions to Interoperability in High-Speed Railway Scenarios.........................................................225
3.1.5.7.1 Scenario Description.........................................................................................................................................225
3.1.5.7.2 Enhanced Solutions to Interoperability in High-Speed Railway Scenarios......................................................225
3.1.6 GUL Interoperability Networking Solution............................................................................................................229
3.1.6.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network..............................................................244
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
3.1.6.1.4 IV. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network.................................................................254

3.1.6.2.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Continuity............................................................................................................260
3.1.6.2.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Service Continuity.......................................................................................................268
3.1.6.2.4 IV. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity.........................................................................................................281
3.1.6.3.2 II. Solutions to Load Balancing in an LTE Network.........................................................................................309
3.1.6.3.3 III. Solutions to Load Balancing in a UMTS Network.....................................................................................313
3.1.6.3.4 IV. Solutions to Load Balancing in a GSM Network........................................................................................326
3.1.6.4.2 II. Solutions to Service Steering in an LTE Network........................................................................................334
3.1.6.4.3 III. Solutions to Service Steering in a UMTS Network.....................................................................................341
3.1.6.4.4 IV. Solutions to Service Steering in a GSM Network.......................................................................................355
3.1.6.5.2 II. CSFB.............................................................................................................................................................365
3.1.6.5.3 III. SRVCC........................................................................................................................................................376
3.1.6.6.1 I. Solutions to GSM-to-LTE Fast Return...........................................................................................................377
3.1.6.6.2 Solutions to UMTS-to-LTE Fast Return...........................................................................................................379
3.1.6.6.3 Solutions to GSM-to-UMTS Fast Return..........................................................................................................388
3.1.7 Single-Frequency Interoperability Solution............................................................................................................390
3.1.7.1 Camping Scheme of UEs in Idle Mode................................................................................................................390
3.1.7.2 Service Continuity Solution.................................................................................................................................390
3.1.7.3 Load Balancing Solution......................................................................................................................................391
3.1.7.4 Service Differentiation Solution...........................................................................................................................391
3.1.7.5 Voice Service Solution..........................................................................................................................................392
3.1.7.6 Fast Return Solution.............................................................................................................................................392
3.2 Parameter Configuration Principles...........................................................................................................................392
3.2.1 Parameter Configuration Principles........................................................................................................................392
3.2.2 Description of Parameters for Inter-RAT Handover Threshold Configuration.......................................................393
3.2.2.1 Configuration of Inter-RAT Handover Threshold from LTE to Another System.................................................393
3.2.2.1.1 Basic Concepts..................................................................................................................................................393
3.2.2.1.2 Setting the Threshold for Event A2...................................................................................................................394
3.2.2.1.3 Setting the Threshold for Event B1...................................................................................................................394
3.2.2.2 Configuration of Inter-RAT Handover Threshold from UMTS to Another System............................................395
3.2.2.2.1 Basic Concepts..................................................................................................................................................395
3.2.2.2.2 Setting the Threshold for Event 2D...................................................................................................................395
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
3.2.2.2.3 Setting the Threshold for 3A Event...................................................................................................................397

3.2.3 Relationship Between Parameters...........................................................................................................................397
3.2.3.1 Relationship Between Inter-RAT Reselection Parameters...................................................................................398
3.2.3.2 Relationship Between Inter-RAT Handover Parameters......................................................................................401
3.2.3.3 Anti-Ping-Pong Parameter Check.........................................................................................................................405
3.3 KPI Feature.................................................................................................................................................................405
3.3.1 Contents of this Chapter..........................................................................................................................................405
3.3.2 G2U KPI..................................................................................................................................................................410
3.3.3 G2L KPI..................................................................................................................................................................414
3.3.4 U2G KPI..................................................................................................................................................................417
3.3.5 U2L KPI..................................................................................................................................................................441
3.3.6 L2G KPI..................................................................................................................................................................443
3.3.7 L2U KPI..................................................................................................................................................................447
4 Typical Scenarios of the Live Network.................................................................................452

4.1 GU Dual-Mode Network............................................................................................................................................452
4.1.1 Scenario Analysis....................................................................................................................................................452
4.1.2 Interoperability Policies...........................................................................................................................................452
4.1.3 Applied Feature.......................................................................................................................................................453
4.1.4 KPI Performance.....................................................................................................................................................453
4.2 UL Dual-Mode Network............................................................................................................................................453
4.2.1 Scenario Analysis....................................................................................................................................................453
4.2.2 Interoperability Policies...........................................................................................................................................454
4.2.3 Applied Feature.......................................................................................................................................................454
4.2.4 KPI Performance.....................................................................................................................................................455
4.3 GUL Tri-Mode Network.............................................................................................................................................455
4.3.1 Operator H in Country C.........................................................................................................................................455
4.3.1.1 Scenario Analysis.................................................................................................................................................455
4.3.1.2 Bearer Policy........................................................................................................................................................456
4.3.1.3 Features Involved.................................................................................................................................................458
4.3.1.4 KPI........................................................................................................................................................................458
4.3.2 Operator T in Country Y..........................................................................................................................................459
4.3.2.2 Bearer Policy........................................................................................................................................................459
4.3.2.3 Application Feature..............................................................................................................................................460
4.3.2.4 KPI........................................................................................................................................................................461
4.3.3 Operator O in Country A.........................................................................................................................................461
4.3.3.2 Bearer Policy........................................................................................................................................................462
4.3.3.3 Application Feature..............................................................................................................................................463
4.3.3.4 KPI........................................................................................................................................................................463
5 Principles of GUL Interoperability Features.......................................................................464
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
5.1 G2U............................................................................................................................................................................468
5.1.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.....................................................................................................468
5.1.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover......................................................................................470
5.1.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover..........................................................................................472
5.1.4 GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State..................................................................................473
5.1.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.........................................................................475
5.1.6 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).................................................................................476
5.1.7 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)........................................................................................478
5.1.8 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA..............................479
5.1.9 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g................................................................................482
5.1.10 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g...................................................................483
5.1.11 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g....................................................................485
5.1.12 GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search.......................................................................................................487
5.2 G2L.............................................................................................................................................................................489
5.2.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.......................................................................................489
5.2.2 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.........................................................................................490
5.2.3 GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality...............................................................492
5.2.4 GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...........................................................494
5.2.5 GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage...........................................................496
5.2.6 GBFD-511305 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority....................................................498
5.2.7 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover......................................................................499
5.2.8 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE.......................................................................................................501
5.2.9 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE....................................................................................................502
5.2.10 GBFD-511309 SRVCC.........................................................................................................................................504
5.2.11 GBFD-171208 QoS Optimization for SRVCC......................................................................................................505
5.2.12 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release...............................................................................507
5.2.13 GBFD-511313 CSFB............................................................................................................................................508
5.2.14 GBFD-171212 Ultra-Flash CSFB.........................................................................................................................510
5.3 U2G............................................................................................................................................................................512
5.3.1 WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage......................................................................................513
5.3.2 WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.........................................................................................515
5.3.3 WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.............................................................................................516
5.3.4 WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.........................................................................................................517
5.3.5 WRFD-02030801 NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)...................................................................................519
5.3.6 WRFD-02030802 PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS.................................................................................520
5.3.7 WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS........................................................................................521
5.3.8 WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management.............................................................................................522
5.3.9 WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance.....................................................................................524
5.3.10 WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry........................................................................................................525
5.3.11 WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect...............................................................................................................526
5.3.12 WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup...................................................527
5.3.13 WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.....................................528
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
5.3.14 WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g..........................................................................530

5.3.15 WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.......................................................................532
5.3.16 WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.......................................................................534
5.4 U2L.............................................................................................................................................................................537
5.4.1 WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase1...................................................................................537
5.4.2 WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE.........................................................539
5.4.3 WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.........................................................................540
5.4.4 WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM....................................................................................................542
5.4.5 WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls........................................................................543
5.4.6 WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to LTE....................................................................................................545
5.4.7 WRFD-171223 Fast Return to LTE for SRVCC User.............................................................................................547
5.4.8 WRFD-150219 Coverage Based PS Redirection from UMTS to LTE...................................................................548
5.4.9 WRFD-150220 Coverage Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE......................................................................550
5.4.10 WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection from UMTS to LTE........................................................................551
5.4.11 WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE...........................................................................553
5.4.12 WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with PS Handover.........................................................................555
5.4.13 WRFD-150231 RIM Based UMTS Target Cell Selection for LTE.......................................................................556
5.5 L2G.............................................................................................................................................................................558
5.5.1 LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN.............................................................558
5.5.2 LOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN.........................................................................................................................561
5.5.3 LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN..................................................................................................................562
5.5.4 LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to GERAN..............................................................................................564
5.5.5 LOFD-001046 Service based inter-RAT handover to GERAN..............................................................................565
5.5.6 LOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN........................................................................................................565
5.5.7 LOFD-081283 Ultra-Flash CSFB to GERAN........................................................................................................567
5.5.8 LOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN..................................................................................................569
5.5.9 LOFD-001073 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to GERAN............................................................................570
5.5.10 LOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN.................................................................................................571
5.5.11 LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Reselection..................................................................................................572
5.6 L2U.............................................................................................................................................................................573
5.6.1 LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN.............................................................573
5.6.2 LOFD-001022 SRVCC to UTRAN.........................................................................................................................576
5.6.3 LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN..................................................................................................................577
5.6.4 LOFD-001043 Service based inter-RAT handover to UTRAN..............................................................................579
5.6.5 LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN..............................................................................................580
5.6.6 LOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN........................................................................................................581
5.6.7 LOFD-070202 Ultra-Flash CSFB to UTRAN........................................................................................................583
5.6.8 LOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN..................................................................................................585
5.6.9 LOFD-001072 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN............................................................................586
5.6.10 LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering........................................................................................587
5.6.11 LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell Selection..........................................................................................588
5.6.12 LOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN.................................................................................................589
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide Contents
5.6.13 LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Reselection..................................................................................................590
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview of This Engineering Guide

This document describes service bearer policies and GUL interoperability features that are
applicable in intra-RAT and inter-RAT scenarios. This document briefly describes each
feature's working principles, application scenarios, related parameters, and KPIs. For detailed
principles, parameter settings, and feature deployment methods, see the corresponding feature
parameter description (FPD) documents. The last chapter provides actual bearer policies and
feature applications in typical scenarios.
This document consists of five parts:
 Part I: Overview of This Document. This part describes the organization of this
document and specifies the aspects of this document that different readers should focus
on for different scenarios.
 Part II: Basis of Multi-RAT Collaboration Technologies. This part mainly includes two
aspects: 1. Basic concepts involved in the multimode and multi-band solution, such as
modes and spectrum development. 2. Methodology of the multi-mode and multi-band
solution. The methodology focuses on analysis of the GUL collaboration networking
solution and is the foundation for subsequent chapters.
 Part III: Multimode and Multi-Band Collaboration Solution. This part is the focus of this
document and it describes features related to multimode interoperability as well as their
parameter settings and KPIs.
 Part IV: Multimode Collaboration Solution Examples.
 Part V: Principles of Multimode Collaboration Features.
This document is intended for MOs, maintenance personnel, customer service personnel, and
test engineers. It is updated with SRAN versions.
This document does not cover features related to TDD, MOCN, and macro-micro networking. For
detailed descriptions of solutions and features for a single mode, see corresponding FPD documents.
Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 1 Introduction
1.2 Problems to be Solved by the Guide

The GUL multimode coordination solution applies to various networking scenarios: GU dual-
mode, GL dual-mode, UL dual-mode, and GUL multimode networking. The following figure
shows the working principle of the GUL multimode networking.
Figure 1.1 Recommended service bearer policies of GUL services
The GUL multimode coordination solution involves collaboration within a single mode
(collaboration between frequency bands or between frequencies) and collaboration between
modes (GU, GL, and UL). To determine the solution, you generally need to perform the
following:
 Determine the application scenarios.
 Determine the problems to be solved.
 Specify the bearer policies for different frequencies and frequency bands, determine cell
camping and reselection policies for UEs in idle mode, and determine service processing
and release policies for CS services, PS services, and combined CS+PS services.
 Determine features to be deployed based on scenarios and requirements.
 Selects appropriate parameter settings when the preceding features are enabled.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 2 Technological Foundation of Multi-RAT Collaboration
2 Technological Foundation of Multi-RAT

Collaboration
2.1 Introduction
This chapter focuses on the multimode coordination solution and the corresponding policies.
2.2 Mode and Spectrum Development

In the GSM network deployment period, the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands are
used. In the earlier and middle stages of UMTS network deployment, the 2100 MHz
frequency band is used for multi-carrier networking. UMTS 900 MHz Refarming emerges
due to the coverage advantages of the 900 MHz frequency band and the increasing
penetration rate of UMTS 900 MHz terminals. In a UMTS 900 MHz refarming project, some
GSM 900 MHz spectrum resources are used by UMTS 900 MHz frequencies. In this stage,
LTE networks are initially deployed for verification of LTE technologies. Generally, the 2600
MHz frequency band is used for hotspot coverage of LTE networks.
Because 2G subscribers are switching to 3G network, the number of UMTS subscribers
increases rapidly. Carriers usually expand the capacity of the 2100 MHz frequency band to
absorb more traffic (the refarmed UMTS 900 MHz network also absorbs traffic as well as
providing coverage). With an increase in the LTE terminal penetration rate, operators
accelerate LTE network deployment. They not only improve the coverage of previously
deployed 2600 MHz networks but also buy 800/700 MHz spectrum resources to solve LTE
coverage problems. With the continuous decrease of GSM subscribers, operators deploy LTE
networks using 5 MHz or 10 MHz spectrum resources on the GSM 1800 MHz frequency
band. TDD spectrums are advantageous in their symmetrical attribute. Therefore, more and
more operators use LTE-FDD/LTE-TDD hybrid networking.
With further decrease of GSM subscribers and increase of UMTS and LTE subscribers,
GU900 refarming is further used to configure two UMTS frequencies on the UMTS 900 MHz
frequency band; GL1800 refarming is further used to configure one 15 MHz frequency on the
LTE 1800 MHz frequency band. The refarming is intended to absorb more traffic.
Figure 1.2 shows the spectrum development process of GUL.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.2 Spectrum development process of GUL
As shown Figure 2-1, less and less frequency resources are used by GSM networks while
more and more spectrum resources are used by UMTS and LTE network, and LTE-TDD/LTE-
FDD hybrid networking emerges. The change requires that the solution supports more flexible
frequency band configuration and mode selections so as to adapt to GUL spectrum
development.
The following table lists current distribution of LTE frequency bands.
E-UTRA Uplink Downlink Duplex Channel Alias Region

Operating (UL) BS (DL) BS Mode Bandwidt
Band Receive Transmit h (MHz)
1 1920 MHz 2110 MHz FDD 5, 10, 15, UMTS Japan,
to 1980 to 2170 20 IMT, Europe,
MHz MHz "2100" Asia
2 1850 MHz 1930 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, PCS, Canada,
to 1910 to 1990 10, 15, 20 "1900" United
MHz MHz States,
Latin
America
3 1710 MHz 1805 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, DCS Finland,
[
to 1785 to 1880 10, 15, 20 1800, 18] Hong
MHz MHz "1800" Kong[19]
[
20]
4 1710 MHz 2110 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, AWS, Canada,
to 1755 to 2155 10, 15, 20 "1.7/2.1 US, Latin
MHz MHz GHz" America
5 824 MHz 869 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, Cellular Canada,
to 849 to 894 10 850, US,
MHz MHz UMTS850 Australia

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
6 830 MHz 875 MHz FDD 5, 10 UMTS800 Japan

to 840 to 885
MHz MHz
7 2500 MHz 2620 MHz FDD 5, 10, 15, IMT-E, EU
to 2570 to 2690 20 "2.5 GHz"
MHz MHz
8 880 MHz 925 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, GSM, EU, Latin
to 915 to 960 10 UMTS900 America
MHz MHz ,
EGSM900
9 1749.9 1844.9 FDD 5, 10, 15, UMTS170 Canada,
MHz to MHz to 20 0 US, Japan
1784.9 1879.9
MHz MHz
10 1710 MHz 2110 MHz FDD 5, 10, 15, UMTS, Brazil,
to 1770 to 2170 20 IMT 2000 Uruguay,
MHz MHz Ecuador,
Peru
11 1427.9 1475.9 FDD 5, 10, 15, PDC Japan
MHz to MHz to 20 (Softbank,
1452.9 1500.9 KDDI,
MHz MHz DoCoMo)
[21]
12 698 MHz 728 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 716 to 746 10
MHz MHz
13 777 MHz 746 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, Verizon's
to 787 to 756 10 700 MHz
MHz MHz Block C
14 788 MHz 758 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, 700 MHz
to 798 to 768 10 Block D
MHz MHz
17 704 MHz 734 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5, AT&T's
to 716 to 746 10 700 MHz
MHz MHz Block B
18 860 MHz 815 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 875 to 830 10
MHz MHz
19 875 MHz 815 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 890 to 830 10
MHz MHz
20 791 MHz 832 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 821 to 862 10
MHz MHz
21 1496 MHz 1448 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1511 to 1462

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MHz MHz 10, 15

22 3510 MHz 3410 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 3590 to 3490 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
23 2180 MHz 2000 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 2220 to 2020 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
24 1525 MHz 1627 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1559 to 1661 10, 15
MHz MHz
25 1930 MHz 1850 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1995 to 1915 10, 15
MHz MHz
26 859 MHz 814 MHz FDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 894 to 849 10
MHz MHz
33 1900 MHz 1900 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1920 to 1920 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
34 2010 MHz 2010 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 2025 to 2025 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
35 1850 MHz 1850 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1910 to 1910 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
36 1930 MHz 1930 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1990 to 1990 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
37 1910 MHz 1910 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1930 to 1930 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
38 2570 MHz 2570 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 2620 to 2620 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
39 1880 MHz 1880 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 1920 to 1920 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
40 2300 MHz 2300 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 2400 to 2400 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
41 2496 MHz 2496 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 2690 to 2690 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
42 3400 MHz 3400 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
to 3600 to 3600 10, 15, 20

MHz MHz
43 3600 MHz 3600 MHz TDD 1.4, 3, 5,
to 3800 to 3800 10, 15, 20
MHz MHz
Currently, GUL networks are mainly deployed on the following frequency bands: 800 MHz,
900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2300 MHz, and 2600 MHz. Later, the 700 MHz and 1900
MHz frequency bands will also be used. Table 2.1 lists the mapping between frequency bands
and supported modes based on the mode supporting capability of each frequency band and
frequency band usage on live networks.
Table 2.1 Mapping between frequency bands and supported modes

Frequency Band (MHz) Supported Mode
700 LTE-FDD
800 LTE-FDD
900 GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD
1800 GSM, LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD
1900 LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD
2100 UMTS
2300 LTE-TDD
2600 LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD
In actual network deployment, there is a high probability that the mapping between frequency
bands and modes is as follows for an operator having six frequency bands.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.3 Typical mapping between frequency bands and modes for an operator having six
frequency bands
The following figures show the path loss of each frequency band in urban areas and rural
areas.
Path loss of each frequency band in urban Path loss of each frequency band in rural
areas areas
Based on the path loss and bandwidth of each frequency band, operators usually use low
frequency bands to provide basic coverage and use high frequency bands to absorb traffic.
In the network evolution process, networks supporting different modes such as GSM, UMTS,
and LTE may coexist, and networks supporting the same mode but working on different
frequency bands may coexist. Figure 2-3 shows intra-RAT and inter-RAT networking
scenarios.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.4 Intra-RAT and inter-RAT networking scenarios
 Intra-RAT special networking scenarios are not covered in this document.

 This document does not cover TDD-related features.
2.3 Subscriber Distribution

In economically developed areas, such as North America, Japan, South Korea, and West
Europe regions, wireless network users are mainly UMTS subscribers, and there will remain a
large number of UMTS subscribers in a certain period. Since 2014, LTE subscribers have
increased rapidly with maturity of LTE terminals. At the same time, GSM subscribers
decrease. It is expected that there will be a small number of GSM subscribers in 2016 and
GSM networks will be out of service in some regions.
With the rapid increase of UMTS and LTE subscribers and decrease of GSM subscribers,
inter-RAT and inter-band load is imbalanced. Therefore, the GUL multimode collaboration
solution needs to take all UEs in idle mode, access state, connected state, and release state into
consideration so as to balance network load and improve network capacity.
2.4 SRAN Feature Design Objectives

The following table describes the SRAN solution development process.
Version Version Positioning
SRAN5.0 In this stage, LTE technologies are relatively immature; LTE networks cover
only hotspots; data cards supporting LTE are sold on the market and are used
for LTE verification and high-speed data service experience. With maturity

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
of UMTS networks, more and more customers want to implement GU

interoperability. Therefore, SRAN5.0 version positioning is as follows:
1. Perfects the GU interoperability solution by adding GU interoperability
features.
2. Supports basic mobility between GSM and LTE and between UMTS and
LTE only in version tests.
SRAN6.0 In this stage, some multimode terminals support LTE. At the initial phase of
LTE network deployment, IMS is not deployed. Main requirements in this
stage are as follows: The GUL collaboration solution supports voice call
requirements of LTE terminals. Due to terminal capability restrictions (for
example, not supporting U2L measurements and handovers in connected
states), UEs need to return to LTE networks after services are finished.
Therefore, the GUL collaboration solution needs to support redirection-based
fast return to LTE. SRAN6.0 version positioning is as follows:
1. Supports commercial use of basic GL interoperability features (coverage-
and load-based handover and redirection), with CSFB and GSM-to-LTE
Fast Return preferentially ensured.
2. Supports commercial use of basic UL interoperability features (coverage-
based handover and redirection), with CSFB and UMTS-to-LTE Fast
Return preferentially ensured.
3. Basic GU interoperability features are mature, and new GU
interoperability features are not incorporated into this version.
Outstanding problems: coverage-related
4. The decision on LTE-to-UMTS cell reselection can be based on either
RSRP or RSRQ. However, the decision on UMTS-to-LTE cell
reselection can only be based on RSRP. Therefore, it is recommended
that the decision on cell reselection between UMTS and LTE only be
based on RSRP to prevent ping-pong cell reselection. This restriction is
lifted in SRAN8.0.
5. In SRAN6.0, GSM-to-UMTS handover decisions are made based on a
single threshold, that is RSCP or Ec/N0, which may cause ping-pong
handovers between GSM and UMTS. This restriction is lifted in
SRAN7.0 by using two thresholds for handover decisions.
6. Before UMTS-to-GSM handover (CS/PS) measurement, inter-frequency
and inter-RAT measurement control messages are sent to a UE at the
same time in this version, and the inter-frequency compressed mode
measurement requires that a UE be handed over to GSM first. The
following phenomenon may occur: Some UEs are preferentially handed
over to GSM even though UMTS inter-frequency coverage is good. This
problem is solved in SRAN7.0. In SRAN7.0, the network preferentially
sends inter-frequency measurement control messages to UEs. A2
thresholds are set separately for LTE inter-frequency and inter-RAT
handovers. Therefore, LTE networks do not have this problem.
7. Cell reselection rather than NC2 and PS handover is generally performed
for switching UEs performing PS services from GSM to UMTS or LTE.
The main cause is as follows:
NC2 has certain impact on network capacity, and some terminals have
incompatibility problems with NC2 (causing data plane interruption).
UEs do not support PS handover and therefore PS handover is not

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
enabled on live networks.

8. The cell change order (CCO) procedure instead of PS handover is
generally performed to switch UEs performing PS services from UMTS
to GSM. This is because terminals do not support PS handovers from
UMTS to GSM.
9. The current version supports UMTS-to-GSM and LTE-to-GSM NACC.
The NACC feature reduces interruption time in a UMTS-to-GSM and
LTE-to-GSM CCO procedure. However, the RIM requires collaboration
of multiple NEs and therefore the NACC feature is not used in SRAN6.0.
With popularization of LTE-to-GSM and LTE-to-UMTS Flash CSFB,
this feature can be used.
10. UEs do not support measurement in connected states or UMTS-to-LTE
PS handover. UMTS-to-LTE redirection is performed on UEs in
connected states in SRAN6.0.
11. To speed up GSM-to-UMTS and GSM-to-LTE cell reselection, the
Extended BCCH feature can be used to accelerate SI2Quater transmission
so that UEs can rapidly obtain system information for inter-RAT cell
reselection.
This version supports LTE-to-GSM or LTE-to-UMTS single radio voice
call continuity (SRVCC) of CS services. That is, if LTE coverage
becomes weak, VoIP services in the LTE network (PS domain) can be
handed over to the CS domain of the GSM or UMTS network to
implement voice continuity. SRAN6.0 only supports SRVCC for CS
services and does not support SRVCC for combined CS+PS services.
Currently, no UEs support SRVCC. Therefore, the SRVCC feature is
neither supported in SRAN6.0 nor covered in this document.
Outstanding problems: load-related
12. Intra-RAT load-based handovers should be preferentially performed.
Inter-RAT load-based handovers are performed only when most cells
within a RAT are heavily loaded.
13. If the Iur-g interface is not configured between GSM and UMTS,
between GSM and LTE, or between UMTS and LTE, all GU, GL, and
UL load-based handovers are blind handovers, that is, the load of the
target cell is unknown. In this case, it is recommended that unidirectional
load-based handover instead of bidirectional load-based handover be
enabled to prevent ping-pong handovers. Handover preparation rejection
also occurs in this scenario, which causes untimely handovers. These
problems are solved in later versions.
14. After the Iur-g interface is configured, the load of the BSC/RNC CPU
increases. You are advised to determine the BSC/RNC CPU load before
configuring the Iur-g interface.
15. The Iur-g interface has the following problem: The maximum number of
neighboring BSC cells that can be configured for an RNC is 3000. When
the maximum number is exceeded, the RNC does not respond to
neighboring cell measurement requests. This problem is solved in
SRAN8.0.
16. No UE supports GSM-to-LTE PS handover in this version. Therefore,
load-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is not described in SRAN6.0
documentation.
17. UEs supporting NC2 have compatibility issues, and GSM-to-LTE NC2 is
immature. Load-based UMTS-to-LTE NC2 is not described in SRAN6.0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

documentation.
18. The WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management feature can
transmit load information based on handover modes. This feature is also
supported but not sold on the BSC side.
Outstanding problems: service-related
19. Traffic steering during the access phase is not sold as features on both the
GSM and UMTS sides. For example, service-based RRC redirection and
measurement-based DRD are basic functions.
20. Ensure that the peer load can be obtained before enabling service-based
handover or direction. This is because ping-pong service-based
redirection or handover occurs if the peer load is high. For details, see
load-related solutions.
21. If a feature makes service handover decisions based on the handover
attribute in the Assignment Request message but the CN does not carry
the handover attribute, the handover attribute configured on the RAN side
can be used for handover decisions.
22. In SRAN6.0, service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS redirection fails after a
DRD. This problem is solved in SRAN7.0.
SRAN7.0 In this stage, the number of terminals supporting LTE CSFB increases and
terminals supporting R9 CSFB emerge, so operators become concerned
about CSFB user experience (CSFB delay). UL interoperability performance
of UEs improves, and UMTS-to-LTE PS handover and measurement are
supported. Because TDD spectrum is not asymmetric, carriers begin to
deploy LTE-FDD+LTE-TDD hybrid networks. GUL collaboration can be
performed between GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. SRAN7.0
version positioning is as follows:
1. GL interoperability features are well developed in SRAN6.0. For
example, features such as Flash CSFB to GERAN are implemented in
SRAN6.0. In SRAN7.0, no new GL interoperability feature is introduced.
Maturity of GL interoperability features is accelerated.
2. In this version, the UMTS-to-LTE Fast Return solution is further
perfected to improve user experience of CSFB (including CSFB delay
improvement, CSFB user admission guarantee, and CSFB emergency call
guarantee) and support handovers between UMTS and LTE. The solution
involves service-based UMTS-to-LTE handover/redirection, fast return,
and fast D2I (state transition from CELL_DCH to idle mode).
3. GU interoperability features are relatively mature. New features, such as
those using the GSM-to-UMTS handover dual-threshold algorithm, are
added in this version.
Outstanding problems:
4. The new function, UL Fast Return, does not solve the PLMN selection
problem in MOCN scenarios. This problem will be solved in SRAN9.0.
SRAN8.0 In this stage, LTE networks have been developed. UL dual-mode terminals
have been increasing. Some LTE networks work on low frequency bands, for
example, the 800 MHz frequency band. More and more LTE networks
support VoIP. In this version, Huawei provides complete UL mobility
policies for customers. For UL interoperability, the LTE networks can be
LTE-TDD/LTE-FDD hybrid networking. SRAN8.0 version positioning is as
follows:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

1. UL interoperability features are perfected according to protocol evolution
and the development of LTE networks and LTE terminal users. The UL
interoperability features include the UL cell reselection algorithm based
on RSRQ, CS+PS LTE-to-UMTS SRVCC, load-based UMTS-to-LTE
handover, and coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover.
2. GL and GU interoperability features are relatively mature. There are no
special GL/GU interoperability feature requirements in SRAN8.0.
3. Cell reselection between UMTS and LTE is based on RSRP or RSRQ and
cannot be based on both RSRP and RSRQ.
4. For combined CS+PS services, LTE-to-UMTS SRVCC does not
guarantee CS services. This problem will be solved in later versions.
5. Protocols do not define a clear emergency call indicator. Therefore,
SRVCC of emergency calls cannot be guaranteed.
6. For load/service-based UMTS-to-LTE PS handover or redirection, the
UMTS network does not know the load of the target LTE cell. Therefore,
handover admission may fail, or ping-pong handovers may take place.
This problem will be solved in later versions.
SRAN9.0 In this stage, LTE users are increasing, and LTE networks require more
spectrum resources. However, GSM 1800 MHz networks cannot refarm
enough spectrum resources to LTE. In addition, CSFB experiences
homogeneous competition, and high-valued features must be designed to
promote the version value. UL dual-mode terminals are increasing. SRAN9.0
version positioning is as follows:
1. The innovatively designed GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing
feature implements spectrum sharing between GSM and LTE. This
feature avoids dramatic deterioration of GSM capacity and service quality
caused by refarming and accelerates refarming.
2. The innovatively designed LTE-to-UMTS Ultra Flash CSFB feature uses
the SRVCC procedure to implement CS fallback, which greatly reduces
CSFB time and improves CSFB user experience.
3. Some features are enhanced and optimized. These features include LTE-
load-based UL mobility management, SRVCC with PS handover, and
SPID-based mobility management.
4. During CSFB Fast Return, blind redirection may fail. This problem will
be solved in SRAN10.1.
5. Currently, SRVCC does not support fast return. SRVCC is not
commercially used in a large scale. SRVCC Fast Return is introduced in
SRAN10.1.
SRAN10.0 SRAN10.0 only incorporates changes caused by architecture design.
Therefore, no important feature is introduced in SRAN10.0. However,
scattered and urgent requirements are incorporated in this version, for
example:
1. LTE-to-UMTS/LTE-to-GSM MLB is optimized for Bell in Canada,
which can now be triggered by the PRB usage and user number.
SRAN10.1 In this stage, LTE users continue to increase, but VoIP services are still not
put into large-scale commercial use. New features are required to better

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
guarantee voice quality. SRAN10.1 version positioning is as follows:

1. The LTE-to-GSM Ultra Flash CSFB feature uses the SRVCC procedure
to implement CS fallback to GSM networks, which significantly reduces
the CSFB duration and improves CSFB user experience.
2. New features or feature enhancements are introduced for GSM-to-LTE
and UMTS-to-LTE fast return so that SRVCC or CSFB UEs can return to
LTE networks fast based on measurement, thereby improving user
experience.
3. QoS Optimization for SRVCC is introduced, which improves SRVCC
handover success rates and SRVCC QoS. User experience of voice
services is improved as a result.
4. Some existing features are enhanced and optimized. Specifically, the
following switch and functions are introduced: cell-level switch for
CSFB-based blind handovers, priority-based cell reselection by UEs in
CELL_FACH state, optimized admission for HSPA+ services after LTE-
to-UMTS handovers, fast RRC connection release, and LTE-frequency-
priority-based handovers and redirections.
None
SRAN11.0 In this phase, the LTE cell load increases. For PS services, the L2U MLB
feature can reduce the LTE cell load. The mature commercial use of this
feature is required. For voice services, satisfy customers' optimization and
maintenance requirements and ensure the mature commercial use.
SRAN11.0 version positioning is as follows:
 The L2U MLB process has been optimized in the following aspects: The
maximum number of transferable users in each execution period can be
configured. The neighboring UMTS cells that fail to prepare handovers
are punished. The load status of LTE is determined based on the L2U
MLB trigger status of cells.
 After the L2U MLB process transfers UEs to UMTS, the current U2L
interoperability features have been optimized as follows to reduce load:
− Delivering MLB-specific priority reselection to UEs handing over to
UMTS networks based on the L2U MLB process
− Prohibiting UEs handing over from LTE networks to perform load-
related U2L redirection/handover
− Non-coverage-related U2L redirection carries blacklisted cells in RRC
release messages.
 LTE and GSM are involved in multi-operator core network (MOCN)
scenarios. The RIM and handover procedures from LTE to GSM are
optimized.
 Combination of CS and PS services will be redirected to UTRAN. The
RAU procedure will be delayed to reduce the fallback delay.
 CSFB parameter optimization
 VoLTE is prohibited to switch over to different frequencies to perform
frequency-level configuration, which ensures the flexibility of handover
policies.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
None
SRAN11.1 In this phase, CSFB features are gradually used commercially on a large
scale. VoLTE is also commercially used in some sites. Requirements of
voice services also increase. SRAN11.1 version positioning is as follows in
consideration of protocol evolution and competitiveness:
 The current interoperability process has been optimized as follows: The
handover preparation failure and retry process have been optimized to
ensure the success rate of CSFB and SRVCC handover preparation. The
conflicts between CSFB and the handover procedure have been optimized
to ensure CSFB first.
 For U2L reselection in idle mode or U2L interoperability in connected
mode, the RNC can deliver the corresponding frequency based on the
frequency selection policy.
 In LTE multiband cell scenarios, The RNC can switch over or redirect a
UE to multiband LTE cells based on the frequency band of the UE.
2.5 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN

2.5.1 SRAN8.0 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN
Inter-RAT networking has certain requirements for the GUL access network. It is
recommended that Huawei products use the versions listed in the following tables or later
versions to ensure that features can be used in SRAN8.0.
Table 4.1 Version requirements for the GUL access network in SRAN8.0
RAN Version
GSM GBSS15.0
UMTS RAN15.0
LTE eRAN6.0
Table 4.2 CN version requirements in SRAN8.0

NE Version
SGSN V900R010C02SPH320
MSC V200R010C00SPC200
HLR HLR9820V600R003
USN USNV9R10C00
UGW UGWV9R10

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NE Version
HSS HSS9860 V9R8C01

RAN Version
GSM GBSS16.0
UMTS RAN16.0
LTE eRAN7.0

NE Version
SGSN V900R011C00
MSC V200R010C20
USN USNV9R11C00

RAN Version
GSM GBSS17.0
UMTS RAN17.0
LTE eRAN8.0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

NE Version
SGSN V900R012C00
MSC V200R010C30
USN USNV9R12C00

RAN Version
GSM GBSS17.1
UMTS RAN17.1
LTE eRAN8.1

NE Version
SGSN V900R012C00
MSC V200R011C00
USN USNV9R12C00
2.5.5 RAN and CN Versions for SRAN11.0

The requirements of RANs for GSM, UMTS, and LTE in the SRAN11.0 inter-RAT
networking are listed below. To ensure the availability of features, the following versions and
later are recommended.
RAN versions for SRAN11.0
RAN Recommended Version
GSM GBSS18.0
UMTS RAN 18.0
LTE eRAN11.0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
CN versions for SRAN11.0
NE/Device Version
SGSN V900R014C10
MSC V200R011C00
USN USNV9R14C10

GSM GBSS18.1
UMTS RAN 18.1
LTE eRAN11.1
NE/Device Version
SGSN V900R014C10
MSC V200R011C00
USN USNV9R14C10

GSM GBSS19.0
UMTS RAN 19.0
LTE eRAN12.0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NE/Device Version
MSC V200R011C00
USN USNV9R14C10
2.6 GUL Interoperability Feature Maturity

For detailed descriptions of feature maturity, obtain the corresponding document from the
website http://wxsolutions/svms/index.do. If the website cannot be accessed, contact relevant
SRAN test personnel.
2.7 Considerations for Choosing a Bearer Policy and

Objectives
The following factors may be considered when selecting a bearer policy for GUL networking:
coverage, load, service, distance, QoS, and customer-specific requirements. Among these
factors, coverage, load, and service are generally considered. Therefore, the factors to be
considered by a solution can be classified into coverage, load, service, and others (including
distance, QoS, and customer-specific requirements), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 1.5 Considerations of the GUL collaboration solution
The selected bearer policies or features need to achieve the following objectives:
 Service continuity: terminal preferential camping and seamless cell selection, seamless
switching of services between networks, and optimum KPI performance. Generally,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
service continuity is the basic network requirement. Subsequent network optimization,

for example, reduction of inter-RAT handover delay, traffic steering, and load balancing
are performed based on service continuity.
 Load balancing: balances the load between networks and improves network capacity.
 Traffic steering: hands over UEs running specific services to an appropriate RAT and
frequency band based on network characteristics and service requirements. After services
are completed, UEs can return to the target RAT and frequency band rapidly to improve
user experience and network capacity.
 Customization: Different service bearer solutions are formulated based on operators'
operating policies.
Figure 1.6 Features involved in the GUL collaboration solution
The following figure shows the classification of GUL interoperability features based on
feature objectives.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
2.8 Methodology
Figure 1.7 illustrates how to determine the appropriate features applicable to a scenario by
means of scenario analysis.
Figure 1.7 Methodology for feature selection by means of scenario analysis
The following sections describe scenario analysis, requirement identification, policy

determination, and feature selection.
2.8.1 Scenario Analysis

The following factors are within the range of scenario analysis: mode combination, frequency
bands of each mode, bandwidth, terminal penetration rate, loads of each mode and frequency
band, and whether the LTE network supports voice services.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Mode combination + frequency bands of each mode + frequencies of each mode +

spectral efficiency of each mode
Mode combinations include GU, GL, UL, and GUL. In GU dual-mode networking
scenarios, the solution needs to consider the load status of the GSM and UMTS networks
and determine whether to perform load-based handovers or redirections.
In scenarios where LTE is involved, the solution needs to consider CS service continuity.
Based on whether LTE supports VoIP, different voice bearer policies should be adopted.
PS services should be carried on the mode with a higher spectral efficiency. As shown in
Figure 2-7 the spectral efficiency in descending order is as follows: L > U > G. Figure 2-
7 assumes that the LTE bandwidth is 5 MHz.
Figure 1.8 Spectral efficiency of each mode
If there are a large number of frequencies in one mode, you need to configure the priority for
each frequency and check whether each frequency band provides continuous coverage.
When there are multiple UMTS frequencies, traffic steering may be performed between these
frequencies. For the bearer policy of each frequency, see the UMTS bearer policy guide. If
traffic steering is performed among UMTS frequencies, LTE-to-UMTS CS/PS traffic steering
may be performed during LTE-to-UMTS interoperability. In this case, a PS service priority
and CS service priority need to be configured for each neighboring UMTS frequency of LTE
cells. Priorities are either high or low. PS service priorities are used in LTE-to-UMTS
coverage-based handover/redirection scenarios, and CS service priorities are used for CSFB
and SRVCC voice service scenarios.
 Frequency bands (frequency bands in each mode, and whether each frequency band
provides continuous coverage)
− Determine the frequency bands in each mode. Check whether the UMTS 900 MHz,
LTE 800 MHz, and LTE 900 MHz frequency bands serve the coverage layer. To
increase the success rate of coverage-based handovers in each mode, it is not
recommended that UEs in idle mode preferentially camp on these frequency bands.
In UMTS networks, frequency priorities are generally not set. UEs can randomly or
preferentially camp on frequencies. The frequency selection scheme is described in
the following sections.
− Check whether the frequency bands in a mode and in different modes provide
continuous coverage. If a mode or frequency band provides discontinuous coverage,
coverage-based inter-RAT handover or inter-frequency handover must be enabled to
ensure service continuity. According to network development rules, high-standard

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
networks are generally newly deployed and cannot provide network-wide

continuous coverage in the initial stage. To improve network utilization and user
experience, customers usually require that multimode UEs preferentially camp on.
At the edge of high-standard networks, UEs can be selected to or handed over to
another RAT.
 Capacity of each frequency band (bandwidth, number of frequencies, whether a
frequency band serves as the capacity layer, and the services that can be carried by each
frequency)
Determine the number of frequencies, bandwidth, and terminal penetration rate of each
mode so as to determine mode bearer policies, which are not described in this chapter.
Check whether traffic steering is performed on UMTS frequencies. To reduce the
complexity of LTE configuration, it is recommended that one or two neighboring UMTS
frequencies be configured for each LTE frequency and ensure that the two UMTS
frequencies provide continuous coverage. If only one UMTS frequency can be
configured, configuration of the UMTS inter-RAT neighboring cells, set 1 or 2 UMTS
frequencies, it is recommended one HSDPA frequency be configured. If two UMTS
frequencies can be configured, it is recommended that one R99 frequency and one
HSDPA frequency be configured.
 Terminal penetration rate
UEs on networks are classified into two types: single-mode UEs and multimode UEs.
The terminal penetration rate has two meanings: penetration rate of terminals supporting
different modes and frequency bands (for example, the proportion of terminals
supporting the LTE 1800 MHz frequency band) and penetration rate of terminals
supporting different functions (for example, when the proportion of terminals not
supporting handovers is high, inter-RAT interoperability is implemented through
redirection.)
 Whether the LTE network supports voice services
If the LTE network does not support VoIP, CS services initiated on the LTE network
must fall back to UMTS or GSM through CSFB. If the LTE network supports VoIP,
when the LTE load is lightly loaded, the solution needs to ensure CS service continuity
by using the coverage-based PS handover or SRVCC; when the LTE network is heavily
loaded, the solution needs to implement load balancing between frequencies in a mode
and load sharing between LTE and UMTS or between LTE and GSM.
2.8.2 Requirement Identification

Determine whether the customer has the following requirements:
 Multimode terminals preferentially camp on UMTS or LTE to improve the utilization
efficiency of high-standard networks and enable users to obtain better service
experience.
 After CS services are released, UEs can quickly return to high-standard networks for
camping on.
 CS/PS service continuity
 Preferential handover or redirection to a specific frequency
 Inter-network load balancing
 Customers' special requirements: whether a customer wants to implement traffic steering
between modes. For example, regarding traffic steering between GSM and UMTS, the
GSM network preferentially carries CS services whereas the UMTS network
preferentially carries PS services; regarding traffic steering between GSM and LTE or
between UMTS and LTE, CS services or other types of services initiated on the LTE
network can be handed over to GSM or UMTS.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
2.8.3 Bearer Policies

Different customers may have different networking scenarios and requirements. For example,
if the customer requires UEs preferentially camp o high-standard networks, the solution needs
to consider the mode combination, frequency combination in each mode, and whether the
frequencies provide continuous coverage. Different customer requirements correspond to
different bearer policies. However, the camping policies in idle mode and service continuity
bearer policies in connected states are the most basic policies that must be implemented,
regarding of whether a customer has raised the requirements. The bearer policies for traffic
steering and load balancing need to be specified when required by the customer. Figure 2-8
shows the mapping among network scenarios, customer requirements, and recommended
bearer polices.
Figure 1.9 Mapping among network scenarios, customer requirements, and recommended bearer
polices
 Camping polices in idle mode

Determine mode and frequency priorities. UEs can perform preferred camping between
modes, for example, UEs can preferentially camp on a high or low standard. UEs can
also preferentially camp on a frequency or perform random camping within a mode.
 Load balancing in access state
When the load of the low standard is heavy, multimode terminals can be switched to the
high standard through load-based redirection. When the load of the high standard is light,
multimode terminals can be switched to the low standard through load-based redirection.
For example, when the GSM load is heavy, CS services can be redirected to UMTS;
when the UMTS load is heavy, CS services can be redirected to GSM.
 Traffic steering in access state
In the access phase, traffic steering can be implemented through redirection. Traffic
steering can be classified into intra-RAT traffic steering between frequencies and inter-
RAT traffic steering. For example, traffic steering is commonly used between UMTS
frequencies. Currently, most live networks do not support VoLTE services, and therefore

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
traffic steering cannot be performed between LTE frequencies. Regarding inter-RAT

traffic steering, the GSM network preferentially carries CS services, whereas the UMTS
or LTE network preferentially carries PS services. CS services initiated on the UMTS
network fall back to the GSM network through service-based redirection.
 Service continuity in connected states
b. CS service continuity
가 GU dual-mode networking scenarios
If a UE initiates CS services in the UMTS network, the UE can perform a
coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM handover, which ensures CS service
continuity when the UMTS network coverage is insufficient. Before the CS
services are finished, the UE does not return to the UMTS network.
나 LTE network available
If LTE does not support VoIP, CS services preferentially fall back to the UMTS
network through CSFB. If there is no UMTS coverage or UMTS coverage is
insufficient, CS services can be switched to the GSM network through CSFB.
If LTE supports VoIP, UEs can switch to the UMTS or GSM network through
coverage-based PS handover or SRVCC when LTE coverage is insufficient.
Before the CS services are finished, the UE does not return to the LTE
network.
1. PS service continuity
Coverage-based inter-RAT PS handovers can be classified into LTE-to-GSM, LTE-to-
UMTS, and UMTS-to-GSM PS handovers.
 GU dual-mode networking scenarios
At the coverage edge of the UMTS network, UEs can be switched to the GSM network
through coverage-based handovers.
After UEs enter the UMTS coverage area, they can be reselected to the UMTS network
based on priorities or the signal level.
 LTE network available
At the coverage edge of the LTE network, UEs can be switched to the UMTS network
through coverage-based handovers. If there is no UMTS coverage or UMTS coverage is
insufficient, UEs can be handed over to the GSM network.
After UEs enter an area with good LTE coverage, they can be reselected to the LTE
network through priority-based GSM-to-LTE or UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection.
 Load balancing in connected states
For example, when the GSM load is heavy, CS services can be handed over to UMTS;
when the UMTS load is heavy, CS or PS services can be handed over to GSM. In
addition, PS services can be handed over or redirected to LTE to implement load sharing.
Currently, the LTE network load is light. Load balancing is implemented between LTE
frequencies. With the increase of LTE subscribers, the LTE load increases, and load
balancing can be implemented between LTE and GSM or between LTE and UMTS.
 Traffic steering in connected states
Based on the services initiated UEs, service-based handover or redirection can be
performed to switch UEs to proper networks to improve network capacity and user
experience. Currently, CS services initiated on the UMTS network can be handed over to
the GSM network, CS services initiated on the LTE network can be handed over or
redirected to the UMTS or GSM network, and PS services initiated on the UMTS
network can be handed over or redirected to the LTE network.
 Fast return in release state

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
After a UE finishes services in the network of a low mode, it can return to the network of
a high mode for camping by using any of the following ways: cell reselection, fast
return, and fast cell reselection. Compared with cell reselection, the fast return solution
reduces the number of location area updates, shortens the camping time in the low mode,
and therefore improves user experience. Compared with cell reselection, the fast cell
reselection solution shortens the cell reselection time.
In UL networking scenarios, after UEs finish services in the LTE network, they can
preferentially camp on the UMTS network to implement LTE-to-UMTS load balancing
if the LTE network load is heavy.
2.8.4 Feature Selection

Features should be selected to ensure the implementation of bearer policies based on the UE
state (idle mode, access state, connected state, or release state) and service type (CS service or
PS service).
2.8.5 Examples
The following is a scenario example:
1. Triple-mode networking: G900 (5 MHz)+G1800 (10 MHz)+ U900 (5 MHz)+U2100
(F1+F2+F3+F4)+L800 (10 MHz) +L1800 (15 MHz) +L2600 (20 MHz)
2. The GSM 900 MHz frequency band provides network-wide continuous coverage, and
some GSM 900 MHz spectrum resources are refarmed to UMTS. The refarmed UMTS
frequencies serve the UMTS coverage layer, filling coverage holes.
3. The GSM 1800 MHz frequency band provides network-wide continuous coverage.
4. Frequencies F1 and F2 on the UMTS 2100 MHz frequency band provide continuous
coverage (coverage layer), and frequencies F3 and F4 on the UMTS 2100 MHz
frequency band provide hotspot coverage (capacity layer).
5. The LTE 2600 MHz frequency band provides continuous coverage in urban areas.
6. The LTE 1800 MHz and 800 MHz frequency bands provide network-wide and
continuous coverage, respectively. In addition, they fill coverage holes of the LTE 2600
MHz frequency band.
7. LTE does not support voice services.
Customer requirements are as follows:
1. UEs in idle mode preferentially camp on LTE.
2. Service continuity in connected states can be guaranteed. The GSM network working at
the 900 MHz frequency band has a light load. UEs are preferentially handed over to the
GSM network working at the 1800 MHz frequency band during LTE-to-GSM or UMTS-
to-GSM handovers so as to improve the success rate of inter-RAT handovers.
3. Load balancing can be performed between GSM and UMTS. If CS traffic is heavy on the
GSM network, some traffic can be distributed to the UMTS network for load sharing.
4. After services are released, UEs can quickly return to the LTE or UMTS network.
Service bearer policies:
Inter-RAT neighboring UMTS frequencies of LTE are U900 and U2100 F1. Inter-RAT
neighboring GSM frequencies of LTE are G900 and G1800.
 Idle mode
The camping priorities in descending order are L2600, L1800, L800, U2100, U900, and
GSM.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Cell reselection can be performed among LTE1800, LTE2600, L800, UMTS, and GSM.
c. At the edge of LTE coverage, UEs support LTE-to-GSM or LTE-to-UMTS cell
reselection.
d. At the edge of L2600 coverage, UEs support cell reselection to the L800 or L1800
network. When UEs enter L2600 coverage, UEs support cell reselection from the
L1800 or L800 network to the L2600 network.
e. After UEs enter the LTE coverage area, UEs can perform GSM-to-LTE or UMTS-
to-LTE cell reselection.
In a UMTS continuous coverage area, UEs use the random camping policy. At the
coverage edge of U2100 F3 or F4, UEs preferentially camp on U2100 F1/F2 or
U900.
f. At the coverage edge of U2100 F3 or F4, UEs can perform cell reselection from
U2100 F3/F4 to U2100 F1/F2 or U900.
g. At the edge of UMTS coverage, UEs can perform UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection.
After UEs enter the UMTS coverage area, UEs can perform GSM-to-UMTS cell
reselection.
UEs randomly camp on GSM frequencies.
 Load balancing in access state
When the GSM load is heavy, CS services initiated on the GSM network can be
redirected to UMTS to implement load balancing. When the UMTS load is heavy, CS
services are handed over to GSM.
 Service continuity in connected states
h. CS service continuity
At the UMTS coverage edge, coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM handovers can be
performed.
At the coverage edge of U2100 F3/F4, UEs can be handed over to U2100 F1/F2 or
U900.
CS services initiated on the LTE network can be preferentially switched to the
UMTS network through CSFB. If there is no UMTS coverage or UMTS coverage is
insufficient, CS services can be switched to the GSM network through CSFB.
i. PS service continuity
At the coverage edge of the UMTS network, UEs can be switched to the GSM
network through coverage-based handovers.
After UEs enter the UMTS coverage area, UEs can perform priority- or level-based
cell reselection to UMTS.
LTE network available
At the coverage of the LTE network, UEs can be switched to U900 or U2100 F1
through coverage-based handover. At the UMTS coverage edge, UEs can be handed
over to GSM.
After UEs enter the LTE coverage area, they can be switched to the LTE network
through priority-based GSM-to-LTE or UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection.
 Load balancing in connected states
When the GSM network load is heavy, CS services can be switched to the UMTS
network through load-based handovers; PS services can be handed over to the LTE
network. When the UMTS network load is heavy, CS or PS services can be handed over
to the GSM network; PS services can also be handed over to the LTE network. When the
LTE network load is heavy, services can be switched to the UMTS or GSM network to
implement load balancing. For load balancing between GSM and UMTS, load

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
information can be exchange over the Iur-g interface to increase the handover success
rate.
 Fast return in release state
After services are released on the GSM network, UEs can quickly return to the LTE or
UMTS network. After services are released on the UMTS network, UEs can quickly
return to the LTE network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 3 Multi-RAT and MultiBand Collaborative Solution
3 Multi-RAT and MultiBand Collaborative

Solution
3.1 Overall GUL Interoperability Solution

3.1.1 Overall Service Bearer Principles of Inter-RAT
Interoperability
The general policy for the GSM, UMTS, and LTE networks to bearer services is as follows:
1. Comply with the existing intra-RAT service bearer policies first. To ensure better service
experience, the inter-frequency handover takes precedence over the coverage-based
handover or load-based handover. In service steering, low-RAT networks bear CS
services and high-RAT networks bear PS services.
2. Idle mode: UEs are preferentially carried in a high-RAT. The common RAT priorities
are as follows: LTE > UMTS > GSM. When high-RAT coverage is insufficient, UEs
reselect a cell of other RATs to camp on based on common cell priorities. UEs reselect a
cell based on load of different carriers and RATs.
3. Access mode:
When using load balancing and service steering policies, consider the RAT to be
accessed by the UE in access mode. The GU dual-mode scenario is used as an example.
If the load of UMTS networks is high, load-based redirection of CS services from UMTS
networks to GSM networks is supported. This avoids the redirection to heavily loaded
GSM cells. In the service steering policy, CS services initiated in UMTS networks can be
redirected to GSM networks. CS services initiated in GSM networks can be carried by
GSM networks.
4. Connected mode:
j. PS services are preferentially carried in LTE networks. If LTE network coverage is
insufficient, PS services are handed over to UMTS networks through packet
switched handover (PSHO) or redirection. If UMTS network coverage is
insufficient, PS services are switched over to GSM networks through PSHO, cell
change order (CCO) or redirection. If load of PS services is high in a certain RAT,
load balancing is performed among networks in other RATs.
i. The handover time through PSHO is short, which ensures continuity of PS
services.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
ii. The handover time through CCO, network assisted cell change(NACC), and
redirection is longer than that through PSHO. Handovers in these three ways
do not need support from the core network or UE. These three ways apply to
PS services, which are not delay-sensitive.
k. CS services:
i. If users initiate CS services in LTE networks but the networks do not support
VoIP, CS services preferentially fall back to UMTS networks through CSFB.
If the coverage of UMTS networks is insufficient, CS services fall back to
GSM networks. If the load of CS services in a network is high, load balancing
can be performed among networks of other RATs.
ii. When VoIP services are deployed in LTE networks, SRVCC is enabled to
switch the VoIP services to the CS domain of UTMS networks if no VoIP
services are deployed in the UTMS network or UMTS networks do not support
PSHO. If VoIP services are deployed in UMTS networks and PSHO is
supported, PSHO is enabled to switch the VoIP services to the CS domain of
UMTS networks. GSM networks do not support VoIP services. Therefore,
VoIP services in LTE networks can be handed over to GSM networks only
through SRVCC.
iii. If LTE does not support inter-RAT measurement in connected mode for GSM
and UMTS, eNodeB will adaptively perform non-measurement-based
handovers. Blind handover priorities for the neighboring GERAN and UTRAN
cells need to be configured.
iv. Video call (only for UMTS): When users initiate video calls in UMTS
networks and the coverage of UMTS networks is insufficient, only voice calls
fall back to GSM networks as GSM networks do not support video calls.
v. In target cell selection, if GU 900 MHz Refarming is performed, the number of
GSM 900 frequencies decreases and the load is high. In UMTS to GSM
interoperability, services are preferentially carried by GSM1800 cells. In LTE
to UMTS interoperability, if carriers in UMTS networks use service steering,
LTE can configure multiple neighboring UMTS frequencies. CS services are
preferentially carried by R99 carriers. PS services are preferentially carried by
HSPA or HSPA + carriers. If LTE configures only one neighboring UMTS
frequency, PS services are preferentially carried by HSPA carriers.
vi. After CS services are released, UEs preferentially return to a high-RAT to
camp on.
3.1.2 General Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring

Frequencies
3.1.2.1 Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring Frequencies on
the LTE Side
3.1.2.1.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring UMTS Frequencies on the LTE Side
 Requirements for configuring neighboring UMTS frequencies and cells on the LTE side
The following table lists the requirements for configuring neighboring UMTS
frequencies and cells on the LTE side.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
L2U PSHO SRVCC Redirection Cell

Reselection in
Idle Mode
Whether to Y Y Y Y
configure
neighboring
frequencies
Whether to Y Y Y/N(*Note) N
configure
neighboring
cells
From eRAN6.0 onwards, neighboring UMTS cells do not need to be configured for LTE-to-UMTS blind
redirection (including CSFB based on blind redirection in R8, and excluding blind CSFB in R9).
Neighboring UMTS cells must be configured for LTE-to-UMTS Flash CSFB (R9 CSFB) and LTE-to-
UMTS PS Redirection with UMTS SIB, regardless of whether the CSFB or PS redirection is a blind one
or based on measurement. The main reason is that UMTS frequencies, scrambling codes, and system
information must be contained in the RRC_CONN_REL messages.
 The number of neighboring UMTS cells carried in the RRC_CONN_REL message is restricted by
the CellInfoMaxUtranCellNum parameter. If the maximum number is exceeded, high-priority cells
are preferentially selected. If cell priorities are the same, cells are randomly selected. In addition, the
solution should ensure that measured cells can be delivered.
 For blind redirection-based CSFB complying with R9, the RIM procedure is performed to obtain
system information of UMTS cells. In this case, external UMTS cells configured on the eNodeB are
used.
As specified in 3GPP specifications, to enable a UE on the LTE network to measure a UMTS cell, the
measurement control message must carry the UMTS frequency and scrambling code of the cell.
Therefore, neighboring UMTS cells must be configured for measurement-based LTE-to-UMTS
redirection.
 Principles for configuring neighboring UMTS frequencies on the LTE side
A UE can measure at most three UMTS frequencies at the same time. When configuring
neighboring UMTS frequencies on the LTE side, it is recommended that different polices
be used based on traffic steering on the UMTS network:
 Traffic steering implemented on the UMTS network
On the LTE side, it is recommended that CS services carried by R99 frequencies be
configured with the highest priority (specified by the CsPriority parameter), and PS
services carried by HSPA frequencies be configured with the highest priority (specified
by the PsPriority parameter). These two parameters have been introduced to
accommodate the LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering feature.
− If the UMTS network load is light, one or two UMTS HSPA frequencies with good
coverage can be configured as neighboring UMTS frequencies on the LTE side.
− If the UMTS network load is imbalanced, multiple neighboring UMTS HSPA
frequencies (at least three) in the continuous UMTS coverage area can be
configured on the LTE side. In addition, the HSPA frequencies can be configured
with PS service priorities through the LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and
Reselection feature. If the HSPA frequencies have different priorities, the eNodeB
preferentially delivers HSPA frequencies with the highest PS service priority. If
each HSPA frequency has the same PS service priority on the LTE side, the eNodeB
preferentially delivers the highest-priority three HSPA frequencies according to the
ConnFreqPriority parameter. If each HSPA frequency has the same PS service

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
priority and the values of the ConnFreqPriority parameters are the same, the
eNodeB randomly delivers three HSPA frequencies.
 Traffic steering not implemented on the UMTS network
− If the UMTS network load is light, it is recommended that one or two UMTS HSPA
frequencies with good coverage be configured on the LTE side to simplify
configuration.
 If the UMTS network load is imbalanced, multiple neighboring UMTS frequencies (at
least three) can be configured on the LTE side. The eNodeB preferentially delivers the
high-priority frequencies based on the ConnFreqPriority parameter. If neighboring
UMTS frequencies have the same priority and the number of neighboring UMTS
frequencies is greater than or equal to 3, the eNodeB will randomly deliver three
frequencies.
3.1.2.1.2 Neighboring GSM Frequency Configurations on the LTE Side

1. Configuration requirements of the neighboring GSM frequencies and cells on the LTE
side.
The following table lists the configuration requirements of the neighboring GSM frequencies
and cells on the LTE side.
L2G PSHO SRVCC CCO/NAC Redirectio Cell

C n Reselection
in Idle
Mode
Whether to Y Y Y Y Y
configure
the
neighboring
frequency
Whether to Y Y Y Y/N (*Note) N
configure
the
neighboring
cell
Note: From eRAN6.0, LTE-to-GSM blind redirection (including redirection-based CSFB in

R8/R9) does not need to configure the neighboring GSM cells. Measurement-based
redirection needs to configure the neighboring GSM cells.
1. Configuration principles of the neighboring GSM frequency on the LTE side
Maximally 31 groups of neighboring GERAN frequencies can be configured for each
cell. A maximum of 64 neighboring GERAN BCCHs can be configured under each
neighboring GERAN carrier frequency group of a cell. In the RRC_CONN_REL
message, the maximum number of frequencies to be delivered is 32. If the number of the
neighboring GSM frequencies on the LTE side is more than 32, 32 neighboring
frequencies with higher connected-mode priorities will be delivered. If the connected-
mode priorities are the same, 32 random neighboring frequencies will be delivered.
Before configuring the BCCH neighboring frequencies, you need to configure the
corresponding BCCH frequency group first. At the protocol and product implementation
level, GSM900 and GSM1800 can be configured to the same frequency group. Different

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
frequency groups can be configured with different policies, such as the priority policy.
GSM1800 is mainly used to absorb traffics and GSM900 is mainly used to enhance
coverage. Therefore, GSM900 and GSM1800 are usually configured to two different
frequency groups. If neighboring GSM frequencies are configured on the LTE side, the
configuration follows the following principles: All GSM frequencies of neighboring
GSM cells which share a site with the LTE cell need to be configured. Frequencies of the
first layer neighboring GSM cells also needs to be configured. The specific coverage
situation determines whether to configure the L2 neighboring cell. For example, L2
neighboring GSM cells need to be configured for LTE800 and only the first layer
neighboring GSM cells need to be configured for LTE2600 as shown in the following
figure:

the UMTS Side
3.1.2.2.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring LTE Frequencies on the UMTS Side
 Requirements for configuring neighboring LTE frequencies and cells on the UMTS side
The following table lists the requirements for configuring neighboring LTE frequencies
and cells on the UMTS side.
U2L PSHO Redirection Cell Fast Return
Reselection in
Idle Mode
Whether to Y Y Y Y
configure
neighboring
frequencies
Whether to Y N (*Note) N Y
configure
neighboring
cells
In RAN14 and earlier versions, neighboring LTE cells need to be configured for UMTS-to-LTE
redirection because frequencies used by neighboring LTE cells are used as the frequencies for UMTS-to-
LTE redirection. Such implementation increases the network maintenance cost. In RAN14.1, non-
neighboring-cell-based UMTS-to-LTE redirection is introduced. The frequencies used for such a
redirection are broadcast in SIB19. The HO_U2L_REDIR_BASED_ABSOLUTE_FREQ_SWITCH
determines whether to perform neighboring-cell-based or SIB19-based UMTS-to-LTE redirection.
 Principles for configuring neighboring LTE frequencies on the UMTS side

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
A UE can measure a maximum of four LTE FDD frequencies and four LTE TDD
frequencies at the same time. If the number of LTE FDD/TDD frequencies is less than or
equal to 4, it is recommended that all LTE FDD/TDD frequencies be configured. If the
number of LTE FDD/TDD frequencies exceeds four, it is recommended that the number
of configured FDD/TDD frequencies not exceed four and that low-band frequencies and
high-band frequencies supported by most UEs be configured.
3.1.2.2.2 Principles for Configuring Neighboring GSM Frequencies on the UMTS Side
 Requirements for configuring neighboring GSM frequencies and cells on the UMTS side
The following table lists the requirements for configuring neighboring GSM frequencies
and cells on the UMTS side.
U2G PSHO CSHO Redirection Cell
Reselection in
Idle Mode
Whether to Y Y Y Y
configure
neighboring
cells
 Principles for configuring neighboring GSM frequencies on the UMTS side

Whether neighboring GSM frequencies need to be configured depends on the
configurations of neighboring GSM cells. Observe the following principles when
configuring neighboring GSM frequencies on the UMTS side: All neighboring GSM
cells co-sited with a local UMTS cell must be configured. The neighboring GSM cells at
the first layer around the local UMTS cell must also be configured. Whether neighboring
GSM cells at the second layer around the local UMTS cell need to be configured
depends on the coverage conditions. The following figure shows an example.

the GSM Side
3.1.2.3.1 Principles for Configuring Neighboring LTE Frequencies on the GSM Side
 Requirements for configuring neighboring LTE frequencies on the GSM side
G2L PSHO NC2 NC0 Cell Fast
Reselectio Return
n in Idle
Mode

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
G2L PSHO NC2 NC0 Cell Fast

Reselectio Return
n in Idle
Mode
configure
neighboring
frequencies
Whether to Y Y N N Y (Note)
configure
neighboring
cells
Neighboring LTE cells need to be configured on the BSC side for GSM-to-LTE Fast Return. Although
GSM-to-LTE Fast Return is a redirection, the network needs to determine whether the neighboring LTE
cell supports GSM-to-LTE rapid reselection. A neighboring LTE cell supports GSM-to-LTE Fast Return
only when the SPTRAPIDSEL parameter for the neighboring LTE cell is set to SUPPORT.
 Principles for configuring neighboring LTE frequencies on the GSM side
According to product specifications, a GSM network can be configured with 8 LTE
frequencies and 32 neighboring LTE cells at most. If the number of available LTE
frequencies is less than or equal to 8, it is recommended that all the LTE frequencies be
configured. If the number of available LTE frequencies is greater than 8, it is
recommended that no more than 8 neighboring frequencies be configured and
frequencies on low bands and frequencies on high bands supported by most UEs be
preferentially configured. For more information about UEs supporting different LTE
frequency bands, see section 3.2.2 "Principles for Configuring Inter-RAT Neighboring
Frequencies on the UMTS Side."
3.1.2.3.2 Principles for Configuring Neighboring UMTS Frequencies on the GSM Side
 Requirements for configuring neighboring UMTS frequencies on the GSM side
G2U PSHO CSHO NC2 NC0 Cell
Reselection
in Idle
Mode
configure
neighboring
cells
 Principles for configuring neighboring UMTS frequencies on the GSM side

A UE can measure at most three UMTS frequencies at the same time. When configuring
neighboring UMTS frequencies on the GSM side, it is recommended that different
polices be used based on traffic steering on the UMTS network:
− Traffic steering implemented on the UMTS network

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
GSM-to-UMTS CS handover instead of GSM-to-UMTS PS handover or NC2 is

generally performed. Observe the following principles when configuring
neighboring UMTS cells in idle mode on the GSM side:
1. Configure co-sited co-coverage UMTS cells as neighboring UMTS cells and ensure that
the total number of frequencies used by these neighboring UMTS cells does not exceed
three.
2. Based on UMTS coverage conditions, configure one or two layers of neighboring UMTS
cells with good coverage. If UMTS900 coverage is available, configure two layers of
neighboring UMTS cells. If UMTS2100 coverage is available, configure only one layer
of neighboring UMTS cells.
Traffic steering is implemented on the UMTS network. If a customer wants to switch CS
services initiated on the GSM network to UMTS R99 frequencies, the NCELLPRI of
R99 frequencies can be set to the highest priority so that CS services can be
preferentially switched to UMTS R99 frequencies.
− Traffic steering not implemented on the UMTS network
When configuring neighboring UMTS cells on the GSM side, it is recommended
that:
3. Configure co-sited co-coverage UMTS cells as neighboring UMTS cells and ensure that
the total number of frequencies used by these neighboring UMTS cells does not exceed
three.
4. Based on UMTS coverage conditions, configure one or two layers of neighboring UMTS
cells with good coverage.
3.1.3 GU Interoperability Networking Solution

3.1.3.1 Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode
3.1.3.1.1 I. Scenario Description
Most networks serve multiple modes and multiple frequency bands. In addition, the
penetration rate of UEs that support multiple modes or multiple frequency bands keeps rising,
gradually replacing single-mode UEs. Regarding such complicated networking, it is
imperative to promote the efficiency of the later-generation mode in a multimode network and
improve user experience by enabling users to camp on appropriate networks.
The following figure shows camping of GU dual-mode UEs in idle mode.
By considering different modes in a network, and the coverage continuity and the load state of
each frequency band, the solutions to camping of UEs in idle mode enable UEs to select a cell
with good signal quality for camping and processing services. Different goals must be reached
in different networking scenarios:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 In GU networking, it is recommended that GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on

the UMTS network to initiate services, thereby improving user experience.
 UEs in idle mode should be evenly distributed among frequency bands to balance
network load in access and connected modes.
3.1.3.1.2 II. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network

 Camping priority
− The camping priority in descending order is UMTS > GSM. The priorities of
frequency bands within UMTS and GSM are the same as the existing frequency
priority policies.
− Priority of frequencies within UMTS: UEs randomly camp on UMTS 900 MHz or
UMTS 2100 MHz cells.
 Cell reselection
GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on UMTS cells and support reselection between
UMTS and GSM cells.
− UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection is supported at the edge of a UMTS cell.
− After the UE enters the UMTS coverage area, GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection is
supported.
 Related features
There is no feature for UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection, which is a basic function.
 Parameter configuration
The following table describes parameter meanings and recommended parameter values.
For details about how to use a parameter, see UE Behaviors in Idle Mode Feature
Parameter Description and MML reference documents.
UMTS Parameter MML Command Recommended Description
Value
QualMeas MOD CPICH_ECNO Measurement

UCELLSELRESEL quantity of cell
selection and
reselection. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
Treselections MOD 1 Cell reselection
UCELLSELRESEL delay time. If the
signal quality of a
neighboring cell is
better than that of
the serving cell
during the specified
time of this
parameter, the UE
reselects the
neighboring cell.
This parameter is
used to avoid ping-
pong reselection
between different
cells. Value 0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
corresponds to the
default value 1s
defined in the
protocol.
For details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
Qqualmin MOD (-18) The minimum
UCELLSELRESEL required quality
threshold
corresponding to
CPICH Ec/N0.
When the measured
CPICH Ec/N0 is
larger than the value
of this parameter,
the cell meets the S
criteria of quality
level for cell
selection/reselection.
The RNC decides
whether the UE can
camp on the cell
according to the cell
selection/reselection
criteria. For details
about this parameter,
see 3GPP TS
25.304.
Qrxlevmin MOD (-58) The minimum
threshold
corresponding to
CPICH RSCP.
When the measured
CPICH RSCP is
of this parameter,
criteria of RX level
for cell
The RNC decides
whether the UE can
camp on the cell
criteria. The setting
of Qrxlevmin
should be related to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
Qqualmin. For
details about this
parameter, see
section 10.3.2.3 in
3GPP TS 25.331.
MaxAllowedUlTxP MOD 24 The maximum
ower UCELLSELRESEL allowed uplink
transmit power of a
UE in the cell, which
is related to the
network planning.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
SsearchRat MOD 2 Threshold for inter-
UCELLSELRESEL RAT cell
measurements in
SIB3 and SIB4.
When the quality
(CPICH Ec/N0
measured by the UE)
of the serving cell is
lower than this
threshold plus the
value of Qqualmin
for the cell, inter-
RAT cell
measurements are
started. When this
parameter is set to
127, inter-RAT cell
measurements are
performed. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
InterRatTreselScalin MOD 255 Inter-RAT
gFactor UCELLSELRESEL reselection delay
scaling factor.
Multiply this
parameter by its
reselection delay to
increase the inter-
RAT reselection
time. This parameter
is invalid when its
value is 255. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
Treselectionspch MOD 255 Reselection delay of

UCELLSELRESEL a UE in the
CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH state.
This parameter is
invalid when its
value is 255. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
Treselectionsfach MOD 255 Reselection delay of
CELL_FACH state.
This parameter is
invalid when its
value is 255. In this
case, Treselections
takes effect. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
MML command examples

\\Modifying cell selection and reselection information
MOD UCELLSELRESEL:QualMeas= CPICH_ECNO, Treselections=1, Qqualmin=-18, Qrxlevmin=-
58, MaxAllowedUlTxPower=24, SsearchRat=2, InterRatTreselScalingFactor=255,
Treselectionspch=255, Treselectionsfach=255;
3.1.3.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network

GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on UMTS cells and support reselection between
UMTS and GSM cells.
− GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection is supported in areas with good UMTS coverage.
− UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection is supported at the edge of a UMTS cell.
Table 9.1 Features recommended for reselection of UEs in idle mode in a GU dual-mode network
UE Mode Service Interoperation Recommended Feature
Type
Idle mode GSM to UMTS GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
For details about how to use a parameter, see Interoperability Between GSM and
WCDMA Feature Parameter Description and MML reference documents.
GSM Parameter MML Command Recommended Description
Value
INTERRATCELLR SET YES Whether the 2G-to-

ESELEN GCELLHOBASIC 3G cell reselection is
allowed.
If this parameter is
set to YES, the
reselection from 2G
cells to 3G cells is
allowed.
QI SET 7 In idle mode, if the
GCELLCCUTRAN signal level of the
SYS serving cell is below
[0, 7] or above [8,
15], the MS starts to
search for 3G cells.
For example, if this
parameter is set to 5
and if the signal
level of the serving
cell is lower than 5,
the MS starts to
search for 3G cells;
if this parameter is
set to 10 and if the
signal level of the
serving cell is above
10, then the MS
starts to search for
3G cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm
6: -74 dBm
7: (always), that is,
the MS keeps
searching for 3G

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
cells
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
15: Positive infinity
(never), that is, the
MS does not search
for 3G cells.
QCI Use_Qsearch_I This parameter
specifies the
threshold of the
signal level for cell
reselection in
connection mode
before Qsearch C is
obtained.
QP 7 In packet transfer
mode, if the signal
cell is below [0, 7]
or above [8, 15], the
MS starts to search
for 3G cells. For
example, if this
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
This parameter is
valid only if the
BSC sends GPRS
cell reselection
parameters to an MS
using a Packet Cell
Change Order or

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
Packet Measurement
Order message.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)

\\Setting basic handover parameters of a cell
SET GCELLHOBASIC: INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;
\\Setting call control UTRAN system message parameters of a cell
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: QI=7, QCI=Use_Qsearch_I, QP=7;
3.1.3.2 Solutions to Service Continuity

In a network of multiple RATs and multiple frequency bands, if the coverage or signal quality
of one mode or frequency band is poor, coverage- or signal quality-based inter-RAT or inter-
frequency handovers or redirections will be triggered. The priorities of inter-frequency or
inter-RAT inter-frequency cells for handovers or redirections can be configured to control
which cell or network the UE preferentially selects.
The following figure shows the inter-RAT and inter-frequency service continuity scheme.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The following sections describe the solutions to weak coverage of different RATs.
3.1.3.2.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Service Continuity

It is recommended that coverage-based inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers or
redirections be used to switch UEs to an inter-frequency or inter-RAT network, thereby
ensuring service continuity of multimode UEs between different networks.
 Solutions to weak UMTS coverage
− When UMTS coverage is insufficient, it is recommended that intra-RAT handovers
be preferentially performed to ensure service continuity.
− When GSM coverage is continuous, the coverage-based CCO or UMTS-to-GSM
PS handovers can be performed to switch services to the GSM network.
Table 9.2 Features recommended for a GU dual-mode network

Type
Connected mode UMTS to GSM WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT

Handover Based on
Coverage
For details about how to use a parameter, see Handover Feature Parameter Description
and MML reference documents.
Value
InterRATCSThd2D MOD (-14) Threshold of

EcN0 UINTERRATHOC triggering inter-RAT
OV measurements for
CS services when
Ec/N0 is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is lower
than this threshold,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the UE reports event

2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
earlier, increase the
threshold of
triggering event 2D;
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
triggering event 2D.
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2FE (-12) Threshold of
cN0 stopping inter-RAT
measurements for
CS services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
triggering event 2F;
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
triggering event 2F.
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATR99PsThd (-15) Threshold of
2DEcN0 triggering inter-RAT
measurement for PS
domain non-HSPA
services when Ec/N0
is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2DE (-15) Threshold of
cN0 triggering inter-RAT
measurements for
HSPA services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
2FEcN0 stopping inter-RAT
measurement for PS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
domain non-HSPA
services when the
measurement
quantity is Ec/N0.
Threshold for
stopping inter-RAT
measurements
(namely, the
threshold for
stopping the
compressed mode) is
one of the most key
parameters in inter-
RAT handover
policies. This
parameter affects the
proportion of UEs
entering the
compressed mode
and the success rate
of hard handovers in
a cell. The setting of
this parameter
depends on the
moving speed of
UEs and cell radius.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements. If the
cell is a macro cell,
it indicates that
micro cells exist in
this cell. To enable
the traffic absorption
function of the micro
cells, the
compressed mode
start threshold
should be set relaxed
and the stop
threshold should be
set harsh, that is, the
threshold for event
2D/2F be set higher

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
by using CPICH
RSCP. If the cell is a
micro cell, it
indicates that the
default value should
be modified
according to the link
budget result. Event
2D and event 2F are
used to enable and
disable the
compressed mode,
respectively. When
the cell is located in
the center of the
frequency coverage
or the inter-
frequency
measurement
quantity is set to
BOTH, Ec/N0
serves as the
decision standard for
events 2D and 2F.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2FEc (-13) Threshold of
N0 stopping inter-RAT
measurements for
HSPA services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2D (-100) Threshold of
RSCP triggering inter-RAT
measurements for
CS services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is lower
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2F (-97) Threshold of
RSCP stopping inter-RAT
measurements for
CS services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2DR (-110) Threshold of
SCP triggering
measurements for
HSPA services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is lower
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
2FRSCP stopping inter-RAT
measurement for PS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
domain non-HSPA
services when the
measurement
quantity is RSCP. If
the measured RSCP
value is greater than
this threshold, the
UE reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
InterRATHThd2FR (-107) Threshold of
SCP stopping
measurements for
HSPA services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.

\\Setting RNC-oriented coverage-based inter-RAT handover measurement algorithm
parameters
SET UINTERRATHOCOV: InterRATCSThd2DEcN0=-14, InterRATCSThd2FEcN0=-12,
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0=-15, InterRATHThd2DEcN0=-15, InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0=-13,
InterRATHThd2FEcN0=-13, InterRATCSThd2DRSCP=-100, InterRATCSThd2FRSCP=-97,
InterRATHThd2DRSCP=-110, InterRATR99PsThd2FRSCP=-107, InterRATHThd2FRSCP=-107;
3.1.3.2.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity

 Solutions to weak GSM coverage
− If UMTS coverage overlaps weak GSM coverage, GSM-to-UMTS CS handovers
can be performed to ensure the service continuity.
 In theory, call drop rates are supposed to decrease after the double threshold algorithm (anti ping-
pong handovers) is enabled in the GSM network. However, on some sites where GSM-to-UMTS
coverage-based handovers are enabled for CS services, the call drop rates significantly increase in
the UMTS network although the algorithm is enabled. Therefore, the handovers are not
recommended unless customers require it urgently.
 The double threshold algorithm for GSM-to-UMTS handovers is implemented as follows: The
threshold of a UMTS measurement quantity is delivered in the MI, and then a UE measures the
delivered measurement quantity of a UMTS neighboring cell. If the measured value exceeds the
threshold, the UE reports another measurement quantity of the UMTS neighboring cell. The
following is an example: If the BSC delivers an MI carrying an RSCP threshold, the UE measures
the RSCP of a UMTS neighboring cell, and reports the Ec/N0 of the UMTS neighboring cell only if
the measured RSCP exceeds the threshold. Then the BSC decides whether to trigger GSM-to-UMTS
handovers by checking whether the Ec/N0 reaches the handover threshold.
 As specified in 3GPP specifications, network control mode 2 (NC2) and PS handovers
can be used to hand UEs over to UMTS cells, thereby ensuring service continuity of
multimode UEs between different networks.
 NC2 or PS handovers cannot be commercially used at present because the industry chain
is immature.
 At present, if the GSM coverage is insufficient, PS UEs reselect another RAT through
NC0.

Type
Connected mode GSM to UMTS GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Value
Send2QuterFlag SET YES This parameter

OTHSOFTPARA specifies whether the
SI Type 3 message
contains the
2QUATER
indicator.
SendUtranECSCFla SET YES This parameter
g OTHSOFTPARA controls the value of
the 3G Early
Classmark Sending
Restriction field
when the BSC sends
system information
(SI) 3 to an MS. If
this parameter is set
to YES, the value of
the 3G Early
Classmark Sending
Restriction field is 1,
indicating that the
early classmark
message sent by the
MS contains the 3G
classmark
information. If this
parameter is set to
NO, the value of the
3G Early Classmark
Sending Restriction
field is 0, indicating
that the early
classmark message
sent by the MS does
not contain the 3G
classmark
information. This
parameter is valid
for dual-mode MSs
and is invalid for
single-mode MSs.
CLASSMARKQUE SET YES Whether to enable
RY OTHSOFTPARA the BSC to include
the 3G classmark
information element
in the Classmark
Request message

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
that the BSC

forwards from the
MSC to an MS
QUERYCMAFTER SET GCELLSOFT YES Whether to query the
INBSCHO classmark of the call
in an incoming BSC
handover
ECSC SET YES The early classmark
GCELLCCBASIC sending control
(ECSC) parameter
specifies whether the
MSs in a cell use
early classmark
sending. After a
successful
immediate
assignment, the MS
sends additional
classmark
information to the
network as early as
possible. The
additional classmark
information mainly
contains the CM3
(classmark 3)
information. The
CM3 (classmark 3)
information contains
the frequency band
support capability of
the MS (used for the
future channel
assignment), power
information about
each frequency band
supported by the MS
(used for the
handover between
different frequency
bands), and
encryption capability
of the MS.
MSCVER SET R99_or_above Protocol version of
GCELLCCUTRAN the MSC that is
SYS connected to the
BSC6910. The
supported signaling
varies with the
protocol versions.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
The setting of this

parameter must be
consistent with the
actual MSC version.
MEASURETYPE SET ComMeasReport Type of the
GCELLCCUTRAN measurement report
SYS (MR) reported by
the MS
GSMFREQCNUM SET 3 Number of
GCELLCCUTRAN neighboring cells
SYS that meet the
following
conditions: If MBR
is indicated in a
system message, the
MS reports the
number of
neighboring cells at
each frequency
band. If the MS
reports the number
of neighboring cells
at the same
frequency band of
the serving cell, it
can report a
maximum of the
value of this
parameter.
These neighboring
cells must meet the
following
requirements:
1. The receive
levels of the
neighboring cells
must be higher
than 900
Reporting
Threshold or
1800 Reporting
Threshold.
2. The BSIC of a
neighboring cell
must be valid.
3. The signals of the
neighboring cells
must be the
strongest among
all the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
neighboring cells
at the same
frequency band.
[0, 7] or above [8,
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm
6: -74 dBm
the MS keeps
searching for 3G
cells
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

MS does not search
for 3G cells.
specifies the
threshold of the
reselection in
connection mode
before Qsearch C is
obtained.
FDDQOFF 0 This parameter
specifies one of the
thresholds of the
signal level for 3G
cell reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
following conditions
are met for five
consecutive seconds:
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RSCP Threshold;
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: - (always select a
cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB,
2: -24 dB,
...
15: 28 dB.
FDDRSCPMIN SET 6 Minimum level
GCELLCCUTRAN threshold of
SYS UTRAN cell
reselection. During
the cell reselection
decision from a
GSM cell to an FDD
cell, this parameter
is used to calculate
the RSCP threshold
of the target cell. An
FDD cell becomes a
candidate cell if all
the following
conditions are met
for five consecutive
seconds:
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold;
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0 = -114 dBm,
1 = -112 dBm,
2 = -110 dBm,
...
14 = -86 dBm,
15 = -84 dBm.
FDDREP EcN0 This parameter
specifies whether
Ec/N0 or RSCP is
used for the
measurement report
on an FDD cell.
Ec/N0 stands for the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
signal-to-noise ratio.
RSCP stands for the
received signal code
power.
FDDFREQCNUM SET 2 Number of UTRAN
GCELLCCUTRAN FDD cells that
SYS should be included
in measurement
reports
FDDQMIN SET 7 This parameter
GCELLCCUTRAN specifies one of the
SYS parameters for FDD
cell reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
are met for five
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold;
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -20 dB,
1: -6 dB,
2: -18 dB,
3: -8 dB,
4: -16 dB,
5: -10 dB,
6: -14 dB,
7: -12 dB.
FDDQMINOFFSET SET 0 Offset of the
GCELLCCUTRAN minimum threshold
SYS for Ec/N0 during an
FDD cell
reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
are met for five
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
cell > Receive

level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold;
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
QP SET 7 In packet transfer
GCELLCCUTRAN mode, if the signal
SYS level of the serving
MS starts to search
for 3G cells. For
example, if this
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
This parameter is
valid only if the
BSC sends GPRS
cell reselection
parameters to an MS
using a Packet Cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
Change Order or
Packet Measurement
Order message.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)
SEARCH3G SET YES Whether to allow the
GCELLCCUTRAN MS to search for a
SYS 3G cell when the
BSIC must be
decoded
INVALBSICEN SET NO Whether a
SYS can contain the
information about a
cell with an invalid
BSIC. The cell with
an invalid BSIC is
an unconfigured
neighboring cell.
SCALEORDER SET ADD0dB This parameter
GCELLCCUTRAN indicates that when
SYS the MS reports the
EMR, it adds the
value of this
parameter to the
received signal level,
and then converts
the result into the
RXLEV value. For
details, see GSM
Rec. 05.08. If the
SCALE_Order

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
reported by the MS
is 10 dBm, level
values 0-63 map
with -100 dBm to
-37 dBm. If the
SCALE_Order
reported by the MS
is 0 dBm, level
values 0-63 map
with -110 dBm to
-47 dBm. If the
SCALE_Order
reported by the MS
is Automatic, the
MS chooses the least
SCALE while
ensuring that the MS
can report the most
strongest.
QSEARCHC SET 7 In connection mode,
GCELLCCUTRAN if the signal level is
SYS below [0-7] or above
[8-15], the MS starts
to search for 3G
cells. For example, if
to 5 and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)
CELL900OFF SET 0 Offset applied to the
GCELLCCUTRAN receive level of a
SYS GSM900 cell in the
measurement report
before cell
prioritizing is
implemented by
frequency band.
Before cells are
sequenced by
priority, according to
frequencies, the
value of this
parameter must be
added to the receive
level value in the
measurement report
of the cells at the
900 MHz frequency
band.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
CELL900THRED SET 0 Threshold of the
SYS of the cells at the
900 MHz frequency
band.
The measurement
report is valid only
when the receive
level in the
measurement report
of the GSM900 cell
exceeds this
threshold. After

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
being filtered, the

measurement report
is used for
prioritizing the cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
7: positive infinity
CELL1800OFF SET 0 Offset of the
1800 MHz
frequency band.
Before cells are
sequenced by
frequencies, the
value of this
parameter must be
level value in the
measurement report
of the cells at the
1800 MHz
frequency band.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
1800 MHz
frequency band.
When the receive
level value in the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
measurement report
of the cells at the
1800 MHz
frequency band
exceeds the value of
this parameter, the
report takes effect.
After being filtered,
the measurement
report is used for
priority sequencing
of cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
FDDCELLOFF SET 0 Offset of an FDD
GCELLCCUTRAN cell report.
SYS When the priority of
a 3G cell is
sequenced, the value
of this parameter
must be added to the
receive level of the
3G cell in the
measurement report.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
FDDCELLTHRED SET 0 Threshold of an
GCELLCCUTRAN FDD cell report.
SYS When the receive
level value in the
measurement report

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
of a 3G cell exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the
measurement report
takes effect. After
the valid
measurement report
is filtered, the 3G
cell joins the cell
priority sequence.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
POS2QUATER SET BCCHNorm Transmission
GCELLCCUTRAN channel for 2Quater
SYS system information.
set to BCCHNorm,
the 2Quater system
information is sent
on the normal
BCCH. If this
parameter is set to
BCCHExt, the
2Quater system
information is sent
on the extended
BCCH.
SI2QUATEROPTI SET YES Whether to optimize
MIZEDALLOWED GCELLCCUTRAN the system
SYS information (SI)
2Quater.
When this parameter
is set to YES,
information about
more neighboring
UMTS cells is
contained in
2Quater, and
therefore the number
of such SIs

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
decreases.
Note: When this
parameter is set to
YES, the SI MI is
also optimized and
information about
more neighboring
UMTS cells is
contained in MI.
FddRptThreshold2E SET 25 Minimum Ec/N0
cno GCELLCCUTRAN threshold 2 for
SYS reporting
measurement reports
in FDD cells.
If FDDREP is set to
RSCP, the value of
this parameter is
used by the
information element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 in
the system
parameter is set to
255, the information
element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 is
not delivered.
The decibel value
corresponding to the
parameter values are
as follows: (For
details, see 3GPP TS
45.008.):
0: < -24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
FddRptThreshold2R SET 20 Minimum RSCP

scp GCELLCCUTRAN threshold 2 for
SYS reporting
measurement reports
in FDD cells.
If FDDREP is set to
Ec/N0, the value of
this parameter is
used by the
information element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 in
the system
parameter is set to
element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 is
not delivered.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP
INTERRATOUTBS SET YES Whether to allow a
CHOEN GCELLHOBASIC handover from a 2G
cell to a 3G cell. If
to NO, inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
RAT directed retries
cannot be initiated.
INTERRATINBSC SET YES Whether to allow a
HOEN GCELLHOBASIC handover from a 3G
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
handovers fail. If the
Iur-g interface is
enabled, the value of
the Csishostate IE is
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
allowed.
set to YES, the
reselection from 2G
allowed.
BET3GHOEN SET NO Whether to enable
GCELLHOUTRAN the 3G better cell
FDD handover algorithm.
set to YES, a better
cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
is allowed.
HOOPTSEL SET Pre_2G_CellThres This parameter
GCELLHOUTRAN specifies whether a
FDD 2G cell or a 3G cell
is preferentially
selected as the target
cell for handovers.
When this parameter
is set to
Pre_2G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 2G
candidate cell as the
target cell for
handovers. When

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

to Pre_3G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 3G
target cell for
handovers. When
to
Pre_2G_CellThres,
the BSC
preferentially selects
a neighboring 3G
cell as the handover
target cell if the
neighboring 2G cell
that ranks the first in
the candidate cell list
is less than or equal
to the value of HO
Preference
Threshold for 2G
Cell. Otherwise, the
BSC preferentially
selects a neighboring
2G cell as the
handover target cell.
HOPRETH2G SET 25 If the receive level
GCELLHOUTRAN of the neighboring
FDD 2G cell that ranks
the first in the
candidate cell list is
less than or equal to
the value of this
parameter, the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell.
Otherwise, the BSC
a neighboring 2G
target cell.
HORSCPTH3G SET 50 Level threshold for
GCELLHOUTRAN triggering a better
FDD cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell.
A better cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
handover to a 3G
neighboring cell can
be triggered only if
the measured RSCP
of a 3G neighboring
cell is greater than
the sum of this
parameter and
RSCPOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for the 3G
neighboring cell for
a period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
HOECNOTH3G SET 35 Threshold for
When FDDREP in
the SET
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is
set to Ec/N0, a better
cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
can be triggered only

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
if the measured
Ec/N0 of a 3G
neighboring cell is
greater than the sum
of this parameter and
ECNOOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for a
period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH Ec/Io <
-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io

\\Setting other BSC software parameters
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;
\\Setting cell software parameters
SET GCELLSOFT: QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES;
\\Setting basic call control parameters of a cell
SET GCELLCCBASIC: SET GCELLCCBASIC=YES;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: MSCVER=R99_or_above, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport,
GSMFREQCNUM=3, QI=7, QCI=Use_Qsearch_I, FDDQOFF=0, FDDRSCPMIN=6, FDDREP=EcN0,
FDDFREQCNUM=2, FDDQMIN=7, FDDQMINOFFSET=0, QP=7, SEARCH3G=YES, INVALBSICEN=NO,
SCALEORDER=ADD0dB, QSEARCHC=7, QSEARCHC=0, CELL900THRED=0, CELL1800OFF=0,
CELL1800THRED=0, FDDCELLOFF=0, FDDCELLTHRED=0,
POS2QUATER=BCCHNorm, SI2QUATEROPTIMIZED ALLOWED=YES, FddRptThreshold2Ecno=25,
FddRptThreshold2Rscp=20;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;
\\Setting UTRAN FDD handover parameters of a cell
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_CellThres, HOPRETH2G=25,
HORSCPTH3G=50, HOECNOTH3G=35;
3.1.3.3 Solutions to Load Balancing

With increases in the penetration rate of multimode UEs in the live network, load of some
cells is relatively high in hot spots, as shown in the following figure. In this case, the
operators' main concern is how to select the target cells to balance load of different cells and
guarantee user experience.
The load balancing solution is introduced to allow services of different UEs to be carried on
suitable networks to achieve the following purposes:
 Maximally use resources in the cells and prevent cells from being overloaded.
 Balance load of cells working in different modes or carried on different frequency bands
to improve user experience.
3.1.3.3.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Load Balancing

When the UMTS serving cell is in the basic congestion state, load reshuffling (LDR) actions
can be performed to balance the cell load.
 Solutions to UMTS load balancing
− Intra-RAT load balancing is preferentially performed over inter-RAT load
balancing.
− Load-based inter-frequency handover and BE service rate reduction are
preferentially performed for intra-RAT load balancing.
− It is recommended that PS domain load-based handovers be enabled for inter-RAT
load balancing, especially for the "should be" services in the PS domain.
− Suggestions for LDR action configurations are as follows:
1. The first recommended downlink LDR action is INTERFREQLDHO (load-based inter-
frequency handover), the second action is BERATERED (BE service rate reduction),
the third action is PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (PS domain inter-RAT should be
load handover), and the rest LDR actions are NOACT (no action).
2. The first recommended uplink LDR action is BERATERED (BE service rate reduction),
the second action is INTERFREQLDHO (load-based inter-frequency handover), the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
third action is PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (PS domain inter-RAT should be

load handover), and the rest LDR actions are NOACT (no action).

Type

Handover Based on Load
MML Command UMTS Parameter Recommended Description
Value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFirstAction INTERFREQLDHO NOACT: No load

reshuffling action is
taken.
INTERFREQLDHO
: The inter-
frequency load
handover is
performed.
BERATERED:
Channels are
reconfigured for the
BE service.
QOSRENEGO: The
renegotiation on the
QoS of the
uncontrollable real-
time service is
performed.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the CS
domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the PS
domain is
performed.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
AMRRATERED
(AMR service rate
decreasing): The
setting of the TFC
subset and the
negotiation of the
service rate can be
performed for the
AMR voice service.
MBMSDECPOWE
R (MBMS power
limiting): The
MBMS service is
configured with the
minimum power.
CODEADJ (code
tree reshuffling):
The fragments of the
downlink code tree
are arranged.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
load handover of the
CS domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
PS domain is
performed.
PSInterU2LLDHO:
The load-based
handover of the PS
domain is performed
from UMTS to LTE.
The LDR takes the
actions in the preset
sequence and judges
whether each action
is successful. If an
action is
unsuccessful, the
LDR turns to the
next action. If an
action is successful,
a parameter is set to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NOACT, or all the

preceding actions are
taken, the downlink
LDR is finished, and
the system waits for
the next triggering of
the LDR.
Because each action
is performed by its
algorithm module,
the LDR algorithm
only selects users
and delivers control
messages, the
execution result of
each action can be
obtained after a
delay, and the LDR
algorithm cannot
wait for a long time,
so the LDR can only
judge whether the
actions succeed by
whether candidate
users are found.
The inter-frequency
load handover has
no impact on the
QoS of users and
can balance the cell
load, so the inter-
frequency load
handover usually
serves as the first
action.
The BE service rate
reduction is effective
only when the
DCCC algorithm is
enabled.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSecondAction BERATERED This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
The selected actions,
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrThirdAction PSINTERRATSHO This parameter has
ULDBELDHO( the same content as
PS domain inter-rat DlLdrFirstAction.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
should be load however, should be

handover) unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFourthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFifthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSixthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSeventhAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEighthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrNinthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrTenthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEleventhActio NOACT This parameter has
n the same content as

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFirstAction BERATERED NOACT: No load
taken.
INTERFREQLDHO
: The inter-
frequency load
handover is
performed.
BERATERED:
Channels are
BE service.
QOSRENEGO: The
QoS of the
time service is
performed.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the CS
domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the PS
domain is
performed.
AMRRATERED
(AMR service rate
decreasing): The
setting of the TFC
subset and the
negotiation of the
service rate can be
performed for the
AMR voice service.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

CS domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
PS domain is
performed.
The LDR takes the
sequence and judges
whether each action
action is
unsuccessful, the
LDR turns to the
next action. If an
NOACT, or all the
taken, the downlink
the LDR.
Because each action
is performed by its
algorithm module,
the LDR algorithm
only selects users
messages, the
execution result of
each action can be
obtained after a
delay, and the LDR
algorithm cannot
so the LDR can only
judge whether the
actions succeed by
whether candidate
users are found.
The inter-frequency
load handover has
no impact on the
QoS of users and

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
load, so the inter-

frequency load
handover usually
serves as the first
action.
The BE service rate
only when the
DCCC algorithm is
enabled.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSecondAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrThirdAction PSINTERRATSHO This parameter has
ULDBELDHO(PS the same content as
domain inter-rat UlLdrFirstAction.
should be load The selected actions,
handover) however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFourthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFifthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSixthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSeventhAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrEighthAction NOACT This parameter has

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the same content as

UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrNinthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlPSU2LHOUeNu NOACT Number of UEs for
m performing uplink
UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers.
ADD UCELLLDR DlPSU2LHOUeNu NOACT Number of UEs for
m performing
downlink UMTS-to-
LTE PS handovers.

\\Adding cell LDR algorithm parameters
ADD UCELLLDR: DlLdrFirstAction=INTERFREQLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=BERATERED,
DlLdrThirdAction=PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO, DlLdrFourthAction=NOACT,
DlLdrFifthAction=NOACT, DlLdrSixthAction=NOACT, DlLdrSeventhAction=NOACT,
DlLdrEighthAction=NOACT, DlLdrNinthAction=NOACT, DlLdrTenthAction=NOACT,
DlLdrEleventhAction=NOACT, UlLdrFirstAction=BERATERED,
UlLdrSecondAction=INTERFREQLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction=PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO,
UlLdrFourthAction=NOACT, UlLdrFifthAction=NOACT, UlLdrSixthAction=NOACT,
UlLdrSeventhAction=NOACT, UlLdrEighthAction=NOACT, UlLdrNinthAction=NOACT,
UlPSU2LHOUeNum=NOACT, DlPSU2LHOUeNum=NOACT;
3.1.3.3.3 III. Solutions to GSM Load Balancing

 If the load of the serving GSM cell is heavier than a pre-defined threshold, the load
balancing policy is used. Details are as follows:
− If the serving GSM cell is congested and no resource is available, UEs move to an
intra-frequency or inter-frequency neighboring cell with the best signal quality
through directed retries to continue with services.
− When the load of the serving GSM cell is heavy, load-based handovers are triggered
to hand some UEs in the serving GSM cell over to inter-frequency cells or other
intra-frequency cells.
− When the load of the serving GSM cell is heavy, UEs can be handed over the
UMTS cells through NC2 or PS handovers. However, NC2 and PS handovers
cannot be put into commercial use currently because the industry chain is immature.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
According to the current reselection policy, GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on UMTS cells. In
this case, when GSM load is heavy, it is difficult to select UEs to be handed over to UMTS cells,
because the UMTS coverage does not reach the handover threshold (that is, UEs in the UMTS coverage
area camp on the UMTS cells even when they are in idle mode). As a result, the GSM-to-UMTS load-
based handover function seldom takes effect in the live network, and therefore is not recommended.

Type

GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover
MML Command GSM Parameter Recommended Description
Value
SET INTERRATOUTBS YES Whether to allow a

GCELLHOBASIC CHOEN handover from a 2G
to NO, inter-RAT
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
SET INTERRATINBSC YES Whether to allow a
GCELLHOBASIC HOEN handover from a 3G
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
Iur-g interface is
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
SET OutSysLoadHoEn YES This parameter
GCELLHOINTERR specifies whether to
ATLDB allow the inter-RAT
load handover in

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
connection mode
(after the assignment
is complete).
SET InterRatServiceLoad Load-based When this parameter
GCELLHOINTERR HoSwitch is set to CnService-
ATLDB based, an inter-RAT
load-based handover
is allowed.
When this parameter
is set to Load-based
or Dynamic-based,
an inter-RAT load-
based handover is
allowed only if the
uplink load of the
cell is greater than or
equal to the value of
UlLdrThrd2GCell
or the downlink load
of the cell is greater
than or equal to the
value of
DlLdrThrd2GCell,
and candidate cells
are filtered based on
the load difference
between the serving
cell and neighboring
cells.
ADD LoadAccThres 80 Threshold for
GEXT3GCELL allowing MSs to
hand over from other
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers.
MSs are allowed to
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers if the cell
load is less than or
this parameter.
Otherwise, the MSs
are not allowed to
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
SET GCELLHOAD LoadAccThres 80 Threshold for

allowing MSs to
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers. MSs are
allowed to hand over
from other cells to
the cell through
load-based
handovers if any of
the following
conditions is met:
1. The cell load is
lower than or
equal to this
threshold when
HOCTRLSWIT
CH is set to
HOALGORITH
M1 and
LOADHOAD is
set to YES in the
SET
GCELLHOBAS
IC command.
2. The cell load is
lower than this
threshold in other
cases.
If neither of the
preceding
conditions is met,
MSs are not
allowed to hand
over from other
cells to the cell
through load-
based handovers.

SET GCELLHOBASIC: INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;
\\Setting inter-RAT handover parameters
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-
based;
\\Adding 3G external cells
ADD GEXT3GCELL: LoadAccThres=80;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
\\Setting advanced handover parameters of a cell

SET GCELLHOAD: LoadAccThres=80;
3.1.3.4 Solutions to Service Steering

Service steering allows UEs processing different types of services (such as CS services and
PS services) to be carried on networks of different RATs or on different carriers in the same
RAT based on networks' characteristics and UEs' capabilities.
3.1.3.4.2 II. Solutions to UMTS Service Steering

 Solutions to UMTS service steering
− Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed. GU service steering is
performed if it is required.
− For GU service steering, PS services are preferentially carried on UMTS cells, and
CS services are preferentially carried on GSM cells. During Radio Access Bearer
(RAB) setup, the UEs performing CS services are handed over to GSM cells
through direct retries, and the UEs performing PS services stay in UMTS cells.

Type

Handover Based on Service
WRFD-070007 GSM and
UMTS Traffic Steering
Based on Iur-g
Value
InterRATFilterCoef SET D3 L3 filter coefficient

UINTERRATHON for inter-RAT
COV measurement.
The parameter has
the same physical
meaning and
measurement model
as the inter-
frequency L3 filter
coefficient. The
reporting period is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
480 ms. For specific

analysis, see the
intra-frequency L3
filter coefficient and
inter-frequency L3
filter coefficient. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
Hystfor3C SET 0 Hysteresis for event
UINTERRATHON 3C.
COV
TrigTime3C SET D640 Time delay to trigger
UINTERRATHON event 3C.
COV
BSICVerify SET REQUIRED This parameter is
UINTERRATHON used to control cells
COV where inter-RAT
measurement reports
are triggered. If this
parameter is set to
REQUIRED, the
measurement
reporting is triggered
after the BSIC of the
measured cell is
decoded correctly. If
the parameter is set
to
NOT_REQUIRE,
the measurement
regardless of
whether the BSIC of
the measured cell is
decoded correctly.
This parameter is
valid for both
periodical reporting
mode and event-
triggered reporting
mode. However, to
ensure handover
reliability, it is
recommended that
the system reports
only the cells whose
BSIC is decoded
correctly. If this
parameter is set to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NOT_REQUIRED,
handovers are likely
to be triggered, but
handover reliability
is lower than that in
the situation this
parameter is set to
REQUIRED.
InterRATNCovHOC SET 21 Quality requirement
SThd UINTERRATHON for the cell of
COV another RAT during
inter-RAT CS
handovers.
If the quality of the
target frequency is
higher than this
threshold, event 3C
is triggered. Value 0
indicates the value
of this parameter is
smaller than -110
dBm.
InterRATNCovHOP SET 21 Quality requirement
inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter is
used for
measurement control
on event 3C. If the
quality of the target
frequency is higher
event 3C is
triggered. Value 0
indicates the value
smaller than -110
dBm.
InterRATHOAttemp SET 16 Maximum number
ts UINTERRATHON of inter-RAT
COV handover attempts
after the non-
coverage-based
handover failures.
For each handover
attempt, a new target
cell where the UE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
has not been handed

over to and fulfills
the criterion can be
selected.
InterRATMeasTime SET 15 Length of a timer for
UINTERRATHON inter-RAT
COV measurements.
After the inter-RAT
measurement starts,
if no inter-RAT
handover is
performed when this
timer expires, the
inter-RAT
measurement is
stopped. In addition,
the compressed
mode (if activated)
should be
deactivated. Value 0
indicates that the
inter-RAT
measurement timer
is not started.
SndLdInfo2GsmInd SET OFF Switch for sending
UINTERRATHON load information to
COV the GSM network.
This parameter is
designed for the
UMTS load-based
access control
strategy when the
3G-to-2G handover
is required. When
the UE is handed
over from the UMTS
network to the GSM
network, the RNC
obtains the load
information of the
best cell and sends it
to the GSM network.
This parameter is
valid only for CS
services The RNC
does not send UMTS
cell load information
to the GSM in the
PS domain.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NcovHoOn2GldInd SET ON Threshold for 2G

UINTERRATHON load for outgoing
COV inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter
specifies the
threshold for 2G
load for outgoing
inter-RAT PS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
cell is stopped if the
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this
parameter.
CSHOOut2GloadTh SET 80 Threshold for 2G
d UINTERRATHON load for outgoing
COV inter-RAT CS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
parameter.
PSHOOut2GloadTh SET 60 Threshold for 2G
COV inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter
specifies the
threshold for 2G
load for outgoing
inter-RAT PS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this
parameter.
PeriodFor3C SET 4 Period for reporting
UINTERRATHON event 3C.
COV
AmntOfRpt3C SET 1 Number of handover
UINTERRATHON attempts after the
COV UE sends to the CN
a message indicating
that inter-RAT
handovers triggered
by event 3C fail.
InterRatPhyChFailN SET 3 Maximum number
um UINTERRATHON of inter-RAT
COV handover failures
allowed due to
physical channel
failures. When the
number of inter-
RAT handover
failures due to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
physical channel
failures exceeds this
parameter, a penalty
is given to the UE.
During the time
specified by
PenaltyTimeForInt
erRatPhyChFail,
the UE is not
allowed to make
inter-RAT handover
attempts.
For details about the
physical channel
failure, see 3GPP TS
25.331.
PenaltyTimeForPhy SET 30 Length of a penalty
ChFail UINTERRATHON timer for inter-RAT
due to physical
channel failures.
During the penalty
period, the UE is not
allowed to make
inter-RAT handover
attempts.
physical channel
25.331.

\\Setting RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover measurement algorithm
parameters
SET UINTERRATHONCOV: InterRATFilterCoef=D3, Hystfor3C=0, TrigTime3C=D640,
BSICVerify=REQUIRED, InterRATNCovHOCSThd=21, InterRATNCovHOPSThd=21,
InterRATHOAttempts=16, InterRATMeasTime=15, SndLdInfo2GsmInd=OFF,
NcovHoOn2GldInd=ON,
CSHOOut2GloadThd=80, PSHOOut2GloadThd=60, PeriodFor3C=4, AmntOfRpt3C=1,
InterRatPhyChFailNum=3, InterRatPhyChFailNum=30;
3.1.3.4.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Steering

 Service steering policy
− GSM networks carry voice services and low-rate data services.
− The Service UTRAN CCO Value part IE from the CN indicates whether UMTS is
suitable for the current service. If the IE indicates that the UTRAN can be the target
RAT, the service can be switched over to UMTS cells.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
UEs in idle mode preferentially camp on UMTS cells. In this case, if GSM-to-UMTS handovers are
triggered for UEs in connected mode, UEs that do not meet the handover requirements will be selected.
Therefore, service-based GSM-to-UMTS handovers are not recommended in the live network.

Type

GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
Value
INTERRATOUTBS SET YES Whether to allow a

to NO, inter-RAT
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
INTERRATINBSC SET YES Whether to allow a
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
Iur-g interface is
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
InterRatServiceLoad SET CnService-based When this parameter
HoSwitch GCELLHOINTERR is set to CnService-
ATLDB based, an inter-RAT
load-based handover
is allowed.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
When this parameter

or Dynamic-based,
an inter-RAT load-
based handover is
allowed only if the
uplink load of the
UlLdrThrd2GCell
value of
DlLdrThrd2GCell,
and candidate cells
the load difference
between the serving
cells.
OUTSYSSERVHO SET NO When the Service
REASSIGNEN OTHSOFTPARA Handover field in an
ASS REQ message
is 0, a direct retry
process targeted at a
3G network is
initiated. If the direct
retry fails, the
system decides
whether to re-assign
channels for the
current call based on
this parameter.
OUTSYSSERVICE SET OPEN(CLOSE) If this parameter is
HOEN OTHSOFTPARA set to OPEN, the
BSS decides
whether to hand over
ongoing services to
the 3G network
according to the
contents of the
Service Handover
information element
in the ASS REQ and
HO REQ messages.
BET3GHOEN SET YES Whether to enable

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
is allowed.
HOOPTSEL SET Pre_3G_Cell This parameter
is preferentially
cell for handovers.
When this parameter
is set to
Pre_2G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 2G
target cell for
handovers. When
to Pre_3G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 3G
target cell for
handovers. When
to
Pre_2G_CellThres,
the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell if the
neighboring 2G cell
to the value of HO
Preference
Threshold for 2G
BSC preferentially
2G cell as the
the first in the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

the value of this
parameter, the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell.
Otherwise, the BSC
a neighboring 2G
target cell.
A better cell
handover to a 3G
the measured RSCP
of a 3G neighboring
the sum of this
parameter and
RSCPOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for the 3G
a period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
CPICH RSCP < -53

dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
When FDDREP in
the SET
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is
set to Ec/N0, a better
cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
can be triggered only
if the measured
Ec/N0 of a 3G
neighboring cell is
ECNOOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for a
period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH Ec/Io <
-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.
RSCPOFF SET G3GNCELL 3 Offset in the RSCP
of a 3G neighboring

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
cell.
The RSCP reported
by the MS minus the
value of this
parameter is used as
the level in the K
criteria for handover
decisions. The level
is used for
handovers from 2G
networks to 3G
networks.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
ECNOOFF SET G3GNCELL 3 Offset in the Ec/N0
of a 3G neighboring
cell.
As a performance
counter for FDD
cells, Ec/N0
indicates the ratio of
the energy per
received chip to the
spectral noise power
density.
If FDDREP in the
SET

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is
set to Ec/N0, the
Ec/N0 reported by
the MS minus the
value of this
the level in the K
is used for
handovers from 2G
networks to 3G
networks.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
45.008.):
0: CPICH Ec/Io <
-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.
HOSTAT3GTDD SET G3GNCELL 5 Period during which
handovers to a better
3G cell are measured
if neighboring 3G
cells are TDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies N in the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
P/N rule.
HODURT3GTDD SET G3GNCELL 4 Period during which
the conditions for
3G cell are met if
neighboring 3G cells
are TDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies P in the
P/N rule.
HOSTAT3G SET G3GNCELL 5 Period during which
if neighboring 3G
cells are FDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies N in the
P/N rule.
HODURT3G SET G3GNCELL 4 Period during which
the conditions for
3G cell are met if
are FDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies P in the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
P/N rule.

SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=CnService-based,
SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=NO, OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell, HOPRETH2G=25,
HORSCPTH3G=20, HOECNOTH3G=25,
\\Modifying 3G neighboring cells
MOD G3GNCELL: RSCPOFF=3, ECNOOFF=3, HOSTAT3GTDD=5, HODURT3GTDD=4, HOSTAT3G=5,
HODURT3G=4;
3.1.3.5 Solutions to Fast Return

When a UE initiates a voice service in the GSM network, it can fast return to the UMTS
network through reselection after the service is released.
3.1.3.5.2 II. Solutions to GSM-to-UMTS Fast Return

A detailed fast return process is as follows: A UE initiates a voice service in the GSM
network, and then terminates the service. Then the BSC delivers a CHANNEL RELEASE
message (the message carries the Cell selection indicator after release of all TCH and SDCCH
IE, and the IE carries the information about the UMTS neighboring cell). After that, the GU
dual-mode UE can return to the UMTS network fast after the voice service is released. This
requires support from both networks and UEs.
 General policy
The GSM-to-UMTS fast return is performed for MSs performing voice services.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
Idle mode GSM to UMTS (scenarios in GBFD-114325 Fast

which CS services are WCDMA Reselection at 2G
released) CS Call Release
For details about how to use a parameter, seeInteroperability Between GSM and
MML Command Parameter ID Default Value Description
SET GCELLCCAD CELLSELECTAFT YES This parameter

ERCALLREL specifies whether to
allow a mobile
phone to
preferentially camp
on a 3G cell after a
call is terminated in
the areas covered by
both the GSM
network and the
UMTS network.
SET INTERRATCELLR YES Whether to send the
OTHSOFTPARA ESELOPTEN MI system
information (SI)
after
INTERRATCELL
RESELEN is set to
YES(Yes).
set to ON(On) and
INTERRATCELL
RESELEN in the
SET
GCELLHOBASIC
command is set to
YES(Yes), the BSC
sends the MI SI.
SET INTERRATCELLR YES Whether the 2G-to-
GCELLHOBASIC ESELEN 3G cell reselection is
allowed.
set to YES, the
reselection from 2G

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MML Command Parameter ID Default Value Description
allowed.

\\Setting advanced call control parameters of a cell
SET GCELLCCAD: CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: INTERRATCELLRESELOPTEN=YES;
3.1.4 GL Interoperability Networking Solution

Figure 3-1 shows the camping scheme of UEs in idle mode in a GL dual-mode scenario.
Figure 1.10 Camping scheme of UEs in idle mode in a GL dual-mode scenario
By considering RATs in the network, and the coverage continuity and the load of each
frequency band, solutions to camping of UEs in idle mode enable UEs to select a cell with
good signal quality for camping on and processing services. Different goals must be reached
 In GL networking, it is recommended that GL dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on the
LTE network to initiate services, thereby improving user experience.
 An LTE network provides multiple frequency bands. The LTE spectrum resources of a
high frequency band are sufficient, and therefore the high frequency band is usually used
as the capacity layer. A low frequency band provides a small bandwidth, and therefore
the low frequency band is usually used as a cover layer. It is recommended UEs in idle
mode preferentially camp on the capacity layer.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
To ensure that UEs in idle mode are evenly distributed to frequency bands and balance load on the
frequency band carrying UEs in access mode and load of the frequency band in which UEs in connected
mode operate, the LTE multiband random camping policy for UEs in idle mode is being verified and
will be updated based on the verification results.
3.1.4.1.2 II. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in an LTE Network

− The RAT priority for camping in descending order is LTE > GSM. The priorities of
frequency bands within the LTE and GSM systems are the same as the existing
policy.
− Priority for LTE frequencies: UEs preferentially camp on high frequency bands
because LTE cells served by high frequency bands provide large bandwidths. A high
frequency band is usually used as a capacity layer. For example, the priority is as
follows: LTE 2600 MHz (20 MHz) > LTE 900 MHz (5 MHz). In a scenario where
an LTE low-frequency band provides a large bandwidth, the policy is adjusted
based on the actual situation.
Cell reselection between LTE and GSM is supported.
− LTE-to-GSM cell reselection is supported at the edge of an LTE cell.
− After UEs move to the LTE coverage area, GSM-to-LTE cell reselection is
supported.
Table 10.1 Features recommended for reselection of UEs in idle mode in a GL dual-mode network
Type
Idle mode LTE to GSM LBFD-00201803 Cell

Selection and Re-selection
The following table describes parameter meanings and recommended parameter values. For
details about how to use a parameter, see Idle Mode Management Feature Parameter
Description and MML reference documents.
LTE Parameter MML Command Recommended Description

Value
QRxLevMin MOD CELLRESEL 64 Indicates the

minimum required
RX level used in
intra-frequency E-
UTRAN cell
reselection, which
corresponds to the
IE q-RxLevMin in
SIB3. This value is
included in the cell
reselection criteria

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
(R criteria) and used

in the evaluation of
cell reselection. For
36.304.
SNonIntraSearchCfg CFG Indicates whether to
Ind set the measurement
triggering threshold
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells.
SNonIntraSearch 9 Indicates the
measurement
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells. If
priority of a
frequency or RAT is
higher than that of
the serving
frequency, the UEs
always start inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements.
If the cell reselection
priority of a
frequency is lower
than or equal to that
of the serving
frequency or if the
cell reselection
priority of a RAT is
lower than that of
the serving
frequency, the UEs
start inter-frequency
or inter-RAT
measurements only
when the value of
Cell selection RX
level value (dB) is
lower than or equal
to the value of this
parameter.
ThrshServLow 7 Indicates the
threshold used in the
evaluation of
reselection to a cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT
frequency. Cell
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT frequency
is performed if no
cell on the serving
frequency or on a
higher priority E-
UTRAN frequency
fulfills criteria 1 for
inter-frequency and
inter-RAT
reselections. For
36.304.
CellReselPriority 6 Indicates the cell
reselection priority
of the serving
frequency. 0
indicates the lowest
priority. The value
of this parameter
must be determined
together with the
priorities of other
frequencies during
the network
planning.
Frequencies used for
different RATs must
be assigned different
cell reselection
priorities.
CellReselPriorityCf ADD CFG Indicates whether to
gInd GERANNFREQGR set the reselection
OUP priority of the
frequencies in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group. If
the value of this
parameter is not
configured, the UE
does not reselect to
neighboring cells on
the frequencies in

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the GERAN carrier

frequency group.
of the GERAN
carrier frequency
group. The value 0
priority. It is
contained in system
information block
type 7 (SIB7). The
UE decides whether
to reselect a
neighboring cell on a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group
based on the value
the absolute priority
of the serving cell. If
the value of this
parameter is larger
than the absolute
priority of the
serving cell, the UE
starts measurements
on neighboring cells
on the frequencies in
the GERAN carrier
frequency group;
then if the signal
quality of some
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection. If the
value of this
parameter is smaller
than the absolute
priority of the
starts the
measurements only
when the signal
quality of the
serving cell is poor;
then if the signal
quality of some

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities. For
36.331.
ThreshXLow 8 Indicates the RX
level required for a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group to
become a candidate
for reselection if the
priority of the
frequency is lower
than that of the
serving frequency.
After measurements
are started for
a frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group, the
UE reselects to a cell
on the frequency
only if the RX level
lower than a
specified threshold
and that of the cell is
better than the value
specified by this
parameter for a time-
to-trigger. For
36.104.
QRxLevMin 2 Indicates the
minimum RX level
required for a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
become a candidate
for selection. It is
included in criteria S
and used in the
evaluation for cell
selection. During the
evaluation for cell
reselection, the UE
performs the
following
calculation: Srxlev =
Measured RSSI
value of a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group -
Value of this
parameter -
Compensated power.
If Srxlev for a
neighboring cell is
better than a
threshold for a time-
to-trigger,
reselection to the
cell is started. For
36.104.
TReselGeran ADD 1 Indicates the
CELLRESELGERA evaluation period for
N a UE to determine
whether to reselect a
neighboring
GERAN cell to
camp on. During the
evaluation period, if
the signal quality
value of the serving
cell is less than the
value of the Serving
frequency lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
CellResel MO for
the serving cell, the
signal quality value
of the neighboring
GERAN cell is
greater than the
value of the Inter

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
frequency lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
EutranInterNFreq
MO for the serving
cell, and the UE
camps on the serving
cell for more than
1s, the UE attempts
to reselect the new
cell to camp on. A
smaller value of this
parameter leads to a
higher probability of
initiating cell
reselections but a
ping-pong
reselections. A
larger value of this
parameter leads to
the opposite effects.

\\Modifying the parameters about cell reselection
MOD CELLRESEL: QRxLevMin=64, SNonIntraSearchCfgInd=CFG, SNonIntraSearch=9,
ThrshServLow=7, CellReselPriority=6;
\\Adding a neighboring GERAN carrier frequency group
ADD GERANNFREQGROUP: CellReselPriorityCfgInd=CFG, CellReselPriority=1,
ThreshXLow=8, QRxLevMin=2;
\\Adding the configuration related to cell reselection to GERAN
ADD CELLRESELGERAN: TReselGeran=1;
3.1.4.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network

GL dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on LTE cells and support reselection between
LTE and GSM cells.
− LTE-to-GSM cell reselection is supported at the edge of an LTE cell.
− GSM-to-LTE cell reselection is supported in areas with good LTE coverage.
Table 10.2 Features recommended for reselection of UEs in idle mode in a GL dual-mode network
Type
Idle mode GSM to LTE GBFD-511301 Cell

Reselection Between GSM

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
and LTE
Value
GERANPRI SET 1 Common priority of

GCELLPRIEUTRA GERAN. Value 0
NSYS indicates the lowest
(All GERAN priority, and value 7
carriers) indicates the highest
priority.
EUTRANPRI 6 Common priority of
EUTRAN. Value 0
priority, and value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
THREUTRANHIG 10 If the measured
H RSRP value of one
or more neighboring
EUTRAN cells is
higher than the value
of this parameter,
the MS is allowed to
reselect a
neighboring cell in
EUTRAN whose
priority is higher
than the GERAN
priority. The values
of this parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB,
1: 2 dB,
2: 4 dB,
3: 6 dB,
...
30: 60 dB,
31: 62 dB.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
EUTRANQRXLEV 6 Used to calculate the

MIN RSRP threshold for
the target cell when
a priority-based
decision to perform
GSM to EUTRAN
cell reselection is
made. The values of
this parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -140 dBm,
1: -138 dBm,
2: -136 dBm,
...
30: -80 dBm,
31: -78 dBm.
SPTRESEL ADD GLTENCELL SUPPORT Whether to support
(All GERAN cell reselection from
carriers) GSM to LTE. If this
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, it
indicates that the
frequency of the
target LTE cell is a
neighboring
frequency of the
source GSM cell and
cell reselection from
GSM to LTE is
supported. If this
parameter is set to
UNSUPPORT, it
indicates that the
frequency of the
neighboring
frequency of the
source GSM cell but
the LTE cell is a
barred neighboring
cell of the GSM cell.
That is, cell
reselection from the
source GSM cell to
the target LTE cell is
not supported.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

\\Setting the cell priority and the parameters about EUTRAN system information
SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: GERANPRI=1, EUTRANPRI=6, THREUTRANHIGH=10,
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN=6;
\\Configuring parameters related to neighboring LTE cells
ADD GLTENCELL: SPTRESEL= SUPPORT;
Figure 3-2 shows the inter-RAT and inter-frequency camping scheme of UEs in idle mode.
Figure 1.11 Inter-RAT and inter- frequency camping scheme of UEs in idle mode

inter-RAT inter-frequency cells can be configured to control which cell or network will the
UE preferentially select.
Figure 1.12 shows the inter-RAT and inter-frequency service continuity scheme.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.12 Service continuity scheme
The following sections describe the solutions to weak coverage provided by different RATs.
3.1.4.2.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Continuity

 Solutions to weak LTE coverage
− An intra-RAT inter-frequency handover is preferentially performed and then an
inter-RAT handover. During selection of the target cell, it is recommended that the
inter-frequency cell in the LTE network be preferentially selected. To preferentially
trigger inter-frequency handovers, you can set TddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOffset or
FddIfHoA2ThdRsrpOffset and GeranA2ThdRsrpOffset to modify the
thresholds for LTE and GSM event A2.
− In a GL dual-mode network, it is recommended that the LTE-to-GSM handover be
disabled to simplify the LTE configuration and policy.
− If the LTE-to-GSM handover needs to be enabled, the blind-handover priority must
be configured for neighboring GERAN cells. This is because it is uncertain whether
UEs in connected mode and in commercial use can measure neighboring GSM
cells, and the UEs may adaptively perform non-measurement-based LTE-to-GSM
handovers.
− LTE-to-GSM handover types include PS handover, SRVCC, CCO/NACC, and
redirection. The handover type to be used depends on UE and network capabilities.
The priority for handover types is as follows: PS handover > SRVCC >
CCO/NACC > redirection.
1. The PS handover can ensure PS service continuity before and after a handover.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
2. The CCO/NACC and redirection apply to PS services not having high requirements on
delay.
3. When VoIP services are deployed in the LTE network, SRVCC is enabled to switch the
VoIP services to the CS domain of the GSM network if no VoIP services are deployed in
the GSM network.
4. UEs in connected mode cannot measure neighboring GSM cells, and these UEs will
adaptively perform non-measurement-based handovers. In this case, the blind-handover
priority must be configured for neighboring GERAN cells.
Table 12.1 Policies on interoperability between the LTE and GSM networks
Service Whether Whether Whether Whether Solution
Type the LTE the GSM the UE and the UE and
Network Network GSM GSM
Supports Supports Network Network
VoIP VoIP Support PS Support
Services Services Handover CCO/NAC
C
Data N/A N/A ● N/A PS handover

services
N/A N/A ○ ● CCO/NACC
N/A N/A ○ ○ Redirection
Voice ● ● ● N/A PS handover
services
● ○ N/A N/A SRVCC
● N/A ○ N/A SRVCC
Data+voice ● ● ● N/A PS handover
services
● ○ ○ N/A SRVCC
without
PSHO
● ○ ● N/A SRVCC with
PS handover
● ● ● N/A PS handover
 The solid circle (●) indicates that the services or function is supported.
 The empty circle (○) indicates that the services or function is not supported.
Table 12.2 Features recommended for a GL dual-mode network

Type
Connected mode LTE to GSM LOFD-001020 PS Inter-

RAT Mobility between E-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
UTRAN and GERAN
For details about how to use a parameter, see Inter-RAT Mobility Management in
Connected Mode Feature Parameter Description and MML reference documents.
Value
InterRatHoA1A2Hy MOD 2 Indicates the

st INTERRATHOCO hysteresis for inter-
MMGROUP RAT measurement
events A1 and A2.
This parameter is
used to prevent
frequent triggering
of event evaluation
caused by radio
signal fluctuation. In
this way, the
probability of ping-
pong handovers or
handover decision
errors is reduced. A
parameter results in
a lower probability.
InterRatHoA1A2Ti 640 ms Indicates the time-
meToTrig to-trigger for inter-
RAT measurement
event A1 or A2.
When detecting that
the signal quality in
the serving cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
quality continuously
meets the entering
condition during the
time-to-trigger.
This parameter helps

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
decrease the number

of occasionally
triggered event
reports, the average
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers. In
summary, it helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers.
InterRatHoA1ThdRs (-111) Indicates the RSRP
rp threshold for inter-
RAT measurement
event A1. When the
measured RSRP
cell exceeds this
threshold, an event
A1 report will be
sent. The value -141
does not take effect
and is reserved for
forward
compatibility. If this
parameter is set to
-141, the value -140
is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
InterRatHoA1ThdRs (-20) Indicates the RSRQ
rq threshold for inter-
RAT measurement
event A1.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the
serving cell exceeds
this threshold, an
event A1 report will
be sent.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRP value of the
serving cell is below
this threshold, an

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
be sent. The value

-141 does not take
effect and is
reserved for forward
parameter is set to
is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the
this threshold, an
be sent.
BlindHoA2ThdOffs 6 Indicates the offset
et of the event A2
threshold for inter-
RAT blind
redirections relative
to the event A2
threshold for
handovers. This
parameter is
compatibility. It
currently.
InterRatHoGeranB1 -100 Indicates the RSSI
Thd threshold for event
B1 related to
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to GERAN.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
the RSSI in at least
one GERAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
triggering conditions
are met. For details,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
see 3GPP TS
36.331.
InterRatHoGeranB1 2 Indicates the
Hyst hysteresis for event
B1 related to inter-
RAT handover to
GERAN. This
parameter is used to
prevent frequent
triggering of event
evaluation caused by
radio signal
fluctuation. In this
way, the probability
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
errors.
InterRatHoGeranB1 640 ms Indicates the time-
TimeToTrig to-trigger for event
B1 related to inter-
RAT handover to
GERAN. When
detecting that the
signal quality in at
least one
neighboring cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.
decrease the number
of occasionally

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
triggered event
number of
handovers and the
number of incorrect
handovers,
preventing
unnecessary
handovers.

\\Modifying a parameter group related to inter-RAT handover to GERAN
MOD INTERRATHOGERANGROUP: InterRatHoGeranB1Thd=-100, InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst=2,
InterRatHoGeranB1TimeToTrig=640ms;
3.1.4.2.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity

 Solutions to weak GSM coverage
− As specified in 3GPP specifications, network control mode 2 (NC2) and PS
handovers can be used to hand UEs over to UMTS or LTE cells, thereby ensuring
service continuity of multimode UEs between different networks.
− Currently, NC2 and PS handovers cannot be put into commercial use because the
industry chain is immature.
− Currently, PS services are reselected to an inter-RAT network through NC0 when
GSM coverage is insufficient.
Currently, the GSM-to-LTE PS handover or NC2 is not supported. Therefore, it is recommended that the
feature in Table 3-13 be disabled.

Type
Connected mode GSM to LTE GBFD-511302 PS Handover

Between GSM and LTE
Based on Coverage
For details about how to use a parameter, see Interoperability Between GSM and LTE
Feature Parameter Description and MML reference documents.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
GPRS SET GCELLGPRS SupportAsInnPcu Whether the current

cell supports GPRS.
NC2SPT SET GCELLGPRS YES Whether to support
network control 2
(NC2). In NC2
mode, an MS sends
the BSC
measurement reports
containing
information about
the serving cell and
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.
SPTLTEOUTBSCP SET GCELLGPRS SUPPORT Whether to support
SHO the MS handover
from the local cell to
an LTE cell during
PS services. If this
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
services is allowed.
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
RESELHYST SET 6 Indicating that
GCELLNC2PARA during cell
reselection, the level
of the target cell
should meet the
following condition:
Level of target cell >
[MAX (level of
serving cell, Cell
Reselection Level
Threshold) + Cell
Reselection
Hysteresis]. In this
way, ping-pong
handovers do not
occur.
NORMALRESELA SET PERMIT Whether to allow a
LLOW GCELLNC2PARA normal cell
reselection. A
normal cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
reselection is
triggered when both
of the following
conditions are met:
The number of times
the BSC
consecutively
measures the receive
level of a serving
cell in a Packet
Measurement Report
message is greater
value of
RESELWATCHPE
RIOD.
The number of times
the receive level of a
serving cell is lower
than the level
specified by
MINACCRXLEV
is greater than the
value of
RESELWORSENL
EVTHRSH.
When this parameter
is set to
PERMIT(Permit)
and NC2LoadResel
is set to
Support(Support),
the BSC considers
cell load as a
parameter when
determining the
target cell among all
candidate cells
during a normal cell
reselection.
RESELWATCHPE SET 10 The number of
RIOD GCELLNC2PARA received Packet
Measurement Report
messages on the
serving cell is
measured
continuously. When
the statistical value
is greater than or

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

this parameter, the
normal reselection
decision is made.
PENALTYLASTT SET 10 Penalty duration for
M GCELLNC2PARA cell reselection. Cell
penalty can be
performed only in
this duration.
RESELWORSENL SET 1 If the number of
EVTHRSH GCELLNC2PARA times when the
serving cell within
Normal Cell
Reselection Watch
Period is lower than
Cell Reselection
Level Threshold is
greater than the
value of this
parameter, the
normal cell
reselection is
triggered.
MINACCRXLEV SET 15 Minimum receive
GCELLNC2PARA level for a
neighboring cell to
become a candidate
cell during cell
reselection. In
addition, the
parameter value is
used to calculate the
times of occurrences
of bad normal cell
reselection level.
When the receive
cell is lower than the
value of this
parameter, the
normal cell
reselection level is
bad.
PENALTYRXLEV SET 30 When the cell
GCELLNC2PARA reselection failure
message is received
or the load cell
reselection is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
initiated, the Cell

Penalty Level is
subtracted from the
target cell to avoid
that cell reselection
failure occurs
repeatedly or that
multiple MSs are
reselected to the
same target cell.
This parameter is
valid only within
Cell Penalty
Duration.
ALLOWEDMEASR SET 4 Number of allowed
PTMISSEDNUM GCELLNC2PARA measurement reports
missed. If the
number of allowed
measurement reports
missed exceeds this
value, the previous
measurement report
is invalid.
FILTERWNDSIZE SET 6 Maximum number
GCELLNC2PARA of former values
when the receive
cell or the receive
level of the neighbor
cell is filtered. The
larger the value of
this parameter, the
higher the weight of
the former receive
levels. The smaller
the value of this
parameter, the
the later receive
levels.
RESELINTERVAL SET 2 NC2 cell reselection
GCELLNC2PARA interval in the same
cell

\\Setting basic attributes of the general packet radio service (GPRS) of a GSM
cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
SET GCELLGPRS: GPRS= SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT= YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO= SUPPORT;

\\Setting parameters related to NC2 of a GSM cell
SET GCELLNC2PARA: RESELHYST=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10,
PENALTYLASTTM=10, RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, MINACCRXLEV=15, PENALTYRXLEV=30,
ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, RESELINTERVAL=2;

With increases in the penetration rate of multimode UEs in the live network, load of LTE cells
is relatively high in hot spots, as shown in Figure 3-4. In this case, the operators' main concern
is how to select the target cells to balance load of different cells and guarantee user
experience.
Figure 1.13 Load balancing scenario
The following sections describe the solutions to high load of different RATs.
3.1.4.3.2 II. Solutions to LTE Load Balancing

When the resources occupied by the serving LTE cell exceed a specific threshold, load
balancing is performed for this cell. It is recommended that intra-RAT load balancing be
preferentially performed to hand UEs over to inter-frequency neighboring cells with the same
coverage or large common coverage. If the load in the serving LTE cell is still heavy after the
intra-RAT load balancing, perform inter-RAT mobility load balancing (MLB) to hand UEs
over to or redirect UEs to inter-RAT neighboring cells with the same coverage or large
common coverage.
 LTE load balancing policy
− It is recommended that inter-frequency load balancing be preferentially enabled for
the live network. For inter-frequency load balancing, the best target cell is selected
based on the load difference between the serving cell and the target neighboring cell
as well as the handover performance.
− If both inter-frequency MLB and inter-RAT MLB are enabled, it is recommended
that the threshold for triggering inter-frequency MLB be less than that for triggering
inter-RAT MLB. When both inter-frequency MLB and inter-RAT MLB are enabled,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
they are triggered if the cell load is higher than the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
threshold plus the offset. In this case, the eNodeB determines whether inter-
frequency MLB or inter-RAT MLB is used depending on the order of measurement
reports.
− The throughput of GSM data services is low and service experience is poor. In a
non-congestion GSM network, the peak throughput of a single UE is only 200
kbit/s. Therefore, it is recommended that LTE-to-GSM load balancing not be
enabled.

Type
Connected mode LTE to GSM LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT

Load Sharing to GERAN
MML Command Parameter ID Recommended Description
Value
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbThd 75 Indicates the

threshold for
triggering inter-RAT
load balancing. Load
balancing between
the cell and its inter-
RAT neighboring
cell is triggered if
the cell load exceeds
the sum of this
threshold and the
offset, and is
stopped if the cell
load falls below this
threshold.
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbUeNum 15 Indicates the
Thd threshold of the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
for triggering inter-
RAT mobility load
balancing (MLB).
MLB is triggered if
the number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell exceeds this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
threshold, and MLB

is stopped if the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
falls below this
threshold. The
threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
equals the
percentage value
multiplied by 1000.
For example,
parameter value 1
indicates that the
threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs is
10 (1000 x 1%),
parameter value 2
indicates threshold
20, and parameter
value 10 indicates
threshold 100. Note
that if the parameter
value is 100 or 99,
the threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs is
1 or 2, respectively.
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbTrigger IRAT_PRB_ONLY Indicates the
Mode triggering mode for
inter-RAT load
balancing. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY
, inter-RAT load
balancing is
triggered based only
on the physical
resource block
(PRB) usage. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_UE_NUMB
ER_ONLY, inter-
RAT load balancing
is triggered based
only on the number
of UEs. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_OR_U

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
E_NUMBER, inter-
RAT load balancing
can be triggered
based on either PRB
usage or the number
of UEs.
ModeThd threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell used to
trigger UE-number-
based inter-RAT
load balancing. If
synchronized UEs in
the cell is greater
sum of the values of
the
InterRatMlbUeNu
mModeThd and
InterRatMlbUeNu
mOffset parameters,
UE-number-based
inter-RAT load
balancing is
triggered. If the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell is less than
the value of the
InterRatMlbUeNu
mModeThd
parameter, UE-
number-based inter-
RAT load balancing
stops.
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbUeSelPr 2 Indicates the PRB
bThd usage threshold for
selecting UEs for
inter-RAT load
balancing. If the
InterRatMlbTrigge
rMode parameter is
set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY
and the
InterRatMlbUeSel
Strategy parameter
is set to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
PRBRATIOLOW
MODE, UEs whose
PRB usage is less
value of the
InterRatMlbUeSel
PrbThd parameter
are selected for
PRB-usage-based
inter-RAT load
balancing. If the
InterRatMlbTrigge
rMode parameter is
set to
IRAT_UE_NUMB
ER_ONLY, UEs
whose PRB usage is
the value of the
InterRatMlbUeSel
PrbThd parameter
are selected for UE-
number-based inter-
RAT load balancing.
MOD CELLMLB InitValidPeriod 10 Indicates the
standard valid
duration for load
sharing with
universal terrestrial
radio access network
(UTRAN) for UEs
in idle mode. The
actual duration
increases on the
basis of a standard
valid duration with
the increase of the
number of uplink-
synchronized UEs.

\\Modifying the configuration of the cell MLB algorithm
MOD CELLMLB: InterRatMlbThd=75, InterRatMlbUeNumThd=15,
InterRatMlbTriggerMode=IRAT_PRB_ONLY,InterRatMlbUeNumModeThd=150,InterRatMlbUeSelP
rbThd=2,InitValidPeriod=10;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.1.4.3.3 III. Solutions to GSM Load Balancing

 When the load of the serving GSM cell is greater than a specific threshold, the GSM load
balancing policy is as follows:
− When congestion occurs in the serving GSM cell and no other resources can be
distributed, UEs are reselected to best intra- or inter-frequency neighboring cells
through directed retry and the UEs continue with services.
− When the load of the serving GSM cell is heavy, load-based handovers are triggered
to hand some UEs in the serving GSM cell over to inter-frequency cells or other
intra-frequency cells.
− When the load of the serving GSM cell is heavy, NC2 or PS handover can be used
to hand some UEs over to LTE cells. However, NC2 and PS handovers cannot be
put into commercial use currently because the industry chain is immature.
Currently, the GSM-to-LTE PS handover or NC2 is not supported, and UEs preferentially camp on the
LTE network. Therefore, it is recommended that the feature in Table 3-15 be disabled.

Type
Connected mode GSM to LTE GBFD-511304 PS Handover

Between GSM and LTE
Based on Cell Load
Value

cell supports GPRS.
network control 2
(NC2). In NC2
mode, an MS sends
the BSC
measurement reports
containing
information about
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

SHO the MS handover
an LTE cell during
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
LOADRESELALL SET PERMIT Whether to allow
OW GCELLNC2PARA load-based cell
reselection. When
the uplink load or
downlink load is
greater than
LOADRESELSTAR
TTHRSH and the
level is smaller than
LOADRESELMAX
RXLEV in a service
cell, the cell
reselection is a load-
based reselection. If
to
PERMIT(Permit)
and NC2 Load
Reselection Switch
is set to
Support(Support),
the load of the target
cell serves as a
parameter when you
attempt to enable the
load-based cell
reselection
algorithm.
LOADRESELSTAR SET 85 When the uplink
TTHRSH GCELLNC2PARA load or downlink
load of the cell
exceeds this
threshold, the load
reselection decision
is made.
LOADRESELRXT SET 60 When the uplink
HRSH GCELLNC2PARA load or downlink

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
load of the target cell

is lower than this
threshold, it can
accept the MSs from
the serving cell due
to load reselection.
LOADRESELMAX SET 40 Threshold for
RXLEV GCELLNC2PARA reselecting a cell.
When the receive
cell is lower than
this threshold, the
load reselection is
triggered.
neighboring cell to
become a candidate
cell during cell
reselection. In
addition, the
parameter value is
of bad normal cell
reselection level.
When the receive
value of this
parameter, the
normal cell
bad.
of the target cell
should meet the
[MAX (level of
serving cell, Cell
Reselection Level
Threshold) + Cell
Reselection
way, ping-pong
handovers do not
occur.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

message is received
or the load cell
reselection is
initiated, the Cell
Penalty Level is
subtracted from the
failure occurs
repeatedly or that
multiple MSs are
reselected to the
same target cell.
This parameter is
valid only within
Cell Penalty
Duration.
penalty can be
performed only in
this duration.
missed. If the
number of allowed
measurement reports
missed exceeds this
value, the previous
measurement report
is invalid.
when the receive
cell or the receive
larger the value of
this parameter, the
the former receive
levels. The smaller
the value of this
parameter, the
the later receive

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
levels.
cell

\\Setting the basic attributes of the GPRS of a GSM cell
SET GCELLGPRS: GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85,
LOADRESELRXTHRSH=60, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6,
PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6,
RESELINTERVAL=2;

3.1.4.4.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Steering

 Service steering
With the service-based handover, the eNodeB can hand a UE over to a proper network in
another mode based on the QoS class identifier (QCI) of the UE's service. For services
with QCI 1 to QCI 9, you can set the InterRatHoState parameter in the
ServiceIrHoCfgGroup MO to force, forbid, or allow UEs to perform service-based
handovers.
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to MUST_HO for a service with a certain
QCI, the eNodeB delivers measurement configuration information about the
service-based handover when a UE initiates this service.
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to NO_HO for a service with a certain
QCI, the eNodeB does not deliver measurement configuration information about the
service-based handover when a UE processing this service initiates a service that
must be handed over.
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to PERMIT_HO for a service with a
certain QCI, the eNodeB does not deliver measurement configuration information
about the service-based handover when a UE initiates this service. However, if a
UE processing this service initiates a service that must be handed over, the eNodeB
delivers measurement configuration information about the service-based handover.
− Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed.
− When inter-RAT service steering is performed, it is recommended that the service-
based LTE-to-UMTS handover be enabled.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
− If both the service-based LTE-to-UMTS handover and the service-based LTE-to-

GSM handover are enabled, the eNodeB determines the target network for service
steering depending on the order of measurement reports.
 Configuration policy for services with different QCIs
QCI values vary depending on service configurations on the core network (CN) side.
Therefore, the InterRatHoState parameter must be set for services with different QCIs
based on the configurations on the CN side and the customer's policy.

Type
Connected mode LTE to GSM LOFD-001046 Service

based inter-RAT handover
to GERAN
Value
HoAlgoSwitch MOD GeranServiceHoSwi Indicates the

ENODEBALGOSW tch-1 switches used to
ITCH enable or disable
handover
algorithms.
If
GeranServiceHoSw
itch is set to on,
service-based
handovers to
GERAN are enabled
and UEs using a
specific type of
services can be
handed over to
GERAN. If
GeranServiceHoSw
itch is set to off,
service-based
handovers to
GERAN are
disabled.
HoModeSwitch MOD GeranRedirectSwitc Indicates the
ENODEBALGOSW h-1 switches
ITCH or corresponding to the
inputs based on

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
GeranPsHoSwitch-1 which the eNodeB

determines handover
policies.
If GeranCcoSwitch
is set to on, the
GERAN supports
cell change order
(CCO). If
GeranCcoSwitch is
set to off, the
GERAN does not
support CCO.
If
GeranPsHoSwitch
is set to on, GERAN
supports PS
handovers. If
GeranPsHoSwitch
is set to off, GERAN
does not support PS
handovers.
InterRatHoState MOD PERMIT_HO Indicates whether
SERVICEIRHOCF service-based inter-
GGROUP RAT handovers are
required, allowed, or
not allowed for a
QCI.
LdSvBasedHoGeran MOD (-98) Indicates the RSSI
B1Thd INTERRATHOGER threshold for event
ANGROUP B1 related to load-
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to GERAN.
When the measured
RSSI value exceeds
this threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.

\\Modifying the configuration of eNodeB-level algorithm switches
MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: HoAlgoSwitch= UtranServiceHoSwitch-1, HoModeSwitch=
UtranPsHoSwitch-1, HoModeSwitch= UtranRedirectSwitch-1, HoModeSwitch=
BlindHoSwitch-0,
\\Modifying a service-based inter-RAT handover policy group
MOD SERVICEIRHOCFGGROUP: InterRatHoState= PERMIT_HO;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

MOD INTERRATHOGERANGROUP: LdSvBasedHoGeranB1Thd=-98;
3.1.4.4.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Steering

− GSM networks carry voice services and low-rate data services.
− The Service UTRAN CCO Value part and Service E-UTRAN CCO Value part IEs
from the CN indicate the most suitable RAT for the current service. If the IEs
indicate that both the UTRAN and E-UTRAN can be the target RATs, the target cell
is selected based on the priority of neighboring cells. That is, UEs are handed over
to high-priority cells.
Currently, the GSM-to-LTE PS handover or NC2 is not supported, and UEs preferentially camp on the
LTE network. Therefore, it is recommended that the feature in Table 3-17 be disabled.

Type
Connected mode GSM to LTE GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE

Service Based PS Handover
Value

cell supports GPRS.
network control 2
(NC2). In NC2
mode, an MS sends
the BSC
measurement reports
containing
information about
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.
SHO the MS handover

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

an LTE cell during
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
TrafficReselAllow GCELLNC2PARA PERMIT Whether to allow the
cell service
reselection. When
to PERMIT, the
Radio Access
Technology (RAT)
of the candidate cell
is considered in the
algorithm for cell
service reselection.

SET GCELLNC2PARA: TrafficReselAllow= PERMIT;
3.1.4.5 Solutions to Voice Services

3.1.4.5.1 I. Policies for 2G and 3G Voice Services
 Policies for 3G voice services
A GU dual-mode UE initiates a CS service in the UMTS network. When the UE moves
to an area with weak UMTS coverage, the UE performs a coverage-based handover to
the GSM network and does not return to the UMTS network during the call. In areas
with weak GSM coverage but with good UMTS coverage, the UE can return to the
UMTS network through cell reselection.
A GU dual-mode UE initiates a CS service in the UMTS network. If there is 3G
coverage or the 3G network is heavily loaded, the CS service can be handed over to the
GSM network.
3.1.4.5.2 II. CSFB

The duration for LTE-to-UMTS CSFB is short and the UMTS network supports combined
services. Therefore, it is recommended that the UE preferentially fall back to the UMTS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
network when the UE initiates a CS service in the LTE network; when the UMTS coverage is
weak, the UE can fall back to the GSM network.
There are four mechanisms for CSFB to UTRAN based on different UE and network
capabilities.
 PS handover-based CSFB
 PS redirection-based CSFB
 Flash CSFB
 Ultra-Flash CSFB
These four mechanisms have advantages as well as disadvantages. They all support
measurement-based and blind handover/redirection-based CSFB. The following table
provides the compassion results of the four mechanisms.
Table 13.5 Comparison of the three mechanisms for LTE-to-UMTS CSFB

CSFB Impact Impact CS CN PS CN CSFB
Mechanis on the on UE Access
m Network Delay
Redirection-  The At present, CS CN PS CN The CSFB

based CSFB eNodeB all UEs supports supports access delay
must be support CSFB. CSFB. is the
configure CSFB. longest.
d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori
ng
UMTS
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
Flash CSFB  The The UE CS CN PS CN According to
eNodeB must support supports supports the baseline
must be Flash CSFB CSFB. CSFB and in SRAN8.0,
configure (3GPP the RIM the delay in
d with Release 9) procedure Flash CSFB
frequenc between is 300 ms to
y groups. UMTS and 1.28s less
 Neighbori LTE. than PS
ng redirection-
UMTS based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be UMTS)
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
PS  The The UE CS CN PS CN According to
handover- eNodeB must support supports supports the baseline
based CSFB must be handover CSFB. CSFB and in SRAN8.0,
configure and all UEs L2U PS the delay in
d with support this handover. PS
frequenc mechanism. handover-
y groups. based CSFB
 Neighbori is 1s less
ng than PS
UMTS redirection-
cells based CSFB.
must be (LTE to
configure UMTS)
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
Ultra-Flash  The The UE This N/A Compared
CSFB eNodeB must support mechanism with R8
must be SRVCC is Huawei LTE-to-
configure handovers. proprietary UMTS
d with and Huawei CSFB, the
frequenci MSC is delay is
es. required. reduced
 Neighbori from 6s to
ng 3.5s.
UMTS
cells
must be
configure
d.
 RAC must
be

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
Table 13.6 Comparison of measurement from LTE to UMTS

Measurement Blind CSFB
Terminal support All UEs support LTE-to- All UEs support LTE-to-
UMTS measurement. UMTS CSFB.
Impact on CSFB delay The delay in CSFB The delay in CSFB
increases. decreases.
PS handover-based CSFB Measurement-based CSFB Blind CSFB is not
is recommended for recommended.
improving the CSFB
success rate because there is
only one target cell for
handover.
Redirection-based CSFB If the coverage of the UMTS network is good, blind CSFB
is recommended.
If the coverage of the UMTS network is poor,
measurement-based CSFB is recommended.
Ultra-Flash CSFB Recommended Not recommended
Tests on the live network show that Qualcomm terminals have bugs in measuring UMTS signals in the
LTE network: The signals are not filtered, leading to inaccurate measurement results. Therefore, UEs
may not be handed over to the UMTS cell with the best signal quality.
At present, redirection-based CSFB is recommended for avoiding CSFB failures caused by failed
handovers.
The following table provides the comparison results of the mechanisms for LTE-to-GSM
CSFB. Currently, UEs do not support handover-based LTE-to-GSM CSFB.
Table 13.7 Comparison of mechanisms for LTE-to-GSM CSFB

m Network Delay
Redirection-  The All UEs CS CN PS CN The delay is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
based CSFB eNodeB support this supports supports the longest.

must be mechanism. CSFB. CSFB.
configure
d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori
ng GSM
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
frequenc between is 1.88s less
y groups. GSM and than PS
 Neighbori LTE. redirection-
ng GSM based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be GSM)
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng GSM
external
cells.
Ultra-Flash  The The UE This Compared
CSFB eNodeB must support mechanism with LTE-to-
must be SRVCC is Huawei GSM CSFB
configure handovers. proprietary complying
d with and Huawei with 3GPP
frequenc MSC is Release 8,
y groups. required. Ultra-Flash
 Neighbori CSFB
ng GSM reduces the
cells delay from
must be 6s to 5s.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
configure
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d for
GSM
external
cells.
Table 13.8 Comparison of measurement from LTE to GSM

Terminal support All UEs support LTE-to- All UEs support blind
GSM CSFB. CSFB.
Redirection-based CSFB If the coverage of the GSM network is good, blind CSFB is
recommended.
If the coverage of the GSM network is poor, measurement-
based CSFB is recommended.
 Selection of redirection or PS handover

Redirection-based CSFB is recommended due to the following reasons:
− Redirection-based CSFB does not rely on the LTE-to-UMTS PS handover function
of the PS CN, which simplifies deployment.
 The configuration for redirection-based CSFB is simple.
 Measurement must be performed for PS handover-based CSFB to ensure the PS
handover success rate. However, Qualcomm terminals have bugs in measurement. (Note:
Tests on the live network show that Qualcomm terminals have bugs in measuring UMTS
signals in the LTE network: The signals are not filtered, leading to inaccurate
measurement results. Therefore, UEs may not be handed over to the UMTS cell with the
best signal quality. This problem is being rectified on the network side.)
 Relationships between Release 8 redirection and Release 9 redirection
All UEs on the live network support R8 redirection and therefore R8 redirection-based
CSFB is enabled for all UEs. R9 redirection-based CSFB has better performance and
commercial UEs such as iPhone 5 and Galaxy S4 support R9 redirection-based CSFB. In
this case, it is recommended that R9 redirection-based CSFB be enabled.
If both R8 and R9 redirection-based CSFB are enabled, the eNodeB can make decisions
based on the UE capability: If the UE supports R9 redirection-based CSFB, R9

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
redirection-based CSFB is performed. If the UE does not support R9 redirection-based

CSFB, R8 redirection-based CSFB is performed.
 Target RAT selection: The UMTS network is preferentially selected for CSFB due to the
following reasons:
 The delay in CSFB to the UMTS network is short and user experience is good.
 The UMTS network supports CS+PS combined services by default. However, Dual
Transfer Mode (DTM) services are not enabled on the GSM network.
 Selection of measurement-based or blind CSFB
 If the UMTS network has continuous coverage, blind CSFB is recommended because it
reduces the CSFB delay.
 If the UMTS network has discontinuous coverage but the GSM network has continuous
coverage, measurement-based CSFB is recommended. The eNodeB is configured with a
protection timer (4s by default). After the timer for CSFB to the UMTS network has
expired, blind redirection is performed to the GSM network. This method increases the
CSFB delay compared with blind CSFB. The reasons are as follows:
1. If UMTS signals can be detected, the UMTS measurement takes extra time, which is
about 300 ms in lab tests.
2. If UMTS signals cannot be detected, the protection timer takes extra time. The timer can
be configured and the default value is 4s.
 If there is only GSM coverage, blind CSFB is recommended.
 Other special scenarios
 Scenario 1: The UMTS network has multiple frequencies and service steering is used
among frequencies. CS and PS services are carried on multiple frequencies.
CSFB policy: LTE-to-UMTS CSFB supports the service steering function. The CSFB
policy is the same as intra-RAT UMTS service steering. That is, CS services fall back to
UMTS frequencies carrying CS services.
 Scenario 2: CS+PS combined services
For LTE-to-GSM CSFB, the GSM network does not support intra-RAT DTM services at
present. Therefore, CS services fall back to the GSM network and PS services are
suspended.
For LTE-to-UMTS CSFB, CS+PS combined services can fall back to the UMTS
network at the same time through handover or redirection.
Common question concerning CSFB: Does the UE support different CSFB methods?
The following table describes the UE support for different CSFB methods.
CSFB Mode Whether the UE Supports This CSFB

Method?
L2U PS HO All UEs support this CSFB mode.

L2U redirect All UEs support this CSFB mode.
L2U flash CSFB Some UEs support this CSFB mode, such as
Galaxy S4 and iPhone5.
L2G PS HO No UE supports this CSFB mode.
L2G redirect All UEs support this CSFB mode.
L2G flash CSFB Some UEs support this CSFB mode, such as

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method?

L2G CCO Some UEs support this CSFB mode, such as
iPhone5.
L2G NACC Some UEs support this CSFB mode, such as
iPhone5.
Capabilities of UEs in measuring GSM and UMTS cells in the LTE network
All UEs in the LTE network can measure UMTS cells.
Some UEs in the LTE network can measure GSM cells.
Table 13.9 Features recommended for a GUL triple-mode network

UE Mode Service Recommended Feature
Interoperability Type
Connected Mode CS LTE to UMTS WRFD-140224 Fast CS

Fallback Based on RIM
WRFD-140102 CS Fallback
Guarantee for LTE
Emergency Calls
LOFD-001033 CS Fallback
to UTRAN
LOFD-001052 Flash CS
Fallback to UTRAN
LOFD-070202 Ultra-Flash
CSFB
with LAI to UTRAN
CS LTE to GSM GBFD-511313 CSFB
GBFD-171212 Ultra-Flash
CSFB
to GERAN
Fallback to GERAN
CSFB to GERAN
 Parameter settings for CSFB

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The following table provides recommended parameter settings for CSFB.
Table 13.10 Recommended parameter settings for CSFB

value
HoAlgoSwitch MOD UtranCsfbSwitch: Indicates the

ENODEBALGOSW On switches used to
handover
algorithms.
UtranCsfbSwitch: If
this switch is turned
on, CSFB to
UTRAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to UTRAN.
HoAlgoSwitch GeranCsfbSwitch: Indicates the
On switches used to
enable or disable
handover
algorithms.
GeranCsfbSwitch: If
on, CSFB to
GERAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to GERAN.
HoModeSwitch BlindHoSwitch: Off Indicates the
switches
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
BlindHoSwitch: If
off, blind handovers
for CSFB are
disabled.
CsfbHoUtranB1Thd MOD -103 dBm Indicates the RSCP
Rscp CSFALLBACKHO threshold for event
B1, which is used in
CS fallback to
UTRAN. When CS
fallback to UTRAN
is applicable, this
parameter is set for
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
event B1. This

parameter indicates
the RSCP
requirement for the
UTRAN cells to be
included in the
measurement report.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
the RSCP in at least
one UTRAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
are met.
CsfbHoUtranTimeT 80 ms Indicates the time-
oTrig to-trigger for event
B1 that is used in CS
fallback to UTRAN.
When CS fallback to
UTRAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. When
detecting that the
least one UTRAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
report to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger. This
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
handovers, and the

number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.
CsfbHoGeranB1Thd -95dBm Indicates the RSSI
threshold for event
fallback to GERAN.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one GERAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
see 3GPP TS
36.331.
CsfbHoGeranTimeT 320 ms Indicates the time-
fallback to GERAN.
When CS fallback to
GERAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. When
detecting that the
least one GERAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.

MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: HoAlgoSwitch= UtranCsfbSwitch: On, HoAlgoSwitch =
GeranCsfbSwitch: On, HoModeSwitch =
BlindHoSwitch:Off,DlIcicSwitch=DlIcicDynamicSwitch_ON_ENUM,
AnrSwitch=IntraRatEventAnrSwitch-1;
Modifying configurations of handover parameters for CSFB
MOD CSFALLBACKHO: LocalCellId=1, CsfbHoUtranTimeToTrig=128ms, CsfbHoGeranB1Thd=-
70, CsfbHoUtranB1ThdRscp=-103 dBm, CsfbHoUtranTimeToTrig=80ms, CsfbHoGeranB1Thd=-
95dBm, CsfbHoGeranTimeToTrig=320ms;
3.1.4.5.3 III. SRVCC

SRVCC requires support from the UE and CN.
Target RAT selection for SRVCC
 If the UMTS network has good coverage, SRVCC to UTRAN is recommended.
 If UMTS network coverage is poor but the GSM network coverage is good, SRVCC to
GERAN is recommended.
 If SRVCC to UTRAN and GERAN are enabled at the same time, the network side
decides the target RAT based on the sequence of report sent by the UE.
For SRVCC with PSHO to UMTS, to ensure the preparation success rate of incoming SRVCC
handover and reduce the call drop rate of VoIP services, the RNC reduces the rate of UEs
performing PS handovers. The rate of PS services can be set to 0 kbit/s or 8 kbit/s. Related
features

Connected mode CS/CS+PS L>U LOFD-001022 SRVCC to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

UTRAN
WRFD-150215 SRVCC
from LTE to UMTS with PS
Handover
CS/CS+PS L>G LOFD-001023 SRVCC to
GERAN
GBFD-511309 SRVCC
LTE-to-UMTS SRVCC handover has not been put into large-scale commercial use and the number of
UEs supporting this function is small. Therefore, the number of times that this function is triggered is
small. This function is under test and optimization at present. The baselines of this function will be
updated after the successful commercial use in two to three sites.
3.1.4.5.4 IV. Processing of Combined Services

For CS+PS combined services between GSM and LTE, the GSM network does not support
inter-RAT DTM. In this case, only CS services can fall back to the GSM network and PS
services are suspended.
For LTE-to-UMTS CS+PS combined services, CS+PS combined services can fall back to the
UMTS network at the same time through handover or redirection.
The transfer of CS+PS combined services between GSM and UMTS does not exist.

GL dual-mode UEs can return to the LTE network fast after voice services are released.
Figure 1.14 shows the scheme of GSM-to-LTE fast return.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.14 Scheme of GSM-to-LTE fast return
3.1.4.6.2 II. Solutions to GSM-to-LTE Fast Return

GL dual-mode UEs can return to the LTE network fast after voice services are released and
the CHANNEL RELEASE message carrying the LTE frequency is delivered.
 General policy
− The GSM-to-LTE fast return is performed for CSFB UEs that can be recognized by
the MSC.
− The UMTS-to-LTE fast return is performed for SRVCC UEs that can be recognized
by the BSC.
− The GSM-to-LTE cell reselection is performed for UEs that cannot use fast return
(that is, CSFB or SRVCC UEs that cannot be recognized by the MSC).
 If an UE initiates a PS service during cell reselection, the UE may not be able to return to the LTE
network. As specified in 3GPP specifications, in GPRS packet transfer mode (PTM), if the PBCCH
is not configured or the PACKET MEASUREMENT ORDER message is not delivered, UEs in
connected mode cannot be reselected to the LTE network. However, certain UEs in connected mode
can be autonomously reselected to the LTE networks when the PBCCH is not configured or the
PACKET MEASUREMENT ORDER message is not delivered.
 After voice services in the GSM network are released, the BSC will trigger a GSM-to-LTE fast
return for all GL dual-mode UEs if the following conditions are met:
 The MSC cannot recognize CSFB calls.
 The BSC cannot recognize SRVCC UEs.
 The DecodeCSFBInd parameter is set to OFF.
 The SRVCCFastReturnSw parameter is set to OFF.
 GL dual-mode UEs that have not subscribed to the LTE network will be out of service. Therefore,
the DecodeCSFBInd and SRVCCFastReturnSw parameters are usually not set to OFF. In this
case, if the MSC cannot recognize CSFB calls or the BSC cannot recognize SRVCC UEs, these UEs
can return to the LTE network only through GSM-to-LTE cell reselection.
 Requirements of GSM-to-LTE fast return on the target cell
− The conditions for UE camping on the LTE cell are met.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
− The threshold for UE camping on the LTE cell can be configured through the
Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin parameters in the eNodeB MML command MOD
CELLSEL.
 Method used by the MSC to recognize CSFB UEs
After voice services are released, the MSC delivers the CLEAR COMMAND message
containing the CSFB indication IE so the BSC can recognize CSFB UEs.
 Method of identifying SRVCC UEs on the GSM side
The BSC configures default SAI and compares this value with the SAI in an HO Request
message. If they are consistent, the BSC identifies a UE that is handed over to GSM
through SRVCC as an SRVCC UE. If they are inconsistent, the BSC does not identify
the UE as an SRVCC UE.

Type
Idle mode GSM to LTE (scenarios in GBFD-511312 Fast LTE

which CS services are Reselection at 2G CS Call
released) Release
For details about how to use a parameter, see Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call
Release Feature Parameter Description and MML reference documents.
Value
MOD GLTENCELL SPTRAPIDSEL SUPPORT Whether a quick

source GSM cell to
allowed. Quick
source GSM cell to
the target LTE cell
indicates that the
CHANNEL
RELEASE message
sent to the MS
carries the
information about
cell reselection, and
the MS performs cell
reselection
immediately after
channel release.
MOD GLTENCELL SPTBLINDHO UNSUPPORT Whether to support
the blind handover

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
from the source

GSM cell to the
target LTE cell. The
blind handover from
the source GSM cell
to the target LTE
cell indicates that the
MS in the GSM cell
is handed over to the
target LTE cell
without measuring
the target LTE cell.
MOD GLTENCELL SPTRAPIDSEL UNSUPPORT Whether a quick
source GSM cell to
allowed. Quick
source GSM cell to
the target LTE cell
indicates that the
CHANNEL
RELEASE message
sent to the MS
carries the
information about
reselection
immediately after
channel release.
MOD GLTENCELL NCELLPRI 255 Common priority of
a neighboring LTE
cell. Value 0
priority, value 7
priority, and value
255 is invalid.

\\Modifying neighboring LTE cells
MOD GLTENCELL: SPTRAPIDSEL=SUPPORT, SPTBLINDHO=UNSUPPORT,
SPTRAPIDSEL=UNSUPPORT, NCELLPRI=255;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.1.5 UL Interoperability Networking Solution

With the continuous maturity of UMTS networks and the popularization of LTE networks, the
structure of wireless networks becomes more and more complicated, with most networks
serving multiple modes and multiple frequency bands. In addition, the penetration rate of UEs
that support multiple modes or multiple frequency bands keeps rising, gradually replacing
single-mode UEs. Regarding such complicated networking, it is imperative to promote the
efficiency of later-generation networks and improve user experience by enabling users to
select appropriate networks.
Figure 3-6 shows camping scheme of UEs in idle mode.
Figure 1.15 Camping scheme of UEs in idle mode
By considering RATs in the network, and the coverage continuity and the load of each
frequency band, solutions to camping of UEs in idle mode enable UEs to select a cell with
good signal quality for camping on and processing services. Different goals must be reached
 After the deployment of LTE networks, it is recommended that multimode UEs
supporting LTE preferentially camp on the LTE network to improve LTE network usage
and allow users to enjoy high throughput and diversified online services provided by the
LTE network.

− The RAT priority for camping in descending order is LTE > UMTS. The priorities
of frequency bands within UMTS and LTE are the same as the existing policy.
− Priority for LTE frequencies: UEs preferentially camp on high frequency bands
because LTE cells served by high frequency bands provide large bandwidths. A high
frequency band is usually used as a capacity layer. For example, the priority is as
follows: LTE 2600 MHz (20 MHz) > LTE 900 MHz (5 MHz). In a scenario where

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
an LTE low-frequency band provides a large bandwidth, the policy is adjusted

based on the actual situation.
Cell reselection between LTE and UMTS is supported.
− LTE-to-UMTS cell reselection is supported at the edge of an LTE cell.
− After UEs move to the LTE coverage area, UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection is
supported.
Table 15.1 Features recommended for reselection of UEs in idle mode in a UL dual-mode network
Type
Idle mode LTE to UMTS LBFD-00201803 Cell

For details about how to use a parameter, see Idle Mode Management Feature
Parameter Description and MML reference documents.
Value
QRxLevMin MOD CELLRESEL -64 Indicates the

minimum required
RX level used in
intra-frequency E-
UTRAN cell
reselection, which
corresponds to the
IE q-RxLevMin in
SIB3. This value is
(R criteria) and used
in the evaluation of
cell reselection. For
36.304.
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells.
measurement
for reselection to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells. If
priority of a
frequency or RAT is
higher than that of
the serving
frequency, the UEs
always start inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements.
priority of a
frequency is lower
of the serving
frequency or if the
cell reselection
lower than that of
the serving
frequency, the UEs
start inter-frequency
or inter-RAT
measurements only
when the value of
Cell selection RX
level value (dB) is
lower than or equal
parameter.
evaluation of
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT
frequency. Cell
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT frequency
is performed if no
cell on the serving
frequency or on a
higher priority E-
UTRAN frequency

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
inter-frequency and
inter-RAT
reselections. For
36.304.
of the serving
frequency. 0
priority. The value
of this parameter
must be determined
together with the
priorities of other
frequencies during
the network
planning.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities.
gInd UTRANNFREQ set the priority of a
cell assigned with
the UARFCN used
in cell reselection to
UTRAN.
of the neighboring
UTRAN frequency.
The value 0
priority. The UE
decides whether to
reselect a
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency based on
the value of this
parameter and the
absolute priority of
the serving cell.
If the value of this
parameter is larger
than the absolute
priority of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
starts measurements
on the UTRAN
frequency; then if
the signal quality of
some neighboring
cells meets the
related conditions,
the UE starts cell
reselection.
than the absolute
priority of the
starts the
measurements only
when the signal
quality of the
then if the signal
quality of some
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities. For
36.331.
ThreshXLow 6 Indicates the
minimum RX level
required for a
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency to become
a candidate for
reselection if the
priority of the
frequency is lower
than that of the
serving frequency.
After measurements
are started for
the UTRAN
frequency, the UE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
reselects to a
neighboring cell on
the frequency only if
the RX level of the
than a specified
threshold and that of
the cell is higher
than the value
specified by this
to-trigger. For
36.331.
QRxLevMin -58 Indicates the RX
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency to become
a candidate for
selection. It is
and used in the
evaluation for cell
evaluation for cell
reselection, the UE
performs the
following
Measured RSRP
value of a
neighboring cell on
the frequency -
Value of this
parameter -
Compensated power.
If Srxlev for a
neighboring cell is
better than a
to-trigger,
reselection to the
25.304.
PmaxUtran 24 dBm Indicates the
maximum power
that the UE can
apply to
transmission on the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UTRAN frequency.
It is used in criteria
S to calculate the
compensated power.
For details, see
3GPP TS 25.104.
TReselUtran ADD 1 Indicates the
CELLRESELUTRA evaluation period for
N a UE to determine
neighboring
UTRAN cell to
camp on. During the
the signal quality
cell is less than the
value of the Serving
frequency lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
CellResel MO for
the serving cell, the
signal quality value
of the neighboring
UTRAN cell is
greater than the
value of the
UTRAN lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
UtranNFreq MO for
the serving cell, and
the UE camps on the
serving cell for more
than 1s, the UE
attempts to reselect
the new cell to camp
on. A smaller value
of this parameter
leads to a higher
probability of
initiating cell
reselections but a
ping-pong
reselections. A
parameter leads to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

\\Modifying the parameters about cell reselection
MOD CELLRESEL: LocalCellId=0, Qhyst=DB2_Q_HYST, SpeedDepReselCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
SNonIntraSearchCfgInd=CFG, SNonIntraSearch=9, ThrshServLow=7, CellReselPriority=6,
QRxLevMin=-64, PMaxCfgInd=CFG, PMax=-27, SIntraSearchCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
MeasBandWidthCfgInd=NOT_CFG, TReselEutran=5, SpeedStateSfCfgInd=NOT_CFG;
\\Adding a neighboring UTRAN frequency
ADD UTRANNFREQ: LocalCellId=0, UtranDlArfcn=10800, UtranFddTddType=UTRAN_FDD,
UtranUlArfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG, CellReselPriorityCfgInd=CFG, ThreshXLow=6, QRxLevMin=-
58, PmaxUtran=24;
\\Adding the configuration related to cell reselection to UTRAN
ADD CELLRESELUTRAN: LocalCellId=0, TReselUtran=1,
3.1.5.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network

 Camping policy
UL dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on LTE cells. For detailed camping and cell
reselection policies, see section II. "Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in an
LTE Network."
UL dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on LTE cells and support reselection between
UMTS and LTE cells.
− UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection is supported in areas with good LTE coverage.
− LTE-to-UMTS cell reselection is supported at the edge of an LTE cell.
Table 15.2 Features recommended for reselection of UEs in idle mode in a UL dual-mode network
Type
Idle mode UMTS to LTE WRFD-020126 Mobility

Between UMTS and LTE
Phase 1
For details about how to use a parameter, see Interoperability Between UMTS and LTE
Value
ThdPrioritySearch1 MOD 4 CPICH RSCP

UCELLSELRESEL threshold for
determining whether
a UE performs
measurements of
low-priority
frequencies and how
often a UE performs

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
measurements of
high-priority
frequencies. CPICH
stands for Common
Pilot Channel and
RSCP stands for
power. A UE
performs
measurements of
low-priority and
high-priority
frequencies under
either of the
following
conditions:
SrxlevServingCell ≤
Sprioritysearch1
SqualServingCell ≤
Sprioritysearch2
where,
SrxlevServingCell
equals RSCP
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum access
level.
Sprioritysearch1
equals the value of
this parameter.
SqualServingCell
equals Ec/N0
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum signal
quality.
Sprioritysearch2
equals the value of
ThdPrioritySearch2.
ThdPrioritySearch2 MOD 4 CPICH Ec/N0
determining whether
a UE performs
measurements of
low-priority
frequencies and how
often a UE performs
measurements of
high-priority

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
frequencies. A UE
performs
measurements of
low-priority and
high-priority
frequencies under
either of the
following
conditions:
Sprioritysearch1
Sprioritysearch2
where,
SrxlevServingCell
equals RSCP
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum access
level.
Sprioritysearch1
equals the value of
ThdPrioritySearch1.
SqualServingCell
equals Ec/N0
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum signal
quality.
Sprioritysearch2
equals the value of
this parameter.
RSRQSwitch MOD False Whether SIB19
UCELLNFREQPRI contains the RSRQ-
OINFO related
ThdToHighRSRQ,
ThdToLowRSRQ,
EQqualmin and
ThdServingLow2
parameters. When
to True, SIB19
contains these
parameters. When
to False, SIB19 does
not contain these
parameters. For
details about this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
parameter, see 3GPP

TS 25.304.
ThdToHigh MOD 10 This parameter
UCELLNFREQPRI specifies the RSRP
OINFO above which the UE
performs cell
serving cell to a cell
on the target
frequency when the
absolute priority
level of the target
frequency is greater
than that of the
serving cell.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection.
Within the interval
defined by
Treselections, if the
RSRP of the cell on
the target frequency
is greater than the
value of this
parameter, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
ThdToLow MOD 10 This parameter
performs cell
on the target
frequency when the
absolute priority
level of the target
frequency is smaller
than that of the
serving cell.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection.
Within the interval
defined by

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RSRP of the serving

cell is smaller than
the parameter of
RSRP threshold of
low-prio-freq
reselection, whereas
the RSRP of the cell
on the target
than the value of this
parameter, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
ThdServingLow MOD 1 CPICH RSCP value
UCELLSELRESEL of the serving cell
below which the UE
initiates cell
on the frequency
with lower priority
level.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection. Within
the interval defined
by Treselections, if
the CPICH RSCP of
the serving cell is
smaller than the
value of this
parameter whereas
the CPICH RSCP of
the cell on the low-
priority frequency is
high, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
ThdToHighRSRQ MOD 3 RSRQ threshold of
UCELLNFREQPRI the target cell
OINFO relative to
EQqualmin when
of the target
UARFCN is higher
than that of the
serving cell and cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

using the target
UARFCN is to be
implemented. After
measurement starts,
if the signal quality
of the target cell
keeps higher than
this threshold during
delay time, the UE
will reselect the
target cell. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
ThdToLowRSRQ MOD 3 RSRQ threshold of
OINFO relative to
EQqualmin when
of the target
UARFCN is lower
than that of the
using the target
UARFCN is to be
implemented. After
measurement starts,
of the serving cell
keeps lower than the
Ec/N0 threshold for
cell reselection
towards a lower-
priority cell and the
signal quality of the
target cell keeps
higher than this
threshold during the
cell reselection delay
time, the UE will
reselect the target
cell. For details
see 3GPP TS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
25.304.
ThdServingLow2 MOD 2 CPICH Ec/N0
UCELLSELRESEL threshold of the
serving cell for cell
reselection towards
the target cell using
a lower-priority
frequency. After the
cell reselection
measurement starts,
if the Ec/N0 of the
serving cell keeps
lower than this
parameter value and
the Ec/N0 of the
target cell using a
lower-priority
frequency keeps
high during the cell
reselection delay
time, the UE will
reselect the target
cell. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.304.
Treselections MOD 1 If the signal quality
UCELLSELRESEL (that is, CPICH
Ec/N0 measured by
the UE) of a
neighboring cell is
better than that of
the serving cell
time of this
parameter, the UE
reselects the
neighboring cell.
This parameter is
used to avoid ping-
pong reselection
between different
cells.
InterRatTreselScalin MOD 255 This parameter is
gFactor UCELLSELRESEL used to increase the
inter-RAT
reselection time.
This parameter is not
configured when its
value is 255. For

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
details about this

parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.

MOD UCELLSELRESEL:
CellId=1, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleQhyst1s=2, ConnQhyst1s=2, IdleQhyst2s=2,
ConnQhyst2s=2, Treselections=1, Qqualmin=-18, Qrxlevmin=-58,
MaxAllowedUlTxPower=21, IdleSintrasearch=3, IdleSintersearch=5,
ConnSintrasearch=3, ConnSintersearch=5, SsearchRat=2,
SpeedDependentScalingFactor=2, InterFreqTreselScalingFactor=10,
InterRatTreselScalingFactor=10, Tcrmaxnonhcs=NotUsed, NonhcsInd=CONFIGURED,
Ncrnonhcs=8, Tcrmaxhystnonhcs=NotUsed, Qhyst1spch=5, Qhyst1sfach=5, Qhyst2spch=5,
Qhyst2sfach=5, Treselectionspch=3, Treselectionsfach=3, SPriority=4,
ThdPrioritySearch1=2, ThdPrioritySearch2=2, ThdServingLow=1;
\\Modifying the priority information of neighboring frequencies of the serving
cell
MOD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO: CellId=1, EARFCN=1000, NPriority=5, ThdToHigh=2,
ThdToLow=2, EMeasBW=D6, EQrxlevmin=-70, EDetectInd=TRUE, BlacklstCellNumber=D0;
Figure 1.16 shows the inter-RAT and inter-frequency camping scheme of UEs in idle mode.
Figure 1.16 Camping scheme of UEs in idle mode

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

inter-RAT inter-frequency cells can be configured to control which cell or network will the
UE preferentially select.
Figure 1.17 shows the inter-RAT and inter-frequency service continuity scheme.
Figure 1.17 Service continuity scheme
The following sections describe the solutions to weak coverage provided by different RATs.
3.1.5.2.2 II. Solutions to Weak LTE Coverage

 Solutions to weak LTE coverage
− An intra-RAT inter-frequency handover is preferentially performed and then an
inter-RAT handover. It is recommended that an inter-frequency cell in the LTE
network be selected as the target cell.
− LTE-to-UMTS handover types include PS handover, SRVCC, and redirection. The
handover type to be used depends on UE and network capabilities. The priority of
the handover types is as follows: PS handover > SRVCC > redirection.
1. The PS handover can ensure PS service continuity before and after a handover.
2. The redirection applies to PS services not having high requirements on delay.
3. When VoIP services are deployed in the LTE network, SRVCC is enabled to switch the
VoIP services to the CS domain of the UMTS network if no VoIP services are deployed
in the UMTS network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
4. UEs in connected mode cannot measure neighboring UMTS cells, and these UEs will
adaptively perform non-measurement-based handovers. In this case, the blind-handover
priority must be configured for neighboring UTRAN cells.
Table 17.1 Policies on interoperability between the LTE and UMTS networks
Service Whether the Whether the Whether the Solution
Type LTE Network Target UE and
Supports Network Network
VoIP Services Supports Support PS
VoIP Services Handover
Data services N/A N/A ● PS handover

N/A N/A ○ Redirection
Voice services ● ● ● PS handover
● ○ ● SRVCC
PS services and ● ● ● PS handover
voice services
● ○ ● SRVCC+PS
handover
 The solid circle (●) indicates that the services or function is supported.
 The empty circle (○) indicates that the services or function is not supported.
Table 17.2 Features recommended for a UL dual-mode network

Type
Connected mode LTE to UMTS LOFD-001019 PS Inter-

UTRAN and UTRAN
For details about how to use a parameter, see IInter-RAT Mobility Management in
Value

events A1 and A2.
This parameter is
used to prevent

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
frequent triggering
of event evaluation
caused by radio
this way, the
pong handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability.
RAT measurement
event A1 or A2.
When detecting that
the serving cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers. In
summary, it helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers.
RAT measurement
event A1. When the
measured RSRP

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
cell exceeds this

threshold, an event
A1 report will be
and is reserved for
forward
parameter is set to
is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
RAT measurement
event A1.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the
this threshold, an
be sent.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRP value of the
this threshold, an
be sent. The value
-141 does not take
effect and is
parameter is set to
is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
this threshold, an
be sent.
et of the event A2
RAT blind
to the event A2
threshold for
handovers. This
parameter is
compatibility. It
currently.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD (-12) Indicates the Ec/N0
ThdEcn0 INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
ANGROUP B1 related to
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
Ec/N0 of the target
UTRAN cell. For a
cell with large signal
fading variance, set
this parameter to a
large value to
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For a cell
with small signal
this parameter to a
small value to ensure
timely handovers. A
large value of this
a low probability of
handover to the
UTRAN cell, and a
small value leads to
a high probability.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
will be sent.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD (-103) Indicates the RSCP
ThdRscp INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
RSCP of the target
UTRAN cell.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD 2 Indicates the
Hyst INTERRATHOUTR hysteresis for event
ANGROUP B1 related to inter-
RAT handover to
UTRAN. This
prevent frequent
triggering of event
radio signal
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
errors.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD 320 ms Indicates the time-
TimeToTrig INTERRATHOUTR to-trigger for event
RAT handover to
UTRAN. When
detecting that the
least one

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
neighboring cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.

\\Modifying a group of common parameters related to inter-RAT handover
MOD INTERRATHOCOMMGROUP: LocalCellId=0, InterRatHoCommGroupId=9,
InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig=640ms,InterRatHoA1A2Hyst=2,InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig=640,I
nterRatHoA1ThdRsrp=-111,InterRatHoA1ThdRsrq=-20,InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp=-
115,InterRatHoA2ThdRsrq=-24,BlindHoA2ThdOffset=6;
\\Modifying a parameter group related to inter-RAT handover to UTRAN
MOD INTERRATHOUTRANGROUP: LocalCellId=0, InterRatHoUtranGroupId=0,
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-20, InterRatHoUtranB1ThdRscp=-103,
InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst=2, InterRatHoUtranB1TimeToTrig=320;
3.1.5.2.3 III. Solutions to Weak UMTS Coverage

 Solutions to weak UMTS coverage
− When UMTS coverage is insufficient, it is recommended that intra-RAT handovers
be used to ensure service continuity.
− When the LTE coverage is continuous, the coverage-based inter-RAT handover is
used to preferentially hand UEs over to the LTE network.

Type
Connected mode UMTS to LTE WRFD-150219 Coverage

Based PS Redirection from
UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150220 Coverage
Based PS Handover from

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
UMTS to LTE
Value
LTEMeasTypOf3C SET MeasurementQuanti This parameter

UU2LTEHOCOV ty specifies the type of
measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
When this parameter
is set to
MeasurementQuan
tity, the parameter
value is the same as
that of
Measurement
Quantity for Event
3C Measurement of
LTE. When this
parameter is set to
Both, the UE needs
to report
measurement results
of both the types:
Reference Signal
Received Power
(RSRP) and
Reference Signal
Receiving Quality
(RSRQ).
U2LTEFilterCoef D3 This parameter
specifies the layer 3
filter coefficient for
the LTE
measurement.
U2LTEMeasTime 30 Length of a timer for
LTE cell
measurements. The
RNC starts the timer
to perform LTE cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
parameter is set to 0,
the RNC keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
LTEMeasQuanOf3C RSRP This parameter
specifies the
measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
that is not based on
coverage. This
parameter can be set
to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what
specific
measurement results
are reported depends
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,
as is specified in
3GPP TS 25.331.
Hystfor3C 4 This parameter
specifies the
hysteresis for a UE
to report event 3C.
For detailed
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TrigTime3C D0 This parameter
specifies the interval
time between
detection of event
3C and sending of
the measurement
report. How to set
this parameter is
related to slow
fading. For detailed
description of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
parameter, see 3GPP

TS 25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRP 36 RSRP threshold for
event 3C for LTE
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRP
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRQ 20 RSRQ threshold for
event 3C for LTE
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRQ
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For
25.331.

\\Modifying RNC-oriented measurement algorithm parameters for coverage-based UMTS-
LTE handovers and redirections
SET UU2LTEHOCOV: LTEMeasTypOf3C= MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D3,
U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=4, TrigTime3C=D3,
TargetRatThdRSRP=36, TargetRatThdRSRQ=20

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

With increases in the penetration rate of multimode UEs in the live network, load of UMTS or
LTE cells is relatively high in hot spots, as shown in Figure 3-9. In this case, the operators'
main concern is how to select the target cells to balance load of different cells and guarantee
user experience.
Figure 1.18 Load balancing scenario
The following sections describe the solutions to high load of different RATs.
3.1.5.3.2 II. Solutions to LTE Load Balancing

When the resources occupied by the serving LTE cell exceed a specific threshold, load
balancing is performed for this cell. It is recommended that intra-RAT load balancing be
preferentially performed to hand UEs over to inter-frequency neighboring cells with the same
coverage or large common coverage. If the load in the serving LTE cell is still heavy after the
intra-RAT load balancing, perform inter-RAT MLB to hand UEs over to or redirect UEs to
inter-RAT neighboring cells with the same coverage or large common coverage.
 LTE load balancing policy
− It is recommended that inter-frequency load balancing be preferentially enabled for
the live network. For inter-frequency load balancing, the best target cell is selected
based on the load difference between the serving cell and the target neighboring cell
as well as the handover performance.
− If both inter-frequency MLB and inter-RAT MLB are enabled, it is recommended
that the threshold for triggering inter-frequency MLB be less than that for triggering
inter-RAT MLB. When both inter-frequency MLB and inter-RAT MLB are enabled,
they are triggered if the cell load is higher than the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
threshold plus the offset. In this case, the eNodeB determines whether inter-
frequency MLB or inter-RAT MLB is used depending on the order of measurement
reports.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
Connected mode LTE to UMTS LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT

Load Sharing to UTRAN
Value
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbThd 75 Indicates the

threshold for
triggering inter-RAT
load balancing. Load
balancing between
the cell and its inter-
RAT neighboring
cell is triggered if
the cell load exceeds
the sum of this
threshold and the
offset, and is
stopped if the cell
load falls below this
threshold.
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbTrigger IRAT_PRB_ONLY Indicates the
Mode triggering mode for
inter-RAT load
balancing. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY
, inter-RAT load
balancing is
triggered based only
on the physical
resource block
(PRB) usage. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_UE_NUMB
ER_ONLY, inter-
RAT load balancing
is triggered based
only on the number
of UEs. If this
parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_OR_U
E_NUMBER, inter-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RAT load balancing

can be triggered
based on either PRB
usage or the number
of UEs.
ModeThd threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell used to
trigger UE-number-
based inter-RAT
load balancing. If
synchronized UEs in
the cell is greater
sum of the values of
the
InterRatMlbUeNu
mModeThd and
InterRatMlbUeNu
mOffset parameters,
UE-number-based
inter-RAT load
balancing is
triggered. If the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell is less than
the value of the
InterRatMlbUeNu
mModeThd
parameter, UE-
number-based inter-
RAT load balancing
stops.
MOD CELLMLB InterRatMlbUeSelPr 2 Indicates the PRB
bThd usage threshold for
selecting UEs for
inter-RAT load
balancing. If the
InterRatMlbTrigge
rMode parameter is
set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY
and the
InterRatMlbUeSel
Strategy parameter
is set to
PRBRATIOLOW

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
MODE, UEs whose

PRB usage is less
value of the
InterRatMlbUeSel
PrbThd parameter
are selected for
PRB-usage-based
inter-RAT load
balancing. If the
InterRatMlbTrigge
rMode parameter is
set to
IRAT_UE_NUMB
ER_ONLY, UEs
whose PRB usage is
the value of the
InterRatMlbUeSel
PrbThd parameter
are selected for UE-
number-based inter-
RAT load balancing.
Thd threshold of the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
for triggering inter-
RAT MLB. MLB is
triggered if the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs in
the cell exceeds this
threshold, and MLB
is stopped if the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
falls below this
threshold. The
threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs
equals the
percentage value
multiplied by 1000.
For example,
parameter value 1
indicates that the
threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
10 (1000 x 1%),
parameter value 2
indicates threshold
20, and parameter
value 10 indicates
threshold 100. Note
that if the parameter
value is 100 or 99,
the threshold for the
number of uplink
synchronized UEs is
1 or 2, respectively.
MOD CELLMLB InitValidPeriod 10 Indicates the
standard valid
duration for load
sharing with
universal terrestrial
radio access network
(UTRAN) for UEs
in idle mode. The
actual duration
increases on the
basis of a standard
valid duration with
the increase of the
number of uplink-
synchronized UEs.

\\Modifying the configuration of the cell MLB algorithm
MOD CELLMLB: LocalCellId=0, InterFreqMlbThd=68,
InterRatMlbThd=75,InterRatMlbTriggerMode=IRAT_PRB_ONLY,InterRatMlbUeNumModeThd=150
,InterRatMlbUeSelPrbThd=2, InterRatMlbUeNumThd=15,InitValidPeriod=10;
3.1.5.3.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Load Balancing

When the serving UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state, an LDR action can be triggered
to perform load balancing.
 Solutions to UMTS load balancing
− Intra-RAT load balancing is preferentially performed over inter-RAT load
balancing.
− For intra-RAT load balancing, the inter-frequency load handover and BE service
rate reduction are preferentially performed.
− For inter-RAT load balancing, the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is preferentially
performed.
 Suggestions for LDR action configurations

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
− In the downlink, set the first, second, and third LDR actions to
InterFreqLDHO(inter-freq load handover), BERateRed(BE traff rate
reduction), and PSInterU2LLDHO, respectively. Set the remaining LDR actions
to NoAct(no action).
− In the uplink, set the first, second, and third LDR actions to BERateRed(BE traff
rate reduction), InterFreqLDHO(inter-freq load handover), and
PSInterU2LLDHO, respectively. Set the remaining LDR actions to NoAct(no
action).
− During UMTS-to-LTE load balancing, it is recommended that LOFD-070203 RIM
Based LTE Target Cell Selection be also enabled. In this case, after load is switched
from LTE cells to UMTS cells, congested LTE cells will be filtered out during
UMTS-to-LTE load-based handovers or redirections.

Type
Connected mode UMTS to LTE WRFD-150216 Load Based

PS Redirection from UMTS
to LTE
WRFD-150217 Load Based
PS Handover from UMTS to
LTE
LTE to UMTS LOFD-070203 RIM Based
LTE Target Cell Selection
Value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFirstAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter

specifies the first
action for downlink
LDR. The value
INTERFREQLDH
O indicates an inter-
frequency load
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSecondAction BERATERED This parameter
specifies the second
action for downlink
LDR. The value
BERateRed
indicates reduction
in the BE service

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
rate.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrThirdAction PSInterU2LLDHO This parameter
specifies the third
action for downlink
LDR. The value
PSInterU2LLDHO
indicates a U2L PS
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFourthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the fourth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
NoAct indicates that
no action is required.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFifthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the fifth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSixthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the sixth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSeventhAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the seventh
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEighthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the eighth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrNinthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the ninth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrTenthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the tenth

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
action for downlink

LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEleventhActio NoACT This parameter
n specifies the
eleventh action for
downlink LDR. The
value NoAct
indicates that no
action is required.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFirstAction BERATERED This parameter
specifies the first
action for uplink
LDR. The value
BERATERED
indicates that
channels are
BE service.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSecondAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
InterFreqLDHO
indicates an inter-
frequency load
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrThirdAction PSInterU2LLDHO This parameter
specifies the third
action for uplink
LDR. The value
PSInterU2LLDHO
indicates a U2L PS
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFourthAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFifthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the fifth
action for uplink
LDR. The value

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSixthAction NoACT This parameter

specifies the sixth
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSeventhAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrEighthAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrNinthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the ninth
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlPSU2LHOUeNu 1 Number of UEs for
m performing uplink
UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers.
ADD UCELLLDR DlPSU2LHOUeNu 1 Number of UEs for
m performing
downlink UMTS-to-
LTE PS handovers.
SET PROCESSSWITCH ON Whether the RNC
URRCTRLSWITC 5: obtains the load
H INTERRAT_LOAD information about
_REPORT_FROM_ LTE cells through
LTE_SWITCH the RAN
information
management (RIM)
procedure.
ADD U2LLTELoadSwitc ON Whether to filter
UCELLHOCOMM h: neighboring LTE
LOAD_BASE_U2L cells or frequencies
_LTE_LOAD_SWI based on LTE cell
TCH loads during load-
based UMTS-to-
LTE handovers or

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
redirections.

\\Adding cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters
ADD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction= INTERFREQLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=
BERATERED, DlLdrThirdAction= PSInterU2LLDHO,
DlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, DlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, DlLdrSixthAction=NoAct,
DlLdrSeventhAction=NoAct, DlLdrEighthAction=NoAct,
DlLdrNinthAction=NoAct, DlLdrTenthAction=NoAct, DlLdrEleventhAction = NoACT,
DlLdrBERateReductionRabNum=1, DlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum=1,
DlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=3, DlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=1,
DlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum=1, DlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=3,
DlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=1, UlLdrFirstAction= BERATERED, UlLdrSecondAction=
INTERFREQLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction= PSInterU2LLDHO,
UlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, UlLdrSixthAction=NoAct,
UlLdrSeventhAction=NoAct, UlLdrEighthAction=NoAct, UlLdrNinthAction= NoAct,
UlPSU2LHOUeNum= NoAct, DlPSU2LHOUeNum= NoAct,
UlLdrBERateReductionRabNum=1, UlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum=1,
UlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=3, UlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=1,
UlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum=1, UlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=3,
UlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=1, UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20,
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20, UlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000,
DlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8,
LdrCodePriUseInd=TRUE, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8,
DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8,LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd=13,CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd=FALSE,Gol
dUserLoadControlSwitch=OFF;

3.1.5.4.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Steering

 Service steering
another mode based on the QCI of the UE's service. For services with QCI 1 to QCI 9,
you can set the InterRatHoState parameter in the ServiceIrHoCfgGroup MO to force,
forbid, or allow UEs to perform service-based handovers.
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to MUST_HO for a service with a certain
QCI, the eNodeB delivers measurement configuration information about the
service-based handover when a UE initiates this service.
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to NO_HO for a service with a certain
service-based handover when a UE processing this service initiates a service that
must be handed over.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
− If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to PERMIT_HO for a service with a

certain QCI, the eNodeB does not deliver measurement configuration information
about the service-based handover when a UE initiates this service. However, if a
UE processing this service initiates a service that must be handed over, the eNodeB
delivers measurement configuration information about the service-based handover.
− Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed.
− When inter-RAT service steering is performed, it is recommended that the service-
based LTE-to-UMTS handover be enabled.
 Configuration policy for services with different QCIs
QCI values vary depending on service configurations on the CN side. Therefore, the
InterRatHoState parameter must be set for services with different QCIs based on the
configurations on the CN side and the customer's policy.
Value
HoAlgoSwitch MOD UtranServiceHoSwit Indicates the

ENODEBALGOSW ch-1 switches used to
handover
algorithms.
If
UtranServiceHoSw
itch is set to on,
service-based
handovers to
UTRAN are
enabled.
HoModeSwitch MOD UtranPsHoSwitch-1 Indicates the
ENODEBALGOSW switches
ITCH corresponding to the
inputs.
If
UtranPsHoSwitch
is set to on, UTRAN
supports PS
handovers.
HoModeSwitch MOD UtranRedirectSwitc Indicates the
inputs.
If
UtranRedirectSwit
ch is set to on,
redirection to
UTRAN is enabled.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
HoModeSwitch MOD BlindHoSwitch-0 Indicates the

inputs.
If BlindHoSwitch is
set to off, blind
handovers for CSFB
are disabled.
not allowed for a
QCI.
LdSvBasedHoUtran MOD (-12) Indicates the Ec/N0
B1ThdEcn0 INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
Ec/N0 of the target
UTRAN cell. When
the measurement
value exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent. For a
this parameter to a
large value to
prevent unnecessary
with small signal
this parameter to a
timely handovers.
LdSvBasedHoUtran MOD (-101) Indicates the RSCP
B1ThdRscp INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
requirement for
RSCP of the target
UTRAN cell.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.

MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH：HoAlgoSwitch= UtranServiceHoSwitch-1,
HoModeSwitch=UtranPsHoSwitch-1 & UtranRedirectSwitch-1 & BlindHoSwitch-0;
MOD SERVICEIRHOCFGGROUP: CnOperatorId=0, ServiceIrHoCfgGroupId=9, InterRatHoState=
PERMIT_HO;
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-20, LdSvBasedHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-12,
LdSvBasedHoUtranB1ThdRscp=-101;
3.1.5.4.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Service Steering

 Solutions to UMTS service steering
− Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed. UMTS-to-LTE service
steering is performed if it is required.
− For UMTS-to-LTE service steering, the service-based UMTS-to-LTE handover or
redirection is used to switch PS services to the LTE network, thereby improving
data service experience.
− During UMTS-to-LTE service-based handovers or redirections, it is recommended
that LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell Selection be also enabled. In this
case, after load is switched from LTE cells to UMTS cells, congested LTE cells will
be filtered out during UMTS-to-LTE service-based handovers or redirections.

Type
Connected mode UMTS to LTE WRFD-020129 Service-

Based PS Service
Redirection from UMTS to
LTE
WRFD-140218 Service-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Type
UMTS to LTE
UMTS MML Command Recommended Description
Parameter Value
LTEMeasTypOf3C MOD MeasurementQuanti This parameter

UU2LTEHONCOV ty specifies the type of
measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
When this parameter
is set to
MeasurementQuan
tity, the parameter
that of
Measurement
Quantity for Event
3C Measurement of
LTE. When this
parameter is set to
Both, the UE needs
to report
measurement results
of both the types:
Reference Signal
Received Power
(RSRP) and
Reference Signal
Receiving Quality
(RSRQ).
U2LTEFilterCoef MOD D3 This parameter
UU2LTEHONCOV specifies the layer 3
the LTE
measurement.
U2LTEMeasTime MOD 30 Length of a timer for
UU2LTEHONCOV LTE cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
measurements. The
to perform LTE cell
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
the RNC keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
LTEMeasQuanOf3C MOD RSRP This parameter
UU2LTEHONCOV specifies the
measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
coverage. This
to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what
specific
measurement results
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,
as is specified in
3GPP TS 25.331.
Hystfor3C MOD 4 This parameter
hysteresis for a UE
to report event 3C.
For detailed
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TrigTime3C MOD D0 This parameter
UU2LTEHONCOV specifies the interval
time between
detection of event
3C and sending of
the measurement
report. How to set
this parameter is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
related to slow
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRP MOD 36 RSRP threshold for
UU2LTEHONCOV event 3C for LTE
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRP
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRQ MOD 20 RSRQ threshold for
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRQ
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For
25.331.
UCELLU2LTEHO ty specifies the type of
NCOV measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
When this parameter

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
is set to
MeasurementQuan
tity, the parameter
that of
Measurement
Quantity for Event
3C Measurement of
LTE. When this
parameter is set to
Both, the UE needs
to report
measurement results
of both the types:
Reference Signal
Received Power
(RSRP) and
Reference Signal
Receiving Quality
(RSRQ).
UCELLU2LTEHO specifies the layer 3
NCOV filter coefficient for
the LTE
measurement.
UCELLU2LTEHO LTE cell
NCOV measurements. The
to perform LTE cell
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
the RNC keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
UCELLU2LTEHO specifies the
NCOV measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
coverage. This

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value

to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what
specific
measurement results
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,
as is specified in
3GPP TS 25.331.
NCOV hysteresis for a UE
to report event 3C.
For detailed
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
UCELLU2LTEHO specifies the interval
NCOV time between
detection of event
3C and sending of
the measurement
report. How to set
this parameter is
related to slow
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
UCELLU2LTEHO event 3C for LTE
NCOV cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRP
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold.
parameter, see 3GPP

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
TS 25.331.
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRQ
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For
25.331.
SHInd MOD HO_TO_GSM_SH Service handover
UTYPRABBASIC OULD_NOT_BE_P attribute.
ERFORM HO_TO_GSM_SHO
ULD_NOT_BE_PE
RFORM: Handover
to the 2G network is
performed when 3G
signals are weak but
2G signals are
strong.
UlFpMode MOD SILENT UL FP mode of this
UTYPRABBASIC type of RAB. For
details about normal
mode and silent
mode, see section
5.1.1 of 3GPP TS
25.427.
EUTRANSHIND MOD HO_TO_EUTRAN_ This parameter
UTYPRABBASIC SHOULD_BE_PER specifies whether to
FORM allow the service-
based handover of
UEs from UMTS to
LTE.
HO_TO_EUTRAN_
SHOULD_BE_PER
FORM: The
handover to the LTE
network is allowed.
HoSwitch SET HO_LTE_PS_OUT This parameter
UCORRMALGOS _SWITCH-1 specifies the switch

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
WITCH for handovers.

HO_INTER_RAT_P
S_OUT_SWITCHO
_INTER_RAT_PS_
OUT_SWITCH:
When the switch is
set to on, the RNC is
allowed to initiate
inter-frequency
measure control and
the PS inter-RAT
hard handover from
the 3G network to
the 2G network.
HoSwitch SET HO_LTE_SERVIC This parameter
UCORRMALGOS E_PSHO_OUT_SW specifies the switch
WITCH ITCH-1 for handovers.
HO_LTE_SERVICE
_PSHO_OUT_SWI
TCH: Whether to
enable service-based
PS handover from
UMTS to LTE.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
can send an LTE
MEASUREMENT
CONTROL message
based on services
and initiate a
service-based PS
handover from
UMTS to LTE.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
cannot initiate a
service-based PS
handover from
UMTS to LTE.
PcSwitch SET PC_OLPC_SWITC When
UCORRMALGOS H-1 PC_OLPC_SWITC
WITCH H is selected, the
RNC updates the UL
SIR TARGET of
radio links on the
NodeB side through
IUB DCH FP inband
signaling.
PROCESSSWITCH SET ON Whether the RNC

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
5: URRCTRLSWITC obtains the load

INTERRAT_LOAD H information about
LTE_SWITCH the RAN
information
management (RIM)
procedure.
U2LLTELoadSwitc ADD ON Whether to filter
h: UCELLHOCOMM neighboring LTE
based UMTS-to-
LTE handovers or
redirections.
\\Modifying cell-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover measurement

algorithm parameters
MOD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV: CellId=1, U2LTEFilterCoef=D3, Hystfor3C=0,
TrigTime3C=D640, LTEMeasTypOf3C= MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEMeasTime=30,
LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=4, TrigTime3C=D0, TargetRatThdRSRP=36,
TargetRatThdRSRQ=20;
\\Modifying the basic information of the typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB)
MOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=1, MaxBitRate=8000, SHInd=
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM, UlFpMode= SILENT, EUTRANSHIND=
HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM;
\\Setting the connection-oriented algorithm switches of an RNC
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1,
HoSwitch= HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1,= HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH-1;

GSM network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.1.5.5.2 II. CSFB

capabilities.
 Flash CSFB

m Network Delay

d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori
ng
UMTS
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
ng redirection-
UMTS based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be UMTS)
configure

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
d for
eRAN3.0
.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
ng than PS
UMTS redirection-
cells based CSFB.
must be (LTE to
configure UMTS)
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
ng 3.5s.
UMTS
cells
must be
configure

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.

improving the CSFB
handover.
is recommended.
handovers.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay

configure
d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori
ng GSM
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
ng GSM based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be GSM)
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng GSM
external
cells.
 Neighbori CSFB
ng GSM reduces the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
cells delay from

must be 6s to 5s.
configure
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d for
GSM
external
cells.

GSM CSFB. CSFB.
recommended.


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
following reasons:
suspended.

Method?


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method?
iPhone5.
iPhone5.


Guarantee for LTE
Emergency Calls
to UTRAN
Fallback to UTRAN
CSFB
with LAI to UTRAN
CSFB
to GERAN
Fallback to GERAN
CSFB to GERAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value

handover
algorithms.
UtranCsfbSwitch: If
on, CSFB to
UTRAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to UTRAN.
On switches used to
enable or disable
handover
algorithms.
GeranCsfbSwitch: If
on, CSFB to
GERAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to GERAN.
switches
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
BlindHoSwitch: If
for CSFB are
disabled.
CS fallback to
UTRAN. When CS
fallback to UTRAN
is applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
event B1. This

parameter indicates
the RSCP
requirement for the
UTRAN cells to be
included in the
measurement report.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one UTRAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
are met.
fallback to UTRAN.
When CS fallback to
UTRAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. When
detecting that the
least one UTRAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
handovers, and the

number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.
threshold for event
fallback to GERAN.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one GERAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
see 3GPP TS
36.331.
fallback to GERAN.
When CS fallback to
GERAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. When
detecting that the
least one GERAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.


features


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

UTRAN
WRFD-150215 SRVCC
Handover
GERAN
GBFD-511309 SRVCC


3.1.5.6.1 Scenario Description
CSFB UEs can return from the UMTS network to the LTE network fast after voice services
are released. Figure 3-10 shows the scheme of UMTS-to-LTE fast return.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.19 Scheme of UMTS-to-LTE fast return
3.1.5.6.2 Solutions to UMTS-to-LTE Fast Return

After voice services are released, the RNC forcibly redirects or hands over CSFB UEs and
SRVCC UEs to the LTE network.
 General policy
− The UMTS-to-LTE fast return is performed for CSFB or SRVCC UEs that can be
recognized by the RNC.
− The UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection or service-based handover/redirection is
performed for UEs that cannot use fast return (that is, CSFB UEs or SRVCC UEs
that cannot be recognized by the RNC).
 Requirements of UMTS-to-LTE fast return on the target cell
CELLSEL.
 Method used by the RNC to recognize CSFB UEs
The RNC considers a UE as a CSFB UE if any of following conditions is met:
− The RELOCATION REQUET message contains the cause value "CS Fallback
triggered."
− The RELOCATION REQUEST message contains the CSFB Information IE whose
value is CSFB or CSFB High Priority, which has been supported.
− The following conditions are met:
가 The RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message contains V860 but does not
contain the Pre-redirection info IE, which has been supported.
나 The value of Support of E-UTRA FDD is DoesSupportEUTRAFDD or the
value of Support of E-UTRA TDD is DoesSupportEUTRATDD in UE radio

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
access capability->UE multi-mode/multi-RAT capability in the RRC

CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message.
다 Upon receipt of the RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message, the
RNC starts the 10s timer. Before the timer expires, the CS service is
successfully set up. The scenario in which the active and standby RNC boards
are switched over is not considered.
− The RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message contains the CSFB Indication IE,
which requires support from UEs.
− After voice services are released, the IU RELEASE COMMAND message from the
CS domain contains the End Of CSFB IE, which requires support from the MSC.
 Method used by the RNC to recognize SRVCC UEs
The RNC considers a UE as an SRVCC UE if the following conditions are met:
− A UE is from an LTE cell, indicated by the "UE History Information" IE. A UE
sends a Relocation Request message when it is handed over from the LTE network
to the UMTS network and the value of the "UE History Information" IE in the
message is "Last Visited E-UTRAN Cell Information." The "UE History
Information" IE is contained in "Source To Target Transparent Container (source
RNC to Target RNC Transparent Container)" in the Relocation Request message.
− The UE has a CS service.
− The UE is not handed over to the UMTS network. The value of the "cause" IE in
the Relocation Request message is not "CS Fallback triggered (268)", and the
message does not carry the "CSFB Information" IE. UEs enabled with Ultra-Flash
CSFB are processed in the same way.
The following table lists the features recommended for a UL dual-mode network.

Interoperation Type
RRC_REL_UE CS/CS+PS U->L WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to

LTE (UMTS)
RRC_REL_UE CS/CS+PS U->L WRFD-171223 Fast Return to LTE for
SRVCC User
 Parameter settings
MML Command Parameter Name Default Value Description
MOD FastReturnToLTES HO_UMTS_TO_LT Whether the

UCELLHOCOM witch E_FAST_RETURN information about
_SWITCH-0 frequencies of
neighboring LTE
cells is carried in the
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
the RNC sends to a

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
CSFB UE in a
UMTS cell for RRC
connection release.
When this switch is
turned on, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
When this switch is
turned off, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
cells is not carried in
the RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
MOD FastReturnToLTES PERFENH_PS_FAS Whether the RNC
UCELLHOCOM witch T_RETURN_LTE_ releases the RRC
SWITCH-0 connection if a
CSFB UE keeps a
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
switch is turned on,
the RNC releases the
RRC connection by
sending to a UE an
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
that carries the
information about
UE-supported LTE
frequencies if the
UE keeps the PS
connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
switch is turned off,
the RNC does not
release the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps the
PS connection after
terminating the CS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
service.
SET HoSwitch HO_UMTS_TO_LT Whether the
UCORRMALGOS E_FAST_RETURN information about
WITCH _SWITCH-0 frequencies of
neighboring LTE
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
the RNC sends to a
CSFB UE in a
UMTS cell for RRC
connection release.
When this switch is
turned on, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
When this switch is
turned off, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
the RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
SET PerfEnhanceSwitch3 PERFENH_PS_FAS Whether the RNC
UCORRMPARA T_RETURN_LTE_ releases the RRC
SWITCH-0 connection if a
CSFB UE keeps a
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
RRC connection by
sending to a UE an
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
that carries the
information about
UE-supported LTE
frequencies if the
UE keeps the PS

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
the RNC does not
release the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps the
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service.
SET OptimizationSwitch U2L_CSFB_FAST_ Whether the RNC
URRCTRLSWITC 6 RETURN_PROC_O triggers a blind fast
H PTI_SWITCH-0 return from UMTS
to LTE for a CSFB
UE immediately
after receiving an Iu
Release Command
message from the
CS domain of the
CN. 1: Indicates that
this switch is set to
ON. The RNC
triggers a blind fast
return from UMTS
to LTE for a CSFB
UE immediately
Release Command
message from the
CS domain of the
CN. When this
the NodeB reports
more RADIO LINK
FAILURE
INDICATION
messages and the
value returned by
VS.IUB.RLFailInd.S
yncFail increases. In
this situation, it is
recommended that
DSCR_RLREL_A
FTER_RRC_REL_
COMPLETE under
the
OptimizationSwitc
h9 parameter in the
SET
URRCTRLSWITC
H command be also

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
set to 1.
0: Indicates that this
switch is set to OFF.
The RNC does not
trigger a fast return
from UMTS to LTE
until the CS RAB is
released.
MOD FastReturnToLTES HO_CSFB_BASED Whether the RNC
UCELLHOCOMM witch _MEAS_FAST_RE triggers the
TURN_SWITCH-0 measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return for CSFB UEs
after their voice
services are released
on the UMTS
network. When this
switch is turned on
and the UE supports
LTE measurement,
the UE triggers an
LTE measurement
after its voice
service is complete.
After the RNC
receives the
measurement report,
the RNC decides
whether to trigger a
U2L fast return
based on the
measurement result.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
can perform only a
blind fast return for
the UE.
SET HoSwitch1 HO_CSFB_BASED Whether the RNC
UCORRMALGOS _MEAS_FAST_RE triggers the
WITCH TURN_SWITCH-0 measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return for CSFB UEs
after their voice
on the UMTS
network. When this
switch is turned on
and the UE supports
LTE measurement,
the UE triggers an
LTE measurement

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
after its voice

After the RNC
receives the
measurement report,
the RNC decides
U2L fast return
based on the
measurement result.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
can perform only a
the UE.
SET PerfEnhanceSwitch7 PERFENH_CS_ON Whether an SRVCC
UCORRMPARA LY_MEAS_FAST_ or CSFB UE whose
RETURN_SWITCH single CS service
-0 has been released
can trigger a
measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return with only
signaling
connections. When
on, if an SRVCC or
CSFB UE whose
single CS service
has been released
does not have PS
service, the RNC can
trigger an LTE
measurement to
enable the UE to
perform a U2L fast
return.
ADD FastReturnToLTES HO_CSFB_BASED Whether the RNC
UCELLHOCOMM witch _RSCP_FAST_RET triggers the UMTS-
URN_SWITCH-0 to-LTE fast return
for CSFB UEs based
on the RSCP of the
best cell after their
voice services are
released on the
UMTS network.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
sends a periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message to the UE,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
instructing the UE to
measure the RSCP
of the best cell. If
the RSCP of the best
cell reported by the
UE is greater than
the value of
U2LNCovRscpThd,
the RNC will trigger
a blind fast return.
Otherwise, the RNC
will not trigger the
blind fast return.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
does not send the
UE the periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message instructing
the UE to measure
cell.
SET HoSwitch1 HO_CSFB_BASED Whether the RNC
UCORRMALGOS _RSCP_FAST_RET triggers the UMTS-
WITCH URN_SWITCH-0 to-LTE fast return
for CSFB UEs based
on the RSCP of the
voice services are
released on the
UMTS network.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
sends a periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message to the UE,
measure the RSCP
UE is greater than
the value of
U2LNCovRscpThd,
Otherwise, the RNC
blind fast return.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
does not send the

UE the periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message instructing
the UE to measure
cell.

//Activating the UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return functions
//Enabling the cell-level UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return
functions
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1,FastReturnToLTESwitch=
HO_UMTS_TO_LTE_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-
1&PERFENH_PS_FAST_RETURN_LTE_SWITCH-1;
//Enabling the RNC-level UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return
functions
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
HoSwitch=HO_UMTS_TO_LTE_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-1; SET
UCORRMPARA:PerfEnhanceSwitch3=PERFENH_PS_FAST_RETURN_LTE_SWITCH-1;
//Turning on the switch for optimized fast return of CSFB UEs to LTE
SET
URRCTRLSWITCH:OptimizationSwitch6=U2L_CSFB_FAST_RETURN_PROC_OPTI_S
WITCH-1;
//Activating the LTE measurement-based fast return function
//Performing the following configurations while enabling the UMTS-to-LTE fast return
function
//Turning on the cell-level switch for LTE measurement-based fast return
MOD UCELLHOCOMM:CellId=1,FastReturnToLTESwitch=
HO_CSFB_BASED_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-1;
//Turning on the RNC-level switch for LTE measurement-based fast return
SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH:HoSwitch1=HO_CSFB_BASED_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_SWI
TCH-1;
//Turning on the switch for measurement-based fast return to LTE after a single CS service is
released
SET
UCORRMPARA:PerfEnhanceSwitch7=PERFENH_CS_ONLY_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_S
WITCH-1;
//Turning on the cell-level switch for fast return based on serving cell RSCP measurement

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, FastReturnToLTESwitch=

HO_CSFB_BASED_RSCP_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-1;
//Turning on the RNC-level switch for fast return based on serving cell RSCP measurement
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch1=
3.1.5.7 Enhanced Solutions to Interoperability in High-Speed Railway

Scenarios
3.1.5.7.1 Scenario Description
If the operator uses public LTE network frequencies and dedicated UMTS network
frequencies in the coverage for the high-speed railway, single-frequency networking is
applied for high- and low-speed cells on the LTE public network and both high- and low-
speed UEs exist in high-speed cells. When users trigger LTE-to-UMTS handovers, high-speed
UEs are expected to preferentially fall back to the UMTS dedicated network, and low-speed
UEs are expected to preferentially fall back to the UMTS public network. This ensures the
handover success rate of high-speed users as well as the exclusive usage of the dedicated
network.
3.1.5.7.2 Enhanced Solutions to Interoperability in High-Speed Railway Scenarios

 For LTE-to-UMTS CSFB UEs, high- and low-speed UEs are identified for differentiated
processing.
 High-speed UEs: Only frequencies of the UMTS dedicated network are delivered to
these UEs so that these UEs are handed over to the UMTS dedicated network. Blind
handovers can be separately enabled for such UEs to reduce the CSFB delay.
 Low-speed UEs: Common policies are used.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 For coverage-based LTE-to-UMTS handover UEs (SRVCC handover/PS handover/PS

redirection), high- and low-speed UEs are identified for differentiated processing.
 High-speed UEs: Only frequencies of the UMTS dedicated network are delivered to
these UEs so that these UEs are handed over to the UMTS dedicated network. The event
B1/B2 hysteresis is adjusted to accelerate measurement so that handovers can be
triggered more promptly.
 Low-speed UEs: Common policies are used.
1. Parameter settings

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
SET HighSpeedInterRat HighSpeedCsfbDirS This parameter

CELLALGOSWITC HoSwitch witch-0& indicates the
H HighSpeedSrvccDir switches used to
Switch-0& optimize inter-RAT
HighSpeedPsDirSwi handover algorithms
tch-0 for high-speed UEs
in high-speed
scenarios.
HighSpeedCsfbDir
Switch: Indicates
whether to enable
directional CSFB for
high-speed UEs.
When this function
is enabled, an
eNodeB delivers
only information
about inter-RAT
frequencies
identified as high-
speed or ultra-high-
speed frequencies
for measurements or
blind redirections.
This function is
enabled only if this
option is selected.
HighSpeedSrvccDi
rSwitch: Indicates
whether to enable
directional SRVCC
for high-speed UEs.
When this function
is enabled, an
eNodeB delivers
only information
about inter-RAT
frequencies
identified as high-
speed frequencies
for measurements
and uses a dedicated
time-to-trigger in
inter-RAT
measurements. This
function is enabled
only if this option is
selected.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
HighSpeedPsDirSw
itch: Indicates
whether to enable
directional PS
handover for high-
speed UEs. When
this function is
enabled, an eNodeB
delivers only
information about
inter-RAT
frequencies
identified as high-
speed frequencies
for measurements
and uses a dedicated
time-to-trigger in
inter-RAT
measurements. This
function is enabled
only if this option is
selected.
ADD UtranFreqHighSpee LOW_SPEED Indicates the speed
UTRANNFREQ dFlag attribute of a
neighboring
UTRAN frequency.
This parameter can
be set to
LOW_SPEED,
HIGH_SPEED, or
ULTRA_HIGH_SP
EED.
ADD HSInterRatHoUtran 64ms Indicates the time-
INTERRATHOUTR B1TimeTrig to-trigger for event
ANGROUP B1 or B2 related to
handovers to
UTRAN for high-
speed UEs in high-
speed cells. When
detecting that the
least one
neighboring cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
when the signal

meets the entering
time-to-trigger.

//Activating the enhanced inter-RAT handover function
MOD CELLALGOSWITCH: LocalCellId=0,
HighSpeedInterRatHoSwitch=HighSpeedCsfbDirSwitch-1& HighSpeedSrvccDirSwitch-1&
HighSpeedPsDirSwitch-1;
//Configuring blind handovers for high-speed CSFB UEs
MOD CELLHOPARACFG: LocalCellId=0, HoModeSwitch=HighSpeedCsfbBlindSwitch-1;
//Configuring UMTS dedicated frequencies as inter-RAT high-speed frequencies
MOD UTRANNFEQ: LocalCellId=0, UtranDlArfcn=9700,
UtranFreqHighSpeedFlag=HIGH_SPEED;
//Configuring the time-to-trigger for inter-RAT handovers of high-speed UEs
HSInterRatHoUtranB1TimeTrig=64;
3.1.6 GUL Interoperability Networking Solution

With the continuous maturity of UMTS networks and the popularization of LTE networks, the
structure of wireless networks becomes more and more complicated, with most networks
serving multiple modes and multiple frequency bands. In addition, the penetration rate of UEs
that support multiple modes or multiple frequency bands keeps rising, gradually replacing
single-mode UEs. Regarding such complicated networking, it is imperative to promote the
efficiency of the later-generation mode in a multimode network and improve user experience
by enabling users to camp on appropriate networks.
The following figure shows camping of UEs in idle mode.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.20 Camping of UEs in idle mode
By considering different modes in a network, and the coverage continuity and the load state of
each frequency band, the solutions to camping of UEs in idle mode enable UEs to select a cell
with good signal quality for camping and processing services. Different goals must be reached
 In GU networking, it is recommended that GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on
the UMTS network to initiate services, thereby improving user experience.
 After the deployment of LTE networks, it is recommended that multimode UEs
supporting the LTE mode preferentially camp on the LTE network to improve LTE
network efficiency so that UEs can enjoy high throughput and diversified online services
provided by the LTE network.
The following figure shows the solutions to inter-RAT and inter- frequency camping of UEs
in idle mode.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.21 Solutions to inter-RAT and inter- frequency camping of UEs in idle mode SHAPE

 General policy
− Camping priority
1. The camping priority in descending order is LTE > UMTS > GSM. The priorities of
frequency bands within UMTS and GSM are the same as the existing frequency priority
policies.
2. Priority for LTE frequencies: UEs preferentially camp on high frequency bands, for
example, the priority of LTE 2600 MHz is higher than LTE 900 MHz.
− Cell reselection
3. Cell reselection among LTE, UMTS, and GSM is supported.
4. LTE-to-GSM/UMTS cell reselection is supported at the edge of an LTE cell.
5. After UEs move to the LTE coverage area, GSM/UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection is
supported.
Table 21.1 Feature recommended for cell reselection of UEs in idle mode in a GUL triple-mode
network
Idle LTE to UMTS/GSM LBFD-00201803 Cell

 Parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS cell
reselection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 21.2 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS cell reselection

Value
QRxLevMin MOD CELLRESEL -64 Indicates the

minimum required
RX level for the cell
to become a
candidate for cell
selection. This value
is included in criteria
S and used in the
evaluation of cell
selection. For
36.304.
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells.
measurement
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells. If
priority of a
frequency or RAT is
higher than that of
the serving
frequency, the UE
always starts inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements.
priority of a
frequency is lower
of the serving
frequency or if the
cell reselection
lower than that of
the serving
frequency, the UE
starts inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements
only when the value
of Cell selection RX

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
level value (dB) is

lower than or equal
parameter.
evaluation of
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT
frequency. Cell
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT frequency
is performed if no
cell on the serving
frequency or on a
higher priority E-
UTRAN frequency
inter-frequency and
inter-RAT
reselections. For
36.304.
of the serving
frequency. 0
priority. The value
of this parameter
must be determined
together with the
priorities of other
frequencies during
the network
planning.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities.
gInd UTRANNFREQ set the reselection
priority of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
neighboring E-
UTRAN frequency.
of the neighboring
UTRAN frequency.
The value 0
priority. The UE
decides whether to
reselect a
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency based on
the value of this
parameter and the
absolute priority of
the serving cell.
parameter is larger
than the absolute
priority of the
starts measurements
on the UTRAN
frequency; then if
some neighboring
cells meets the
related conditions,
the UE starts cell
reselection.
than the absolute
priority of the
starts the
measurements only
when the signal
quality of the
then if the signal
quality of some
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
different RATs must

cell reselection
priorities. For
36.331.
ThreshXLow 6 Indicates the
minimum RX level
required for a
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency to become
a candidate for
reselection if the
priority of the
frequency is lower
than that of the
serving frequency.
After measurements
are started for
the UTRAN
frequency, the UE
reselects to a
neighboring cell on
the frequency only if
the RX level of the
than a specified
threshold and that of
the cell is higher
than the value
specified by this
to-trigger. For
36.331.
QRxLevMin -58 Indicates the RX
neighboring cell on
the UTRAN
frequency to become
a candidate for
selection. It is
and used in the
evaluation for cell
evaluation for cell
reselection, the UE
performs the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
following
Measured RSRP
value of a
neighboring cell on
the frequency -
Value of this
parameter -
Compensated power.
If Srxlev for a
neighboring cell is
better than a
to-trigger,
reselection to the
25.304.
PmaxUtran 24 dBm Indicates the
maximum power
that the UE can
apply to
transmission on the
UTRAN frequency.
It is used in criteria
S to calculate the
compensated power.
For details, see
3GPP TS 25.104.
TReselUtran ADD 1 Indicates the
CELLRESELUTRA evaluation period for
N a UE to determine
neighboring
UTRAN cell to
camp on. During the
the signal quality
value of a serving
UTRAN cell is less
than the value of the
Serving frequency
lower priority
threshold parameter
in the CellResel MO
for the serving cell,
the signal quality
value of a
neighboring
UTRAN cell is
greater than the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
value of the
UTRAN lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
UtranNFreq MO for
the serving cell, and
the UE camps on the
serving cell for more
than 1s, the UE
attempts to reselect
the new cell to camp
on.
A smaller value of
this parameter leads
to a higher
probability of
initiating cell
reselections but a
ping-pong
reselections. A
parameter leads to

\\Modifying parameters related to cell reselection
MOD CELLRESEL: LocalCellId=0, Qhyst=DB2_Q_HYST, SpeedDepReselCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
SNonIntraSearchCfgInd=CFG, SNonIntraSearch=9, ThrshServLow=7, CellReselPriority=6,
QRxLevMin=-64, PMaxCfgInd=CFG, PMax=-27, SIntraSearchCfgInd=NOT_CFG,
MeasBandWidthCfgInd=NOT_CFG, TReselEutran=5, SpeedStateSfCfgInd=NOT_CFG;
\\Adding a neighboring UTRAN frequency
ADD UTRANNFREQ: LocalCellId=0, UtranDlArfcn=10800, UtranFddTddType=UTRAN_FDD,
UtranUlArfcnCfgInd=NOT_CFG, CellReselPriorityCfgInd=CFG, ThreshXLow=6, QRxLevMin=-
58, PmaxUtran=24;
\\Adding the configuration related to cell reselection to UTRAN
ADD CELLRESELUTRAN: LocalCellId=0, TReselUtran=1, SpeedStateSfCfgInd=CFG,
TReselUtranSfMedium=T_RESEL_SF_0DOT75, TReselUtranSfHigh=T_RESEL_SF_0DOT25;
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM cell
reselection.
Table 21.3 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM cell reselection

Value
QRxLevMin MOD CELLRESEL 64 Indicates the

minimum required

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RX level used in
intra-frequency E-
UTRAN cell
reselection, which
corresponds to the
IE q-RxLevMin in
SIB3. This value is
and used in the
evaluation of cell
reselection. For
36.304.
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells.
measurement
for reselection to
inter-frequency or
inter-RAT cells. If
priority of a
frequency or RAT is
higher than that of
the serving
frequency, the UE
always starts inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements.
priority of a
frequency is lower
of the serving
frequency or if the
cell reselection
lower than that of
the serving
frequency, the UE
starts inter-
frequency or inter-
RAT measurements
only when the value
of Cell selection RX

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
level value (dB) is

lower than or equal
parameter.
evaluation of
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT
frequency. Cell
on a lower priority
E-UTRAN
frequency or on an
inter-RAT frequency
is performed if no
cell on the serving
frequency or on a
higher priority E-
UTRAN frequency
inter-frequency and
inter-RAT
reselections. For
36.304.
of the serving
frequency. 0
priority. The value
of this parameter
must be determined
together with the
priorities of other
frequencies during
the network
planning.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities.
gInd GERANNFREQGR set the reselection
priority of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
OUP frequencies in the

GERAN carrier
frequency group. If
the value of this
parameter is not
configured, the UE
does not reselect to
the frequencies in
the GERAN carrier
frequency group.
of the GERAN
carrier frequency
group. The value 0
priority. It is
contained in system
information block
type 7 (SIB7). The
UE decides whether
to reselect a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group
based on the value
of the serving cell. If
the value of this
parameter is larger
than the absolute
priority of the
starts measurements
on the frequencies in
the GERAN carrier
frequency group;
then if the signal
quality of some
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection. If the
value of this
than the absolute

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
priority of the
starts the
measurements only
when the signal
quality of the
then if the signal
quality of some
neighboring cells
meets the related
conditions, the UE
starts cell
reselection.
different RATs must
cell reselection
priorities. For
36.331.
ThreshXLow 8 Indicates the RX
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group to
become a candidate
for reselection if the
priority of the
frequency is lower
than that of the
serving frequency.
After measurements
are started for
a frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group, the
UE reselects to a cell
on the frequency
only if the RX level
lower than a
specified threshold
and that of the cell is
better than the value
specified by this
to-trigger. For

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
36.104.
QRxLevMin 2 Indicates the
minimum RX level
required for a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group to
become a candidate
for selection. It is
and used in the
evaluation for cell
evaluation for cell
reselection, the UE
performs the
following
Measured RSSI
value of a
frequency in the
GERAN carrier
frequency group -
Value of this
parameter -
Compensated power.
If Srxlev for a
neighboring cell is
better than a
to-trigger,
reselection to the
36.104.
TReselGeran ADD 1 Indicates the
CELLRESELGERA evaluation period for
N a UE to determine
neighboring
GERAN cell to
camp on. During the
the signal quality
value of a serving
GERAN cell is less
than the value of the
Serving frequency
lower priority

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
threshold parameter
in the CellResel MO
for the serving cell,
the signal quality
value of a
neighboring
GERAN cell is
greater than the
value of the Inter
frequency lower
priority threshold
parameter in the
EutranInterNFreq
MO for the serving
cell, and a UE camps
on the serving cell
for more than 1s, the
UE attempts to
reselect the new cell
to camp on.
A smaller value of
this parameter leads
to a higher
probability of
initiating cell
reselections but a
ping-pong
reselections. A
parameter leads to

\\Modifying parameters related to cell reselection
MOD CELLRESEL:QRxLevMin=64, SNonIntraSearchCfgInd=CFG, SNonIntraSearch=9,
ThrshServLow=7, CellReselPriority=6;
\\Adding a neighboring GERAN frequency group
ADD GERANNFREQGROUP: CellReselPriorityCfgInd=CFG, CellReselPriority=1,
ThreshXLow=8, QRxLevMin=2;
\\Adding the configuration related to cell reselection to GERAN
ADD CELLRESELGERAN: TReselGeran=1;
3.1.6.1.3 III. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a UMTS Network

 General policy
− UL dual-mode or GUL multimode UEs preferentially camp on LTE cells. For
detailed camping and cell reselection policies, see description in the preceding part
of the document.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 GU dual-mode UEs preferentially camp on UMTS cells and the UEs support cell
reselection between UMTS and GSM.
1. UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection is supported at the edge of a UMTS cell.
2. After UEs move to the UMTS coverage area, GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection is
supported.
network
Idle UMTS to GSM/LTE WRFD-020126 Mobility

Phase 1
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE cell
reselection.
Table 21.5 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection

Value
ThdPrioritySearch1 MOD 4 CPICH RSCP

determining whether
a UE performs
measurements of
low-priority
frequencies and how
often a UE performs
measurements of
high-priority
frequencies. CPICH
stands for Common
Pilot Channel and
RSCP stands for
power. A UE
performs
measurements of
low-priority and
high-priority
frequencies under
either of the
following
conditions:
Sprioritysearch1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
Sprioritysearch2
where,
SrxlevServingCell
equals RSCP
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum access
level.
Sprioritysearch1
equals the value of
this parameter.
ThdPrioritySearch2 MOD 4 CPICH Ec/N0
determining whether
a UE performs
measurements of
low-priority
frequencies and how
often a UE performs
measurements of
high-priority
frequencies. A UE
performs
measurements of
low-priority and
high-priority
frequencies under
either of the
following
conditions:
Sprioritysearch1
Sprioritysearch2
where,
SrxlevServingCell
equals RSCP
measured in the
serving cell minus
the minimum access
level.
Sprioritysearch1
equals the value of
ThdPrioritySearch1.
RSRQSwitch MOD False Whether SIB19
UCELLNFREQPRI contains the RSRQ-
OINFO related

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
ThdToHighRSRQ,
ThdToLowRSRQ,
EQqualmin and
ThdServingLow2(S
eeADD
UCELLSELRESE
L)parameters. When
to True, SIB19
contains these
parameters. When
to False, SIB19 does
not contain these
parameters. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
ThdToHigh MOD 10 This parameter
performs cell
on the target
frequency when the
absolute priority
level of the target
than that of the
serving cell.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection.
Within the interval
defined by
RSRP of the cell on
the target frequency
is greater than the
value of this
parameter, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
ThdToLow MOD 10 This parameter
performs cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

on the target
frequency when the
absolute priority
level of the target
frequency is smaller
than that of the
serving cell.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection.
Within the interval
defined by
RSRP of the serving
cell is smaller than
the parameter of
RSRP threshold of
low-prio-freq
reselection, whereas
the RSRP of the cell
on the target
than the value of this
parameter, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
ThdServingLow MOD 1 CPICH RSCP value
UCELLSELRESEL of the serving cell
below which the UE
initiates cell
on the frequency
with lower priority
level.
The UE measures
cells on the target
frequency for cell
reselection. Within
the interval defined
by Treselections, if
the CPICH RSCP of
the serving cell is
smaller than the
value of this
parameter whereas
the CPICH RSCP of
the cell on the low-
priority frequency is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
high, the UE
performs cell
reselection.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
ThdToHighRSRQ MOD 3 RSRQ threshold of
OINFO relative to
EQqualmin when
of the target
UARFCN is higher
than that of the
using the target
UARFCN is to be
implemented. After
measurement starts,
of the target cell
keeps higher than
this threshold during
delay time, the UE
will reselect the
target cell. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
ThdToLowRSRQ MOD 3 RSRQ threshold of
OINFO relative to
EQqualmin when
of the target
UARFCN is lower
than that of the
using the target
UARFCN is to be
implemented. After
measurement starts,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
of the serving cell

keeps lower than the
Ec/N0 threshold for
cell reselection
towards a lower-
priority cell and the
signal quality of the
target cell keeps
higher than this
threshold during the
cell reselection delay
time, the UE will
reselect the target
cell. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.304.
ThdServingLow2 MOD 2 CPICH Ec/N0
UCELLSELRESEL threshold of the
serving cell for cell
reselection towards
the target cell using
a lower-priority
frequency. After the
cell reselection
measurement starts,
if the Ec/N0 of the
serving cell keeps
lower than this
parameter value and
the Ec/N0 of the
target cell using a
lower-priority
frequency keeps
high during the cell
reselection delay
time, the UE will
reselect the target
cell. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.304.
Treselections MOD 1 Indicates the
UCELLSELRESEL reselection delay. If
the signal quality
(CPICH Ec/N0
measured by the UE)
in a neighboring cell
is continuously
better than that in
the serving cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
during the time

specified through
this parameter, the
UE performs
reselection to the
neighboring cell.
This parameter is
used to prevent ping-
pong reselections.
scaling factor.
Multiply this
parameter by its
increase the inter-
RAT reselection
is not configured
when its value is
255. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.304.

MOD UCELLSELRESEL:
CellId=1, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleQhyst1s=2, ConnQhyst1s=2, IdleQhyst2s=2,
ConnQhyst2s=2, Treselections=1, Qqualmin=-18, Qrxlevmin=-58,
MaxAllowedUlTxPower=21, IdleSintrasearch=3, IdleSintersearch=5,
ConnSintrasearch=3, ConnSintersearch=5, SsearchRat=2,
SpeedDependentScalingFactor=2, InterFreqTreselScalingFactor=10,
InterRatTreselScalingFactor=10, Tcrmaxnonhcs=NotUsed, NonhcsInd=CONFIGURED,
Ncrnonhcs=8, Tcrmaxhystnonhcs=NotUsed, Qhyst1spch=5, Qhyst1sfach=5, Qhyst2spch=5,
Qhyst2sfach=5, Treselectionspch=3, Treselectionsfach=3, SPriority=4,
ThdPrioritySearch1=2, ThdPrioritySearch2=2, ThdServingLow=1;
\\Modifying the priority information of neighboring frequencies of the serving
cell
ADD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO: CellId=1, EARFCN=1000, NPriority=5, ThdToHigh=2,
ThdToLow=2, EMeasBW=D6, EQrxlevmin=-70, EDetectInd=TRUE, BlacklstCellNumber=D0;
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM cell
reselection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 21.6 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM cell reselection

Value
QualMeas MOD CPICH_ECNO Measurement

UCELLSELRESEL quantity of cell
selection and
reselection. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
Treselections MOD 1 Cell reselection
UCELLSELRESEL delay time. If the
signal quality of a
neighboring cell is
better than that of
the serving cell
time of this
parameter, the UE
reselects the
neighboring cell.
This parameter is
used to avoid ping-
pong reselection
between different
cells. Value 0
corresponds to the
default value 1s
defined in the
protocol.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
Qqualmin MOD (-18) The minimum
threshold
corresponding to
CPICH Ec/N0.
When the measured
CPICH Ec/N0 is
of this parameter,
criteria of quality
level for cell
The RNC decides
whether the UE can
camp on the cell
criteria. For details

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

see 3GPP TS
25.304.
Qrxlevmin MOD (-58) The minimum
threshold
corresponding to
CPICH RSCP.
When the measured
CPICH RSCP is
of this parameter,
criteria of RX level
for cell
The RNC decides
whether the UE can
camp on the cell
criteria. The setting
of Qrxlevmin should
be related to
Qqualmin. For
details about this
parameter, see
section 10.3.2.3 in
3GPP TS 25.331.
MaxAllowedUlTxP MOD 24 The maximum
ower UCELLSELRESEL allowed uplink
transmit power of a
UE in the cell, which
is related to the
network planning.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
SsearchRat MOD 2 Threshold for inter-
UCELLSELRESEL RAT cell
measurements in
SIB3 and SIB4.
When the quality
(CPICH Ec/N0
measured by the UE)
lower than this
threshold plus the
value of Qqualmin
for the cell, inter-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RAT cell
measurements are
started. When this
parameter is set to
127, inter-RAT cell
measurements are
performed. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.304.
scaling factor.
Multiply this
parameter by its
increase the inter-
RAT reselection
is not configured
when its value is
255. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.304.
Treselectionspch MOD 255 Reselection delay of
CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH state.
used when its value
is 255. For details
see 3GPP TS 25.304
Treselectionsfach MOD 255 Reselection delay of
CELL_FACH state.
used when its value
is 255. For details
see 3GPP TS 25.304

MOD UCELLSELRESEL: QualMeas= CPICH_ECNO, Treselections=1, Qqualmin=-18,
Qrxlevmin=-58, MaxAllowedUlTxPower=24, SsearchRat=2,
InterRatTreselScalingFactor=255, Treselectionspch=255, Treselectionsfach=255;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.1.6.1.4 IV. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network

 General policy
− GL or GUL multimode UEs preferentially camp on LTE cells. For detailed camping
and cell reselection policies, see description in the preceding part of the document.
− For the camping and cell reselection policies of GU dual-mode UEs, see description
in the preceding part of the document.
network
Idle GSM to UMTS/LTE GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
GBFD-511301 Cell
and LTE
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS cell
reselection.
Table 21.8 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection

Value

allowed. If this
parameter is set to
YES, the reselection
from 2G cells to 3G
cells is allowed.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

[0, 7] or above [8,
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm
6: -74 dBm
the MS keeps
searching for 3G
cells
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
MS does not search

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
for 3G cells.
specifies the
threshold of the
reselection in
connection mode
before Qsearch C is
obtained.
QP 7 In packet transfer
mode, if the signal
MS starts to search
for 3G cells. For
example, if this
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
This parameter is
valid only if the
BSC sends GPRS
cell reselection
parameters to an MS
using a Packet Cell
Change Order or
Packet Measurement
Order message.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)

SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: QI=7, QCI=Use_Qsearch_I, QP=7;
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE cell reselection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE cell
reselection.
Table 21.9 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE cell reselection

Value
GERANPRI SET 1 Common priority of

GCELLPRIEUTRA GERAN. Value 0
NSYS indicates the lowest
(All GERAN priority, and value 7
carriers) indicates the highest
priority.
EUTRANPRI 6 Common priority of
EUTRAN. Value 0
priority, and value 7
priority.
THREUTRANHIG 10 [2 dB] If the measured
H (-108 dBm) RSRP value of one
or more neighboring
EUTRAN cells is
higher than the value
of this parameter,
the MS is allowed to
reselect a
neighboring cell in
EUTRAN whose
priority is higher

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
than the GERAN

priority.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 2 dB
2: 4 dB
3: 6 dB
...
30: 60 dB
31: 62 dB
EUTRANQRXLEV 6 Used to calculate the
MIN RSRP threshold for
the target cell when
a priority-based
decision to perform
GSM to EUTRAN
cell reselection is
made.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -140 dBm
1: -138 dBm
2: -136 dBm
...
30: -80 dBm
31: -78 dBm
SPTRESEL ADD GLTENCELL SUPPORT Whether to support
(All GERAN cell reselection from
carriers) GSM to LTE. If this
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, it
indicates that the
frequency of the
neighboring
frequency of the
source GSM cell and
cell reselection from
GSM to LTE is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
supported. If this
parameter is set to
UNSUPPORT, it
indicates that the
frequency of the
neighboring
frequency of the
source GSM cell but
the LTE cell is a
barred neighboring
cell of the GSM cell.
That is, cell
source GSM cell to
not supported.

\\Setting the cell priority and the parameters about EUTRAN system information
SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: GERANPRI=1, EUTRANPRI=6, THREUTRANHIGH=10,
EUTRANQRXLEVMIN=6;
\\Adding neighboring LTE cells
ADD GLTENCELL: SPTRESEL= SUPPORT;

inter-RAT inter-frequency cells for handovers or redirections can be configured to control
which cell or network the UE preferentially selects.
The following figure Figure 3-13 shows the scheme for inter-RAT and inter-frequency service
continuity.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.22 Scheme for inter-RAT and inter-frequency service continuity
3.1.6.2.2 II. Solutions to LTE Service Continuity

 General policy
The general solutions to weak LTE coverage are as follows:
1. Intra-RAT inter-frequency handover is preferentially performed over inter-RAT
handover. It is recommended that an inter-frequency cell in the LTE network be selected
as the target cell.
2. If the UMTS network has continuous coverage, UEs are preferentially handed over to the
UMTS network to ensure service continuity.
3. In a GUL triple-mode network, it is recommended that LTE-to-GSM handover be
prevented to simply LTE configuration and handover policy.
Policies for ensuring LTE service continuity are as follows:
− Coverage-based inter-frequency and inter-RAT handovers are supported.
4. At present, commercial UEs in LTE networks begin to support UMTS measurement in
connected mode, but most UEs do not support GSM measurement in connected mode.
Therefore, the eNodeB delivers only UMTS measurement control messages to the UE. If
the coverage of a UMTS cell is good and the UE reports event 1B, the eNodeB switches
the UE to a neighboring UMTS cell. If no UMTS coverage can be detected and the UE
does not report event 1B, the eNodeB switches the UE to the GSM network through
blind redirection if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than a pre-defined
threshold.
5. After UEs support GSM measurement, the setting of timer to trigger (TTT)-related
parameter of the GSM network can be adjusted to ensure that UEs preferentially send an
event 1B report of the UMTS cell and perform inter-RAT handover to the UMTS
network. It is recommended that the value of the TTT-related parameter of the GSM
network be greater than the UMTS measurement period.
6. It is uncertain whether commercial UEs in connected mode can measure neighboring
GSM and UMTS cells. In this case, non-measurement-based LTE-to-UMTS/GSM

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
handovers may be performed and the blind-handover priority must be configured for
neighboring GSM and UMTS cells.
7. With handover priority configuration, UEs can preferentially switch to a neighboring
UMTS cell through blind handover.
 LTE-to-UMTS handover types include PS handover, SRVCC, CCO/NACC, and
redirection. For the handover priorities and applicability of these methods, see section
3.4.2 II. "Solutions to LTE Service Steering."
 LTE-to-GSM handover types include PS handover, SRVCC, CCO/NACC, and
redirection. For the handover priorities and applicability of these methods, see section
3.5.2 II. "Solutions to Weak LTE Coverage."

Connected mode LTE to UMTS LOFD-001019 PS Inter-

UTRAN and UTRAN
LTE to GSM LOFD-001020 PS Inter-
UTRAN and GERAN
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS handover or redirection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS
handover or redirection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 22.2 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS handover or redirection

Value

events A1 and A2.
This parameter is
used to prevent
frequent triggering
of event evaluation
caused by radio
this way, the
pong handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
errors.
RAT measurement
event A1 or A2.
When detecting that
the serving cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
number of incorrect
handovers. In
summary, it helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers.
RAT measurement
event A1. When the
measured RSRP
cell exceeds this
threshold, an event
A1 report will be
and is reserved for
forward
parameter is set to
is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
RAT measurement
event A1.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the
this threshold, an
be sent.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRP value of the
this threshold, an
be sent. The value
-141 does not take
effect and is
parameter is set to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

is used as the
threshold in
implementation.
RAT measurement
event A2.
When the measured
RSRQ value of the
this threshold, an
be sent.
et of the event A2
RAT blind
to the event A2
threshold for
handovers. This
parameter is
compatibility. It
currently.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD (-12) Indicates the Ec/N0
ThdEcn0 INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
Ec/N0 of the target
UTRAN cell. For a
this parameter to a
large value to
prevent unnecessary
with small signal
this parameter to a
timely handovers. A

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
large value of this

a low probability of
handover to the
UTRAN cell, and a
small value leads to
a high probability.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD (-103) Indicates the RSCP
ThdRscp INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
RSCP of the target
UTRAN cell.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD 2 Indicates the
Hyst INTERRATHOUTR hysteresis for event
RAT handover to
UTRAN. This
prevent frequent
triggering of event
radio signal
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability
of ping-pong

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
handovers or
handover decision
errors.
InterRatHoUtranB1 MOD 320 ms Indicates the time-
TimeToTrig INTERRATHOUTR to-trigger for event
RAT handover to
UTRAN. When
detecting that the
least one
neighboring cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE
does not send a
measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.

\\Modifying a group of common parameters related to inter-RAT handover
MOD INTERRATHOCOMMGROUP: LocalCellId=0, InterRatHoCommGroupId=9,
InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig=640ms,InterRatHoA1A2Hyst=2,InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig=640,I
nterRatHoA1ThdRsrp=-111,InterRatHoA1ThdRsrq=-20,InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp=-
115,InterRatHoA2ThdRsrq=-24,BlindHoA2ThdOffset=6;
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-20, InterRatHoUtranB1ThdRscp=-103,
InterRatHoUtranB1Hyst=2, InterRatHoUtranB1TimeToTrig=320;
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM handover or redirection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM
handover or redirection.
Table 22.3 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM handover or redirection

value
InterRatHoGeranB1 ADD (-100) Indicates the RSSI

Thd INTERRATHOGER threshold for event

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
coverage-based
inter-RAT handover
to GERAN.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one GERAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
see 3GPP TS
36.331.
InterRatHoGeranB1 ADD 2 Indicates the
Hyst INTERRATHOGER hysteresis for event
RAT handover to
GERAN. This
prevent frequent
triggering of event
radio signal
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
a lower probability
of ping-pong
handovers or
handover decision
errors.
InterRatHoGeranB1 ADD 640 ms Indicates the time-
TimeToTrig INTERRATHOGER to-trigger for event
RAT handover to
GERAN. When
detecting that the
least one
neighboring cell
meets the entering
condition, the UE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
does not send a

measurement report
to the eNodeB
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
time-to-trigger.
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers and the
number of incorrect
handovers,
preventing
unnecessary
handovers.

MOD INTERRATHOGERANGROUP: InterRatHoGeranB1Thd=-100, InterRatHoGeranB1Hyst=2,
InterRatHoGeranB1TimeToTrig=640ms;
3.1.6.2.3 III. Solutions to UMTS Service Continuity

 General policy
General solutions to weak UMTS coverage are as follows:
l. When UMTS coverage is insufficient, it is recommended that intra-RAT handovers
be preferentially performed to ensure service continuity.
m. When the LTE network has continuous coverage, coverage-based inter-RAT
handover is preferentially initiated to the LTE network.
n. Coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM and UMTS-to-LTE handover can be enabled at the
same time. Detailed service continuity policies in this scenario are as follows:
 If the first measurement report received by the RNC contains both neighboring GSM and
LTE cells, LTE cells are preferred.
 If the first measurement report received by the RNC contains only neighboring GSM
cells: If the neighboring GSM cells are neighboring cells of the best cell, these
neighboring GSM cells are arranged according to the priorities set by the HOPrio

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
parameter in the ADD U2GNCELL command. The cell with the highest priority is
selected; if the priorities of multiple neighboring GSM cells are the same, the cell with
the best signal quality is selected.
 If the first measurement report received by the RNC contains only neighboring LTE
cells: If the neighboring LTE cells are neighboring cells of the best cell, these
neighboring LTE cells are arranged according to the priorities set by the NPriority
parameter in the ADD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO command. The cell with the highest
priority is selected; if the priorities of multiple neighboring LTE cells are the same, the
cell with the best signal quality is selected.

Connected mode UMTS to LTE WRFD-150219 Coverage

UMTS to LTE
UMTS to LTE
UMTS to GSM WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on
Coverage
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE handover or redirection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE handover or
redirection.
Table 22.5 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE handover or redirection

Value

UU2LTEHOCOV ty specifies the type of
measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
When this parameter
is set to
MeasurementQuan
tity, the parameter
that of Measurement
Quantity for Event
3C Measurement of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
LTE. When this

parameter is set to
Both, the UE needs
to report
measurement results
of both the types:
Reference Signal
Received Power
(RSRP) and
Reference Signal
Receiving Quality
(RSRQ).
U2LTEFilterCoef D3 Layer 3 filtering
coefficient for LTE
cell measurements
U2LTEMeasTime 30 Length of a timer for
LTE cell
measurements. The
BSC6910 starts the
timer to perform
LTE cell
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
the BSC6910 keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
LTEMeasQuanOf3C RSRP This parameter
specifies the
measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
coverage. This
to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what
specific
measurement results
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
as is specified in
3GPP TS 25.331.
Hystfor3C 4 Hysteresis value for
reporting event 3C.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TrigTime3C D0 Time delay to trigger
event 3C. The value
related to slow
fading. For details
see 3GPP TS
25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRP 36 RSRP threshold for
LTE cell
measurements.
Event 3A is
triggered when the
UE detects the
cell is higher than
the threshold. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
TargetRatThdRSRQ 20 RSRQ threshold for
LTE cell
measurements. If
LTEReportMode is
set to
EVENT_TRIGGE
R, event 3A is
triggered when the
UE detects the
cell is higher than
the threshold. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.

\\Modifying RNC-oriented measurement algorithm parameters for coverage-based UMTS-
LTE handovers and redirections
MOD UU2LTEHOCOV: LTEMeasTypOf3C= MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D3,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

TargetRatThdRSRP=36, TargetRatThdRSRQ=20
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM handover or redirection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM handover
or redirection.
Table 22.6 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM handover or redirection

value
InterRATCSThd2D MOD (-14) Threshold of

EcN0 UINTERRATHOC triggering inter-RAT
OV measurements for
CS services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2FE (-12) Threshold of
cN0 stopping inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
measurements for
CS services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
2DEcN0 triggering inter-RAT
measurement for PS
domain non-HSPA
services when Ec/N0
is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
2D. Then, the RNC

sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2DE (-15) Threshold of
cN0 triggering inter-RAT
measurements for
HSPA services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
2FEcN0 stopping inter-RAT
measurement for PS
domain non-HSPA
services when Ec/N0
is used as the
measurement
quantity.
This parameter is a
key parameter in
inter-RAT handover
policies. This
parameter affects the
proportion of UEs
entering the
compressed mode
and the success rate
of hard handovers in
a cell. The setting of
this parameter
depends on the
moving speed of
UEs and cell radius.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
measurements.
If the cell is a macro
cell, it indicates that
micro cells exist in
this cell. To enable
the traffic absorption
function of the micro
cells, the
compressed mode
start threshold
should be set higher
and the stop
threshold also be set
higher, that is, the
threshold for event
2D/2F be set higher
by using CPICH
RSCP. If the cell is a
micro cell, modify
the preceding
configurations based
on the results of link
budget.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
When the cell is
located in the center
of the frequency
coverage or the
inter-frequency
measurement
quantity is set to
BOTH, Ec/N0
serves as the
decision standard for
events 2D and 2F.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2FEc (-13) Threshold of
N0 stopping inter-RAT
measurements for
HSPA services when
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
Ec/N0 value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2D (-100) Threshold of
RSCP triggering inter-RAT
measurements for
CS services when
RSCP is used as the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is lower
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of
otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATCSThd2F (-97) Threshold of
RSCP stopping inter-RAT
measurements for
CS services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
and stop inter-RAT

measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
InterRATHThd2DR (-110) Threshold of
SCP triggering
measurements for
HSPA services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is lower
2D. Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to enable the
compressed mode
and start inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to
enable and disable
the compressed
mode, respectively.
To enable the
compressed mode
threshold of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value

otherwise, decrease
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.
2FRSCP stopping inter-RAT
measurement when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
InterRATHThd2FR (-107) Threshold of
SCP stopping
measurements for
HSPA services when
RSCP is used as the
measurement
quantity.
If the measured
RSCP value is
greater than this
threshold, the UE
reports event 2F.
Then, the RNC
sends the signaling
to disable the
compressed mode
and stop inter-RAT
measurements.
Event 2D and event
2F are used to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
enable and disable

the compressed
mode, respectively.
To disable the
compressed mode
earlier, reduce the
threshold of
otherwise, increase
the threshold of
To prevent frequent
enabling and
disabling of the
compressed mode,
increase the
difference between
the thresholds of
triggering event 2D
and event 2F.

\\Modifying RNC-oriented algorithm parameters for coverage-based inter-RAT
handover measurement
SET UINTERRATHOCOV: InterRATCSThd2DEcN0=-14, InterRATCSThd2FEcN0=-12,
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0=-15, InterRATHThd2DEcN0=-15, InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0=-13,
InterRATHThd2FEcN0=-13, InterRATCSThd2DRSCP=-100, InterRATCSThd2FRSCP=-97,
InterRATHThd2DRSCP=-110, InterRATR99PsThd2FRSCP=-107, InterRATHThd2FRSCP=-107;
3.1.6.2.4 IV. Solutions to GSM Service Continuity

 General policy
The general solutions to weak GSM coverage are as follows:
1. According to 3GPP protocols, UEs can be handed over to UMTS or LTE cells through
network control mode 2 (NC2) or PS handovers to ensure the service continuity of
multimode UEs among different networks.
2. NC2 or PS handovers cannot be commercially used at present because the industry chain
is immature.
3. At present, if the GSM coverage is insufficient, PS UEs reselect another RAT through
NC0.

GSM to UMTS GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Interoperability
GSM to LTE GBFD-511301 Cell
and LTE
GBFD-511302 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Coverage
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS handover or redirection

value
Send2QuterFlag SET YES This parameter

OTHSOFTPARA specifies whether the
system information
(SI) Type 3 message
contains the
2QUATER
indicator.
SendUtranECSCFla SET YES This parameter
g OTHSOFTPARA controls the value of
the 3G Early
Classmark Sending
Restriction field
when the BSC sends
system information
(SI) 3 to an MS.
set to YES, the value
of the 3G Early
Classmark Sending
Restriction field is 1,
indicating that the
early classmark
message sent by the
MS contains the 3G
classmark
parameter is set to
NO, the value of the
3G Early Classmark
Sending Restriction
field is 0, indicating
that the early
classmark message
sent by the MS does
not contain the 3G
classmark

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
information. This
parameter is valid
for dual-mode MSs
and is invalid for
single-mode MSs.
CLASSMARKQUE SET YES(NO) Whether to enable
RY OTHSOFTPARA the BSC to include
the 3G classmark
information element
in the Classmark
Request message
that the BSC
forwards from the
MSC to an MS
QUERYCMAFTER SET GCELLSOFT YES(NO) Whether to query the
INBSCHO classmark of the call
in an incoming BSC
handover
ECSC SET YES The early classmark
GCELLCCBASIC sending control
(ECSC) parameter
specifies whether the
MSs in a cell use
early classmark
sending.
After a successful
immediate
assignment, the MS
sends additional
classmark
information to the
network as early as
possible. The
additional classmark
information mainly
contains the CM3
(classmark 3)
information. The
CM3 (classmark 3)
information contains
the frequency band
support capability of
the MS (used for the
future channel
assignment), power
information about
each frequency band
supported by the MS
(used for the
handover between

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
different frequency
bands), and
encryption capability
of the MS.
MSCVER SET R99_or_above Protocol version of
GCELLCCUTRAN the MSC that is
SYS connected to the
BSC6910. The
supported signaling
varies with the
protocol versions.
The setting of this
parameter must be
consistent with the
actual MSC version.
MEASURETYPE SET ComMeasReport Type of the
SYS (MR) reported by
the MS
GSMFREQCNUM SET 3 Number of
GCELLCCUTRAN neighboring cells
SYS that meet the
following
conditions: If MBR
is indicated in a
system message, the
MS reports the
number of
neighboring cells at
each frequency
band. If the MS
reports the number
of neighboring cells
at the same
frequency band of
the serving cell, it
can report a
maximum of the
value of this
parameter.
These neighboring
cells must meet the
following
requirements:
1. The receive
levels of the
neighboring cells
must be higher
than 900

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
Reporting
Threshold or
1800 Reporting
Threshold.
2. The BSIC of a
neighboring cell
must be valid.
3. The signals of the
neighboring cells
must be the
strongest among
all the
neighboring cells
at the same
frequency band.
SET [0, 7] or above [8,
GCELLCCUTRAN 15], the MS starts to
SYS search for 3G cells.
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm
6: -74 dBm

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
the MS keeps
searching for 3G
cells
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
MS does not search
for 3G cells.
specifies the
threshold of the
reselection in
connection mode
before Qsearch C is
obtained.
FDDQOFF 0 This parameter
specifies one of the
thresholds of the
signal level for 3G
cell reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
are met for five
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
level of the FDD

cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold
(RSCP Threshold
is calculated
based on the
value of the
FDDRSCPMIN
parameter. For
details about the
calculation, see
3GPP TS
45.008);
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: - (always select a
cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB,
2: -24 dB,
...
15: 28 dB.
FDDRSCPMIN SET 6(0) Minimum level
GCELLCCUTRAN threshold of
SYS UTRAN cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
SET reselection. During

GCELLCCUTRAN the cell reselection
SYS decision from a
GSM cell to an FDD
cell, this parameter
is used to calculate
the RSCP threshold
of the target cell. An
FDD cell becomes a
candidate cell if all
the following
conditions are met
for five consecutive
seconds:
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold
(RSCP Threshold
is calculated
based on the
value of the
FDDRSCPMIN
parameter. For
details about the
calculation, see
3GPP TS
45.008);

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0 = -114 dBm,
1 = -112 dBm,
2 = -110 dBm,
...
14 = -86 dBm,
15 = -84 dBm.
FDDREP EcN0 This parameter
specifies whether
Ec/N0 or RSCP is
used for the
measurement report
on an FDD cell.
Ec/N0 stands for the
signal-to-noise ratio.
RSCP stands for the
power.
FDDFREQCNUM 2 Number of UTRAN
FDD cells that
should be included
in measurement
reports
FDDQMIN SET 7 This parameter
GCELLCCUTRAN specifies one of the
SYS parameters for FDD
cell reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
are met for five

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold
(RSCP Threshold
is calculated
based on the
value of the
FDDRSCPMIN
parameter. For
details about the
calculation, see
3GPP TS
45.008);
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
The values of this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -20 dB,
1: -6 dB,
2: -18 dB,
3: -8 dB,
4: -16 dB,
5: -10 dB,
6: -14 dB,
7: -12 dB.
FDDQMINOFFSET SET 0 Offset of the
GCELLCCUTRAN minimum threshold
SYS for Ec/N0 during an
FDD cell
reselection.
An FDD cell
becomes a candidate
cell if all the
are met for five
1. Receive level of
the FDD cell >
Average receive
level of the
current serving
cell + FDD Q
offset;
The FDD cell
meets the
following
condition in the
case of any
neighboring 2G
cell: Receive
level of the FDD
cell > Receive
level of any
neighboring 2G
cell + FDD Q
offset;
2. Ec/N0 of the
FDD cell ≥ FDD
Qmin - FDD
Qmin Offset;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
3. Receive level of
the FDD cell ≥
RSCP Threshold
(RSCP Threshold
is calculated
based on the
value of the
FDDRSCPMIN
parameter. For
details about the
calculation, see
3GPP TS
45.008);
If multiple FDD
cells meet the
preceding
conditions, the
MS reselects the
cell with the
strongest receive
level.
See 3GPP TSs
45.008 and
25.304.
QP SET 7 In packet transfer
GCELLCCUTRAN mode, if the signal
SYS level of the serving
MS starts to search
for 3G cells. For
example, if this
and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells.
This parameter is
valid only if the
BSC sends GPRS
cell reselection
parameters to an MS
using a Packet Cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
Change Order or
Packet Measurement
Order message.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)
SEARCH3G SET YES Whether to allow the
GCELLCCUTRAN MS to search for a
SYS 3G cell when the
BSIC must be
decoded
INVALBSICEN SET NO Whether a
SYS can contain the
information about a
cell with an invalid
BSIC. The cell with
an invalid BSIC is
an unconfigured
neighboring cell.
SCALEORDER SET ADD0dB This parameter
GCELLCCUTRAN indicates that when
SYS the MS reports the
EMR, it adds the
value of this
parameter to the
received signal level,
and then converts
the result into the
RXLEV value. For
details, see GSM
Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
reported by the MS
is 10 dBm, level
values 0-63 map
with -100 dBm to
-37 dBm. If the
SCALE_Order
reported by the MS
is 0 dBm, level
values 0-63 map
with -110 dBm to
-47 dBm. If the
SCALE_Order
reported by the MS
is Automatic, the
MS chooses the least
SCALE while
ensuring that the MS
can report the most
strongest.
QSEARCHC SET 7 In connection mode,
GCELLCCUTRAN if the signal level is
SYS below [0-7] or above
[8-15], the MS starts
to search for 3G
cells. For example, if
to 5 and if the signal
the MS starts to
signal level of the
10, then the MS
3G cells. 0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
(never)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
CELL900OFF SET 0 Offset applied to the

GCELLCCUTRAN receive level of a
SYS GSM900 cell in the
measurement report
before prioritizing
cells by frequency
bands. Before cells
are sequenced by
frequencies, the
value of this
parameter must be
level value in the
measurement report
of the cells at the
900 MHz frequency
band.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
900 MHz frequency
band. The
measurement report
is valid only when
the receive level in
the measurement
report of the
GSM900 cell
exceeds this
threshold. After
being filtered, the
measurement report
is used for
prioritizing the cells.
The value 7 means
infinite:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
...
6: 36 dB
CELL1800OFF SET 0 Offset of the
1800 MHz
frequency band.
Before cells are
sequenced by
frequencies, the
value of this
parameter must be
level value in the
measurement report
of the cells at the
1800 MHz
frequency band.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
1800 MHz
frequency band.
When the receive
level value in the
measurement report
of the cells at the
1800 MHz
frequency band
exceeds the value of
this parameter, the
report takes effect.
After being filtered,
the measurement
report is used for
priority sequencing
of cells.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
The values of this

parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
FDDCELLOFF SET 0 Offset of an FDD
GCELLCCUTRAN cell report.
SYS When the priority of
a 3G cell is
sequenced, the value
of this parameter
must be added to the
3G cell in the
measurement report.
The values of this
parameter
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
FDDCELLTHRED SET 0 Threshold of an
GCELLCCUTRAN FDD cell report.
SYS When the receive
level value in the
measurement report
of a 3G cell exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the
measurement report
takes effect. After
the valid
measurement report
is filtered, the 3G
cell joins the cell
priority sequence.
The values of this
parameter

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
correspond to the
following decibel
values:
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
POS2QUATER SET BCCHNorm Transmission
GCELLCCUTRAN channel for 2Quater
SYS system information.
set to BCCHNorm,
the 2Quater system
information is sent
on the normal
BCCH. If this
parameter is set to
BCCHExt, the
2Quater system
information is sent
on the extended
BCCH.
SI2QUATEROPTI SET YES Whether to optimize
MIZEDALLOWED GCELLCCUTRAN the system
SYS information (SI)
2Quater. When this
parameter is set to
YES, information
about more
neighboring UMTS
cells is contained in
2Quater, and
therefore the number
of such SIs
decreases. Note:
When this parameter
is set to YES, the SI
MI is also optimized
and information
about more
neighboring UMTS
cells is contained in
MI.
FddRptThreshold2E SET 25(255) Minimum Ec/N0
cno GCELLCCUTRAN threshold 2 for
SYS reporting
measurement reports

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
in FDD cells. If
FDDREP is set to
RSCP, the value of
this parameter is
used by the
information element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 in
the system
parameter is set to
element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 is
not delivered.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
details, see the 3GPP
TS 45.008 protocol.)
0: < -24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.
FddRptThreshold2R SET 20(255) Minimum RSCP
scp GCELLCCUTRAN threshold 2 for
SYS reporting
measurement reports
in FDD cells. If
FDDREP is set to
Ec/N0, the value of
this parameter is
used by the
information element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 in
the system

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
parameter is set to
element
FDD_REPORTING
_THRESHOLD_2 is
not delivered.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
INTERRATOUTBS SET YES(NO) Whether to allow a
to NO, inter-RAT
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
INTERRATINBSC SET YES(NO) Whether to allow a
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
Iur-g interface is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
INTERRATCELLR SET YES(NO) Whether the 2G-to-
allowed.
set to YES, the
reselection from 2G
allowed.
BET3GHOEN SET NO Whether to enable
cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
is allowed.
HOOPTSEL SET Pre_2G_CellThres This parameter
is preferentially
cell for handovers.
When this parameter
is set to
Pre_2G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 2G
target cell for
handovers. When
to Pre_3G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 3G
target cell for
handovers. When
to
Pre_2G_CellThres,
the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell if the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value

neighboring 2G cell
to the value of HO
Preference
Threshold for 2G
BSC preferentially
2G cell as the
the first in the
equal to or smaller
the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell.
Otherwise, the BSC
a neighboring 2G
target cell.
A better cell
handover to a 3G
the measured RSCP
of a 3G neighboring
the sum of this
parameter and
RSCPOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for the 3G
a period of time.
The decibel value

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value

as follows: (For
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
When FDDREP in
the SET
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is
set to Ec/N0, a
better cell handover
to a 3G neighboring
cell can be triggered
only if the measured
Ec/N0 of a 3G
neighboring cell is
ECNOOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for a
period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
0: CPICH Ec/Io <

-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.

\\Setting other software parameters of the BSC
SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;
\\Setting the software parameters of a cell
SET GCELLSOFT: QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES;
\\Setting basic call control parameters of a cell
SET GCELLCCBASIC: SET GCELLCCBASIC=YES;
SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: MSCVER=R99_or_above, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport,
GSMFREQCNUM=3, QI=7, QCI=Use_Qsearch_I, FDDQOFF=0, FDDRSCPMIN=6, FDDREP=EcN0,
FDDFREQCNUM=2, FDDQMIN=7, FDDQMINOFFSET=0, QP=7, SEARCH3G=YES, INVALBSICEN=NO,
SCALEORDER=ADD0dB, QSEARCHC=7, QSEARCHC=0, CELL900THRED=0, CELL1800OFF=0,
CELL1800THRED=0, FDDCELLOFF=0, FDDCELLTHRED=0,
POS2QUATER=BCCHNorm, SI2QUATEROPTIMIZED ALLOWED=YES, FddRptThreshold2Ecno=25,
FddRptThreshold2Rscp=20;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES,
INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_CellThres, HOPRETH2G=25,
HORSCPTH3G=50, HOECNOTH3G=35;
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE handover or redirection

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE handover or
redirection.

Value

cell supports GPRS.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

NC2. In NC2 mode,
an MS sends the
BSC measurement
reports containing
information about
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.
SHO the MS handover
an LTE cell during
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
RESELHYST GCELLNC2PARA 6 Indicating that
during cell
of the target cell
should meet the
[MAX (level of
serving cell, Cell
Reselection Level
Threshold) + Cell
Reselection
way, ping-pong
handovers do not
occur.
NORMALRESELA GCELLNC2PARA PERMIT Whether to allow a
LLOW normal cell
reselection. A
normal cell
reselection is
triggered when both
of the following
conditions are met:
 The number of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
times the BSC

consecutively
measures the
receive level of a
serving cell in a
Packet
Measurement
Report message
is greater than or
equal to the value
of
RESELWATC
HPERIOD.
 The number of
times the receive
level of a serving
cell is lower than
the level
specified by
MINACCRXLE
V is greater than
the value of
RESELWORSE
NLEVTHRSH.
When this parameter
is set to
PERMIT(Permit)
and NC2LoadResel
is set to
Support(Support),
the BSC considers
cell load as a
parameter when
determining the
target cell among all
candidate cells
during a normal cell
reselection.
RESELWATCHPE GCELLNC2PARA 10 The number of
RIOD received Packet
Measurement Report
messages on the
serving cell is
measured
continuously. When
the statistical value
is greater than or
this parameter, the
normal reselection

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
decision is made.
PENALTYLASTT GCELLNC2PARA 10 Penalty duration for
M cell reselection. Cell
penalty can be
performed only in
this duration.
RESELWORSENL GCELLNC2PARA 1 If the number of
EVTHRSH times when the
serving cell within
Normal Cell
Reselection Watch
Period is lower than
Cell Reselection
Level Threshold is
greater than the
value of this
parameter, the
normal cell
reselection is
triggered.
MINACCRXLEV GCELLNC2PARA 15 Minimum receive
level for a
neighboring cell to
become a candidate
cell during cell
reselection. In
addition, the
parameter value is
of bad normal cell
reselection level.
When the receive
value of this
parameter, the
normal cell
bad.
PENALTYRXLEV GCELLNC2PARA 30 When the cell
reselection failure
message is received
or the load cell
reselection is
initiated, the Cell
Penalty Level is
subtracted from the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

failure occurs
repeatedly or that
multiple MSs are
reselected to the
same target cell.
This parameter is
valid only within
Cell Penalty
Duration.
ALLOWEDMEASR GCELLNC2PARA 4 Number of allowed
PTMISSEDNUM measurement reports
missed. If the
number of allowed
measurement reports
missed exceeds this
value, the previous
measurement report
is invalid.
FILTERWNDSIZE GCELLNC2PARA 6 Maximum number
of former values
when the receive
cell or the receive
larger the value of
this parameter, the
the former receive
levels. The smaller
the value of this
parameter, the
the later receive
levels.
RESELINTERVAL GCELLNC2PARA 2 NC2 cell reselection
interval in the same
cell

SET GCELLGPRS: GPRS= SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT= YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO= SUPPORT;
SET GCELLNC2PARA: RESELHYST=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
PENALTYLASTTM=10, RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, MINACCRXLEV=15, PENALTYRXLEV=30,

ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, RESELINTERVAL=2;

With the increasing penetration rate of multimode UEs in the live network, load of UMTS or
LTE cells is relatively high in hot spots, as shown in the following figure. In this case, the
operators' main concern is how to select the target cells to balance load of different cells and
guarantee user experience.
Figure 1.23 Load balancing SHAPE
3.1.6.3.2 II. Solutions to Load Balancing in an LTE Network

 General policy
If the resource usage of an LTE serving cell exceeds a pre-defined threshold, load
balancing actions are performed for the cell. It is recommended that intra-RAT load-
based handovers be preferentially performed to switch UEs to an inter-frequency
neighboring cell that has the same or a wide overlapped coverage area as the serving cell.
If the load of the LTE serving cell is still heavy, inter-RAT mobility load balancing
(MLB) is performed to hand over or redirect UEs to an inter-RAT neighboring cell that
has the same or large overlapped coverage area as the serving cell.
The load balancing policy for the LTE network is as follows:
1. Inter-frequency MLB is recommended for live networks. Inter-frequency MLB selects
the best target cell based on the load difference between and handover performance of
the serving cell and the target cell.
2. If switches for inter-frequency and inter-RAT MLB are both turned on, it is
recommended that the threshold for triggering inter-frequency MBL be lower than that
for triggering inter-RAT MLB. When the switches for inter-frequency and inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MLB are both turned on, if the load of an LTE cell is greater than the sum of the
threshold and offset for triggering inter-frequency or inter-RAT MLB, both inter-
frequency and inter-RAT MLB will be triggered. The eNodeB decides whether to
perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT MLB first based on whether it receives inter-
frequency or inter-RAT measurement report first.
3. Before inter-RAT MLB is performed, it is recommended that load balancing to UTRAN
be enabled.
4. If switches for inter-RAT MLB to UTRAN and GERAN are turned on at the same time
and the two systems are not prioritized, both neighboring UTRAN and GERAN cells can
be the target cells of inter-RAT MLB. The eNodeB decides whether to perform inter-
frequency or inter-RAT MLB first based on whether it receives inter-frequency or inter-
RAT measurement report first.

Connected mode LTE to UMTS LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT

LTE to GSM LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS load balancing

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS load
balancing.
Table 23.2 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS load balancing

MML Parameter Defau Description
Command Name lt
Value
MOD InterRatMlb 75 Indicates the threshold for triggering inter-RAT

CELLMLB Thd load balancing. Load balancing between the cell
and its inter-RAT neighboring cell is triggered if
the cell load exceeds the sum of this threshold
and the offset, and is stopped if the cell load falls
below this threshold.
MOD InterRatMlb 15 Indicates the threshold of the number of uplink
CELLMLB UeNumThd synchronized UEs for triggering inter-RAT
MLB. MLB between the cell and its inter-RAT
neighboring cell is triggered if the number of
uplink synchronized UEs in the cell exceeds this
threshold, and MLB is stopped if the number of
uplink synchronized UEs falls below this
threshold. The threshold for the number of uplink
synchronized UEs equals the percentage value
multiplied by 1000. For example, parameter
value 1 indicates that the threshold for the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Command Name lt
Value
number of uplink synchronized UEs is 10 (1000

x 1%), parameter value 2 indicates threshold 20,
and parameter value 10 indicates threshold 100.
Note that if the parameter value is 100 or 99, the
threshold for the number of uplink synchronized
UEs is 1 or 2, respectively.
MOD InterRatMlb IRAT_ Indicates the mode for triggering inter-RAT
CELLMLB TriggerMode PRB_O MLB. The parameter value IRAT_PRB_ONLY
NLY indicates that load balancing is triggered by
physical resource block (PRB) usage. The
parameter value IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY
indicates that load balancing is triggered by the
number of UEs in the serving cell. The parameter
value IRAT_PRB_OR_UE_NUMBER
indicates that load balancing is triggered by
either the PRB usage or the number of UEs in the
serving cell.
CELLMLB UeNumMod synchronized UEs when
eThd InterRatMlbTriggerMode is set to
IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY. MLB between
the cell and its inter-RAT neighboring cell is
triggered if the number of uplink synchronized
UEs in the cell is greater than or equal to this
threshold plus the offset threshold, and MLB is
stopped if the number of uplink synchronized
UEs falls below this threshold.
MOD InterRatMlb 2 Indicates the PRB usage threshold for selecting
CELLMLB UeSelPrbTh UEs for inter-RAT load sharing. If the
d InterRatMlbTriggerMode parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY and the
InterRatMlbUeSelStrategy parameter is set to
PRBRATIOLOWMODE, UEs whose PRB
usage is less than or equal to this threshold are
selected for PRB-usage-based inter-RAT load
sharing. If the InterRatMlbTriggerMode
parameter is set to
IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY, UEs whose
PRB usage is less than or equal to this threshold
are selected for UE-number-based inter-RAT
load sharing.
MOD InitValidPeri 10 Indicates the standard valid duration for load
CELLMLB od sharing with UTRAN for UEs in idle mode. The
actual duration increases on the basis of a
standard valid duration with the increase of the
number of uplink-synchronized UEs.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

\\Modifying settings of parameters for LTE-to-UMTS inter-RAT MLB
MOD CELLMLB: LocalCellId=0, InterFreqMlbThd=68, InterRatMlbThd=75,
InterRatMlbUeNumThd=15, InterRatMlbTriggerMode=IRAT_PRB_ONLY,
InterRatMlbUeNumModeThd=150, InterRatMlbUeSelPrbThd=2, InitValidPeriod=10;
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM load balancing

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM load
balancing.
Table 23.3 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM load balancing

Command Name lt
Value
MOD InterRatMlb 75 Indicates the threshold for triggering inter-RAT

CELLMLB Thd load balancing. Load balancing between the cell
and its inter-RAT neighboring cell is triggered if
the cell load exceeds the sum of this threshold
and the offset, and is stopped if the cell load falls
below this threshold.
CELLMLB UeNumThd synchronized UEs for triggering inter-RAT
MLB. MLB between the cell and its inter-RAT
neighboring cell is triggered if the number of
uplink synchronized UEs in the cell exceeds this
threshold, and MLB is stopped if the number of
uplink synchronized UEs falls below this
threshold. The threshold for the number of uplink
synchronized UEs equals the percentage value
multiplied by 1000. For example, parameter
value 1 indicates that the threshold for the
number of uplink synchronized UEs is 10 (1000
x 1%), parameter value 2 indicates threshold 20,
and parameter value 10 indicates threshold 100.
Note that if the parameter value is 100 or 99, the
threshold for the number of uplink synchronized
UEs is 1 or 2, respectively.
MOD InterRatMlb IRAT_ Indicates the mode for triggering inter-RAT
CELLMLB TriggerMod PRB_O MLB. The parameter value IRAT_PRB_ONLY
e NLY indicates that load balancing is triggered by
physical resource block (PRB) usage. The
parameter value IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY
indicates that load balancing is triggered by the
number of UEs in the serving cell. The parameter
value IRAT_PRB_OR_UE_NUMBER
indicates that load balancing is triggered by
either the PRB usage or the number of UEs in the
serving cell.
CELLMLB UeNumMod synchronized UEs when

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Command Name lt
Value
eThd InterRatMlbTriggerMode is set to

IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY. MLB between
the cell and its inter-RAT neighboring cell is
triggered if the number of uplink synchronized
UEs in the cell is greater than or equal to this
threshold plus the offset threshold, and MLB is
stopped if the number of uplink synchronized
UEs falls below this threshold.
MOD InterRatMlb 2 Indicates the PRB usage threshold for selecting
CELLMLB UeSelPrbTh UEs for inter-RAT load sharing. If the
d InterRatMlbTriggerMode parameter is set to
IRAT_PRB_ONLY and the
InterRatMlbUeSelStrategy parameter is set to
PRBRATIOLOWMODE, UEs whose PRB
selected for PRB-usage-based inter-RAT load
sharing. If the InterRatMlbTriggerMode
parameter is set to
IRAT_UE_NUMBER_ONLY, UEs whose PRB
selected for UE-number-based inter-RAT load
sharing.
MOD InitValidPeri 10 Indicates the standard valid duration for load
CELLMLB od sharing with UTRAN for UEs in idle mode. The
actual duration increases on the basis of a
standard valid duration with the increase of the
number of uplink-synchronized UEs.

\\Modifying settings of parameters for LTE-to-GSM inter-RAT MLB
MOD CELLMLB: InterRatMlbThd=75, InterRatMlbUeNumThd=15,
InterRatMlbTriggerMode=IRAT_PRB_ONLY, InterRatMlbUeNumModeThd=150,
InterRatMlbUeSelPrbThd=2, InitValidPeriod=10;
3.1.6.3.3 III. Solutions to Load Balancing in a UMTS Network

 General policy
When the UMTS serving cell is in the basic congestion state, load reshuffling (LDR)
actions can be performed to balance the cell load.
The load balancing policy for the UMTS network is as follows:
 Intra-RAT inter-frequency load balancing is performed prior to inter-RAT load balancing.
 Load-based inter-frequency handover and BE service rate reduction are preferentially
performed for intra-RAT load balancing.
 UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is preferentially performed for inter-RAT load balancing.
The recommended configurations for LDR actions are as follows:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 The first recommended downlink LDR action is INTERFREQLDHO (load-based inter-

frequency handover), the second action is BERATERED (BE service rate reduction), the
third action is PSInterU2LLDHO (UMTS-to-LTE PS handover), and the rest LDR
actions are NOACT (no action).
 The first recommended uplink LDR action is BERATERED (BE service rate reduction),
the second action is INTERFREQLDHO (load-based inter-frequency handover), the
third action is PSInterU2LLDHO (UMTS-to-LTE PS handover), and the rest LDR
actions are NOACT (no action).
 It is recommended that UMTS-to-LTE load balancing be used together with LOFD-
070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell Selection, that is, the eNodeB sends LTE cell load
information to the RNC and the RNC filters out congested LTE cells when performing
UMTS-to-LTE load-based handover or redirection.


UMTS to LTE WRFD-150216 Load Based
to LTE
LTE
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE load balancing

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE load
balancing.
Table 23.5 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE load balancing

MML Command Parameter Name Recommended Description
Value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFirstAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter

specifies the first
action for downlink
LDR. The value
INTERFREQLDH
O indicates that
load-based inter-
frequency handover
is performed.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSecondAction BERATERED This parameter

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

action for downlink
LDR. The value
BERateRed
indicates that the
rates of BE services
are reduced.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrThirdAction PSInterU2LLDHO This parameter
specifies the third
action for downlink
LDR. The value
PSInterU2LLDHO
indicates that a
UMTS-to-LTE PS
handover is
performed.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFourthAction NoACT This parameter
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFifthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the fifth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSixthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the sixth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSeventhAction NoACT This parameter
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEighthAction NoACT This parameter
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrNinthAction NoACT This parameter

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
specifies the ninth

action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrTenthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the tenth
action for downlink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEleventhActio NoACT This parameter
n specifies the
eleventh action for
downlink LDR. The
value NoAct
indicates that no
action is required.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFirstAction BERATERED This parameter
specifies the first
action for uplink
LDR. The value
BERATERED
indicates that
channels are
BE service.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSecondAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
InterFreqLDHO
indicates an inter-
frequency load
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrThirdAction PSInterU2LLDHO This parameter
specifies the third
action for uplink
LDR. The value
PSInterU2LLDHO
indicates a U2L PS
handover.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFourthAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFifthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the fifth
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSixthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the sixth
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSeventhAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrEighthAction NoACT This parameter
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrNinthAction NoACT This parameter
specifies the ninth
action for uplink
LDR. The value
ADD UCELLLDR UlPSU2LHOUeNu NoACT Number of UEs for
m performing uplink
UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers.
ADD UCELLLDR DlPSU2LHOUeNu NoACT Number of UEs for
m performing
downlink UMTS-to-
LTE PS handovers.
SET PROCESSSWITCH ON Whether the RNC
URRCTRLSWITC 5: obtains the load
H INTERRAT_LOAD information about
LTE_SWITCH the RAN
information
management (RIM)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
procedure.
ADD U2LLTELoadSwitc ON Whether to filter
UCELLHOCOMM h: neighboring LTE
based UMTS-to-
LTE handovers or
redirections.

\\Adding cell-level parameters for the LDR algorithm
ADD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction= INTERFREQLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=
BERATERED, DlLdrThirdAction= PSInterU2LLDHO,
DlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, DlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, DlLdrSixthAction=NoAct,
DlLdrSeventhAction=NoAct, DlLdrEighthAction=NoAct,
DlLdrNinthAction=NoAct, DlLdrTenthAction=NoAct, DlLdrEleventhAction = NoACT,
DlLdrBERateReductionRabNum=1, DlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum=1,
DlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=3, DlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=1,
DlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum=1, DlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=3,
DlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=1, UlLdrFirstAction= BERATERED, UlLdrSecondAction=
INTERFREQLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction= PSInterU2LLDHO,
UlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, UlLdrSixthAction=NoAct,
UlLdrSeventhAction=NoAct, UlLdrEighthAction=NoAct, UlLdrNinthAction= NoAct,
UlPSU2LHOUeNum= NoAct, DlPSU2LHOUeNum= NoAct,
UlLdrBERateReductionRabNum=1, UlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum=1,
UlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=3, UlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum=1,
UlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum=1, UlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=3,
UlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum=1, UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20,
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20, UlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000,
DlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8,
LdrCodePriUseInd=TRUE, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8,
DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd=13, CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd=FALSE,
GoldUserLoadControlSwitch=OFF;
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM load balancing

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM load
balancing.
Table 23.6 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM load balancing

Value
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFirstAction INTERFREQLDHO NOACT: No load

taken.
INTERFREQLDHO
: The inter-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
frequency load
handover is
performed.
BERATERED:
Channels are
BE service.
QOSRENEGO: The
QoS of the
time service is
performed.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the CS
domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the PS
domain is
performed.
AMRRATERED
(AMR service rate
decreasing): The
setting of the TFC
subset and the
negotiation of the
service rate can be
performed for the
AMR voice service.
MBMSDECPOWE
R (MBMS power
limiting): The
MBMS service is
configured with the
minimum power.
CODEADJ (code
tree reshuffling):
The fragments of the
downlink code tree
are arranged.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
SHOULDNOTBE
CS domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
PS domain is
performed.
WAMRSfReconfigu
ration(AMR-WB SF
reconfiguration):
The rate of an AMR-
WB service is
lowered through RB
reconfiguration and
the SF of the AMR-
WB service is
reconfigured when
code resource
congestion occurs.
The LDR takes the
sequence and judges
whether each action
action is
unsuccessful, the
LDR turns to the
next action. If an
NOACT, or all the
taken, the downlink
the LDR.
Because each action
is performed by its
algorithm module,
the LDR algorithm
only selects users
messages, the
execution result of
each action can be
obtained after a

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
delay, and the LDR

algorithm cannot
so the LDR can only
judge whether the
actions succeed by
whether candidate
users are found.
The inter-frequency
load handover has
no impact on the
QoS of users and
load, so the inter-
frequency load
handover usually
serves as the first
action.
The BE service rate
only when the
DCCC algorithm is
enabled.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSecondAction BERATERED This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrThirdAction PSINTERRATSHO This parameter has
ULDBELDHO the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFourthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrFifthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSixthAction NOACT This parameter has

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
the same content as

DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrSeventhAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEighthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrNinthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrTenthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR DlLdrEleventhActio NOACT This parameter has
n the same content as
DlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFirstAction BERATERED NOACT: No load
taken.
INTERFREQLDHO
: The inter-
frequency load
handover is
performed.
BERATERED:
Channels are
BE service.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
QOSRENEGO: The
QoS of the
time service is
performed.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the CS
domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDBELDHO: The
inter-RAT
SHOULDBE load
handover of the PS
domain is
performed.
AMRRATERED
(AMR service rate
decreasing): The
setting of the TFC
subset and the
negotiation of the
service rate can be
performed for the
AMR voice service.
CSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
CS domain is
performed.
PSINTERRATSHO
ULDNOTLDHO:
The inter-RAT
SHOULDNOTBE
PS domain is
performed.
The LDR takes the
sequence and judges
whether each action
action is
unsuccessful, the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
LDR turns to the

next action. If an
NOACT, or all the
taken, the downlink
the LDR.
Because each action
is performed by its
algorithm module,
the LDR algorithm
only selects users
messages, the
execution result of
each action can be
obtained after a
delay, and the LDR
algorithm cannot
so the LDR can only
judge whether the
actions succeed by
whether candidate
users are found.
The inter-frequency
load handover has
no impact on the
QoS of users and
load, so the inter-
frequency load
handover usually
serves as the first
action.
The BE service rate
only when the
DCCC algorithm is
enabled.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSecondAction INTERFREQLDHO This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrThirdAction PSINTERRATSHO This parameter has

ULDBELDHO the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFourthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrFifthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSixthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrSeventhAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrEighthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlLdrNinthAction NOACT This parameter has
the same content as
UlLdrFirstAction.
however, should be
unique.
ADD UCELLLDR UlPSU2LHOUeNu NOACT Number of UEs for
m performing uplink
UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
ADD UCELLLDR DlPSU2LHOUeNu NOACT Number of UEs for

m performing
downlink UMTS-to-
LTE PS handovers.

\\Adding cell-level parameters for the LDR algorithm
ADD UCELLLDR: DlLdrFirstAction=INTERFREQLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=BERATERED,
DlLdrThirdAction=PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO, DlLdrFourthAction=NOACT,
DlLdrFifthAction=NOACT, DlLdrSixthAction=NOACT, DlLdrSeventhAction=NOACT,
DlLdrEighthAction=NOACT, DlLdrNinthAction=NOACT, DlLdrTenthAction=NOACT,
DlLdrEleventhAction=NOACT, UlLdrFirstAction=BERATERED,
UlLdrSecondAction=INTERFREQLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction=PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO,
UlLdrFourthAction=NOACT, UlLdrFifthAction=NOACT, UlLdrSixthAction=NOACT,
UlLdrSeventhAction=NOACT, UlLdrEighthAction=NOACT, UlLdrNinthAction=NOACT,
UlPSU2LHOUeNum=NOACT, DlPSU2LHOUeNum=NOACT;
3.1.6.3.4 IV. Solutions to Load Balancing in a GSM Network

 General policy
If the load of the serving GSM cell is heavier than a pre-defined threshold, the load
balancing policy is used.
 If the serving GSM cell is congested and no resource is available, UEs move to an intra-
frequency or inter-frequency neighboring cell with the best signal quality through
directed retries to continue with services.
 If the serving GSM cell is heavily loaded, load-based handover is triggered to hand over
some UEs in the serving GSM cell to an inter-band or intra-band cell.
 If the serving GSM cell is heavily loaded, NC2 or PS handover is performed to hand
over UEs to a UMTS or LTE cell. However, NC2 and PS handovers cannot be put into
commercial use currently because the industry chain is immature.


Handover
GSM to LTE GBFD-511304 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Cell Load
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS load balancing

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS load
balancing.
Table 23.8 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS load balancing

Value
SET INTERRATOUTBS YES Whether to allow a

GCELLHOBASIC CHOEN handover from a 2G
to NO, inter-RAT
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
SET INTERRATINBSC YES Whether to allow a
GCELLHOBASIC HOEN handover from a 3G
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
Iur-g interface is
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
SET OutSysLoadHoEn YES This parameter
GCELLHOINTERR specifies whether to
ATLDB allow the inter-RAT
load handover in
connection mode
(after the assignment
is complete).
SET InterRatServiceLoad Load-based Policy for an inter-
GCELLHOINTERR HoSwitch RAT load-based
ATLDB handover in access
state.
When this parameter
is set to CnService-
based, an inter-RAT
load-based handover
is allowed.
When this parameter
or Dynamic-based,
an inter-RAT load-
based handover is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
allowed only if the

uplink load of the
UlLdrThrd2GCell
value of
DlLdrThrd2GCell,
and candidate cells
the load difference
between the serving
cells.
ADD LoadAccThres 80 Threshold for
GEXT3GCELL allowing MSs to
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers. MSs are
from other cells to
the cell through
load-based
handovers if any of
the following
conditions is met:
1. The cell load is
lower than or
equal to this
threshold when
HOCTRLSWIT
CH is set to
HOALGORITH
M1 and
LOADHOAD is
set to YES in the
SET
GCELLHOBAS
IC command.
2. The cell load is
lower than this
threshold in other
cases.
If neither of the
preceding
conditions is met,
MSs are not
allowed to hand

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
over from other

cells to the cell
through load-
based handovers.
SET GCELLHOAD LoadAccThres 80 Threshold for
allowing MSs to
cells to the cell
through load-based
handovers. MSs are
from other cells to
the cell through
load-based
handovers if any of
the following
conditions is met:
1. The cell load is
lower than or
equal to this
threshold when
HOCTRLSWIT
CH is set to
HOALGORITH
M1 and
LOADHOAD is
set to YES in the
SET
GCELLHOBAS
IC command.
2. The cell load is
lower than this
threshold in other
cases.
If neither of the
preceding
conditions is met,
MSs are not
allowed to hand
over from other
cells to the cell
through load-
based handovers.


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-

based;
\\Adding a 3G external cell
ADD GEXT3GCELL: LoadAccThres=80;
\\Setting advanced handover parameters of a cell
SET GCELLHOAD: LoadAccThres=80;
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE load balancing

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE load
balancing.
Table 23.9 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE load balancing

Value

cell supports GPRS.
NC2. In NC2 mode,
an MS sends the
BSC measurement
reports containing
information about
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.
SHO the MS handover
an LTE cell during
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
LOADRESELALL SET PERMIT Whether to allow
OW GCELLNC2PARA load-based cell
reselection. When
the uplink load or
downlink load is
greater than
LOADRESELSTA
RTTHRSH and the
level is smaller than

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
LOADRESELMA
XRXLEV in a
service cell, the cell
reselection is a load-
based reselection. If
to PERMIT(Permit)
and NC2 Load
Reselection Switch
is set to
Support(Support),
the load of the target
cell serves as a
parameter when you
attempt to enable the
load-based cell
reselection
algorithm.
LOADRESELSTAR SET 85 When the uplink
TTHRSH GCELLNC2PARA load or downlink
load of the cell
exceeds this
threshold, the load
reselection decision
is made.
LOADRESELRXT SET 60 When the uplink
HRSH GCELLNC2PARA load or downlink
load of the target cell
is lower than this
threshold, it can
accept the MSs from
the serving cell due
to load reselection.
LOADRESELMAX SET 40 Threshold for
RXLEV GCELLNC2PARA reselecting a cell.
When the receive
cell is lower than
this threshold, the
load reselection is
triggered.
neighboring cell to
become a candidate
cell during cell
reselection. When
the receive level of
the serving cell is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
lower than the value

of this parameter, it
indicates that the
normal cell
bad. In this case, the
parameter value is
used for the
calculation of the
times of the
occurrence of bad
normal cell
reselection level.
of the target cell
should meet the
[MAX (level of
serving cell, Cell
Reselection Level
Threshold) + Cell
Reselection
way, ping-pong
handovers do not
occur.
message is received
or the load cell
reselection is
initiated, the Cell
Penalty Level is
subtracted from the
failure occurs
repeatedly or that
multiple MSs are
reselected to the
same target cell.
This parameter is
valid only within
Cell Penalty
Duration.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

penalty can be
performed only in
this duration.
missed. If the
number of allowed
measurement reports
missed exceeds this
value, the previous
measurement report
is invalid.
when the receive
cell or the receive
larger the value of
this parameter, the
the former receive
levels. The smaller
the value of this
parameter, the
the later receive
levels.
cell

SET GCELLNC2PARA: LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85,
LOADRESELRXTHRSH=60, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6,
PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6,
RESELINTERVAL=2;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

3.1.6.4.2 II. Solutions to Service Steering in an LTE Network

 General policy
Service steering
another mode based on the QCI of the UE's service.
For services with QCI 1 to QCI 9, UEs can be configured to perform, forbid, or allow
service-based handovers. These three actions are determined by the InterRatHoState
parameter in the ServiceIrHoCfgGroup MO.
 If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to MUST_HO for a service with a certain QCI,
the eNodeB delivers measurement configuration information about the service-based
handover when a UE initiates this service.
 If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to NO_HO for a service with a certain QCI, the
eNodeB does not deliver measurement configuration information about the service-based
handover when a UE processing this service initiates a service that must be handed over.
 If the InterRatHoState parameter is set to PERMIT_HO for a service with a certain
service-based handover when a UE initiates this service. However, if a UE processing
this service initiates a service that must be handed over, the eNodeB delivers
measurement configuration information about the service-based handover.
Service steering policy
 Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed.
 When inter-RAT service steering is performed, it is recommended that the service-based
LTE-to-UMTS handover be enabled.
 If both the service-based LTE-to-UMTS handover and the service-based LTE-to-GSM
handover are enabled, the eNodeB determines the target network for service steering
depending on the order of measurement reports.
Configuration policy for services with different QCIs
 The value MUST_HO is recommended for QCI 1.
 The value NO_HO is recommended for QCIs 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 8.
 The value PERMIT_HO is recommended for QCIs 5 and 9.

Connected mode LTE to UMTS LOFD-001043 Service

to UTRAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

LTE to GSM LOFD-001046 Service

to GERAN
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS service
steering.
Table 23.11 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-UMTS service steering

Value

handover
algorithms. If
UtranServiceHoSw
itch is set to on,
service-based
handovers to
UTRAN are
enabled.
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies. If
UtranPsHoSwitch
is set to on, UTRAN
supports PS
handovers.
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies. If
UtranRedirectSwitch
is set to on,
redirection to
UTRAN is enabled.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies. If
BlindHoSwitch is
set to off, blind
handover is disabled.
not allowed for a
QCI.
LdSvBasedHoUtran MOD (-12) Indicates the Ec/N0
B1ThdEcn0 INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the
requirement for
Ec/N0 of the target
UTRAN cell. When
the measurement
value exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent. For a
this parameter to a
large value to
prevent unnecessary
with small signal
this parameter to a
timely handovers.
LdSvBasedHoUtran MOD (-101) Indicates the RSCP
B1ThdRscp INTERRATHOUTR threshold for event
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to UTRAN.
This parameter
specifies the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
requirement for
RSCP of the target
UTRAN cell.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.

MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH：HoAlgoSwitch= UtranServiceHoSwitch-

1,HoModeSwitch= UtranPsHoSwitch-1 & UtranRedirectSwitch-1 & BlindHoSwitch-0;
MOD SERVICEIRHOCFGGROUP: CnOperatorId=0, ServiceIrHoCfgGroupId=9, InterRatHoState=
PERMIT_HO;
InterRatHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-20, LdSvBasedHoUtranB1ThdEcn0=-12,
LdSvBasedHoUtranB1ThdRscp=-101;
 Parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM service
steering.
Table 23.12 Recommended parameter settings for LTE-to-GSM service steering

Value

handover
algorithms. The
switches are
described as follows:
UtranCsfbSwitch: If
CSFB to UTRAN is
disabled, this switch
does not take effect.
GeranCsfbSwitch: If
CSFB to GERAN is
disabled, this switch
does not take effect.
CsfbAdaptiveBlind
HoSwitch: If the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
blind handover
CsfbAdaptiveBlind
HoSwitch does not
take effect.
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
EutranVoipCapSwit
ch: This switch will
be removed in later
versions. In this
version, the setting
of this switch is still
synchronized
between the U2000
and the eNodeB, but
it is no longer used
internally.
Therefore, you are
advised to avoid
using this switch.
BlindHoSwitch: If
on, blind handovers
for CSFB are
enabled. If this
blind handovers for
CSFB are disabled.
GeranNaccSwitch:
This switch does not
take effect if
GeranCcoSwitch is
disabled.
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
EutranVoipCapSwit
be removed in later

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
versions. In this
synchronized
between the U2000
and the eNodeB, but
internally.
Therefore, you are
advised to avoid
using this switch.
BlindHoSwitch: If
on, blind handovers
for CSFB are
enabled. If this
blind handovers for
CSFB are disabled.
GeranNaccSwitch:
take effect if
GeranCcoSwitch is
disabled.
ENODEBALGOS switches
WITCH corresponding to the
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
EutranVoipCapSwit
be removed in later
versions. In this
synchronized
between the U2000
and the eNodeB, but
internally.
Therefore, you are
advised to avoid
using this switch.
BlindHoSwitch: If
on, blind handovers
for CSFB are
enabled. If this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

blind handovers for
CSFB are disabled.
GeranNaccSwitch:
take effect if
GeranCcoSwitch is
disabled.
not allowed for a
QCI.
LdSvBasedHoGeran MOD (-98) Indicates the RSSI
B1Thd INTERRATHOGER threshold for event
or service-based
inter-RAT handover
to GERAN.
When the
measurement value
exceeds this
threshold, a
measurement report
will be sent.

MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: HoAlgoSwitch= UtranServiceHoSwitch-1, HoModeSwitch=
UtranPsHoSwitch-1 & UtranRedirectSwitch-1 & BlindHoSwitch-0,
MOD SERVICEIRHOCFGGROUP: InterRatHoState= PERMIT_HO;
MOD INTERRATHOGERANGROUP: LdSvBasedHoGeranB1Thd=-98;
3.1.6.4.3 III. Solutions to Service Steering in a UMTS Network

 General policy
Solutions to UMTS service steering are as follows:
 Intra-RAT service steering is preferentially performed. UMTS-to-LTE/GSM service
steering is performed if it is required.
 Service steering between GSM and UMTS: PS services are preferentially carried on the
UMTS network and CS services are preferentially carried on the GSM network. During
RAB setup, UEs processing CS services switch to the GSM network through directed
retry and UEs processing PS services remain in the UMTS network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 For UMTS-to-LTE service steering, the service-based UMTS-to-LTE handover or

redirection is used to switch PS services to the LTE network, thereby improving data
service experience.
 During UMTS-to-LTE service-based handovers or redirections, it is recommended that
LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell Selection be also enabled. In this case, after
load is switched from LTE cells to UMTS cells, congested LTE cells will be filtered out
during UMTS-to-LTE service-based handovers or redirections.

Connected Mode UMTS to GSM WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT

WRFD-070007 GSM and
Based on Iur-g
UMTS to LTE WRFD-020129 Service-
Based PS Service
LTE
UMTS to LTE
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM service
steering.
Table 23.14 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-GSM service steering

Value
InterRATFilterCoef SET D3 L3 filter coefficient

UINTERRATHON for inter-RAT
COV measurement.
The parameter has
the same physical
meaning and
measurement model
as the inter-
frequency L3 filter
coefficient. The
reporting period is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
480 ms. For specific

analysis, see the
intra-frequency L3
filter coefficient and
inter-frequency L3
filter coefficient. For
details about this
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
Hystfor3C SET 0 Hysteresis for event
UINTERRATHON 3C.
COV
TrigTime3C SET D640 Time delay in
UINTERRATHON triggering event 3C.
COV
BSICVerify SET REQUIRED This parameter is
UINTERRATHON used to control cells
COV where inter-RAT
measurement reports
are triggered. If this
parameter is set to
REQUIRED, the
measurement
after the BSIC of the
measured cell is
decoded correctly. If
the parameter is set
to
NOT_REQUIRE,
the measurement
regardless of
whether the BSIC of
the measured cell is
decoded correctly.
This parameter is
valid for both
periodical reporting
mode and event-
triggered reporting
mode. However, to
ensure handover
reliability, it is
recommended that
the system reports
only the cells whose
BSIC is decoded
correctly. If this
parameter is set to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NOT_REQUIRED,
handovers are likely
to be triggered, but
handover reliability
is lower than that in
the situation this
parameter is set to
REQUIRED.
InterRATNCovHOC SET 21 Quality requirement
inter-RAT CS
handovers. If the
frequency is higher
event 3C is
triggered. Value 0
indicates the value
smaller than -110
dBm.
InterRATNCovHOP SET 21 Quality requirement
inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter is
used for
measurement control
on event 3C. If the
frequency is higher
event 3C is
triggered. Value 0
indicates the value
smaller than -110
dBm.
InterRATHOAttemp SET 16 Maximum number
ts UINTERRATHON of inter-RAT
COV handover attempts
after the non-
coverage-based
handover failures.
For each handover
attempt, a new target
cell where the UE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
has not been handed

over to and fulfills
the criterion can be
selected.
InterRATMeasTime SET 15 Length of a timer for
UINTERRATHON inter-RAT
COV measurements.
After the inter-RAT
measurement starts,
if no inter-RAT
handover is
performed when this
timer expires, the
inter-RAT
measurement is
stopped. In addition,
the compressed
mode (if activated)
should be
deactivated. Value 0
indicates that the
inter-RAT
measurement timer
is not started.
SndLdInfo2GsmInd SET OFF Switch for sending
UINTERRATHON load information to
COV the GSM network.
This parameter is
designed for the
UMTS load-based
access control
strategy when the
3G-to-2G handover
is required. When
the UE is handed
over from the UMTS
network to the GSM
network, the RNC
obtains the load
information of the
best cell and sends it
to the GSM network.
This parameter is
valid only for CS
service. The RNC
does not send UMTS
cell load information
to the GSM in PS
domain.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NcovHoOn2GldInd SET ON Threshold for 2G

UINTERRATHON load for outgoing
COV inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter
specifies the
threshold for 2G
load for outgoing
inter-RAT PS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this
parameter.
CSHOOut2GloadTh SET 80 Threshold for 2G
COV inter-RAT CS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
parameter.
PSHOOut2GloadTh SET 60 Threshold for 2G
COV inter-RAT PS
handovers.
This parameter
specifies the
threshold for 2G
load for outgoing
inter-RAT PS
handovers. If the
GSM load policy is
used, that is,
NcovHoOn2GldInd
in the SET
UINTERRATHON
COV command is
set to ON, a non-
coverage-based
handover from the
3G cell to the 2G
uplink or downlink
normalized load
carried in the
relocation response
message from the
2G network exceeds
the value of this
parameter.
PeriodFor3C SET 4 Interval between
UINTERRATHON handover attempts
COV for event 3A
AmntOfRpt3C SET 1 Number of handover
UINTERRATHON attempts after the
COV UE sends to the CN
a message indicating
that inter-RAT
handovers triggered
by event 3C fail.
InterRatPhyChFailN SET 3 Maximum number
um UINTERRATHON of inter-RAT
allowed due to
physical channel
failures. When the
number of inter-
RAT handover
failures due to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
physical channel
failures exceeds this
parameter, a penalty
is given to the UE.
During the time
specified by
PenaltyTimeForInt
erRatPhyChFail,
the UE is not
allowed to make
inter-RAT handover
attempts.
physical channel
25.331.
PenaltyTimeForPhy SET 30 Length of a penalty
ChFail UINTERRATHON timer for inter-RAT
due to physical
channel failures.
During the period
specified by
PenaltyTimeForPh
yChFail, the UE is
not allowed to make
inter-RAT handover
attempts.
physical channel
25.331.

\\Setting parameters in the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover
measurement algorithm
SET UINTERRATHONCOV: InterRATFilterCoef=D3, Hystfor3C=0, TrigTime3C=D640,
BSICVerify=REQUIRED, InterRATNCovHOCSThd=21, InterRATNCovHOPSThd=21,
InterRATHOAttempts=16, InterRATMeasTime=15, SndLdInfo2GsmInd=OFF,
NcovHoOn2GldInd=ON,
CSHOOut2GloadThd=80, PSHOOut2GloadThd=60, PeriodFor3C=4, AmntOfRpt3C=1,
InterRatPhyChFailNum=3, InterRatPhyChFailNum=30;
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE service
steering.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 23.15 Recommended parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE service steering

Parameter Value

UU2LTEHONCOV ty specifies the type of
measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
UU2LTEHONCOV specifies the layer 3
the LTE
measurement.
UU2LTEHONCOV LTE cell
measurements. The
to perform LTE cell
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
the RNC keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
coverage. This
to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what
specific
measurement results
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,
as is specified in

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
3GPP TS 25.331.
hysteresis for a UE
to report event 3C.
For detailed
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
UU2LTEHONCOV specifies the interval
time between
detection of event
3C and sending of
the measurement
report. How to set
this parameter is
related to slow
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover.
If RSRP is used as
the measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold.
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
cell measurements
during a non-
coverage-based
handover. If RSRQ
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
3C, event 3C can be

triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For
25.331.
UCELLU2LTEHO ty specifies the type of
NCOV measurement result
that a UE needs to
carry in an event-
triggered or
periodical
measurement report.
UCELLU2LTEHO specifies the layer 3
NCOV filter coefficient for
the LTE
measurement.
U2LTEMeasTime MOD 30(15) Length of a timer for
UCELLU2LTEHO LTE cell
NCOV measurements. The
to perform LTE cell
measurements.
When the timer
expires, the RNC
stops measuring
LTE cells. If the
the RNC keeps
measuring the LTE
cells.
NCOV measurement
quantity of a
handover target LTE
system in an event
3C measurement
report sent by a UE
during a handover
coverage. This
to RSRP or RSRQ.
Note that what

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
specific
measurement results
on the setting of
Report Type of
LTE Measurement,
as is specified in
3GPP TS 25.331.
NCOV hysteresis for a UE
to report event 3C.
For detailed
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
UCELLU2LTEHO specifies the interval
NCOV time between
detection of event
3C and sending of
the measurement
report. How to set
this parameter is
related to slow
description of the
parameter, see 3GPP
TS 25.331.
during a non-
coverage-based
handover.
If RSRP is used as
the measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold.
during a non-
coverage-based

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
handover. If RSRQ
is used as the
measurement
quantity for event
3C, event 3C can be
triggered only when
the target cell is
greater than the
threshold. For
25.331.
SHInd MOD HO_TO_GSM_SH Service handover
UTYPRABBASIC OULD_NOT_BE_P attribute.
ERFORM HO_TO_GSM_SHO
ULD_NOT_BE_PE
RFORM: Handover
to the 2G network is
performed when 3G
signals are weak but
2G signals are
strong.
UlFpMode MOD SILENT UL FP mode of this
UTYPRABBASIC type of RAB. For
details about normal
mode and silent
mode, see section
5.1.1 of 3GPP TS
25.427.
EUTRANSHIND MOD HO_TO_EUTRAN_ This parameter
UTYPRABBASIC SHOULD_BE_PER specifies whether to
FORM(HO_TO_EU allow the service-
TRAN_SHALL_NO based handover of
T_BE_PERFORM) UEs from UMTS to
LTE for a certain
type of service.
HO_TO_EUTRAN
_SHOULD_BE_PE
RFORM indicates
that UMTS to LTE
handover is allowed
for this type of
services.
HoSwitch SET HO_LTE_PS_OUT Handover algorithm
UCORRMALGOS _SWITCH- switch.
WITCH 1(HO_LTE_PS_OU HO_INTER_RAT_P
T_SWITCH-0) S_OUT_SWITCH
indicates that the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Parameter Value
RNC is allowed to
initiate inter-RAT
measure control and
the PS inter-RAT
hard handover from
the 3G network to
the 2G network.
HoSwitch SET HO_LTE_SERVIC Handover algorithm
UCORRMALGOS E_PSHO_OUT_SW switch.
WITCH ITCH- HO_LTE_SERVICE
1(HO_LTE_SERVI _PS_OUT_SWITC
CE_PSHO_OUT_S H: Whether to
WITCH-0) enable service-based
redirection from
UMTS to LTE.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
can send an LTE
MEASUREMENT
CONTROL message
based on services
and initiate a
service-based PS
redirection from
UMTS to LTE.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
cannot initiate a
service-based PS
redirection from
UMTS to LTE.
PROCESSSWITCH SET ON Whether the RNC
5: URRCTRLSWITC obtains the load
INTERRAT_LOAD H information about
LTE_SWITCH the RAN
information
management (RIM)
procedure.
U2LLTELoadSwitc ADD ON Whether to filter
h: UCELLHOCOMM neighboring LTE
based UMTS-to-
LTE handovers or
redirections.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

LTEMeasTypOf3C= MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C= RSRP,
Hystfor3C=4, TrigTime3C= D0,TargetRatThdRSRP=36,TargetRatThdRSRQ=20;
TrigTime3C=D640, LTEMeasTypOf3C= MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D3,
TargetRatThdRSRP=36, TargetRatThdRSRQ=20;
\\Modifying the basic information of the typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB)
MOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=1, MaxBitRate=8000, SHInd=
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM, UlFpMode= SILENT, EUTRANSHIND=
HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM;
\\Setting the connection-oriented algorithm switches of an RNC
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch= HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1
& HO_LTE_SERVICE_PSHO_OUT_SWITCH-1
3.1.6.4.4 IV. Solutions to Service Steering in a GSM Network

 General policy
GSM service steering policies are as follows:
 GSM networks carry voice services and low-rate data services.
 The Service UTRAN CCO Value part and Service E-UTRAN CCO Value part IEs from
the CN indicate the most suitable RAT for the current service. If the IEs indicate that
both the UTRAN and E-UTRAN can be the target RATs, the target cell is selected based
on the priority of neighboring cells. That is, UEs are handed over to high-priority cells.

UE Mode Service Recommended
Interoperability Type Features
Connected Mode GSM to UMTS GBFD-114321

GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
GSM to LTE GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS service
steering.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 23.17 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS service steering

Value
INTERRATOUTBS SET YES(NO) Whether to allow a

to NO, inter-RAT
outgoing BSC
handovers or inter-
INTERRATINBSC SET YES(NO) Whether to allow a
to NO, inter-RAT
incoming BSC
Iur-g interface is
DISABLED in the
common
measurement
message reported to
a different system.
InterRatServiceLoad SET CnService- Policy for an inter-
HoSwitch GCELLHOINTERR based(OFF) RAT load-based
ATLDB handover in access
state.
When this parameter
is set to CnService-
based, an inter-RAT
load-based handover
is allowed.
When this parameter
or Dynamic-based,
an inter-RAT load-
based handover is
allowed only if the
uplink load of the
UlLdrThrd2GCell
value of
DlLdrThrd2GCell,
and candidate cells

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

the load difference
between the serving
cells.
OUTSYSSERVHO SET NO When the Service
REASSIGNEN OTHSOFTPARA Handover field in an
ASS REQ message
is 0, a direct retry
process targeted at a
3G network is
initiated. If the direct
retry fails, the
system decides
whether to re-assign
channels for the
current call based on
this parameter.
OUTSYSSERVICE SET OPEN(CLOSE) Whether to allow
HOEN OTHSOFTPARA inter-RAT handover.
set to OPEN, the
BSS decides
whether to hand over
ongoing services to
the 3G network
according to the
contents of the
Service Handover
information element
in the ASS REQ and
HO REQ messages.
BET3GHOEN SET YES(NO) Whether to enable
cell handover to a
3G neighboring cell
is allowed.
HOOPTSEL SET Pre_3G_Cell(Pre_2 This parameter
GCELLHOUTRAN G_CellThres) specifies whether a
is preferentially
cell for handovers.
When this parameter
is set to
Pre_2G_Cell, the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
BSC preferentially
selects a 2G
target cell for
handovers. When
to Pre_3G_Cell, the
BSC preferentially
selects a 3G
target cell for
handovers. When
to
Pre_2G_CellThres,
the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell if the
neighboring 2G cell
to the value of HO
Preference
Threshold for 2G
BSC preferentially
2G cell as the
the first in the
equal to or smaller
the BSC
a neighboring 3G
target cell.
Otherwise, the BSC
a neighboring 2G
target cell.
HORSCPTH3G SET 20(50) Level threshold for

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

A better cell
handover to a 3G
the measured RSCP
of a 3G neighboring
the sum of this
parameter and
RSCPOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for the 3G
a period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
HOECNOTH3G SET 25(35) Threshold for
When FDDREP in
the SET
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
set to Ec/N0, a
better cell handover
to a 3G neighboring
cell can be triggered
only if the measured
Ec/N0 of a 3G
neighboring cell is
ECNOOFF in the
ADD G3GNCELL
command for a
period of time.
The decibel value
as follows: (For
0: CPICH Ec/Io <
-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.
RSCPOFF ADD G3GNCELL 3 Offset in the RSCP
of a 3G neighboring
cell. The RSCP
reported by the MS
minus the value of
this parameter is
used as the level in
the K criteria for
handover decisions.
The level is used for
handovers from 2G
networks to 3G
networks.
The decibel value

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

as follows: (For
0: CPICH RSCP <
-115 dBm
1: -115 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-114 dBm
2: -114 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP <
-113 dBm
...
61: -55 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -54
dBm
62: -54 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP < -53
dBm
63: -53 dBm ≤
CPICH RSCP.
ECNOOFF ADD G3GNCELL 3 Offset in the Ec/N0
of a 3G neighboring
cell. As a
performance counter
for FDD cells,
Ec/N0 indicates the
ratio of the energy
per received chip to
the spectral noise
power density.
If FDDREP in the
SET
GCELLCCUTRA
NSYS command is
set to Ec/N0, the
Ec/N0 reported by
the MS minus the
value of this
the level in the K
is used for
handovers from 2G
networks to 3G
networks.
The decibel value

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
as follows: (For
0: CPICH Ec/Io <
-24 dB
1: -24 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < -22
dB
...
47: -1 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB ≤
CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB ≤ CPICH
Ec/Io.
HOSTAT3GTDD ADD G3GNCELL 5(10) Period during which
if neighboring 3G
cells are TDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies N in the
P/N rule.
HODURT3GTDD ADD G3GNCELL 4(8) Period during which
the conditions for
3G cell are met if
are TDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
met for P out of N

MRs. This parameter
specifies P in the
P/N rule.
HOSTAT3G ADD G3GNCELL 5(10) Period during which
if neighboring 3G
cells are FDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies N in the
P/N rule.
HODURT3G ADD G3GNCELL 4(8) Period during which
the conditions for
3G cell are met if
are FDD cells.
According to the
P/N rule, handovers
to a better 3G cell
can be triggered
when the conditions
for handovers to a
better 3G cell are
met for P out of N
MRs. This parameter
specifies P in the
P/N rule.

SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=CnService-based,
SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=NO, OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN;
SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell, HOPRETH2G=25,
HORSCPTH3G=20, HOECNOTH3G=25,

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
\\Modifying 3G neighboring cells

MOD G3GNCELL: RSCPOFF=3, ECNOOFF=3, HOSTAT3GTDD=5, HODURT3GTDD=4, HOSTAT3G=5,
HODURT3G=4;
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE service steering

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE service
steering.
Table 23.18 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE service steering

Value

cell supports GPRS.
NC2. In NC2 mode,
an MS sends the
BSC measurement
reports containing
information about
neighboring cells,
and the network
controls cell
reselection for the
MS.
SHO the MS handover
an LTE cell during
parameter is set to
SUPPORT, the LTE
coming cell
handover during PS
In addition, the MS
must support the PS
handover.
TrafficReselAllow GCELLNC2PARA PERMIT Whether to allow the
cell service
reselection. When
to "PERMIT", the
RAT of the
candidate cell is
considered in the
algorithm for cell
service reselection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

SET GCELLNC2PARA: TrafficReselAllow= PERMIT;

GSM network.
3.1.6.5.2 II. CSFB

capabilities.
 Flash CSFB

m Network Delay

d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
ng
UMTS
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
ng redirection-
UMTS based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be UMTS)
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
ng than PS
UMTS redirection-
cells based CSFB.
must be (LTE to
configure UMTS)
d.
 RAC must

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.
ng 3.5s.
UMTS
cells
must be
configure
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng
UMTS
external
cells.

improving the CSFB
handover.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
is recommended.
handovers.

m Network Delay

configure
d with
frequenc
y groups.
 Neighbori
ng GSM
cells
must be
configure
d for
eRAN3.0
.
ng GSM based CSFB.
cells (LTE to
must be GSM)
configure
d for

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

m Network Delay
eRAN3.0
.
 RAC must
be
configure
d when
configuri
ng GSM
external
cells.
 Neighbori CSFB
ng GSM reduces the
cells delay from
must be 6s to 5s.
configure
d.
 RAC must
be
configure
d for
GSM
external
cells.

GSM CSFB. CSFB.
recommended.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

following reasons:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
suspended.

Method?

iPhone5.
iPhone5.


Guarantee for LTE
Emergency Calls
to UTRAN
Fallback to UTRAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

CSFB
with LAI to UTRAN
CSFB
to GERAN
Fallback to GERAN
CSFB to GERAN


value

handover
algorithms.
UtranCsfbSwitch: If
on, CSFB to
UTRAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to UTRAN.
On switches used to
enable or disable
handover
algorithms.
GeranCsfbSwitch: If
on, CSFB to
GERAN is enabled
and UEs can fall
back to GERAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
switches
inputs based on
which the eNodeB
determines handover
policies.
BlindHoSwitch: If
for CSFB are
disabled.
CS fallback to
UTRAN. When CS
fallback to UTRAN
is applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. This
parameter indicates
the RSCP
requirement for the
UTRAN cells to be
included in the
measurement report.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one UTRAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
are met.
fallback to UTRAN.
When CS fallback to
UTRAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
event B1. When

detecting that the
least one UTRAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.
threshold for event
fallback to GERAN.
A UE sends a
measurement report
related to event B1
to the eNodeB when
one GERAN cell
exceeds this
threshold and other
see 3GPP TS
36.331.
fallback to GERAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

value
When CS fallback to
GERAN is
applicable, this
UEs and used in the
evaluation of
whether to trigger
event B1. When
detecting that the
least one GERAN
cell meets the
entering condition,
the UE does not
send a measurement
immediately.
Instead, the UE
sends a report only
when the signal
meets the entering
parameter helps
decrease the number
of occasionally
triggered event
number of
handovers, and the
number of incorrect
handovers, and
therefore helps
prevent unnecessary
handovers. For
36.331.


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

features


UTRAN
WRFD-150215 SRVCC
Handover
GERAN
GBFD-511309 SRVCC


Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

3.1.6.6.1 I. Solutions to GSM-to-LTE Fast Return
GL dual-mode UEs can return to the LTE network fast after voice services are released and
the CHANNEL RELEASE message carrying the LTE frequency is delivered. The following
figure shows the scheme of GSM-to-LTE fast return.
General policy:
1. The GSM-to-LTE fast return is performed for CSFB UEs that can be recognized by the
MSC.
2. The GSM-to-LTE fast return is performed for SRVCC UEs that can be recognized by the
BSC.
3. The GSM-to-LTE cell reselection is performed for UEs that cannot use fast return (that
is, CSFB or SRVCC UEs that cannot be recognized by the MSC).
Requirements of GSM-to-LTE fast return on the target cell
1. The conditions for UE camping on the LTE cell are met.
2. The threshold for UE camping on the LTE cell can be configured through the
CELLSEL.
Method used by the MSC to recognize CSFB UEs
After voice services are released, the MSC delivers the CLEAR COMMAND message
containing the CSFB indication IE so the BSC can recognize CSFB UEs.
Method of identifying SRVCC UEs on the GSM side
The BSC configures default SAI and compares this value with the SAI in an HO Request
message. If they are consistent, the BSC identifies a UE that is handed over to GSM through
SRVCC as an SRVCC UE. If they are inconsistent, the BSC does not identify the UE as an
SRVCC UE.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Released CS GSM to LTE GBFD-511312 Fast LTE

Reselection at 2G CS Call
Release
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE CS fast return.

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE CS fast
return.
Table 23.27 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-LTE CS fast return

MOD GLTENCELL SPTBLINDHO UNSUPPORT Whether to support

the blind handover
from the source
GSM cell to the
target LTE cell. The
blind handover from
the source GSM cell
to the target LTE
cell indicates that the
MS in the GSM cell
is handed over to the
target LTE cell
without measuring
the target LTE cell.
MOD GLTENCELL SPTRAPIDSEL UNSUPPORT Whether a quick
source GSM cell to
allowed. Quick
source GSM cell to
the target LTE cell
indicates that the
CHANNEL
RELEASE message
sent to the MS
carries the
information about
reselection
immediately after
channel release.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MOD GLTENCELL NCELLPRI 255 Common priority of

a neighboring LTE
cell. Value 0
priority, value 7
priority, and value
255 is invalid.

\\Modifying neighboring LTE cells
MOD GLTENCELL: SPTRAPIDSEL=SUPPORT, SPTBLINDHO=UNSUPPORT,
SPTRAPIDSEL=UNSUPPORT, NCELLPRI=6;
3.1.6.6.2 Solutions to UMTS-to-LTE Fast Return

After voice services are released, the RNC forcibly redirects CSFB UEs to the LTE network
no matter whether PS services are being processed or RRC connections exist. The following
figure shows the scheme of UMTS-to-LTE fast return.
 General policy
− The UMTS-to-LTE fast return is performed for CSFB or SRVCC UEs that can be
recognized by the RNC.
− The UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection is performed for UEs that cannot use fast return
(that is, CSFB or SRVCC UEs that cannot be recognized by the RNC).
 Requirements of UMTS-to-LTE fast return on the target cell

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
CELLSEL.
 Method used by the RNC to recognize CSFB UEs
The RNC considers a UE as a CSFB UE if any of following conditions is met:
− The RELOCATION REQUET message contains the cause value "CS Fallback
triggered."
− The RELOCATION REQUEST message contains the CSFB Information IE whose
value is CSFB or CSFB High Priority, which has been supported.
− The following conditions are met:
가 The RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message contains V860 but does not
contain the Pre-redirection info IE, which has been supported.
나 The value of Support of E-UTRA FDD is DoesSupportEUTRAFDD or the
value of Support of E-UTRA TDD is DoesSupportEUTRATDD in UE radio
access capability->UE multi-mode/multi-RAT capability in the RRC
CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message.
다 Upon receipt of the RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message, the
RNC starts the 10s timer. Before the timer expires, the CS service is
successfully set up. The scenario in which the active and standby RNCs are
switched over is not considered.
− The RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message contains the CSFB Indication IE,
which requires support from UEs.
− After voice services are released, the IU RELEASE COMMAND message from the
CS domain contains the End Of CSFB IE, which requires support from the MSC.
 Method used by the RNC to recognize SRVCC UEs
The RNC considers a UE as an SRVCC UE if the following conditions are met:
− A UE is from an LTE cell, indicated by the "UE History Information" IE. A UE
sends a Relocation Request message when it is handed over from the LTE network
to the UMTS network and the value of the "UE History Information" IE in the
message is "Last Visited E-UTRAN Cell Information." The "UE History
Information" IE is contained in "Source To Target Transparent Container (source
RNC to Target RNC Transparent Container)" in the Relocation Request message.
− The UE has a CS service.
− The UE is not handed over to the UMTS network. The value of the "cause" IE in
the Relocation Request message is not "CS Fallback triggered(268)", and the
message does not carry the "CSFB Information" IE. UEs enabled with Ultra-Flash
CSFB are processed in the same way.
The following table lists the features recommended for a GUL triple-mode network.
Type
RRC_REL_UE CS/CS+PS U->L WRFD-140226 Fast Return

from UMTS to LTE
(UMTS)
RRC_REL_UE CS/CS+PS U->L WRFD-171223 Fast Return
to LTE for SRVCC User

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Parameter settings for UMTS-to-LTE fast return

The following table lists recommended parameter settings.
MOD FastReturnToLTES HO_UMTS_TO_LT Whether the

UCELLHOCOM witch E_FAST_RETURN information about
MOD FastReturnToLTES _SWITCH-0 frequencies of
UCELLHOCOM witch PERFENH_PS_FAS neighboring LTE
T_RETURN_LTE_ cells is carried in the
SET HoSwitch RRC
UCORRMALGOS SWITCH-0
PerfEnhanceSwitch3 CONNECTION
WITCH HO_UMTS_TO_LT RELEASE message
OptimizationSwitch E_FAST_RETURN
SET 6 the RNC sends to a
UCORRMPARA _SWITCH-0 CSFB UE in a
FastReturnToLTES PERFENH_PS_FAS UMTS cell for RRC
SET witch
URRCTRLSWITC T_RETURN_LTE_ connection release.
H HoSwitch1 SWITCH-0 When this switch is
PerfEnhanceSwitch7 U2L_CSFB_FAST_ turned on, the
MOD information about
UCELLHOCOMM FastReturnToLTES RETURN_PROC_O
PTI_SWITCH-0 UE-supported
SET witch frequencies of
UCORRMALGOS HoSwitch1 HO_CSFB_BASED neighboring LTE
WITCH _MEAS_FAST_RE cells is carried in the
TURN_SWITCH-0 RRC
SET
UCORRMPARA HO_CSFB_BASED CONNECTION
_MEAS_FAST_RE RELEASE message.
ADD TURN_SWITCH-0 When this switch is
UCELLHOCOMM turned off, the
PERFENH_CS_ON
SET LY_MEAS_FAST_ information about
UCORRMALGOS RETURN_SWITCH UE-supported
WITCH -0 frequencies of
neighboring LTE
HO_CSFB_BASED cells is not carried in
_RSCP_FAST_RET the RRC
URN_SWITCH-0 CONNECTION
HO_CSFB_BASED RELEASE message.
_RSCP_FAST_RET Whether the RNC
URN_SWITCH-0 releases the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps a
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
RRC connection by
sending to a UE an
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
that carries the
information about
UE-supported LTE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
frequencies if the
UE keeps the PS
connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
the RNC does not
release the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps the
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service.
Whether the
information about
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
the RNC sends to a
CSFB UE in a
UMTS cell for RRC
connection release.
When this switch is
turned on, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
When this switch is
turned off, the
information about
UE-supported
frequencies of
neighboring LTE
the RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message.
Whether the RNC
releases the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps a
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

RRC connection by
sending to a UE an
RRC
CONNECTION
RELEASE message
that carries the
information about
UE-supported LTE
frequencies if the
UE keeps the PS
connection after
terminating the CS
service. When this
the RNC does not
release the RRC
connection if a
CSFB UE keeps the
PS connection after
terminating the CS
service.
Whether the RNC
return from UMTS
to LTE for a CSFB
UE immediately
Release Command
message from the
CS domain of the
CN. 1: Indicates that
this switch is set to
ON. The RNC
return from UMTS
to LTE for a CSFB
UE immediately
Release Command
message from the
CS domain of the
CN. When this
the NodeB reports
more RADIO LINK
FAILURE
INDICATION
messages and the
value returned by
VS.IUB.RLFailInd.S
yncFail increases. In
this situation, it is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
recommended that
DSCR_RLREL_A
FTER_RRC_REL_
COMPLETE under
the
OptimizationSwitc
h9 parameter in the
SET
URRCTRLSWITC
H command be also
set to 1.
0: Indicates that this
switch is set to OFF.
The RNC does not
trigger a fast return
from UMTS to LTE
until the CS RAB is
released.
Whether the RNC
triggers the
measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return for CSFB UEs
after their voice
on the UMTS
network. When this
switch is turned on
and the UE supports
LTE measurement,
the UE triggers an
LTE measurement
after its voice
After the RNC
receives the
measurement report,
the RNC decides
U2L fast return
based on the
measurement result.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
can perform only a
the UE.
Whether the RNC
triggers the
measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return for CSFB UEs

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
after their voice

on the UMTS
network. When this
switch is turned on
and the UE supports
LTE measurement,
the UE triggers an
LTE measurement
after its voice
After the RNC
receives the
measurement report,
the RNC decides
U2L fast return
based on the
measurement result.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
can perform only a
the UE.
Whether an SRVCC
or CSFB UE whose
single CS service
has been released
can trigger a
measurement-based
UMTS-to-LTE fast
return with only
signaling
connections. When
on, if an SRVCC or
CSFB UE whose
single CS service
has been released
does not have PS
service, the RNC can
trigger an LTE
measurement to
enable the UE to
perform a U2L fast
return.
Whether the RNC
triggers the UMTS-
to-LTE fast return
for CSFB UEs based
on the RSCP of the
voice services are

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
released on the
UMTS network.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
sends a periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message to the UE,
measure the RSCP
UE is greater than
the value of
U2LNCovRscpThd,
Otherwise, the RNC
blind fast return.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
does not send the
UE the periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message instructing
the UE to measure
cell.
Whether the RNC
triggers the UMTS-
to-LTE fast return
for CSFB UEs based
on the RSCP of the
voice services are
released on the
UMTS network.
When this switch is
turned on, the RNC
sends a periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message to the UE,
measure the RSCP
UE is greater than
the value of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
U2LNCovRscpThd,
Otherwise, the RNC
blind fast return.
When this switch is
turned off, the RNC
does not send the
UE the periodic
intra-frequency
measurement control
message instructing
the UE to measure
cell.

//Activating the UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return functions
//Enabling the cell-level UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return
functions
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1,FastReturnToLTESwitch=
HO_UMTS_TO_LTE_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-
1&PERFENH_PS_FAST_RETURN_LTE_SWITCH-1;
//Enabling the RNC-level UMTS-to-LTE fast return and enhanced UMTS-to-LTE fast return
functions
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:
HoSwitch=HO_UMTS_TO_LTE_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-1; SET
UCORRMPARA:PerfEnhanceSwitch3=PERFENH_PS_FAST_RETURN_LTE_SWITCH-1;
//Turning on the switch for optimized fast return of CSFB UEs to LTE
SET
URRCTRLSWITCH:OptimizationSwitch6=U2L_CSFB_FAST_RETURN_PROC_OPTI_S
WITCH-1;
//Activating the LTE measurement-based fast return function
//Performing the following configurations while enabling the UMTS-to-LTE fast return
function
//Turning on the cell-level switch for LTE measurement-based fast return
MOD UCELLHOCOMM:CellId=1,FastReturnToLTESwitch=
HO_CSFB_BASED_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_SWITCH-1;
//Turning on the RNC-level switch for LTE measurement-based fast return
SET
UCORRMALGOSWITCH:HoSwitch1=HO_CSFB_BASED_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_SWI
TCH-1;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
//Turning on the switch for measurement-based fast return to LTE after a single CS service is
released
SET
UCORRMPARA:PerfEnhanceSwitch7=PERFENH_CS_ONLY_MEAS_FAST_RETURN_S
WITCH-1;
//Turning on the cell-level switch for fast return based on serving cell RSCP measurement
MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, FastReturnToLTESwitch=
//Turning on the RNC-level switch for fast return based on serving cell RSCP measurement
SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch1=
3.1.6.6.3 Solutions to GSM-to-UMTS Fast Return

The MS is performing a CS call in the GSM network. After the call is terminated, the BSC
includes the IE Cell selection indicator after release of all TCH and SDCCH in the Channel
Release message and this IE carries information of neighboring WCDMA cells so that dual-
mode MSs can fast return to the WCDMA network. The network and MS must support this
solution.
General policy:
The GSM-to-UMTS fast return is performed for CS services in the GSM network.

Released CS GSM to UMTS GBFD-114325 Fast

WCDMA Reselection at 2G
CS Call Release

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS fast return

The following table provides recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS fast return.
Table 23.29 Recommended parameter settings for GSM-to-UMTS fast return

SET GCELLCCAD CELLSELECTAFT YES This parameter

ERCALLREL specifies whether to
allow a mobile
phone to
preferentially camp
on a 3G cell after a
call is terminated in
the areas covered by
both the GSM
network and the
UMTS network.
SET INTERRATCELLR YES Whether to send the
OTHSOFTPARA ESELOPTEN MI system
information (SI)
after
INTERRATCELL
RESELEN is set to
YES(Yes).
set to ON(On) and
INTERRATCELL
RESELEN in the
SET
GCELLHOBASIC
command is set to
YES(Yes), the BSC
sends the MI SI.
SET INTERRATCELLR YES Whether the 2G-to-
GCELLHOBASIC ESELEN 3G cell reselection is
allowed.
set to YES, the
reselection from 2G
allowed.

\\Setting advanced call control parameters of a cell.
SET GCELLCCAD: CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES;
SET OTHSOFTPARA: INTERRATCELLRESELOPTEN=YES;

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

3.1.7 Single-Frequency Interoperability Solution

The networking of some networks is simple. UMTS and LTE have only one frequency. GSM
has a basic network layer. Interoperability policies are also relatively simple. This section uses
the GUL networking as an example to describe the interoperability policies in single
frequency scenarios.
3.1.7.1 Camping Scheme of UEs in Idle Mode
Service continuity differences between the single frequency and multiple frequencies are as
follows:
1. LTE: Different frequencies do not exist. UEs preferentially camp on LTE networks.
Intra-RAT camping priority differentiation is not required.
2. UMTS: Different frequencies do not exist. Intra-RAT camping priority differentiation is
not required.
3. GSM: It is the same as the multi-frequency camping scheme of UEs in idle mode.
3.1.7.2 Service Continuity Solution

In a network of multiple RATs, if the coverage or signal quality of one RAT or frequency band
is poor, coverage- or signal quality-based inter-RAT or inter-frequency handovers or
redirections will be triggered. It is recommended that a more recent mode be selected as the
target cell to ensure user experience. The following figure shows the inter-RAT service
continuity solution.
Service continuity differences between the single frequency and multiple frequencies are as
follows:
1. LTE: The inter-frequency handover is not supported. Only intra-frequency handover and
inter-RAT handover are supported.
2. UMTS: The inter-frequency handover is not supported. Only intra-frequency handover
and inter-RAT handover are supported.
Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3. GSM: It is the same as the multi-frequency service continuity solution.
3.1.7.3 Load Balancing Solution
Load balancing differences between a single frequency and multiple frequencies:

1. LTE: Inter-frequency load balancing is not supported. Only inter-RAT load balancing is
supported.
2. UMTS: Inter-frequency load balancing is not supported. Only inter-RAT load balancing
is supported.
3. GSM: It is the same as the multi-frequency load balancing solution.
3.1.7.4 Service Differentiation Solution

Service differentiation allows UEs processing different types of services (such as CS services
and PS services) to be carried on networks of different RATs based on networks'
characteristics and UEs' capabilities.
Service differentiation differences between the single frequency and multiple frequencies:
1. LTE: Inter-frequency service differentiation is not supported. Only inter-RAT service
differentiation is supported. Possible service differentiation: GSM and UMTS bear CS
services. LTE bears PS services. When the service-based L2U handover and L2G
handover are enabled at the same time, the network determines the target mode for
service differentiation based on the sequence of measurement reports.
2. UMTS: Inter-frequency service differentiation is not supported. Only inter-RAT service
differentiation is supported.
3. GSM: It is the same as the multi-frequency service differentiation solution.
3.1.7.5 Voice Service Solution

It is the same as the multi-frequency voice service solution.
3.1.7.6 Fast Return Solution

It is the same as the multi-frequency voice service solution.
3.2 Parameter Configuration Principles

Connected-mode-related parameters and idle-mode-related parameters are involved in an
inter-RAT network. The connected-mode-related parameters are directly related to handovers
and control the following operations:
 Starting an inter-RAT handover measurement

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Exiting an inter-RAT handover measurement

 Starting an inter-RAT handover
The idle-mode-related parameters are directly related to the inter-RAT reselection and
perform the following operations:
1. Starting an inter-RAT reselection measurement
2. Starting an inter-RAT reselection
3.2.1 Parameter Configuration Principles

In most inter-RAT network scenarios, the principles for networking design are as follows:
Parameters in this section are configured according to these principles. In other special scenarios, the
following parameter configurations can be adjusted based on specific scenarios.
1. Principle of priority within a system: When inter-frequency and inter-RAT networks
coexist, the priority of inter-frequency neighboring cells is higher than that of inter-RAT
neighboring cells.
2. Preventing ping-pong reselections: The inter-RAT ping-pong reselections caused by
improper parameter configurations must be prevented.
3. Principle of reselections prior to handovers: If a UE stays in an area where the UE cannot
be reselected to an inter-RAT neighboring cell and initiates a service request to enter the
connected mode, the coverage-based inter-RAT handover will be triggered. As a result,
the UE is handed over to an inter-RAT neighboring cell. This situation needs to be
prevented.
4. Principle of the LTE/UMTS/GSM frequency priorities: The priorities of the
LTE/UMTS/GSM frequencies are configured based on operators' requirement. In most
cases, priorities 4 to 7 are for LTE, priorities 2 and 3 are for UMTS, and priorities 0 and
1 are for GSM.
5. Principle of the interrelated parameter configurations: The consistency between
parameters must be kept for configuring interrelated parameters.
3.2.2 Description of Parameters for Inter-RAT Handover

Threshold Configuration
The most important parameters during an inter-RAT handover are the level threshold of the
serving cell and the handover level threshold of the target cell when an inter-RAT
measurement is started. This section uses the example of inter-RAT handovers from UMTS to
LTE and LTE to UMTS to describe the basis for setting the level thresholds of the serving cell
and target cell.
3.2.2.1 Configuration of Inter-RAT Handover Threshold from LTE to

Another System
3.2.2.1.1 Basic Concepts
Table 23.30 Events that trigger inter-RAT handovers from LTE to another system
Event ID Event Contents Remarks
A1 The signal strength of a Used to exit the inter-

serving cell is higher than an frequency measurement

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
absolute threshold. (GAP measurement)

A2 The signal strength of a Used to start the inter-
serving cell is lower than an frequency measurement
absolute threshold. (GAP measurement) of UEs
in connected mode
B1 The signal strength of an Used to hand over to an
inter-RAT neighboring cell inter-RAT cell
is higher than an absolute
threshold.
B2 The signal strength of a Seldom used
serving cell is lower than an
absolute threshold and the
signal strength of an inter-
RAT neighboring cell is
higher than another absolute
threshold.
Event A2 is used as an example. If a serving cell and a neighboring cell are working in the
same mode (for example, the LTE mode) and the reference signal received power
(RSRP)/reference signal received quality (RSRQ) of the serving cell measured by the UE is
lower than the threshold for event A2, the inter-frequency measurement is started. Then, the
measurement result is sent to the serving cell.
Event B1 is used as an example. If a serving cell and a neighboring cell are working in
different modes (for example, the serving cell working in LTE mode while the neighboring
cell working in UMTS mode), and the RSRP or Ec/N0 of the neighboring cell measured by
the UE is higher than the threshold for event B2, the UE will report this event B1 to the
serving cell.
3.2.2.1.2 Setting the Threshold for Event A2

The threshold for event A2 is determined by link budget. In areas covered by LTE networks
with the bandwidth of 20 MHz in FDD mode, an uplink edge rate of 1 Mbit/s and the
maximum downlink edge rate of 2.2 Mbit/s are required. In this case, the threshold for event
A2 is set to -115 dBm. The following figure shows the procedure for link budget.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
If the threshold for event A2 is determined by actual conditions, the default threshold is
increased by 1 dB to 2 dB compared with link budget.
To implement the prior handover of the FDD/TDD/UMTS/GSM mode, the LTE TDD inter-
freq A2 Threshold RSRP Offset, LTE FDD inter-freq A2 Threshold RSRP Offset,
UTRAN A2 Threshold RSRP Offset, and GERAN A2 Threshold RSRP Offset parameters
are introduced to preferentially trigger the measurement of a certain mode.
3.2.2.1.3 Setting the Threshold for Event B1

The threshold for inter-RAT event B1 is set to a proper value so that a UE can stably perform
services in inter-RAT neighboring cells. It is recommended that the value of event B1 for
neighboring UMTS cells be set to -103 dBm. The threshold for event B1 on the LTE side
must be higher than the threshold for event 2D on the UMTS side.
Threshold for event B1 = Threshold for event 2D on the UMTS side + 5 dB to 10 dB

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.2.2.2 Configuration of Inter-RAT Handover Threshold from UMTS to

Another System
3.2.2.2.1 Basic Concepts
Table 23.31 Events that trigger inter-RAT handovers from UMTS to another system
2F The signal strength of a Used to exit the inter-

serving cell is higher than an frequency measurement
absolute threshold. (GAP measurement)
2D The signal strength of a Used to start the inter-
serving cell is lower than an frequency measurement
absolute threshold. (GAP measurement) of UEs
in connected mode
3A The signal strength of an Used to hand over to an
inter-RAT neighboring cell inter-RAT cell
is higher than an absolute
threshold.
3.2.2.2.2 Setting the Threshold for Event 2D

The threshold for event 2D is based on link budget. In areas covered by UMTS networks, the
continuity of AMR 12.2 kbit/s service must be ensured. In this case, the default value of
LTEThd2DEcN0 is set to -15 dB. The default value of LTEThd2DRSCP is set to -110
dBm. The following figures show the procedure for link budget.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.24 Setting the threshold for AMR12.2

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.25 Setting the threshold for PS services
If the threshold for event 2D is determined by actual conditions, the default value of RSCP is
increased by 1 dBm to 2 dBm compared with link budget. The default value of Ec/N0 is
almost the same as that in the link budget.
3.2.2.2.3 Setting the Threshold for 3A Event

The threshold for inter-RAT event 3A is set to a proper value so that a UE can stably perform
services in inter-RAT neighboring cells. It is recommended that the value of event 3A
threshold be set to -105 dBm. The threshold for event 3A must be higher than the threshold
for event A2 on the LTE side.
Threshold for event 3A = Threshold for event A2 on the LTE side + 5 dBm to 10 dBm
3.2.3 Relationship Between Parameters

Based on parameter configuration principles in preceding sections, this section describes
parameters involved in inter-RAT networks and relationship between them in detail due to the
typical inter-RAT reselections and handovers to LTE neighboring cells. For details about the
relationship between parameters of cell reselections and handovers to other systems, see LTE
Parameter Configuration.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
3.2.3.1 Relationship Between Inter-RAT Reselection Parameters

1. Parameter for starting inter-frequency and inter-RAT reselection measurement
(SNonIntraSearch)
Figure 1.26 Parameter for starting inter-frequency and inter-RAT reselection measurement
(SNonIntraSearch)
If inter-RAT networks are required when operators deploy LTE networks, the LTE is
configured with a high priority to ensure that most users camp on LTE networks. In this
case, a UE must start inter-frequency and inter-RAT reselection measurement before
starting an inter-RAT reselection. Only after the threshold for starting inter-frequency
and inter-RAT reselections is met, the UE in idle mode can start the inter-RAT
measurement. Therefore, lower-priority inter-frequencies can be reselected. This
parameter is available for inter-frequency (reselection from high-priority frequencies to
low-priority frequencies) and inter-RAT (reselection from high-priority modes to low-
priority modes) cells. The following inequality indicates the condition for starting inter-
RAT reselection.
Ms ≤ SNonIntraSearch + QRxLevMin
In the inequality, Ms is the RSRP of serving cells measured by UEs.
SNonIntraSearch+QRxLevMin is the threshold for starting inter-frequency and inter-
RAT reselection, where QRxLevMin is the minimum receive level and its default value
is -128 dBm.
Since the reselection is preferred to handovers, the threshold for starting inter-RAT
reselections is set to a value greater than or equal to the threshold for starting GAP
measurements in most cases.
The value of SNonIntraSearch is closely related to event A2 as shown in the following formula:
(SNonIntraSearch - 4) + QRxLevMin = A2 - Hys -1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
A2-Hys on the right of the equation is the actual threshold for starting GAP measurements. To meet the
principle of reselections prior to handovers, the threshold for starting inter-RAT reselections
(SNonIntraSearch-4+QRxLevMin) can be obtained by the actual threshold for starting GAP
measurements (A2-Hys) adding 2 dB. Then, the value of SNonIntraSearch can be obtained. In addition,
the IE value of SNonIntraSearch is twice the actual dB value. To ensure that the value of
SNonIntraSearch is an even number, A2-Hys+2-QRxLevMin is decreased by 1 if the A2-Hys+2-
QRxLevMin is an odd number.
The measurement time is determined by the discontinuous reception (DRX) period during reselection.
Based on the processing period of Qualcomm chips and default DRX period (1.28s) of Huawei devices,
the inter-RAT measurement period in idle mode is about 6.4s, which is longer than the handover
measurement time. To ensure timely reselections, you are advised to enable the measurement threshold
for UEs in idle mode. Therefore, SNonIntraSearch-4 on the left side of the equation indicates that an
extra gap of 4 dB between SNonIntraSearch and A2 is provided.
IE value of Hys is half of the actual dB value. A2 indicates the threshold of inter-RAT
event A2. The default value of QrxLevMin in LTE is 64 (-128 dBm).
− If the threshold of event A2 is set to -115 dBm, the value of SNonIntraSearch is 18
dB and the IE value is 9.
− If inter-RAT ping-pong reselections occur, you need to check the parameter
configuration for reselections on both sides of the two systems. Since the LTE is
configured with a high priority, a better method to avoid ping-pong reselections is
to increase the inter-RAT threshold for reselecting to LTE to a value greater than the
threshold for starting inter-RAT measurement in LTE (that is, greater than the value
of QRxLevMin+SNonIntraSearch). The other method is to lower the value of
SNonIntraSearch. After reselection to an inter-RAT system, ensure that the UE
will not reselect to LTE under a same measurement condition. However, the latter
method may damage the principle of reselection prior to handovers.
2. Threshold for the serving frequency used in reselections to lower-priority cells
(ThrshServLow)
Figure 1.27 Threshold for the serving frequency used in reselections to lower-priority cells
(ThrshServLow)
ThrshServLow is used when a UE performs an inter-frequency reselection from a high-

priority frequency to a low-priority frequency or when a UE performs an inter-RAT
reselection from a high-priority system to a low-priority system. If the priority of a
serving cell is higher than that of a neighboring cell, and the RSRP of the serving cell
(Ms_serving) measured by the UE and the measurement signal strength of the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
neighboring cell meet the following inequalities, the UE performs the reselection from
LTE to the GU system.
Ms_serving < ThrshServLow + QRxLevMin
Mn_neighbour > ThreshXLow + QRxLevMin
ThrshServLow is the threshold for the serving frequency used in reselections to lower-
priority cells. The first inequality indicates that when the RSRP of the serving cell is
lower than a threshold, the UE is allowed to reselect to an inter-RAT system. However,
the second inequality determines whether the UE is successfully reselected to an inter-
RAT system. ThreshXLow in the second inequality is the inter-RAT threshold used in
reselections to lower-priority cells. It indicates that when the measured signal of the
neighboring cell is higher than a threshold, the UE can be reselected to an inter-RAT
system. It should be emphasized that only when the two inequalities are met, the UE can
be reselected to an inter-RAT system.
It is recommended that the reselection threshold of a serving cell be 1 dB to 2 dB greater than the
threshold for starting inter-RAT measurement in connected mode as shown in the following inequality:
ThrshServLow = SNonIntraSearch - 4 = A2 – Hys + 2 (-1) - QRxLevMin
If A2 is set to -115 dBm, the value of ThrshServLow is 14 dB and the IE value is 7.
3. Parameters related to the measurement threshold used in reselections to neighboring cells
(ThreshXHigh/ThreshXLow)
Figure 1.28 Parameters related to the measurement threshold used in reselections to neighboring
cells (ThreshXHigh/ThreshXLow)
ThreshXHigh is used when a UE performs inter-RAT reselections from a low-priority system

(LTE) to a high-priority system (GU). It also indicates the threshold required by measured
signal of GU neighboring cells. Since the LTE system is configured with a high priority in
most cases, this parameter is not used when a UE performs inter-RAT reselections. However,
it must be configured on the eNodeB. It is recommended that the value of ThreshXHigh be
set to the same as that of ThreshXLow.
ThreshXLow is used when a UE performs an inter-RAT reselection from a high-priority
system (LTE) to a low-priority system (GU). It also indicates the threshold required by
measured signal of GU neighboring cells. Set the value of ThreshXLow as shown in the
following:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The measurement threshold used in reselections to neighboring cells is determined by the minimum
receive level (QRxLevMin) and threshold used in reselections to higher- or lower-priority cells
(ThreshXHigh/ThreshXLow). QRxLevMin is recommended. The measurement threshold used in
reselections to neighboring cells can be changed by modifying the value of ThreshXHigh or
ThreshXLow.
According to the protocol and demodulation capability of the system, set the minimum receive level
required by neighboring UMTS cells to -115 dBm (IE value of -58) and the minimum receive level
required by neighboring GSM cells to -111 dBm (IE value of 2).
Similarly, based on the principle of reselections prior to handovers, the measurement threshold used in
reselections to neighboring cells depend on the value of event B1. In most cases, the inter-RAT
measurement threshold used in reselections to neighboring cells is set to a value lower than or equal to
the threshold for inter-RAT handovers.
ThreshXHigh/ThreshXLow + QRxLevMin (Inter-RAT system) = B1 + Hys - 2 (+1)
Similarly, the IE value of ThreshXHigh/ThreshXLow in the formula is twice the actual dB value. The
IE value of Hys is half the actual dB value. Whether to add 1 in this formula depends on the calculated
value from B1+Hys-2-QRxLevMin (Inter-RAT system). If the calculated value is odd, add 1.
If a UE performs a reselection to a UMTS system, when B1 is set to -103 dBm and QRxLevMin is set
to -115 dBm, the value of ThreshXLow/ThreshXHigh is 12 dB (IE value of 6).
If a UE performs a reselection to a GSM system, when B1 is set to -95 dBm and QRxLevMin is set to
-111 dBm, the value of ThreshXLow/ThreshXHigh is 16 dB (IE value of 8).
If a UE performs a reselection to a UMTS system, P_MaxUTRA is mandatory in the protocol (36.331).
It is recommended that P_MaxUTRA be set to 24 dBm, which is the same as the RACH power
configured in UMTS by default. The RF power of UEs defined in the 3GPP TS 25.101 are uncertain.
Table 4-5 lists the specifications.
Figure 1.29 UE power classes
As listed in Table 4-5, if the RF power of a UE is between 34 dBm and 19 dBm, after the UE
is reselected to the UMTS, the UE determines that the value compensated for the UMTS
threshold is as follows:
Pcomp = max{(P_MaxUTRA-RF Power Class), 0}
Therefore, the threshold after the UE is reselected to the UMTS fluctuates is between -103
dBm to -98 dBm.
3.2.3.2 Relationship Between Inter-RAT Handover Parameters

If a UE is in connected mode and the signal of the serving cell is lower than the threshold of
event A2, the inter-RAT measurement is started. If the signal of neighboring cells is higher
than the threshold of B1, the eNodeB enables the UE to hand over to an inter-RAT
neighboring cell.
1. Parameter of event A2 for starting inter-RAT handover measurements
(InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.30 Parameter of event A2 for starting inter-RAT handover measurements

Before an inter-RAT handover, the inter-RAT measurement must be enabled to detect the
signal strength of inter-RAT cells. When the signal of a serving cell is lower than a
certain threshold, the UE starts the inter-RAT handover measurement to prepare for an
inter-RAT handover. If the following inequality is met, the UE will enable the inter-RAT
handover measurement.
Ms + Hys (InterRatHoA1A2Hyst) < Parameter of event A2 (InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp)
Ms is the RSRP of the serving cell measured by the UE. Hys is the hysteresis value for
starting inter-frequency measurement. Besides the hysteresis for event A2,
InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig is the time-to-trigger for event A2. Its default value is
640 ms. When the trigger condition of event A2 is met, the UE does not send a
measurement report to the eNodeB immediately. Instead, the UE sends a report only
when the trigger condition of event A2 is continuously met during the time-to-trigger.
This parameter helps decrease the number of occasionally triggered event reports, the
average number of handovers and the number of incorrect handovers, preventing
unnecessary handovers.
The value of event A2 is closely related to network conditions, such as available bandwidth and load.
According to the principle of throughput optimality, the throughput demarcation point between service
frequencies and other frequencies can be found by an on-site test and by determining whether the uplink
or downlink throughput is used by operators. Then, set the RSRP related to the throughput demarcation
point to the value of event A2 (InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp).
The default values of InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp and Hys are -115 dBm and 1 dB,
respectively. The threshold for starting inter-RAT measurement by a UE is -116 dBm
(InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp - Hys = -115 dBm - 1 dB). The default value is used as an
example for subsequent parameters related to the event A2. An appropriate parameter of
Event A2 (InterRatHoA2ThdRsrp) for each frequency band or cell can be determined
according to the on-site environment.
2. Parameter of event A1 for exiting the inter-RAT measurement

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.31 Parameter of event A1 for exiting the inter-RAT measurement

If the signal strength of the serving cell (RSRP) exceeds a certain threshold after a UE
starts inter-frequency measurement, the UE exits inter-RAT measurement. The parameter
of event A1 is used to ensure that when a UE returns to an area within the serving cell
coverage, the UE can exit GAP measurement (that is, inter-RAT measurement in
connected state) to prevent throughput loss. The value of event A1 is 4 dB (empirical
value) greater than that of event A2 due to the timeliness and stability for starting and
exiting of GAP measurement, A1 set event parameters.
Ms – Hys (InterRatHoA1A2Hyst) > Parameter of event A1 (InterRatHoA1ThdRsrp)
Ms is the RSRP of a serving cell measured by a UE. Hys is the hysteresis value for
exiting inter-frequency measurement. Besides the hysteresis for event A1,
InterRatHoA1A2TimeToTrig is the time-to-trigger for event A1. Its default value is
640 ms. When the trigger condition of event A1 is met, the UE does not send a
measurement report to the eNodeB immediately. Instead, the UE sends a report only
when the trigger condition of event A2 is continuously met during the time-to-trigger.
This parameter helps decrease the number of occasionally triggered event reports, the
average number of handovers and the number of incorrect handovers, preventing
unnecessary handovers.
Generally, if Hys is set to 1 dB, the value of event A1 equals the value of event A2 plus 4 dB.
The actual gap between starting and exiting GAP measurement is A1-A2+2xHys due to the existence of
Hys. If the signal fluctuates significantly and consequently, a UE frequently enters and performs GAP
measurement, the value of Hys can be increased to prevent the impact of signal fluctuation.
For example, if the value of event A2 is set to -115 dBm, the value of event A1 is -111 dBm.
3. Parameter of inter-RAT event B1 (InterFreqHoA4ThdRsrp)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.32 Parameter of inter-RAT event B1
The parameter for inter-RAT event B1 is used for inter-RAT handovers. When the RSRP of
the neighboring cell exceeds a certain threshold (parameter of event B1), the UE is handed
over from the serving cell to the neighboring cell. The relationship between the RSRP of the
neighboring cell and parameter of event B1 can be presented by the following inequality:
Mn + Hys > Parameter of B1 event + Hys (4-3)
Mn is the signal of inter-RAT neighboring cells measured by the UE. Hys indicates the
hysteresis of event B1 for inter-RAT handovers. This parameter is used to prevent frequent
triggering and cancellation of inter-RAT handovers caused by radio signal fluctuation. In this
way, the probability of handover decision errors is reduced. The value of this parameter has a
negative correlation with the probability of handover decision errors.
Besides the hysteresis for event B1, there is also the time-to-trigger for event B1. This
parameter indicates the time-to-trigger for event B1 associated with inter-RAT handovers.
When the trigger condition of event B1 is met, the UE does not send a measurement report to
the eNodeB immediately. Instead, the UE sends a report only when the trigger condition of
event B1 is continuously met during the time-to-trigger. This parameter helps decrease the
number of occasionally triggered event reports, the average number of handovers and the
number of incorrect handovers, preventing unnecessary handovers.
The threshold for inter-RAT B1 event is set to a proper value according to different target
modes so that a UE can stably perform services in inter-RAT neighboring cells. It is
recommended that the parameter of event B1 in neighboring UMTS cells be set to -103 dBm
by default and the parameter of event B1 in neighboring GSM cells be set to -95 dBm which
is a modified value consistent with the U2G handover threshold.
If handovers between inter-RAT systems are required and inter-RAT ping-pong handovers occur, you
need to check parameter settings for the two inter-RAT handovers. For the inter-RAT systems, the
handover threshold can be increased to prevent ping-pong handovers. For the LTE, A2 is determined
based on the optimal throughput, which does not need to be reduced. The ping-pong handovers can be
cleared only by increasing the threshold for event B1. The adjustment policy is to increase the threshold
for event B1 to a value which is the same as the threshold for starting inter-RAT measurement in LTE
networks.
A UE which does not support inter-RAT measurement will be blindly redirected to an inter-RAT
neighboring cell. Because there is no inter-RAT signal measurement, the UE is not limited by the
threshold of event B1.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
If GSM and UMTS systems coexist in the target network and UEs differ in their measurement
capabilities, the UE can be configured to preferentially fall back to a certain system. In LTE networks,
most UEs support UMTS measurement, and few UEs support GSM measurement. In addition, UMTS
provides a higher data rate for UEs compared with GSM. Therefore, the UE preferentially operates in a
UMTS system. For more information, see the following table.
Table 32.1 Preferential handover to a neighboring UMTS cell

UE Measurement Capability Preferential Handover to a
Neighboring UMTS Cell
Not supporting GSM and UMTS The eNodeB uses the parameter for inter-
measurement RAT blind handovers
(CSFALLBACKBLINDHOCFG) to
decide which system to preferentially hand
over to
Supporting UMTS measurement The eNodeB delivers the measurement for
Not supporting GSM measurement Neighboring UMTS cells. If event B1 is
reported to the eNodeB, the UE is handed
over to a UMTS cell. Otherwise, the blind
redirection to GSM is triggered.
Supporting GSM and UMTS measurement The eNodeB modifies the time to trigger
(TTT) to ensure that event B1 for the UMTS
is preferentially reported. The TTT duration
of event B1 for the GSM is longer than the
measurement time of Neighboring UMTS
cells.
3.2.3.3 Anti-Ping-Pong Parameter Check

To prevent inter-RAT ping-pong operations, parameters related to thresholds and priorities
must be configured according to certain rules. You can use the CME to check parameter
consistency. For details about the check rule and operation, see related information by
choosing Advanced > Feature Operation and Maintenance > Feature Parameters Check
on the CME.
3.3 KPI Feature

3.3.1 Contents of this Chapter
This section describes KPIs in different networking scenarios. Features related to GUL
interoperability can be classified into the following types: reselection, CSFB, fast return,
SRVCC, CS handover, PS handover, and CoRRM.
Table 32.2 Classification of the GUL interoperability features

Level-1 Directory Level-2 Directory Feature Involved
Reselection Common reselection GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
between GSM and UMTS Interoperability

WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on
Coverage
Priority-based reselection GBFD-511301 Cell
between GSM, UMT, and Reselection Between GSM
LTE and LTE
WRFD-020126 Mobility
Phase 1
LOFD-001020 PS Inter-
UTRAN and GERAN
UTRAN and UTRAN
CSFB L2G CSFB LOFD-001034 CS Fallback
to GERAN
GBFD-511313 CSFB
L2U CSFB LOFD-001033 CS Fallback
to UTRAN
Guarantee for LTE
Emergency Calls
Flash L2G CSFB LOFD-001053 Flash CS
Fallback to GERAN
GBFD-511308 eNACC
Between GSM and LTE
Flash L2U CSFB LOFD-001052 Flash CS
Fallback to UTRAN
WRFD-140224 Fast CS
L2G CSFB with LAI LOFD-001069 CS Fallback
with LAI to GERAN
L2U CSFB with LAI LOFD-001068 CS Fallback
with LAI to UTRAN
Fast Return Fast return to UMTS GBFD-114325 Fast
WCDMA Reselection at 2G
CS Call Release
Fast return to LTE GBFD-511312 Fast LTE
Reselection at 2G CS Call

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Release
WRFD-140226 Fast Return
from UMTS to LTE
SRVCC L2U SRVCC LOFD-001022 SRVCC to
UTRAN
WRFD-150215 SRVCC
Handover
L2G SRVCC LOFD-001023 SRVCC to
GERAN
GBFD-511309 SRVCC
CS Handover Coverage-based handover GBFD-114301
GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
Handover Based on
Coverage
Load-based handover GBFD-114322
Handover
WRFD-02040002 Inter
System Direct Retry
WRFD-020310 3G/2G
Common Load Management
Service-based handover GBFD-114321
GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
WRFD-02040003 Inter
System Redirect
Other CS handovers WRFD-020307 Video
Telephony Fallback to
Speech (AMR) for Inter-
RAT HO
Handover Based on DL QoS
Redirection Based on

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Distance
PS Handover Coverage-based handover GBFD-511302 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Coverage
UMTS to LTE
UMTS to LTE
UTRAN and UTRAN
UTRAN and GERAN
Load-based handover GBFD-511304 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Cell Load
WRFD-150231 RIM Based
UMTS Target Cell Selection
for LTE
to LTE
LTE
LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT
LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT
Service-based handover GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE
UMTS to LTE
Based PS Service
LTE
LOFD-001043 Service-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Based Inter-RAT Handover

to UTRAN
LOFD-001046 Service-
to GERAN
LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to
UTRAN CS/PS Steering
Other PS handovers GBFD-511303 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Quality
GBFD-511305 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE
Based on Mode Priority
GBFD-511307 eNC2
Between GSM and LTE
GBFD-511308 eNACC
Between GSM and LTE
GBFD-511310 Multi
Technology Neighbour Cell
Based Handover
Handover Phase 2
WRFD-02030801 NACC
(Network Assisted Cell
Change)
WRFD-02030802 PS
Handover Between UMTS
and GPRS
LOFD-001072 Distance
to UTRAN
LOFD-001073 Distance
to GERAN
CoRRM Load-based handover GBFD-511103 GSM and
WCDMA Load Balancing
Based on Iur-g
GBFD-511101 Load Based
Handover Enhancement on
Iur-g
WRFD-070006 GSM and
UMTS Load Balancing

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Based on Iur-g
GSM and UMTS Handover
Enhancement Based on Iur-g
Service-based handover GBFD-511104 GSM and
WCDMA Traffic Steering
Based on Iur-g
WRFD-070007 GSM and
Based on Iur-g
NACC GBFD-511102 NACC
Procedure Optimization
Based on Iur-g between
GSM and WCDMA
WRFD-070005 NACC
Procedure Optimization
Based on Iur-g
The following sections describe KPIs related to these features in different networking
scenarios.
3.3.2 G2U KPI

The G2U interoperability KPIs refer to the G2U CS/PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The G2U interoperability KPIs can be classified into network
KPIs and service KPIs as listed in Table 5-2 and Table 5-3.
Table 32.3 Network KPIs

KPI Name Service Measurement Standard Short Name
Method Definition
Success Rate of Voice Field test Statistics on the N/A

Inter-RAT UE side:
Handovers from Success rate
GSM to UMTS (outgoing) =
Success
times/Attempt
times x 100%
Success times =
Number of
Handover To
UTRAN
Complete
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Number of
Handover to
UTRAN
Command
messages
received by the
UE
Statistics Success rate of Definition of
CS inter-RAT cell-level KPIs:
outgoing SUM(CELL.IN
handovers = TERRAN.OUT
Number of CELL.HO.SUC
successful CS C)/SUM(CELL.
inter-RAT INTERRAN.O
outgoing UTCELL.HO.R
handovers/Num EQ)
ber of CS inter-
RAT outgoing
handover
attempts x
100%
Number of CS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handover
requests =
Number of
inter-RAT
outgoing cell
handovers
initiated by the
BSC based on
measurement
reports
Number of
successful CS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handovers =
Number of
CLEAR CMD
messages
(whose cause
values are
Handover
Successful)
received by the
BSC from the
MSC during the
outgoing inter-

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
RAT handovers
Success Rate of Voice Statistics Success rate of Definition of
Inter-RAT CS inter-RAT cell-level KPIs:
Radio outgoing SUM(CELL.IN
Handovers from handovers = TERRAN.OUT
GSM to UMTS Number of CELL.HO.SUC
successful CS C)/SUM(CELL.
inter-RAT INTERRAN.O
outgoing UTCELL.HO.C
handovers/Num MD)
ber of CS inter-
RAT outgoing
handover
attempts x
100%
Number of
successful CS
inter-RAT
outgoing cell
handovers =
Number of HO
CMD messages
sent by the
source cell to
the MSC after
the BSC
receives HO
CMD messages
sent by the
MSC
Number of
successful CS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handovers =
Number of
CLEAR CMD
messages
(whose cause
values are
Handover
Successful)
received by the
BSC from the
MSC during the
outgoing inter-
RAT handovers

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 32.4 Service KPIs

Counter Name Service Measurement Standard
Method Definition
Signaling Delay of Voice Field test Statistics on the BSC

Inter-RAT side:
Handovers from Start point: The BSC
GSM to UMTS sends an Inter-
System to UTRAN
Handover Command
message the UE.
End point: The BSC
receives a Clear
Command message
with the cause value
"Handover
Successful" or
"Normal Release".
Field test Statistics on the UE
side:
Start point: The UE
receives an Inter-
System to UTRAN
Handover Command
message.
End point: The UE
sends a Handover To
Utran Complete
message to the RNC.
Voice Interruption Voice Field test (Mobility) This counter can be
Duration of Inter- tested by the DSLA
RAT Handovers device. The voice
from GSM to UMTS interruption duration
can be obtained by
comparing the
waveforms for the
input audio of
terminal A and that
of terminal B.
User-Plane PS Field test (Mobility) Downlink
Interruption interruption delay at
Duration of PS the TCP layer
Inter-RAT
Handovers from
GSM to UMTS
Control-Plane Delay PS Field test (Mobility) Statistics on the UE
of PS Handovers side:
from GSM to UMTS Start point: The UE
reads the last
message on the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
GSM side.
End point: The UE
sends a Route Area
Update Complete
message to the RNC.
PS Field test (Mobility) Statistics on the
RNC side:
Start point: The
RNC receives a
COMMON_ID
request from the CN.
End point: The RNC
returns A RAB
ASSIGNMENT
RESPONSE
message to the CN.
3.3.3 G2L KPI

The G2L interoperability KPIs refer to the G2L PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The G2L interoperability KPIs can be classified into network KPIs
and service KPIs as listed in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5.

Method Definition
Success Rate of PS Statistics Number of (CELL.2G4GIN

PS Inter-RAT Data successful PS TERRAN.OUT
Handovers from inter-RAT CELL.PSHO.A
GSM to LTE outgoing TMPT-
handovers from CELL.2G4GIN
GSM to TERRAN.OUT
LTE/Number of CELL.PSHO.F
PS inter-RAT AIL)/CELL.2G
outgoing 4GINTERRAN.
handover OUTCELL.PS
attempts from HO.ATMPT
GSM to LTE
Field test Success rate of N/A
handovers from
GSM to LTE =
Number of
successful
handovers from
GSM to
LTE/Number of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
handover
attempts from
GSM to LTE
 Success times
= Number of
Handover
To EUTRA
Complete
messages
sent by the
UE
 Attempt times
= Number of
PS
HANDOVE
R
COMMAN
D messages
received by
the UE
Success Rate of NC2 Statistics Number of (NC.CELL.INT
NC2 from GSM successful NC2 ERRAN.RESE
to LTE inter-RAT LECT.ATMPT
reselections -
from GSM to NC.CELL.2G.T
LTE/Number of O.4G.RESELE
NC2 inter-RAT CT.FAIL)/(NC.
reselection CELL.INTERR
attempts from AN.RESELEC
GSM to LTE T.ATMPT)
NC2 inter-RAT
reselections
from GSM to
LTE = Number
of successful
NC2 inter-RAT
reselections
from GSM to
LTE/Number of
NC2 inter-RAT
reselection
attempts from
GSM to LTE
 Success times
= Number of
Routing
Area Update
Complete
messages

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
sent by the
UE
 Attempt times
= Number of
Cell Change
Order
messages
received by
the UE

Method Definition
Fast Return Delay N/A Field test Fast Return:

from GSM to LTE Interval between the
time when the UE
receives a Channel
Release message on
the GERAN side and
the time when the
UE sends an RRC
CONN REQ
message on the
EUTRAN side
3.3.4 U2G KPI

The U2G interoperability KPIs refer to the U2G CS/PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The U2G interoperability KPIs can be classified into network
KPIs and service KPIs as listed in Table 5-6 and Table 5-7.

Method Definition
Success Rate of Voice Field test Statistics on the N/A

CS Inter-RAT UE side:
UMTS to GSM (outgoing) =
Success
times/Attempt
times x 100%
Success times =
Number of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Handover
Complete
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
Handover from
UTRAN
Command
messages
received by the
UE
CS inter-RAT RNC-level
outgoing KPIs:
handovers = VS.IRATHO.S
Number of uccOutCS.RNC
successful CS /VS.IRATHO.A
inter-RAT ttOutCS.RNC
outgoing Definition of
handovers/Num cell-level KPIs:
ber of CS inter-
RAT outgoing SUM(IRATHO.
handover SuccOutCS)/SU
attempts x M(IRATHO.Att
100% OutCS)
Number of CS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handover
attempts =
Number of
Handover from
UTRAN
Command
messages sent
by the RNC
Number of
successful CS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handovers =
Number of IU
RELEASE
COMMAND
messages
(whose value is
Successful
Relocation or
Normal

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Release)
received by the
RNC
Success Rate of PS Field test Statistics on the N/A
PS Inter-RAT UE side:
UMTS to GSM (outgoing) =
Success
times/Attempt
times x 100%
Success times =
Number of
Routing Area
Update
Complete
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
CELL
CHANGE
ORDER FROM
UTRAN
messages
received by the
UE
PS inter-RAT RNC-level
outgoing KPIs:
handovers (VS.IRATHO.S
(initiated by the uccOutPSUTR
RNC) = AN.RNC/VS.IR
Number of ATHO.AttOutP
successful PS SUTRAN.RNC
inter-RAT )
outgoing Definition of
handovers/Num cell-level KPIs:
ber of PS inter-
RAT outgoing SUM(IRATHO.
handover SuccOutPSUTR
executions AN)/SUM(IRA
THO.AttOutPS
Number of PS UTRAN)
inter-RAT
outgoing
handover
executions =
Number of
CELL
CHANGE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
ORDER FROM
UTRAN
messages sent
by the RNC
Number of
successful PS
inter-RAT
outgoing
handovers =
Number of IU
RELEASE
COMMAND
messages
(whose value is
Successful
Relocation or
Normal
Release)
received by the
RNC

Method Definition
Signaling Delay of Voice Field test (Mobility) 1. Statistics on the

Inter-RAT RNC side:
Handovers from 2. Start point: The
UMTS to GSM RNC sends a
Handover From
Utran Command
message to the
UE.
3. End point: The
RNC receives an
IU Release
Command
message with the
cause value
"Successful
Relocation" or
"Normal
Release" from
the CN.
Field test (Mobility) 1. Statistics on the
UE side:
2. Start point: The
UE receives a

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Handover From
Utran Command
message.
3. End point: The
UE sends a
Handover
Complete
message to the
BSC.
Voice Interruption Voice Field test (Mobility) This counter can be
Duration of Inter- tested by the DSLA
RAT Handovers device. The voice
from UMTS to GSM interruption duration
can be obtained by
comparing the
waveforms for the
input audio of
terminal A and that
of terminal B.
User-Plane PS Field test (Mobility) Downlink
Interruption interruption delay at
Duration of PS the TCP layer
Inter-RAT
Handovers from
GSM to UMTS
Control-Plane Delay PS Field test (Mobility) Statistics on the UE
of PS Inter-RAT side:
Handovers from 1. Start point: The
UMTS to GSM UE receives a
Cell Change
Order From
Utran message.
2. End point: The
UE sends a Route
Area Update
Complete
message to the
BSC.
PS Field test (Mobility) Statistics on the
RNC side:
1. Start point: The
RNC sends a Cell
Change Order
From Utran
message to the
UE.
2. End point: The
RNC receives an
IU Release

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Command
message with the
cause value
"Successful
Relocation" or
"Normal
Release" from
the CN.
Table 32.9 List of parameters of WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

NE MML Command Parameter Name Recommended
Value
RNC MOD HoSwitch HO_INTER_RAT_

UCORRMALGOS CS_OUT_SWITCH-
WITCH 1
RNC MOD HoSwitch HO_INTER_RAT_P
UCORRMALGOS S_3G2G_CELLCH
WITCH G_NACC_SWITCH
-0
UCORRMALGOS S_3G2G_RELOCA
WITCH TION_SWITCH-0
UCORRMALGOS S_OUT_SWITCH-1
WITCH
UCORRMALGOS RNC_SERVICE_H
WITCH O_SWITCH-0
RNC MOD HoSwitch HO_MULTIRAB_C
UCORRMALGOS SPS_HO_COV_PA
WITCH RA_SWITCH-0
RNC MOD BandInd GSM900_DCS1800
UEXT2GCELL _BAND_USED
RNC MOD UseOfHcs NOT_USED
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD HCSPrio 0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD Qhcs 20
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD NcMode NC0
UEXT2GCELL

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RNC MOD SuppRIMFlag FALSE

UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD SuppPSHOFlag FALSE
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD CIO 0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD U2GNCELL CIOOffset 0
RNC MOD U2GNCELL Qoffset1sn 0
RNC MOD U2GNCELL Qrxlevmin (-50)
RNC MOD U2GNCELL TpenaltyHcsReselec D0
t
RNC MOD U2GNCELL TempOffset1 D3
RNC MOD U2GNCELL BlindHoFlag FALSE
RNC MOD U2GNCELL DRDEcN0Threshho (-18)
ld
RNC MOD U2GNCELL SIB11Ind TRUE
RNC MOD U2GNCELL SIB12Ind FALSE
RNC MOD U2GNCELL NPrioFlag FALSE
RNC MOD U2GNCELL MBDRFlag FALSE
RNC MOD U2GNCELL MBDRPrio 0
RNC MOD U2GNCELL SRVCCSwitch OFF
RNC MOD U2GNCELL InterRatAdjsQhcs 20
RNC MOD U2GNCELL NIRATOverLap FALSE
RNC MOD InterRatReportMode PERIODICAL_REP
UINTERRATHOC ORTING
OV
RNC MOD FilterCoefOf2D2F D3
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD MeasQuantityOf3A AUTO
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRATFilterCoef D3
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD WeightForUsedFreq 0

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRATPeriodRep D1000
UINTERRATHOC ortInterval
OV
RNC MOD Hystfor2D 0
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD Hystfor2F 0
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD Hystfor3A 4
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD HystforInterRAT 0
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TrigTime2D D320
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TrigTime2F D1280
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TrigTime3A D0
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TimeToTrigForNon 0
UINTERRATHOC Verify
OV
RNC MOD TimeToTrigForVeri 0
UINTERRATHOC fy
OV
RNC MOD BSICVerify REQUIRED
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRATCSThd2D (-14)
UINTERRATHOC EcN0
OV
RNC MOD InterRATCSThd2FE (-12)
UINTERRATHOC cN0
OV
RNC MOD InterRATR99PsThd (-15)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UINTERRATHOC 2DEcN0
OV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2DE (-15)
UINTERRATHOC cN0
OV
UINTERRATHOC 2FEcN0
OV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2FEc (-13)
UINTERRATHOC N0
OV
UINTERRATHOC RSCP
OV
RNC MOD InterRATCSThd2F (-97)
UINTERRATHOC RSCP
OV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2DR (-110)
UINTERRATHOC SCP
OV
UINTERRATHOC 2FRSCP
OV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2FR (-107)
UINTERRATHOC SCP
OV
RNC MOD TargetRatCsThd 16
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TargetRatR99PsThd 16
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD TargetRatHThd 16
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCsThdEcN (-12)
UINTERRATHOC 0
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqR99PsThd (-13)
UINTERRATHOC EcN0
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqHThdEcN (-13)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UINTERRATHOC 0
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCsThdRsc (-97)
UINTERRATHOC p
OV
UINTERRATHOC Rscp
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqHThdRscp (-107)
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRATMeasTime 60
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRATPingPongT 0
UINTERRATHOC imer
OV
RNC MOD InterRATPingPong 0
UINTERRATHOC Hyst
OV
RNC MOD PeriodFor3A 1
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD AmntOfRpt3A 4
UINTERRATHOC
OV
RNC MOD InterRatPhyChFailN 3
UINTERRATHOC um
OV
RNC MOD PenaltyTimeForPhy 30
UINTERRATHOC ChFail
OV
RNC MOD InterRatReportMode PERIODICAL_REP
UCELLINTERRAT ORTING
HOCOV
RNC MOD FilterCoefOf2D2F D3
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD MeasQuantityOf3A AUTO
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD WeightForUsedFreq 0
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATPeriodRep D1000
UCELLINTERRAT ortInterval
HOCOV
RNC MOD Hystfor2D 4
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD Hystfor2F 4
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD Hystfor3A 4
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD HystforInterRAT 0
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TrigTime2D D320
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TrigTime2F D1280
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TrigTime3A D0
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TimeToTrigForNon 0
UCELLINTERRAT Verify
HOCOV
RNC MOD TimeToTrigForVeri 0
UCELLINTERRAT fy
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT EcN0
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATCSThd2FE (-12)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UCELLINTERRAT cN0
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT 2DEcN0
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2DE (-15)
UCELLINTERRAT cN0
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT 2FEcN0
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2FEc (-13)
UCELLINTERRAT N0
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT RSCP
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATCSThd2F (-97)
UCELLINTERRAT RSCP
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT 2DRSCP
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATHThd2DR (-110)
UCELLINTERRAT SCP
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT 2FRSCP
HOCOV
RNC　 MOD InterRATHThd2FR (-107)
UCELLINTERRAT SCP
HOCOV
RNC MOD TargetRatCsThd 16
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TargetRatR99PsThd 16
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD TargetRatHThd 16
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCsThdEcN (-12)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UCELLINTERRAT 0
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT EcN0
HOCOV
RNC MOD UsedFreqHThdEcN (-13)
UCELLINTERRAT 0
HOCOV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCsThdRsc (-97)
UCELLINTERRAT p
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT Rscp
HOCOV
RNC MOD UsedFreqHThdRscp (-107)
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATPingPongT 0
UCELLINTERRAT imer
HOCOV
RNC MOD InterRATPingPong 0
UCELLINTERRAT Hyst
HOCOV
RNC MOD PeriodFor3A 1
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC MOD AmntOfRpt3A 4
UCELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT um
HOCOV
UCELLINTERRAT ChFail
HOCOV
RNC MOD UHOCOMM CoexistMeasThdCh COEXIST_MEAS_
oice THD_CHOICE_INT
ERFREQ
RNC MOD UHOCOMM CsHoPrioMeasTime 3(0)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
rLen
RNC MOD UHOCOMM PsHoPrioMeasTime 6(0)
rLen
RNC MOD InterFreqRATSwitc SIMINTERFREQR
UCELLHOCOMM h AT
RNC MOD CoexistMeasThdCh COEXIST_MEAS_
UCELLHOCOMM oice THD_CHOICE_INT
ERFREQ
RNC MOD CSPSMRABThd2D (-14)
UMULTIRABHOC EcN0
OV
RNC MOD CSPSMRABThd2F (-12)
UMULTIRABHOC EcN0
OV
RNC MOD CSPSMRABThd2D (-95)
UMULTIRABHOC RSCP
OV
RNC MOD CSPSMRABThd2F (-92)
UMULTIRABHOC RSCP
OV
RNC MOD TargetRatCSPSMR 16
UMULTIRABHOC ABThd
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCSPSThd (-12)
UMULTIRABHOC EcN0
OV
RNC MOD UsedFreqCSPSThd (-16)
UMULTIRABHOC RSCP
OV
RNC MOD QualMeas CPICH_ECNO
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD Treselections 1
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD Qqualmin (-18)
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD Qrxlevmin (-58)
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD MaxAllowedUlTxP 24
UCELLSELRESEL ower
RNC MOD SsearchRat 2

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD InterRatTreselScalin 255
UCELLSELRESEL gFactor
RNC MOD Treselectionspch 255
UCELLSELRESEL
RNC MOD Treselectionsfach 255
UCELLSELRESEL
Table 32.10 List of parameters of WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load parameters
Value

WITCH 1
WITCH
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD HCSPrio 0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD Qhcs 20
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD NcMode NC0
UEXT2GCELL
UEXT2GCELL
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD CIO 0
UEXT2GCELL

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
t
ld
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrFirstAction InterFreqLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrSecondAction BERateRed
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrThirdAction QoSRenego
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrFourthAction CSInterRatShouldBe
LDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrFifthAction PSInterRatShouldBe
LDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrSixthAction AMRRateRed
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrSeventhAction MBMSDecPower
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrEighthAction CodeAdj
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrNinthAction CSInterRatShouldN
otLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlLdrTenthAction PSInterRatShouldNo
tLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlCSInterRatShould 3
BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlPSInterRatShould 1
BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlCSInterRatShould 3
NotHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR DlPSInterRatShould 1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
NotHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrFirstAction InterFreqLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrSecondAction BERateRed
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrThirdAction QoSRenego
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrFourthAction CSInterRatShouldBe
LDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrFifthAction PSInterRatShouldBe
LDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrSixthAction AMRRateRed
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrSeventhAction CSInterRatShouldN
otLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlLdrEighthAction PSInterRatShouldNo
tLDHO
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlCSInterRatShould 3
BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlPSInterRatShould 1
BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlCSInterRatShould 3
NotHOUeNum
RNC MOD UCELLLDR UlPSInterRatShould 1
NotHOUeNum
RNC MOD DlLdrFirstAction BERateRed
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD DlLdrSecondAction QoSRenego
UNODEBLDR
DlLdrThirdAction CSInterRatShouldBe
LDHO
RNC MOD DlLdrFourthAction PSInterRatShouldBe
UNODEBLDR LDHO
RNC MOD DlLdrFifthAction AMRRateRed
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD DlLdrSixthAction CSInterRatShouldN
UNODEBLDR otLDHO
RNC MOD DlLdrSeventhAction PSInterRatShouldNo
UNODEBLDR tLDHO
RNC MOD DlCSInterRatShould 3
UNODEBLDR BeHOUeNum

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RNC MOD DlPSInterRatShould 1

UNODEBLDR BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD DlCSInterRatShould 3
UNODEBLDR NotHOUeNum
RNC MOD DlPSInterRatShould 1
RNC MOD UlLdrFirstAction InterFreqLDHO
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD UlLdrSecondAction BERateRed
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD UlLdrThirdAction QoSRenego
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD UlLdrFourthAction CSInterRatShouldBe
UNODEBLDR LDHO
RNC MOD UlLdrFifthAction PSInterRatShouldBe
UNODEBLDR LDHO
RNC MOD UlLdrSixthAction AMRRateRed
UNODEBLDR
RNC MOD UlLdrSeventhAction CSInterRatShouldN
UNODEBLDR otLDHO
RNC MOD UlLdrEighthAction PSInterRatShouldNo
UNODEBLDR tLDHO
RNC MOD UlCSInterRatShould 3
UNODEBLDR BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UlPSInterRatShould 1
UNODEBLDR BeHOUeNum
RNC MOD UlCSInterRatShould 3
RNC MOD UlPSInterRatShould 1
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD Hystfor3C 0
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD TrigTime3C D640
UINTERRATHON
COV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD InterRATNCovHOC 21
UINTERRATHON SThd
COV
RNC MOD InterRATNCovHOP 21
UINTERRATHON SThd
COV
RNC MOD InterRATHOAttemp 16
UINTERRATHON ts
COV
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD SndLdInfo2GsmInd ON
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD NcovHoOn2GldInd ON
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD CSHOOut2GloadTh 80
UINTERRATHON d
COV
RNC MOD PSHOOut2GloadTh 60
UINTERRATHON d
COV
RNC MOD PeriodFor3C 4
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC MOD AmntOfRpt3C 1
UINTERRATHON
COV
UINTERRATHON um
COV
UINTERRATHON ChFail
COV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RNC MOD Hystfor3C 0

UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT SThd
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT SThd
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT ts
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT d
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT d
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT um
HONCOV
HONCOV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Table 32.11 List of parameters of WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

Value

WITCH 1
WITCH
UCORRMALGOS RNC_SERVICE_H
WITCH O_SWITCH-0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD HCSPrio 0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD Qhcs 20
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD NcMode NC0
UEXT2GCELL
UEXT2GCELL
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD CIO 0
UEXT2GCELL
RNC MOD CSServiceHOSwitc ON(OFF)
UCELLHOCOMM h
RNC MOD PSServiceHOSwitch OFF
UCELLHOCOMM
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
RNC MOD Hystfor3C 0
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT SThd
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT SThd
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT ts
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT d
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT d
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT
HONCOV
UCELLINTERRAT um
HONCOV
HONCOV
RNC SET InterRATFilterCoef D3
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET Hystfor3C 0
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET TrigTime3C D640
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET BSICVerify REQUIRED

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET InterRATNCovHOC 21
UINTERRATHON SThd
COV
RNC SET InterRATNCovHOP 21
UINTERRATHON SThd
COV
RNC SET InterRATHOAttemp 16
UINTERRATHON ts
COV
RNC SET InterRATMeasTime 15
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET SndLdInfo2GsmInd OFF
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET NcovHoOn2GldInd ON
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET CSHOOut2GloadTh 80
UINTERRATHON d
COV
RNC SET PSHOOut2GloadTh 60
UINTERRATHON d
COV
RNC SET PeriodFor3C 4
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET AmntOfRpt3C 1
UINTERRATHON
COV
RNC SET InterRatPhyChFailN 3
UINTERRATHON um
COV
RNC SET PenaltyTimeForPhy 30
UINTERRATHON ChFail
COV

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value

t
ld
Table 32.12 List of parameters of WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry

Value
RNC MOD DrSwitch DR_RRC_DRD_S

UCORRMALGOS WITCH-1
WITCH
RNC MOD DrSwitch DR_RAB_SING_D
UCORRMALGOS RD_SWITCH-1
WITCH
RNC MOD DrSwitch DR_RAB_COMB_
UCORRMALGOS DRD_SWITCH-0
WITCH
RNC MOD DrSwitch DR_INTER_RAT_
UCORRMALGOS DRD_SWITCH-1
WITCH
RNC MOD UDRD DRMaxGSMNum 2
RNC MOD UDRD ServiceDiffDrdSwit OFF
ch
RNC MOD UDRD LdbDRDSwitchDC OFF
H

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Value
RNC MOD UDRD LdbDRDSwitchHS OFF

DPA
RNC MOD UDRD CodeBalancingDrdS OFF
witch
RNC MOD UDRD ULLdbDRDSwitch ON(OFF)
DcHSDPA
RNC MOD UDRD BasedOnMeasHRetr OFF
yDRDSwitch
RNC MOD UDRD DPGDRDSwitch OFF
RNC MOD UCELLDRD DRMaxGSMNum 2
RNC MOD UCELLDRD ServiceDiffDrdSwit OFF
ch
RNC MOD UCELLDRD LdbDRDSwitchDC OFF
H
RNC MOD UCELLDRD LdbDRDSwitchHS OFF
DPA
RNC MOD UCELLDRD CodeBalancingDrdS OFF
witch
RNC MOD UCELLDRD ULLdbDRDSwitch ON(OFF)
DcHSDPA
RNC MOD UCELLDRD DPGDRDSwitch OFF
3.3.5 U2L KPI

The U2L interoperability KPIs refer to the U2L PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The U2L interoperability KPIs can be classified into network KPIs

Method Definition
Success Rate of PS Statistics Number of VS.U2LTEHO.

PS Inter-RAT service-based SuccOutPS.Ser
Handovers from PS inter-RAT vice/VS.U2LTE
UMTS to LTE handover HO.AttRelocPr
attempts from epOutPS
UMTS to LTE
for a
cell/Number of
PS inter-RAT

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
handover
preparations for
a cell
inter-RAT
handovers from
UMTS to LTE
= Number of
successful inter-
RAT handovers
from UMTS to
LTE/Number of
inter-RAT
handover
attempts from
UMTS to LTE
 Success times
= Number of
HandoverTo
EUTRANC
omplete
messages
sent by the
UE
 Attempt times
= Number of
Handover
from Utran
Command
messages
received by
the UE

Counter Name Measurement Method Measurement Point
Redirection from UMTS to Field test Control plane:

LTE Interval between the time
when the UE receives an
RRC CONN REL message
on the UMTS side and the
time when the UE sends an
RRC CONN REQ message
on the LTE side
Field test User plane (downlink):
Interval between the time

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
when the last downlink User

Datagram Protocol (UDP)
packet is received before the
stream discontinuity occurs
and the time when the first
downlink UDP packet is
received after the stream
recovery occurs (measured
by using the Wireshark for
packet capture on the UE
side)
Field test User plane (uplink):
when the last uplink UDP
uplink UDP packet is
packet capture on the server
side)
Reselection from UMTS to Field test Reselection from UMTS to
LTE LTE (CELL_PCH):
Time that UE sends a
TAU_REQ message on the
LTE side - Time that UE
sends an
RB_RECONF_CMP(PCH)
message on the UMTS side
Field test Reselection from UMTS to
LTE (IDLE):
Time that UE initiates
TAU_REQ on the LTE side
- Time that UE receives
RRC_CONN_REL message
on the UMTS side
3.3.6 L2G KPI

The L2G interoperability KPIs refer to the L2G CS/PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The L2G interoperability KPIs can be classified into network KPIs

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Success Rate of PS Field test Success rate of N/A

Inter-RAT inter-RAT
Handovers from handovers from
LTE to GSM LTE to GSM =
Number of
successful inter-
RAT handovers
from LTE to
GSM/Number
of inter-RAT
handover
attempts from
LTE to GSM
Success times =
Number of PS
Handover
Access
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
MobilityFromE
UTRAComman
d messages
received by the
UE
Statistics Number of L.IRATHO.E2
successful inter- G.ExecSuccOut
RAT outgoing /L.IRATHO.E2
handovers from G.PrepAttOut
E-UTRAN to
GERAN/Numb
er of inter-RAT
outgoing
handover
attempts from
E-UTRAN to
GERAN x
100%
Success Rate of SRVCC Statistics Number of N/A
SRVCC-based successful
Handovers from outgoing
LTE to GSM SRVCC-based
handovers from
LTE to
GSM/Number
of outgoing
SRVCC-based
handover

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
attempts from
LTE to GSM
SRVCC Statistics Success rate of Definition of
SRVCC-based cell-level KPIs:
handovers from SUM(CELL.IN
LTE to GSM = TERRAN.OUT
Number of CELL.HO.SUC
SRVCC-based C)/SUM(CELL.
handovers from INTERRAN.O
LTE to UTCELL.HO.C
GSM/Number MD)
of SRVCC-
based handover
attempts from
LTE to GSM
Success times =
Number of
Handover
Complete
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
Handover from
EUTRA
Command
messages
received by the
UE
Success Rate of CCO Statistics Number of N/A
CCOs from successful inter-
LTE to GSM RAT outgoing
cell change
orders (CCOs)
from LTE to
GSM/Number
of inter-RAT
outgoing CCO
attempts from
LTE to GSM
- Field test L2G CCO Definition of
success rate = cell-level KPIs:
Number of SUM(CELL.IN
successful L2G TERRAN.OUT
CCOs/Number CELL.HO.SUC
of L2G CCO C)/SUM(CELL.
attempts INTERRAN.O
Success times = UTCELL.HO.C
Number of MD)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
Route Update
Complete
messages
successfully
sent by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of Cell
Change Order
messages
received by the
UE

PS Redirection from LTE to Field test Control plane:

GSM Interval between the time
on the LTE side and the time
when the UE sends a
Channel Request message
on the GERAN side
when the last downlink UDP
side)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
side)
CSFB from LTE to GSM Field test CSFB based on Redirect
M2PSTN:
when the UE sends an
Extend SR message on the
LTE side and the time when
UE receives or sends an
ALERTING message on the
UMTS side
Field test CSFB based on Redirect
MT:
UMTS side
M(L)2M(L):
UMTS side
3.3.7 L2U KPI

The L2U interoperability KPIs refer to the L2U CS/PS handover success rates and KPIs
measuring handover delay. The L2U interoperability KPIs can be classified into network KPIs

Method Definition
Success Rate of PS Field test Success rate of N/A

Inter-RAT inter-RAT
Handovers from handovers from
LTE to UMTS LTE to UMTS
= Number of
successful inter-
RAT handovers
from LTE to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
UMTS/Number
of inter-RAT
handover
attempts from
LTE to UMTS
Success times =
Number of
Handover To
UTRANCompl
ete messages
sent by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
MobilityFromE
UTRAComman
d messages
received by the
UE
Statistics Number of L.IRATHO.E2
successful inter- W.ExecSuccOu
RAT outgoing t/L.IRATHO.E2
handovers from G.PrepAttOut
E-UTRAN to
GERAN/Numb
er of inter-RAT
outgoing
handover
attempts from
E-UTRAN to
GERAN x
100%
Success Rate of SRVCC Statistics Number of N/A
Inter-RAT successful
SRVCC-based outgoing L2U
Handovers from SRVCCs/Numb
LTE to UMTS er of outgoing
L2U SRVCC
attempts
SRVCC Statistics Success rate of N/A
inter-RAT
SRVCC-based
handovers from
LTE to UMTS
= Number of
successful inter-
RAT SRVCC-
based
handovers from
LTE to
UMTS/Number

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Method Definition
of inter-RAT
SRVCC-based
handover
attempts from
LTE to UMTS
Success times =
Number of
Handover
Complete
messages sent
by the UE
Attempt times =
Number of
Handover from
EUTRAN
Command
messages
received by the
UE

PS Redirection from LTE to Field test Control plane:

UMTS Interval between the time
on the LTE side and the time
when the UE sends an RRC
CONN REQ message on the
UMTS side
side)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

side)
PS Handover from LTE to Field test Control plane:
UMTS Interval between the time
when the UE receives a HO
CMD message between the
time when the UE sends a
HO CMP message
side)
side)
CSFB from LTE to UMTS Field test CSFB based on Redirect
M2PSTN:
UMTS side

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

MT:
UMTS side
M(L)2M(L):
UMTS side
Field test CSFB based on PSHO
M2PSTN:
UMTS side
MT:
UMTS side
M(L)2M(L):
UMTS side

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 4 Typical Scenarios of the Live Network
4 Typical Scenarios of the Live Network
Different frequency band combinations require different network policies as described in the
following sections.
4.1 GU Dual-Mode Network

Operator O in country A is used as an example in this section.
 The version of BSC 1 is V900R013ENGC00SPC550.
 The version of RNC 1 is V900R013ENGC00SPC550.
 BSC 1 and RNC 1 cover the same areas. Frequencies F1 and F2 in U2100 provide
continuous coverage and frequencies F3 and F4 cover hotspot areas. U900 is refarmed
from G900 and is used for deep coverage as shown in the following figure.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
4.1.2 Interoperability Policies

Table 32.19 Interoperability Policies
UE State Service Interoperation Type Use Policies
IDLE UMTS to GSM or GSM to UMTS The bi-directional cell

reselections (UMTS is
preferentially selected) based
on the cell priority support
GSM-to-UMTS and UMTS-
to-GSM reselections.
CONNECTED CS UMTS to GSM At the coverage edge of the
PS UMTS to GSM UMTS cell, the RNC
triggers coverage-based
handovers to GSM.
At the coverage edge of the
UMTS cell, the RNC
triggers coverage-based
handovers to GSM.
4.1.3 Applied Feature

 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
 WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage
4.1.4 KPI Performance

UMTS UCELL Group RNC 1
VS.IRATHO.SuccRelocPre 99.53%
pOutCS.Cell.Rate
VS.IRATHO.SuccOutCS.C 98.09%
ell.Rate
GSM GCELL Group BSC 1
CELL.INTERRAN.INCEL 98.20
L.HO.SUCC.RATE
4.2 UL Dual-Mode Network

Operator B in country C is used as an example in this section.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 There are two frequencies at UMTS 850 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency bands,
respectively. These frequencies provide continuous coverage.
 The 1800 MHz frequency band is used by the LTE network and does not provide
continuous coverage. The LTE network uses a 15 MHz bandwidth in some areas and a
10 MHz bandwidth in others.
 The LTE network does not support Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) services.
Figure 1.33 Typical scenarios of the UL dual-mode network
4.2.2 Interoperability Policies
 In idle state, UEs preferentially camp on the LTE mode, and then the UMTS mode. At
the coverage edge of the LTE cell, UEs can be reselected to a UMTS cell.
 In connected state, if a UE establishes a CS service on the LTE side, the eNodeB triggers
a CSFB to UMTS. If the UE establishes a PS service on the LTE side and the network
coverage is limited, the eNodeB triggers a coverage-based handover from LTE to
UMTS. After the UE moves to a better LTE coverage area, services can still be accessed
in UMTS cells. After the UE releases its RRC connection and returns to idle mode, the
UE reselects an LTE cell.
4.2.3 Applied Feature

 WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN

 LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
4.2.4 KPI Performance

None
4.3 GUL Tri-Mode Network

4.3.1 Operator H in Country C
4.3.1.1 Scenario Analysis
 Operator C and H construct the MOCN.
 Operator C holds LTE26000 (20 MHz), LTE1800 (20 MHz), LTE900 (3 MHz),
UMTS2100 (15 MHz), and UMTS900 (5 MHz) frequency bands.
 Country H holds LTE1800 (10 MHz) and UMTS2100 (15 MHz) frequency bands.
 LTE1800 + LTE900 networking provides continuous coverage.
The following figure shows the networking structure.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
4.3.1.2 Bearer Policy

Overall Principles
 L2U policies in CSFB, connected mode, and idle mode for operators C and H are set
respectively.
 For operator C, select UMTS 2100 (F4-F5) first. For operator H, select UMTS 2100 (F1-
F3) first. For operators C and H, users in LTE 900 MHz cells, select UMTS 900 only.
 UEs operating in UMTS2100 only reselect or return to LTE2600 (20 MHz) and
LTE1800 (20 MHz). UEs operating in UMTS900 reselect or return to LTE2600 (20
MHz) and LTE1800 (20 MHz).
 VoLTE UEs operating in LTE900 do not hand over to other bands.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
VoLTE solution
Coexistence of CSFB and VoLTE services:
VoLTE UEs of different operators are split when CSFB from LTE to UMTS2100 is triggered.
UEs in the UMTS2100 are not split when UEs return to LTE2600 and LTE1800 (20 MHz).
 CSFB from LTE900 to UMTS900 is triggered for UEs. UEs operating in UMTS900
returns to LTE2600, LTE1800 (20 MHz), and LTE900 by fast return.
 VoLTE UEs operating in LTE1800 which is the main voice coverage layer hand over to
LTE900 unidirectionally. VoLTE UEs operating in LTE2600 hand over to LTE800
unidirectionally.
 A difference between VoLTE handover and PS handover is that UEs operating in
LTE900 do not hand over to LTE2600. Voice handover from high frequency to low
frequency is not considered due to the spectral advantage of LTE900.
 VoLTE UEs operating in LTE2600 (20 MHz) and LTE1800 (20 MHz) do not hand over
to or reselect LTE1800 (10 MHz) because LTE1800 (20 MHz) and LTE1800 (10 MHz)
overlapped the coverage.
LTE data service in connected mode
Operators H and C have different inter-RAT policies:
 LTE1800 (20 MHz) and LTE900 which serve as the coverage layer are configured as
neighboring cells. LTE900 bears emergency services because the incoming handover
threshold is similar to the blind handover threshold.
 UEs operating in LTE2600 (20 MHz) only hands over to LTE1800 (20 MHz) to ensure
user experience. LTE1800 (20 MHz) and LTE1800 (10 MHz) overlap the coverage.
Therefore, coverage-based handover is not performed between them.
 Load balancing: LTE1800 (10 MHz) shares loads for LTE2600 and LTE1800 (20 MHz).
When UEs operating in LTE2600 (20 MHz)/LTE1800 (20 MHz) hand over to LTE1800
(10 MHz), the inter-frequency A2 is set to a –40 dB to prevent coverage-based
handovers.
 LTE–>UMTS: UEs operating in the LTE network provided by operator H hand over to
UMTS F4-F6 by the measurement-based redirection. UEs operating in LTE network
provided by operator C hand over to UMTS F1-F3 by the measurement-based
redirection. UEs operating in LTE900 hand over to UMTS900 by the measurement-
based redirection.
 UMTS–>LTE: UEs operating in the UMTS network hand over to LTE2600 and
LTE1800 (20 MHz) based on the redirection. UEs operating in UMTS900 hand over to
LTE900 based on the redirection.
LTE data service in idle mode
Operator H and C have different inter-RAT policies:
 Frequency band priority: LTE2600 = LTE1800(20 MHz)–>LTE1800(10 MHz)–
>LTE900–>UMTS2100 = UMTS900
 LTE2600 and LTE1800 (20 MHz) are set with the same priority. The priority of
LTE1800 (10 MHz) is set higher than that of LTE900. UEs operating in LTE1800 with
the low priority can only hand over to LTE2600 and LTE1800 (20 MHz).
 When UEs hand over between LTE and UMTS in idle and connected mode, the mobility
direction is the same.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
4.3.1.3 Features Involved

UE Mode Service/Interoperation Recommended Feature
Direction
IDLE L<->U LOFD-001019 PS Inter-

UTRAN and UTRAN
Phase 1
Connected CS L>U LOFD-001033 CS Fallback
to UTRAN
LOFD-001022 SRVCC to
UTRAN
PS L->U LOFD-001019 PS Inter-
UTRAN and UTRAN
Released CS U->L WRFD-140226 Fast Return
from UMTS to LTE
(UMTS)
4.3.1.4 KPI
After the networking solution implementation, the E-RAB access rate, inter-frequency
handover success rate, CSFB success, and QCI1 E-RAB access rate of operator C and H meet
customers' requirements.
Remarks: The abnormal indicator of operator C in the preceding figure is caused by CN

problems.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
4.3.2 Operator T in Country Y

 LTE900 (5 MHz) has large number of coverage holes due to large inter-sited distance.
LTE900 are co-sited with GSM900. 15 MHz bandwidth resources are available on the
UMTS2100 band. The UMTS network provides continuous coverage outdoors but
coverage holes exist indoors.
 GSM900 only leaves 2.5 MHz bandwidth resources due to the refarming and the GSM
network provides continuous coverage. The GSM1800 using 22.5 MHz bandwidth
resources bears the GSM traffic and provides continuous coverage.
Figure 1.34

Reselection policy in idle mode
LTE–>UMTS/GSM: The priority of LTE is higher than that of UMTS/GSM. In weak LTE
network coverage areas, the reselection policy in idle mode is as follows:
 When the LTE network coverage is weak and the UMTS network coverage is good, the
UE preferentially selects the UMTS network.
 When the LTE and UMTS network coverage is weak while the GSM network coverage
is good, the UE reselects the GSM network.
UMTS/GSM–>LTE: When the frequency priority of UMTS/GSM is lower than that of LTE,
reselection policies are as follows:
 When the LTE network coverage is good, the UE preferentially reselects the LTE
network regardless of the signal quality of the serving UMTS/GSM cell.
Redirection policy in connected mode

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
LTE-->UMTS/GSM:
 When the LTE signal quality is poor, the eNodeB initiates inter-RAT UMTS
measurement based on event A2 reported by the UE. When the UMTS signal quality is
poor, redirection from LTE to UMTS is triggered.
 If the UMTS signal is not found within a period of time and the signal quality of LTE
serving cell continuously deteriorates, blind redirection from LTE to GSM is triggered.
UMTS/GSM-->LTE:
 Enable service-based PS redirection from UMTS to LTE in connected mode on the
UMTS side. When the triggering source is activated and the LTE signal quality is good
enough (the condition for event 3C is met), the PS redirection from UMTS to LTE is
triggered.
 Turn on the U2L_SERV_IUCS_REL_TRIGGER and
U2L_SERV_IUCS_REL_TRIGGER switch to reduce the molded grip impacts on
UMTS performance.
CSFB policy
LTE–>UMTS/GSM (CSFB steering):
 In UMTS coverage areas, measurement-based CSFB from LTE to UMTS is triggered for
VoLTE UEs.
 The UMTS network is configured with three frequencies to prevent single-frequency
coverage hole. CSFB from LTE to UMTS adopts multi-frequency coverage hole filling,
that is, UMTS frequencies are configured on the LTE network and the less than 32
neighboring cells are configured for each frequency (The protocol requires that each
frequency must be configured with less than 32 neighboring cells).
 CSFB from LTE to UMTS is triggered for VoLTE UEs in areas without UMTS coverage
and UEs can measure the UMTS network for 4s to minimize unnecessary L2G
handovers.
UMTS/GSM-->LTE:
 When the UE falls back to the UMTS network, blind fast return is performed in the
UMTS/LTE co-sited scenario. The UE falls back to LTE network by measurement-based
redirection when the LTE and UMTS network are not co-sited. If GSM-to-LTE fast
return is not enabled, the UE falls back from the GSM network to the LTE network by
reselection after the CS service is complete.
4.3.2.3 Application Feature

Direction

UTRAN and UTRAN
Phase 1
L<->G LOFD-001020 PS inter-
UTRAN and GERAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Direction
GBFD-511301 Cell
and LTE
G<->U GBFD-114301
GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
Handover Based on
Coverage
to UTRAN
UTRAN
Steering to GERAN
UTRAN and UTRAN
CS and PS services: from WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT
UMTS to GSM Handover Based on
Coverage
from UMTS to LTE
(UMTS)
4.3.2.4 KPI
None
4.3.3 Operator O in Country A

 The newly-deployed LTE700 network with a 2 x 10 MHz bandwidth will replace
LTE1800 network to serve as the coverage layer.
 The LTE1800 network with a 15 MHz bandwidth serves as the LTE coverage layer.
 The LTE2300 with a 4 x 20 MHz bandwidth serves as the capacity layer of the current
network.
 The LTE2600 with a 20 MHz bandwidth serves as the capacity layer of the live network.
 The UMTS900 serves as the UMTS network coverage layer, UMTS2100 serves as the
UMTS network capacity layer, and the coverage is continuous.
 GSM900 is due to exit the market.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.35

Networking policy in idle mode:
 Priority sequence: LTE2300 and LTE2600–>LTE2100 and LTE1800–>LTE700
 The priority of UMTS is lower than that of LTE while the priority of UMTS2100 is
higher than that of UMTS900.
 The UE on the GSM network cannot reselect other RATs.
Handover policy in connected mode
LTE—>LTE:
 Handover from LTE2300/LTE2600/LTE2100 to LTE700/LTE1800
 Handover between LTE700/LTE1800 and LTE2300/LTE2600
 Handover between LTE700 and LTE1800. After LTE700 is deployed, LTE1800 serves as
the capacity layer. The handover policy is similar to that of LTE2300.
LTE–>UMTS:
 Reselection or PS handover from LTE2300/LTE2600/LTE1800/LTE700 to
UMTS900/UMTS2100 is triggered.
 The UE operating on the LTE700 network measures UMTS900 and UMTS2100 in
sequence.
 The UE operating on the LTE1800/LTE2100/LTE2300/LTE2600 network measures the
UMTS2100 and UMTS900 in sequence.
UMTS -->LTE:
 PS handover-based redirection from UMTS to LTE
Voice service policy:
 The UE initiates the CSFB on the LTE side and camps on the UMTS network through
CSFB (flash CSFB) instead of GSM.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 After the voice service is complete, the UE falls back from UMTS to LTE by fast return.
 The handover from LTE2300/LTE2600/LTE2100 to LTE1700/LTE1800 for the VoLTE
UE is triggered.
 The handover between LTE700 and LTE1800 for the VoLTE UE is triggered.
 VoLTE UE operating on LTE700/LTE1800 must be handed over to
UMTS900/UMTS2100 neighboring cells. UEs operating on LTE2300, LTE2600, and
LTE2100 can be handed over to other UMTS neighboring cells.
4.3.3.3 Application Feature

Direction

UTRAN and UTRAN
LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to
UTRAN CS/PS
Phase 1
G<->U GBFD-114301
GSM/WCDMA
Interoperability
Handover Based on
Coverage
to UTRAN
UTRAN
UTRAN and UTRAN
CS and PS services: from WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT
UMTS to GSM Handover Based on
Coverage
from UMTS to LTE
(UMTS)
4.3.3.4 KPI
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Guide 5 Principles of GUL Interoperability Features
5 Principles of GUL Interoperability

Features
Chapter 3 "Overall GUL Interoperability Solution" describes bearer polices in the GU/GL/UL
dual-mode and GUL triple-mode networking scenarios. GUL interoperability involves many
features, and this chapter describes the application scenarios and working principles of each
feature. These features are classified into six types considering the source RAT and target
RAT: G2U, G2L, U2G, U2L, L2G, and L2U. Users can select a proper and mature feature
based on the interoperability direction, application scenario, feature dependency, and
hardware dependency.
Table 35.1 Features related to GUL interoperability

Interoperability Type Feature Involved
G2U GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA

Interoperability
GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service
Based Handover
GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover
GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection
Based on MS State
GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection
at 2G CS Call Release
GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure
Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM
and WCDMA
GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover
Enhancement on Iur-g
GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load
Balancing Based on Iur-g
GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Steering Based on Iur-g

GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind
Search
G2L GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between
GSM and LTE
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS
Handover
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM
and LTE Based on Quality
and LTE Based on Cell Load
and LTE Based on Coverage
and LTE Based on Mode Priority
GBFD-511310 Multi Technology
Neighbour Cell Based Handover
GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and
LTE
GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and
LTE
GBFD-171208 QoS Optimization for
SRVCC
GBFD-511309 SRVCC
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G
CS Call Release
GBFD-511313 CSFB
GBFD-171212 Ultra-Flash CSFB
U2G WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based
on Coverage
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based
on Service
on Load
WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase
2
WRFD-02030801 NACC (Network
Assisted Cell Change)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
WRFD-02030802 PS Handover Between

UMTS and GPRS
on DL QoS
WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load
Management
WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection
Based on Distance
WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and
UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on
Iur-g
WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure
Optimization Based on Iur-g
WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load
Balancing Based on Iur-g
WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic
Steering Based on Iur-g
U2L WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS
and LTE Phase 1
WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service
Redirection from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover
from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fallback Based on
RIM
WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for
LTE Emergency Calls
WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to
LTE (UMTS)
WRFD-150219 Coverage Based PS
Handover from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection
from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover
from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to
UMTS with PS Handover

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for

LTE Emergency Calls
WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to
LTE (UMTS)
WRFD-171223 Fast Return to LTE for
SRVCC User
Handover from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection
from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover
from UMTS to LTE
WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to
UMTS with PS Handover
WRFD-150231 RIM Based UMTS Target
Cell Selection for LTE
L2G LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility
between E-UTRAN and GERAN
LOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN
LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN
LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to
GERAN
LOFD-001046 Service Based Inter-RAT
Handover to GERAN
LOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to
GERAN
LOFD-081283 Ultra-Flash CSFB to
GERAN
LOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to
GERAN
LOFD-001073 Distance Based Inter-RAT
Handover to GERAN
L2U LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility
between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
LOFD-001022 SRVCC to UTRAN
LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
LOFD-001043 Service Based Inter-RAT

Handover to UTRAN
LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to
UTRAN
LOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to
UTRAN
LOFD-070202 Ultra-Flash CSFB
LOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to
UTRAN
LOFD-001072 Distance Based Inter-RAT
Handover to UTRAN
LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN
CS/PS Steering
LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell
Selection
LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell
Selection
5.1 G2U
5.2 G2L
5.3 U2G
5.4 U2L
5.5 L2G
5.6 L2U
5.1 G2U
5.1.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
Model
GMISGWCRAH00
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
The BSS system supports the handover and reselection of MSs between the GSM network
and the WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to roam and be handed over from the WCDMA network to the
GSM network. This can solve the challenge of insufficient coverage in the early stage of the
WCDMA network development. With this feature, the GSM network can smoothly evolve to
the WCDMA network, saving the operator's investment.
Description
GSM/WCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs
between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. Huawei BSS supports the handover
and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. The
handover and roaming include the following situations:
 In idle mode, an MS roams from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
 In idle mode, an MS roams from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
 In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
 In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
This feature consists of the following functions:
 Roaming in idle mode
Through PLMN reselection, an MS can be handed over from the GSM network to the
WCDMA network, or from the WCDMA network to the GSM network. The selection of
the GSM network or the WCDMA network is determined by the network operator.
Usually the WCDMA MSs preferentially select the WCDMA network. The PLMN
reselection can be scheduled on the MS. The reselection time is determined by the
operator.
To inform the MS of the information on the neighboring WCDMA cell, the GBSS
system needs to add the description of the neighboring WCDMA cell to the system
information. The system information 3 is modified to indicate whether the system
information 2 quarter exists. The system information 2 quarter includes information
about cell reselection, measurement, and neighboring WCDMA cell.
Through system reselection, a WCDMA MS can be handed over to a neighboring GSM
cell when the signal in the WCDMA network is weak.
 CS domain handover in busy mode
The handover from the WCDMA system to the GSM system is determined by the
WCDMA network. When receiving the handover request from the MSC, the BSS works
with the MSC to implement the handover based on the resource situation.
Then, the MS in busy mode in the GSM cell measures the neighboring WCDMA cell
based on the neighboring cell information in the system information and submits the MR
to the BSC. The BSC then makes decisions according to the information in the MR and
initiates inter-RAT handover when the requirements for the WCDMA cell handover are
met.
The cell reselection of the network-controlled MS from the GPRS/EDGE system to the
WCDMA system is implemented by using the inter-RAT NC2 feature. The inter-RAT
NACC feature can speed up the cell reselection from the WCDMA system to the
GPRS/EDGE system.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 BSC6900 Hardware
NA
NA
 GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
 GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
 MS
The MS must support this feature.
 CN
The CN must support this feature.
 Other NEs
NA
 Prerequisite Features
NA
 Mutually Exclusive Features
NA
Professional Service
It is recommended that this feature work with the GU interoperability service.
5.1.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

Model
GMIS0GWSBH00
Availability
Summary
In a GSM-WCDMA co-sited network, the operator can classify services into different types
according to the operation policies. Then, the operator determines whether a service
preferentially uses the radio resources of the GSM system or the WCDMA system. During
call access or the handover, the BSC works with the MSC to perform the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Benefits
With this feature, the advantages of the GSM system and the WCDMA system are fully
utilized and therefore the service quality is improved and user experience is enhanced. In
addition, the operators' investment is saved and the utilization of the network resources is
maximized.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. The service quality on the two radio access systems is different. Therefore, it is
necessary to immediately use different system resources for different services. According to
the service hierarchy principle, different services can be preferentially handed over to
different systems. For example, the CS services are preferentially handed over to the GSM
system whereas the PS services are preferentially retained in the WCDMA system.
In the assignment procedure, the MSC sends the service handover information to the BSC
through the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message. If the service handover information
indicates that the call should be preferentially processed in the UTRAN, the directed retry
procedure is initiated to hand over the call to the WCDMA system.
The HANDOVER REQUEST message received by the BSC may also carry the service
handover information and the BSC uses this information for the subsequent handover
decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114301 GSM and WCDMA Interoperability
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.1.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

Model
GMIS0GWLBH00
Availability
Summary
When the cell load in the GSM system is heavy, the BSC can initiate the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system based on the load of the GSM system and the WCDMA
system to balance the overall load in the network, maximizing the utilization of the network
resources.
Benefits
This feature balances the load of the WCDMA system and the GSM system, improving the
service quality and the usage of the network resources.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. Therefore, the usage of the resources in the two radio access systems needs to be
maximized. When the load of one radio access system is heavy whereas the load of the other
radio access system with the same coverage is light, the load-based inter-RAT handover can
be initiated to balance the load of the two systems if the services of the current user can be
supported by the other system.
The load information about the WCDMA system is transparently transmitted to the BSC
through the MSC. Then the BSC determines whether to initiate the inter-RAT handover based
on the load information about the WCDMA system and the load information about the BSC.
Meanwhile, the load information about the BSC is carried in the handover request message
for the reference of the target system during the inter-RAT handover decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114301 GSM and WCDMA Interoperability
NA
5.1.4 GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

Model
GMISMSBGCR00
Availability
Summary
This feature is designed to optimize cell reselection from the GSM network to the 3G network
(WCDMA network or TD-SCDMA network). It enables dual-mode MSs in the idle state or in
the packet transfer state to adopt different reselection policies to access the GSM network or
3G network as required.
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Helps the operator to determine whether to select the GSM or 3G network according to
the network planning requirements when the MS is in the idle state or in the packet
transfer state.
 Reduces the duration of service interruption caused by frequent cell reselection.
Description
During the 3G network construction, operators need to select a proper network planning
strategy for the MSs to select the GSM network or the 3G network based on the coverage of
the 3G network and the compatibility of dual-mode MSs with the 3G network. This feature
provides different cell reselection strategies based on the MS state.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
For example, in the early stage of the 3G network construction, operators expect that the 3G
network can share some traffic of the GSM network. The data transmission of the MS in
packet transfer mode, however, may be interrupted after cell reselection because the coverage
of the 3G network is imperfect or the compatibility between the MS and 3G network is poor.
In such a case, the KPIs deteriorate. In addition, the current 3GPP protocols do not support the
NACC feature between the GERAN and the UTRAN. Therefore, the services of the MS in
packet transfer state are inevitably interrupted during the inter-RAT cell reselection and
therefore the quality of the PS services deteriorates. With this feature, operators allow the MS
in idle mode to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_I to a
specific value between 0 and 14. Similarly, operators can prohibit the MS in packet transfer
mode to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_P to 15. In this
manner, operators can control the MS's access to the GSM network or the 3G network
according to the MS state.
This feature and the Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature are mutually
exclusive. With the NC2 feature, the MS in packet transfer state can select a neighboring 3G
cell through the BSC's control of the inter-RAT cell reselection. With this feature, however,
the MS in packet transfer state can be prohibited from selecting a neighboring 3G cell. This
limitation can be solved by configuring priorities for these two features.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability or GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-
SCDMA Interoperability
− GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)
− GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.1.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call

Release
Model
QM1SFRCSCR00
Availability
Summary
When an MS terminates a call on a GSM network, it camps on a WCDMA network based on
the "cell selection indicator after release" information in the Channel Release message
without performing cell reselection calculation. In this way, the MS can preferentially camp
on a WCDMA cell, accelerating cell reselection.
Benefits
The cell reselection of the MS is accelerated, thereby decreasing the GSM-to-WCDMA cell
reselection duration to 1-2s. The MS can obtain services from the WCDMA network
immediately after the call is released from the GSM network.
Description
In general, when the MS terminates a call on a GSM network, it camps on the cell in which
the call is released and then starts the measurement related to the cell reselection. When a
neighboring WCDMA cell meets the cell reselection requirements, the MS camps on the
WCDMA network after the cell reselection. The WCDMA cell reselection is initiated after the
MS receives the system information and performs the related calculation.
With this feature, the BSS figures out the best neighboring WCDMA cell based on the
measurement information about the neighboring WCDMA cells after the MS in the GSM
network terminates a CS call. Then, the BSS sends the MS the frequency information about
the cell through the Channel Release message to instruct it to camp on the WCDMA cell. In
this way, the MS can preferentially camp on a WCDMA cell without related calculation,
accelerating cell reselection
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
N/A
NA
 MS
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
NA
5.1.6 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)

Model
GMIS00NCCR00
Availability
Summary
The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet
transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell based on MRs.
Benefits
Based on the receive quality of the MS and receive level of the neighboring cell, this feature
enables the network-controlled MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. Therefore, the
subscriber can obtain better packet service, the performance of the packet service in the whole
network is improved, and the resource usage is increased.
Description
In NC2 mode, the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. In this manner, the
MS can reselect a better cell because the network has a clearer view of the actual network
condition than the MS does. Therefore, better network performance is achieved.
When the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network helps to reselect a cell with better
receive level and lighter load for the MS based on the MR and the network load condition.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The NC2 is triggered under the following scenarios:

1. The downlink receive quality of the MS drops rapidly.
2. The reselection does not occur and the number of received packet measurement reports
reaches a certain threshold.
In these cases, the network helps the MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. As a
result, user experience is enhanced, and the performance of the packet service in the whole
network is improved.
Enhancement
 GBSS8.1
Inter-BSC NC2: The network can select the neighboring cell controlled by another BSC
as the target cell and initiate the cell re-selection procedure.
NC2 based on cell load: When the load of PS services in the cell exceeds a specified
threshold, the MS that meets the requirement of neighboring cell level threshold is
reselected to the neighboring cell with light load.
Support for NC2 of the target cell of the WCDMA system: The network can select the
target cell of the WCDMA system for cell reselection based on the MRs.
Dependency
A built-in PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS
− GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search
The GERAN-to-UTRAN cell reselection in NC2 mode is mutually exclusive with
GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.1.7 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

Model
GMIS00NACC00
Availability
Summary
NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. To implement rapid PS access after cell
reselection, the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell
reselection. Therefore, the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized.
Benefits
 Increases the cell reselection speed, minimizes the service interruption time due to the
cell reselection, and enhances user experience.
 Adheres to satisfy the services that have higher requirements for delay and throughput
(such as the streaming service).
 Increases the system capacity because the resources of the original cell can be released
rapidly after the cell reselection.
Description
The NACC feature enables the MS to access the new cell rapidly after cell reselection and
perform data transmission without receiving the complete system information.
The NACC feature does not control the cell reselection of the MS, but notifies the network to
send the system information in advance when the MS decides to reselect a cell and delays the
cell reselection. In this manner, this feature increases the cell reselection speed of the MS,
greatly reducing the data transmission interruption time due to cell reselection.
Because the cell reselection speed is increased, the MS can rapidly notify the SGSN. The
SGSN can then rapidly detect that the cell reselection occurs. As a result, the resources of the
original cell can be quickly released to other users and therefore the system capacity is
increased.
Enhancement
 GBSS8.1
Support for resource reservation in the target cell: When the network receives the cell
reselection decision of the MS, it reserves the required radio resources in the target cell
to ensure that the MS can obtain sufficient resources for service recovery after
reselection.
Support for NACC between BSCs or between BSC and RNC: This application
enhancement can reduce the delay of cell reselection between BSCs or between the BSC
and the RNC. It requires the BSC to support the RIM procedure to obtain the system
information of the external cell. During cell reselection, if the BSC has the system

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
information of the external cell, it sends the system information to the MS. Otherwise,
the BSC initiates the RIM procedure to request the system information and save the
system information for future use.
 GBSS14.0
This feature supports lossless data packet transfer during intra-BSC inter-routing area
cell reselection.
As defined in the 3GPP specifications, all data packets of the serving cell are discarded
when an MS in the transfer state performs inter-routing area cell reselection.
With this enhancement, data packets can be transferred without loss from the serving cell
to the target cell when an MS in the transfer state performs intra-BSC inter-routing area
cell reselection. In this way, data transfer quickly restores after the MS camps on a new
routing area. This increases data throughput.
Dependency
A built-in PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS
NA
NA
5.1.8 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

between GSM and WCDMA
Model
QM1SNPOBIU00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol
stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS
services from a WCDMA cell to a GSM cell does not require the information transfer via the
CN.
Benefits
This feature provides a solution that enables the NACC procedure when the CN does not
support the RIM procedure. The simulation results show that this feature helps shorten the
delay of PS handover by two seconds. As the delay is shortened, user experience can be
improved.
Description
As indicated in the 3GPP specifications, the GERAN (P) SI is obtained by performing the
RIM procedure during the NACC procedure. The NACC procedure involves the RNC,
WCDMA SGSN, GSM SGSN, and BSC. When this feature is applied, the GSM/WCDMA
GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the Iur-g interface between the base station
controllers, without being transferred via the CN.
This feature applies only to the Iur-g interface, which connects different base station
controllers. In such a case, the GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the protocol
stack complying with the 3GPP specifications. If there is no Iur-g interface between WCDMA
and GSM, the GERAN (P) SI information can be exchanged only via the CN, and accordingly
the NACC procedure can be implemented only through the CN, as specified in the 3GPP
specifications.
The following figure shows the network topology that supports this feature. As shown in the
figure, Huawei RNCs and BSCs are connected on the Iur-g interface. This feature applies to
the BSC/RNC of other vendors only if it has passed the interoperability test (IOT). Otherwise,
the CN-involved NACC procedure is applied. For the BSC/RNC of other vendors, the
common cell reselection procedure is performed if the CN does not support the RIM
procedure.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
An IP interface board is required if IP transmission is used between the BSC and the
RNC.
RNC.
NA
NA
 MS
NA
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and
UMTS
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.1.9 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

Model
QM1SLBHEOI00
Availability
Summary
This feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing load
information over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP
specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficient
coverage can be more accurate, reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers between the
GSM network and WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature helps maintain a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It also helps increase the accuracy of handover decision, reducing the possibility of ping-pong
handovers. The simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid
handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 6% and increases the
total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 5%.
Description
This feature functions as a supplement to GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover. If the handover decision is based only on load, the occurrence of ping-pong
handover is highly possible. The reason is that the mechanism of load information exchange
between the GSM network and WCDMA network is inadequate. The inadequate mechanism
may cause excessive services to be handed over from the GSM network to the WCDMA
network, leading to the overload of the WCDMA network and consequently handover back to
the GSM network.
This feature enables the load information exchange over the Iur-g interface, so that the
decision on load-based handover can be more rational. The conditions on which the decision
is based are as follows:
 The target WCDMA cell meets the load requirements.
 The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.
 The handover will not lead to the congestion in the target WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
RNC.
RNC.
NA
NA
 MS
NA
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
− WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on
Iur-g
NA
5.1.10 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on

Iur-g
Model
QM1SGULBIU00
Availability
Summary
This feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange of
Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on
the basis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA
network when an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between
the GSM network and WCDMA network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Benefits
This feature aims at striking a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It reduces the possibility of congestion in areas covered by both GSM and WCDMA. The
network utilization is consequently increased. The simulation results show that this feature
reduces the percentage of invalid handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 6% and decreases the access congestion rate during busy hours by up to 4%.
Description
As high-speed PS services are on great demand by a large number of GSM/WCDMA dual-
mode handsets in well-established 2G/3G commercial networks, the load of WCDMA
network has become increasingly heavy. Facing the situation, network operators focus on
reducing the congestion rate and making full utilization of the present network capacity. This
feature can efficiently address this situation. With this feature, the load balance between the
GSM network and WCDMA network can be achieved. This helps reduce the possibility of
network congestion and the percentage of invalid inter-RAT handovers. As a result, the
capacity of both the GSM network and WCDMA network can be fully utilized.
The following figure shows the applicable scenario where the GSM cell and WCDMA cell
have the same coverage. In this scenario, this feature provides a load-balancing function for
admitted MSs through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE between the GSM cell and
WCDMA cell.
The load-balancing function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the requested CS service to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service
handover indicator and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA
cell. The conditions on which the decision is based are as follows:
 The MS supports WCDMA services.
 The service handover indicator assigned by the CN or configured at the GBSC/MBSC
shows that the CS service can be handed over to the WCDMA cell.
 The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded.
 The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 The GBSC/MBSC determines whether to perform the inter-RAT handover on a number

of MSs according to the predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a
probability rate with respect to the redirection of a single MS. If the GBSC/MBSC
determines that the handover is not performed, the CS service will be processed in the
GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the handover of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
RNC.
RNC.
NA
NA
 MS
NA
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114322 GSM and WCDMA Load Based Handover
− WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
NA
5.1.11 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on

Iur-g
Model
QM1SGUSDIU00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
Summary
This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services
are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and
the load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.
Benefits
This feature helps operators to develop network services in hierarchies, which facilitates the
hierarchical network planning. With this feature, the spectrum utilization is increased. The
simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid inter-RAT
handovers by up to 8% and increases the total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 8%.
Description
In the case of evolution from a legacy GSM network to a GSM&WCDMA network, the
WCDMA network usually has a larger capacity in the early stage. How to fully utilize the
WCDMA network to carry high-speed services has become a major concern for network
operators. This feature provides the service steering function for the benefit of network
planning. Service steering helps improve the utilization of resources in each network and
divide frequencies and RATs into different hierarchies. In addition to service steering, the
selection of RAT for an MS to access also depends on the network load. This helps optimize
the network performance in the following aspects:
 Tasks of different RATs can be clearly defined, which facilitates the planning of network
capacity.
 Service steering can reduce interference between different traffic classes, increasing the
network capacity of the WCDMA network.
 The flexible distribution of services to the WCDMA and GSM cells can improve the
utilization of system resources, reduce the access congestion rate, and enhance the QoS
of the network.
The service-steering function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the MS to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service handover indicator
and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA cell. The conditions on
which the decision is based are as follows:
 The MS requests the CS service.
 The MS supports WCDMA services.
 The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded and is with the lightest load among all
neighboring WCDMA cells of the source GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the steering of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
RNC.
RNC.
NA
NA
 MS
NA
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
− WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
NA
5.1.12 GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search

Model
QM1SBLDSCH00
Availability
Summary
The BSC supporting Blind Search feature simplifies cell reselection from a GSM cell to a
WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell.
Benefits
With this feature, users can easily configure cell reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or
TD-SCDMA cell.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Description
Without this feature, when cell reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or TD-SCDMA
cell is enabled, users must configure frequencies and scrambling codes of neighboring
WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells in a GSM network. After the configuration, the GSM network
sends the frequencies and scrambling codes to an MS using SI messages. As a result, the MS
can measure the neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells specified in the SI messages and
reselect to an appropriate neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell. If users adjust the
planned frequencies and scrambling codes of the neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells,
they must modify the information in the GSM network accordingly. Otherwise, cell
reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell will fail.
With this feature, users need to only configure frequencies of neighboring WCDMA or TD-
SCDMA cells. After receiving the frequencies of a neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA
cell, an MS automatically searches for the scrambling codes of neighboring cells and reselects
to an appropriate neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
The MS must support blind search.
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
The MS must support blind search.
− GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability or GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-
SCDMA Interoperability
− GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
The 2G/3G NC2 function of this feature is mutually exclusive with the preceding
features.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.2 G2L
In the early phase of LTE network deployment, operators can use GSM networks to ensure
service continuity as a complement to poor continuous coverage in LTE networks. The
GSM/LTE Interoperability feature enables a UE to be handed over to or reselect a GSM cell if
the serving cell of the UE is not covered by the LTE network or in an area with excessive LTE
network load. This can alleviate the LTE network load and improve user experience.
In a GSM&LTE co-sited network, the UE in idle mode or packet transfer mode can perform
cell reselection. In addition, the UE in packet transfer mode can perform inter-system PS
handovers.
Currently, the GSM/LTE Interoperability feature provided by Huawei supports bi-directional
cell reselection and PS handovers between the GSM and LTE networks.
5.2.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

Model
GMISCRBGAL00
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0 for test. It is commercially used from GBSS13.0.
Summary
This feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS in idle mode to perform cell reselection
based on the level of the neighboring cells and setting of the radio access technology (RAT)
priority.
Benefits
 This feature enables the GSM network and LTE network to work as a complement to
each other. This is profitable for operators who have deployed both the GSM network
and LTE network.
 This feature enables the existing GSM network to provide communication services to
LTE subscribers at the initial deployment stage of LTE, generating profit for the LTE
operators.
 This feature can be used to balance the traffic between the GSM network and LTE
network, prolonging the life cycle of the GSM network.
 A GSM/LTE dual-mode MS can be made to camp on the LTE network through the
setting of the RAT priority when the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS is within the coverage
area of the LTE network.
Description
An MS in idle mode periodically measures the level of the serving cell and the cell of the
neighboring cells specified in the system information. The MS determines whether to perform
cell reselection based on the settings of the mode priority parameters and on the cell
reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can always camp on a cell that can provide quality
services. Therefore, the purpose of this feature is to bind the MS to a cell that can provide
quality services.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The cell reselection between GSM and LTE is based on the setting of the RAT priority. The
RAT priority is set on the BSC side, and is sent to the MS through the system information
message SI2quater. Different RAT priorities must be set for the GSM and LTE networks.
Therefore, the MS can select to camp on the network of higher service quality based on the
RAT priorities.
The MS obtains the information about the frequencies of the neighboring cells by parsing the
system information message SI2quater. It also measures the downlink level of all neighboring
cells to obtain the candidate cells for reselection. Then, the MS sorts the candidate cells
according to the RAT priority, and selects the best cell for reselection.
This feature supports the cell reselection between GSM and LTE FDD and the cell reselection
between GSM and LTE TDD.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
NA
NA
It is recommended that this feature work with the GL interoperability service.
5.2.2 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

Model
GMISPSHGLS00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS12.0. It is available for commercial use from
GBSS13.0.
Summary
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the BSC hands over services of different
types to the GSM or LTE network based on the service distribution information sent by the
SGSN.
Benefits
 PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms
and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service.
Therefore, the operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and
Gaming.
 The services of different types are handed over to the GSM or LTE network based on the
service attribute. In this manner, the loads on the two networks are balanced. In addition,
the PS services will not be handed over to an inappropriate network.
 The operator can use the LTE network to carry the services with high requirement for
rate and delay, enhancing user experience and increasing the revenue.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the operator can divide the services into
multiple types, and then determine the network (GSM or LTE) for carrying each type of
services. In this manner, the load is balanced between the two networks, and the operator can
use the advantages of both GSM and LTE to provide satisfactory service quality.
For example, the operator can use the LTE network to carry the streaming services with a high
requirement for rate and the conversational services with a high requirement for delay, and
use the GSM network to carry the background services with a low requirement for rate and
delay.
The operator can configure the policy on the core network, and then during the PS handover,
the BSC hands over the services with different types to the corresponding network according
to the service distribution information sent by the core network.
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the handover to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects a
neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the MS
to hand over to the target cell through PS handover.
Enhancement
 GBSS13.0
The Fast PS Handover between GSM and LTE function is introduced.
Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
limitation. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before
the MS camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is
reduced to less than 150 ms.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
If GSM cells and LTE cells are co-sited and cover the same areas, blind handovers must
be supported. When a GSM/LTE dual-mode or multi-mode MS is processing PS services
in a GSM cell, a service-based or load-based PS handover can be triggered to hand over
the MS to an LTE cell. In this case, a target LTE cell can be selected according to the
default system setting, without using the MRs.
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
− GBFD-119502 PS Handover
The following features related to PS handover are activated in order of priority:
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover > GBFD-511303 PS
Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality > GBFD-511304 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load > GBFD-511302 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
These features should be used together.
NA
5.2.3 GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based

on Quality
Model
GMISPSHGLQ00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. Based on the MRs, the BSC
triggers a PS handover to a neighboring LTE cell if the UL or DL signal quality in the current
GSM cell on the air interface reaches the specified threshold.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Gaming.
In the scenarios with severe signal attenuation, this feature can be used to prevent PS service
disruption due to deterioration of signal quality on the air interface, improving network
performance and user experience.
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.
When the UL or DL air interface quality of the MS in the serving cell is reaches the preset
threshold, the BSC triggers the PS handover between GSM and LTE so that the MS reselects
a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level. In this manner, the success rate of the
PS handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
 GBSS13.0
Dependency
NA
NA
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
NA

on Cell Load
Model
GMISPSHGLL00
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
Based on the traffic load and the MRs reported by the MS in PS connection mode, the BSC
may trigger the PS handover from GSM to LTE when the PS load on the GSM cell is high to
achieve load balance and in addition, to fully utilize the transmission resources.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Therefore, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
When the GSM network is congested, this feature can be used to transfer part of the load of
the GSM cell to the neighboring LTE cells, increasing the PS service rate and enhancing the
network performance and user experience.
Description
With the construction of the LTE network, the networking with both GSM and LTE is widely
used. Huawei aims to fully utilize the resources of the two networks. The LTE network can
take over part of PS services from the GSM network.
In an area covered with both GSM and LTE networks, if the load difference between the two
networks is great and the current services are supported by both GSM and LTE, the PS
handover between GSM and LTE can be triggered for load balance.
When this feature is enabled, the BSC selects a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive
level for the handover. In this manner, the success rate of the PS handover, the throughput of
the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
 GBSS13.0
Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
limitation. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before
the MS camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is
reduced to less than 150 ms.
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

NA

on Coverage
Model
GMISPSHGLC00
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. The BSC obtains the receive level
of the serving cell through MRs. When the receive level of the serving cell remains lower than
the specified PS handover threshold for a period, the BSC triggers the PS handover between
GSM and LTE. In this manner, the MS reselects a neighboring cell with a higher receive level.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Gaming.
This feature provides PS coverage for cells of another RAT to ensure the PS service
continuity. In this manner, the network performance and user experience are improved.
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Based on the MRs reported by the MS, the BSC triggers the coverage-based PS handover
between GSM and LTE when the receive level of the serving cell remains lower than the PS
handover threshold for a period. This ensures that the MS can reselect a neighboring cell with
a higher receive level. As the receive level of the neighboring cell is considered before the
handover, the success rate of the handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS
can be guaranteed.
Enhancement
 GBSS13.0
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

on Mode Priority
Model
GMISPSHGLP00
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
This feature enables operators to set priorities for GSM and LTE networks. In this manner,
during the PS handover, the MS will select a network with the higher priority.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Therefore, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
The operator can use the LTE network to carry PS services preferentially. That is, in the area
with LTE coverage, use the LTE network to provide high-speed data services for GSM/LTE
dual-mode users; in the area without LTE coverage, use the GSM network to carry the
services. In this manner, the operator can make profit quickly from the LTE network and user
experience is enhanced.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, this feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode
MSs to select LTE network preferentially for PS services.
Based on MRs from the MS, the BSC triggers a PS handover when the downlink level of the
serving cell reaches the level threshold for PS handover, when the UL or DL air interface
quality decreases to the handover threshold, or when the PS load of the GSM cell is high. The
BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
Because the receive level, service quality, load, and network mode of the target cell and the
suitable network is considered before the PS handover, the handover success rate and the
throughput of the target cell are guaranteed.
This feature must be used with the feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and
LTE Based on Coverage, GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on
Quality, or GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage, GBFD-
511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality, or GBFD-511304
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
NA
5.2.7 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based

Handover
Model
GMISNCMTHO00
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the handover between GSM frequency bands and LTE frequency bands.
Benefits
Through this feature, an MS is handed over to a specific GSM or LTE frequency band, and
the resources of the LTE or GSM frequency band occupied by the MS before the handover are
released. This feature improves the Quality of Service (QoS) of end users, thereby increasing
the revenue of operators.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Description
This feature is an enhancement of the inter-RAT handover. It supports handovers between
frequency bands of different RATs based on the priorities of neighboring cells. Through this
feature, an MS is handed over to a frequency band of another RAT to meet the requirements
of users for mobility or to ensure that the capacity restrictions on frequency bands are not
exceeded.
This feature can be applied to the following combinations of RATs and frequency bands:
 GSM 900 MHz
 GSM 1800 MHz
 LTE 800 MHz
 LTE 900 MHz
 LTE 2.6 GHz
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
− GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage, GBFD-
511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality, or GBFD-511304
PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.2.8 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

Model
GMIS0NC2GL00
Availability
Summary
In a GSM/LTE hybrid network, when the MS is in a GSM cell, the MS periodically sends
packet measurement reports to the BSC if the serving cell is in NC2 mode and packet
connection state. On receiving the reports from the MS, the BSC triggers a network-controlled
cell reselection based on the receive level, cell load, receive quality, modulation scheme, and
service priority indicated by the message sent from the core network. If the target cell is an
LTE cell, the BSC triggers a procedure of eNC2 between GSM and LTE.
Benefits
Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, eNC2 Between GSM and LTE has the
following benefits:
The following factors are considered at the network so that the MS can be reselected to a cell
with better signal quality: receive level of the serving cell, receive quality over the Um
interface, and packet service load, priority of modulation scheme, and service priority
indicated by the message sent from the core network. This can prevent deterioration of QoS of
the MS. In this manner, user experience can be improved, for the duration of packet service
disruption is shortened to less than 500 ms.
Description
Four types of cell reselection decision are involved in eNC2 between GSM and LTE: service-
based cell reselection decision, quality-based cell reselection decision, load-based cell
reselection decision, and coverage-based cell.
 Service-based cell reselection decision
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the reselection to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects
a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the
MS to reselect the target cell through an eNC2 procedure.
 Quality-based cell reselection decision
The BSC determines whether the radio link quality is good or bad according to the receive
quality or bit error rate, and performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive quality
of the link over the Um interface. When the receive quality of the uplink or downlink radio
link deteriorates to a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC
selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
 Load-based cell reselection decision

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the packet load of the serving cell.
When the packet load of the serving cell reaches a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the
NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a
network with the highest priority as the target cell.
 Coverage-based cell reselection decision
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive level of the serving cell.
When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold for a period, the
BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from
the cells in a network with the highest priority as the target cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
 CN
NA
 Other NEs
NA
NA
5.2.9 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE

Model
GMISNACCGL00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
Summary
This feature supports eNACC from LTE to GSM only.
In RRC connected mode, the UE sends the eNodeB a message, requesting for the system
information of the target GSM cell. Upon receiving the message, the eNodeB sends the
system information of the target GSM cell to the UE. Upon receiving the system information,
the UE accelerates the packet service access to the target GSM cell.
Benefits
 The cell reselection of the UE from an LTE cell to a GSM cell is accelerated, the data
transmission disruption becomes shorter, saving the access delay about 1.8s, and the
duration of the service disruption is shorter than 500 ms. In this manner, the
requirements of services, such as streaming service, for delay and throughput are met.
 The resources of the original cell can be released for new subscribers faster after the cell
reselection. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Description
eNACC is a function based on which the UE accesses the target GSM cell quickly after the
cell reselection is completed without receiving the complete system information of the target
cell.
eNACC does not control cell reselection of the UE. Instead, the network is informed of the
message that the UE requires cell reselection, and then the network sends the system
information of target GSM cells to the UE before the cell reselection. In this manner, the cell
reselection is accelerated, and therefore the duration of data transmission disruption is reduced
greatly.
As the cell reselection is accelerated, the SGSN can detect faster that a new cell is reselected
for the UE. Therefore, the resources of the source LTE cell can be released faster for other
subscribers. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Limited by 3GPP 48.018 technical specifications, the system does not support GSM-to-LTE
eNACC.LTE-to-GSM eNACC is supported only when the BSC supports RIM over the Gb
interface.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
 MS
 CN
 Other NEs
NA
NA
5.2.10 GBFD-511309 SRVCC

Model
GMIS0SRVCC00
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0. This feature is recommended for test purposes
rather than for commercial use.
Summary
With Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC), speech services in the LTE network can
be maintained when it is handed over to a GERAN network or UTRAN network.
Benefits
The speech service can be maintained when it is handed over from the GERAN to the
UTRAN.
Description
At the initial stage of the LTE project, the 3GPP defines that only the packet service is
supported. In the evolution from GERAN to LTE, the 3GPP R8 defines two solutions:
SRVCC and CSFB, to realize the interoperability of speech services between GERAN and
LTE.
To implement the SRVCC solution, the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) must be deployed at
the CN and the speech service must be provided. With the assistance of the VoIP speech
service routing, control, and triggering by the IMS and the handover control by the Mobile
Management Entity (MME), the speech service in the LTE network can be handed over to the
GERAN/UTRAN smoothly.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
In SRVCC, speech services are implemented in the LTE packet network, so technically the
SRVCC solution can be regarded as a real LTE VoIP technique. Through circuit switch in
GERAN network or packet switch in LTE network, the UE can access IMS based on which
the speech service is maintained. SRVCC supports handover of speech services from LTE to
GSM only.
SRVCC is available only when GERAN network and LTE network cover the same area.
GBSS12.0 does not support SRVCC in DTM mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
The MS must support SRVCC from LTE to GSM.
 CN
The CN must support the SRVCC procedure.
 Other NEs
The eNodeB must support SRVCC from LTE to GSM.
NA
NA
5.2.11 GBFD-171208 QoS Optimization for SRVCC

Model
GMIS0QSPFS00
Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS17.1.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
This feature performs VIP assurance actions to ensure good user experience for UEs that are
handed over to the GSM network from the LTE network using the SRVCC feature.
Benefits
If the load is high or congestion occurs in the GSM cell, this feature can increase the success
rate of SRVCCs from LTE to GSM and improve the mean opinion score (MOS) of UEs that
are experiencing SRVCC (SRVCC UEs for short).
Description
This feature performs the following VIP assurance actions:
 preemption and Queuing and preemption
During the SRVCC preparation phase, if congestion occurs in the GSM cell, SRVCC
UEs can preempt the channel resources of common GSM UEs to ensure a high SRVCC
success rate.
 Preferential assignment of TCHFs
Compared with common GSM UEs, SRVCC UEs can be preferentially assigned full-rate
traffic channels (TCHFs) and have TCHF-TCHH conversion delayed. In this way,
SRVCC UEs make full use of TCHFs to ensure good SRVCC voice quality.
 Prohibition of VAMOS pairing
Compared with common GSM UEs, SRVCC UEs can have VAMOS pairing or half-rate
VAMOS pairing prohibited to ensure good SRVCC voice quality.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
 UBBP Hardware
N/A
 MS
 CN
The CN must support the SRVCC procedure.
 Other NEs
The eNodeB must support SRVCC from LTE to GSM.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
− GBFD-511309 SRVCC
N/A
None
5.2.12 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Model
GMISFLRGCS00
Availability
Summary
After terminating a call on the GSM network, an MS camps on the LTE network according to
the cell selection indication information in the channel release message (cell selection
indicator after release). The MS does not need to return to the LTE network through cell
reselection.
Benefits
This feature speeds up the MS's cell reselection. After releasing a call on the GSM network,
the MS can immediately reselect an LTE cell to perform services., thereby decreasing the
GSM-to-LTE cell reselection duration to 1-2s
Description
In general, when an MS terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on a cell in which the
call is released and then starts neighboring cell measurement. When a neighboring LTE cell
meets the requirements for cell reselection, the MS reselects the LTE cell. The MS needs to
receive system information and is allowed to initiate LTE cell reselection only after
performing cell reselection calculations, so that the MS can perform services in the LTE
network for a long time.
With this feature, after an MS terminates a call on the GSM network, the BSS calculates an
optimal neighboring LTE cell according to neighboring LTE cell measurement messages.
Then, the BSS sends the frequency information of the cell to the MS through the Channel
Release message, which specifies the LTE cell on which the MS camps after the call is
terminated. The MS preferentially camps on the LTE cell without performing cell reselection
calculations, thereby accelerating cell reselection.
Enhancement
 GBSS15.0
This feature is valid only for CSFB subscribers. This is to prevent users that do not
subscribe to the LTE network from failing to return to LTE.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Neighboring LTE cell measurement is added. The corresponding LTE frequency is sent
in the channel release message only when the neighboring LTE cell's signal quality meets
specified requirements. This is to prevent failures in returning to LTE due to weak LTE
signals.
 GBSS17.1
Whether an SRVCC subscriber can fast reselect an LTE cell after the call is released can
be independently controlled.
User-level measurement information (MI) messages are sent according to the UE's LTE
measurement capabilities.
The sending of LTE frequency in the channel release message is optimized.
Dependency
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
 MS
N/A
 CN
N/A
 Other NEs
N/A
N/A
5.2.13 GBFD-511313 CSFB

Model
GMIS00CSFB00
Availability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
The circuit switched fallback (CSFB) feature enables a UE camping on the E-UTRAN
network to access the GERAN/UTRAN network through a PS handover or PS cell reselection
and then process CS services. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN and
GERAN/UTRAN networks cover the same areas.
Benefits
This feature enables a UE to be handed over from the LTE network to the GERAN network to
process CS services, thereby protecting the investment in the GERAN network.
The GERAN network can be used to provide CS services, and the E-UTRAN network can be
used to provide high-speed PS services.
Compared with the Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) technique, CSFB provides
CS services for UEs in the LTE network with a simpler network structure, without deploying
the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).
Description
In the LTE startup stage, the 3GPP stipulates that LTE supports only PS services. In the
evolution from GERAN to E-UTRAN, 3GPP Release 8 defines two solutions, SRVCC and
CSFB, to implement the interoperability between GERAN and E-UTRAN.
If a mature GERAN network is available in the initial stage of E-UTRAN deployment, the
operator can use the existing GERAN network to provide CS services whereas use the LTE
network to provide PS services. This saves the investment in the existing GERAN network.
With CSFB, a UE in the LTE network can be handed over to the GERAN network to process
CS services.
To implement CSFB, the SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the
Mobile Management Entity (MME) so that dual-mode UEs attached to the LTE network can
process services such as calling, calling response, SMS, and combined location update
between E-UTRAN and GERAN. Technically, CSFB is not a real LTE VoIP technique
because a dual-mode UE has been handed over from E-UTRAN to GERAN before it initiates
CS services.
The CSFB feature is available only when GERAN and LTE cover the same areas. CSFB does
not need the IMS, thereby simplifying the network architecture. However, every time the UE
makes or receives a call, the UE is handed over from LTE to GERAN. This increases the
access delay. In addition, the ongoing LTE PS services are affected by the incoming call.
Enhancement
 GBSS16.0
The enhancement in GBSS16.0 enhances the capability to identify CSFB mobile
originated calls (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) so that the BSC can
quickly identify a CSFB call when it requests a channel. In addition, the procedure for
reporting the Utran Classmark Change message is optimized to shorten the access delay
of CSFB calls.
MOC identification: The BSC changes the NECI value in system information (SI) 3 and
send SI 3 to the LTE network. After a call accesses the GSM network, the BSC identifies
whether the call is a CSFB MOC based on the cause value in the channel request
message.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MTC identification: Different Channel Need identifiers are set in paging messages on the
GSM and LTE networks. After a call accesses the GSM network, the BSC identifies
whether the call is a CSFB MTC based on the cause value in the channel request
message.
Optimized procedure for reporting the Utran Classmark Change message. When
accessing the GSM network, MSs actively report the Utran Classmark Change message.
This prolongs the access delay of CSFB calls. To address this problem, the indication for
reporting the Utran Classmark Change message is modified using the RIM procedure. In
this way, MSs do not actively report the Utran Classmark Change message and the BSC
query this indication after the alerting phase. This shortens the access delay of CSFB
calls.
Dependency
NA
NA
NA
NA
 MS
GSM/LTE dual-mode MSs that support CSFB.
 CN
 Other NEs
The SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the MME.
− GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE
The enhancement in GBSS16.0 requires the preceding feature.
NA
5.2.14 GBFD-171212 Ultra-Flash CSFB

Model
GMISUFCSFB00
Availability
Summary
In areas covered by both GSM and LTE, LTE does not support voice services, and a UE
initiates a voice service request on the LTE side. The BSC prepares CS resources on the GSM

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
side in advance through the Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) procedure, thereby
reducing the delay of the UE's circuit switched fallback (CSFB) to the GSM network and
improving user experience.
Benefits
This feature reduces the delay of the UE's CSFB from LTE to GSM by about 1.5s, thereby
improving user experience.
Description
Figure 1.1 Ultra-Flash CSFB
The Ultra-Flash CSFB process is as follows:

1. The UE initiates a CS service request on the LTE side.
2. The eNodeB triggers an SRVCC to GSM.
3. The core network (CN) sends a handover request message, which carries CS service-
related parameters, to the BSC so as to instruct the BSC to establish CS resources. The
BSC then allocates CS resources in advance according to the instruction from the CN.
4. The CN sends a handover command to the UE through the eNodeB.
5. The UE is handed over to the BSC.
6. The CS service is set up.
The standard CSFB process is omitted for location update, authentication, encryption,
and identity query. The reestablishment of CS resources is not required. Therefore, the
voice access delay is reduced.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
 UBBP Hardware
N/A
 MS
 CN
The MME and MSC are provided by Huawei and support Ultra-Flash CSFB.
 Other NEs
N/A
N/A
N/A
None
5.3 U2G
This section describes features related to inter-RAT handovers between 3G and 2G.
Handovers from 3G to 2G based on coverage or QoS use the same handover procedure but
are triggered by different reasons. Inter-RAT handovers between 3G and 2G are classified into
the following by involved service type:
 Handovers in the CS domain (from 3G to 2G)
 Handovers in the PS domain (from 3G to 2G)
 Simultaneous 3G-to-2G handovers in the CS and PS domains
Signaling procedures for handovers vary by service type. For details, see the relevant 3G
feature documentation.
The following describes inter-RAT handovers based on coverage, downlink QoS, load, or
service, intra-RAT PS handover phase 2, network assisted cell change, PS handovers between
UMTS and GPRS, and 3G/2G common load management.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.3.1 WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

Model
QW1SIRHBCV00
QW1SIRHBCP00
Availability
This feature is available from RAN2.0.
Summary
This feature is related to inter-RAT handover based on coverage such as Active Set Quality
measurement 2D, UE uplink QoS or emergency blind handover triggered by event 1F. This
feature deals with the inter-RAT handover caused by coverage reason or UE mobility.
Benefits
Inter-RAT handover improves flexibility in planning UMTS and GSM networks for the
network operator. It can also reduce cost by utilizing the existing GSM network resources and
provide coverage expansion, load sharing, and layered service.
Description
Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM/GPRS Function is the procedure during which the
WCDMA RAN initiates handover (for CS services) or UE initiates cell reselection (for PS
services) to the GSM.
The GSM/GPRS system cannot perform CS and PS services simultaneously. Therefore, when
the handover for CS and PS domain combined services is determined,the CS service can be
handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM/GPRS system successfully, but the PS
service will be suspended. After the CS call is finished, a resume request will be sent to the
2G SGSN to continue the PS service.
Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM can be triggered by coverage reason, cell load,
service of UE and HCS. The trigger condition based on the cell load belongs to the optional
feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load. The trigger condition based on
the service assigned by CN node belongs to the optional feature WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Service. This feature deals with inter-RAT handover triggered by
coverage reason.
This trigger condition is based on the quality measurement. The compressed mode for DL or
UL will be triggered by event measurement report 2d for inter-frequency and inter-RAT
handover and stopped by event measurement report 2f. When the compressed mode triggered,
the RNC will start the inter-RAT measurement in UE to get the target cell to handover if inter-
RAT neighboring cells are configured.
The related measurement quantity can be either Ec/N0 or RSCP. Moreover, event 3A and
period measurement report mode are supported and which measurement quantity and mode to
use can be configured by operator. The measurement related parameters include threshold,
hysteresis, and trigger delay time. The inter-RAT neighboring cell number can be up to 32.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The compressed mode includes two types, spreading factor reduction (SF/2) and high layer
approaches. The usage of type of compressed mode is decided by the RNC automatically,
according to the configurable spreading factor used in uplink and downlink.
Another measurement report 1F can also trigger inter-RAT handover, but compressed mode
will not be triggered in this scenario since such report means call drop may occur in any time
and there is no time to implement measurement procedure. The target cell to handover will be
selected based on the configurable parameter "Blind Handover Priority" in the neighboring
inter RAT cells, Priority 0-15 indicates the handover successful rate can be guaranteed, such
parameter will be certain as the result of network planning.
Inter-RAT handover triggered by UE TX power is available for PS BE, CS AMR services.
This function can be switched on/off by operator.
The procedure of Inter-RAT handover from UMTS to GSM is executed by Relocation
Preparation procedure at Iu interface and handover or cell change order command at Uu
interface.
When the UE is in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state, UMTS ' GSM handover
in PS domain is triggered through Inter-RAT Cell Re-selection from UMTS to GPRS
procedure. This procedure is triggered by UE and realized by Routing Area Update procedure.
The parameters for inter-RAT handover can be configured and are different for CS and PS
services respectively.
Since the GSM/GPRS system cannot perform CS and PS services simultaneously, Inter-RAT
handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS Function can be divided to CS and PS individually.
On the UMTS side:
For CS: inter-RAT handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS is comprised of Relocation Resource
Allocation, Relocation detect, Relocation complete procedure at Iu interface and
HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE message processing at Uu interface.
For PS: inter-RAT handover from GSM/GPRS to UMTS is the same as the setup of a PS
service.
Enhancement
 RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP services are handed over
to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.
 RAN10.0
In RAN10.0, inter-RAT handover triggered by UE TX power or high UL BLER is
available for PS BE and CS AMR services.
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
The UE should support the relevant measurements and the procedure of handover. If the
video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied, the
UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
If the video telephony fallback to speech (AMR) for inter-RAT handover is to be applied,
the MSC needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.
 Other features
NA
5.3.2 WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

Model
QW1SINSHOV00
QW1SINSHOP00
Availability
This feature is introduced in 3GPP R99.
Summary
This feature supports 3G to 2G handover based on service attributes. When 3G and 2G
coexist, this feature enables the 3G traffic to be directed to the 2G system.
Benefits
This feature provides an inter-RAT handover mechanism according to the service. It can
balance the load between the two systems by transferring some kind of appropriate services to
GSM/GPRS and prevent the handover course from bad effect to services according to
attributes of the services.
Description
Inter-RAT Handover based on Service introduces a precondition for UMTS to GSM/GPRS
handover to UTRAN.
The RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC may include a
service handover IE. With this IE, the UTRAN determines whether to switch the
corresponding RAB from UTRAN to GSM/GPRS. The operation (the CN sends the RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the RNC) can also influence decisions made
regarding UTRAN-initiated inter-system handovers.
If this indicator is not included in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message, the RNC can
use its pre-configured value for various kinds of services.
Enhancement
 RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP services are handed over
to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
the UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
 Other features
NA
Recommend to deploy this feature with GUL Co-Operation Audit and Optimization Service
5.3.3 WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

Model
QW1SIELHOV00
QW1SIELHOP00
Availability
Summary
When a cell is in initial congestion state, this feature enables some UEs in the cell to be
handed over to an inter-RAT co-coverage cell, reducing the load of the cell.
Benefits
This feature reduces the load of the cell in basic congestion and keeps the system in a safety
state.
Description
This feature is an important action for Load Reshuffling (LDR). It enables the system to
perform inter-RAT handover that handover UE to GSM/GPRS cell and reduce current cell
load.
This action is triggered when system detects that the current serving cell load is beyond the
pre-defined congestion threshold and a cell is entering a basic congestion state. Normally the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
resource used for cell load level measurement includes the power resource, that used for
NodeB load level includes Iub transport resource and NodeB CE resource if Inter-RAT
handover is taken as an action for LDR. The load measurement is done both for UL and DL.
The system will select a UE to handover during the LDR according to the UE priority. If the
UEs have the same priority, the UE with higher service bit rate will be selected first.
Enhancement
 RAN5.1
In RAN5.1, the user selection criterion considers the Traffic Class, ARP, and bear type
(R99 or HSPA) when calculating the UE priority.
 RAN6.0
In RAN6.0, THP factor is added. the fallback of video telephony to speech before VP
services are handed over to the 2G system is supported to ensure continuous calls.
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
the UE needs to be compliant with 3GPP Release 6.
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
 Other features
When this feature is used for HSDPA/HSUPA load control, WRFD-010610 HSDPA
Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.
Recommend to deploy this feature with GUL Co-Operation Audit and Optimization Service
5.3.4 WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

Model
QW1SPIRHPV00
Availability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
This feature provides the inter-RAT relocation procedure for NACC and PS services to
shorten the interruption time of PS services caused by inter-RAT handover.
Benefits
The service interruption for PS service inter-system handover will be shorter or reduced. With
this feature, in scenario of inter-RAT handover, the user experience will be enhanced greatly
especially for the real-time PS service.
Description
The inter-RAT Handover Enhanced Package includes following features:
 NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)
 PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS
With these features, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover will be
shorter or reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
UE should also support NACC and PS handover.
 Other NEs
BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management) and PS handover
procedure.
 CN
SGSN should also support NACC and PS handover.
 Other features
WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage or WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or
WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)
5.3.5 WRFD-02030801 NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

Model
QW1SPIRHPV00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
This feature is available from RAN6.1 (BSC6900 only).
Summary
This feature supports the standard NACC procedure defined in 3GPP specifications.
Benefits
Compared with the normal cell change, the NACC can shorten a service interruption of about
four to eight seconds and greatly enhance user experience.
Description
The NACC refers to Network Assisted Cell Change from UTRAN to GERAN, which is
different from normal cell change order procedure, due to network providing GERAN (P) SI
to UE.
In today's GPRS networks (without NACC), cell re-selection may cause a service interruption
between 4 - 8 seconds, which obviously has an impact on the user experience. Similar
interruption time can be expected in mixed UMTS and GPRS networks, during UE cell re-
selection from UTRAN to GERAN.
GERAN (P)SI information is acquired by RIM (RAN Information Management) procedure.
In this feature, when handover from UTRAN to GERAN is to be performed, and if both UE
and network support NACC, then RNC will firstly trigger the RIM procedure. If (P)SI is
obtained successfully, cell change order from UTRAN message carrying the GERAN (P)SI
information will be sent. That is, NACC is completed, which is illustrated in the following
figure. Otherwise, normal cell change order would be performed.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
UE should also support NACC handover.
 Other NEs
BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management).
 CN
SGSN should also support NACC handover.
 Other features
WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2
5.3.6 WRFD-02030802 PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

Model
QW1SPIRHPV00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the relocation of PS services between systems.
Benefits
In inter-system handover scenarios, this feature can greatly improve user perception,
especially for real-time PS services.
Description
The PS handover is different from NACC or normal cell change function, with which the
relocation procedure between 3G and 2G is applied, just like the CS inter-system handover.
With this feature, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover is reduced by a
great extent.
In this feature, both handover from UTRAN to GERAN and handover from GERAN to
UTRAN are supplied. If both UE and network support PS handover, handover between
UTRAN and GERAN would be performed. Otherwise, either NACC or normal cell change
order would be selected.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
UE should also support PS handover.
 Other NEs
BSC should support PS handover procedure.
 CN
SGSN should also support PS handover.
 Other features
WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2
5.3.7 WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

Model
QW1SDQSHOV00
QW1SDQSHOP00
Availability
This feature is introduced in RAN10.0
Summary
When the load of voice and PS BE services is higher in the cell and downlink QoS drops, this
feature enables the UE to be handed over to an inter-RAT cell, guaranteeing QoS
requirements.
Benefits
DL QoS based inter-RAT handover provides the method to prevent call drop and guarantee
the QoS in inter-RAT networking, therefore, improving the network performance and
enhancing the end user experience.
Description
In the scenarios of severe fading and high load, the call drop could take place due to the
limitation of DL transmitted code power. In addition, coverage area is different for different
services in network planning, thereby the system should take actions in order to guarantee the
downlink QoS and keep the connection as could as possible. The evaluation of downlink QoS
status is on the basis of TCP (Transmitted Code Power) or RLC retransmission (only for R99
PS BE).
Once the downlink QoS is detected in bad condition, inter-RAT handover could be triggered if
in inter-system networking:
 For AMR service, inter-RAT handover could be triggered based on TCP;
 For PS BE service, inter-RAT handover could be triggered based on TCP and RLC
retransmission.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
This feature can be switched on/off separately for AMR and PS BE services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
UE should support the relevant measurements and the procedure of handover.
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage
5.3.8 WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management

Model
QW1S03CLMV00
QW1S03CLMP00
Availability
Summary
During inter-RAT handover or inter-system direct retry, this feature supports the transfer of
load information as stipulated in 3GPP specifications to reduce inter-RAT ping-pong
handover.
Benefits
 Decrease the probability of 2G system overload or congestion due to inter-RAT handover
from 3G to 2G based on service or load.
 Avoid 3G system overload due to inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G.
 Avoid ping-pong handover between 3G and 2G.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Description
The 3G/2G Common Load Management applies to inter-RAT handover and inter system
direct retry. The load of source cell and target cell are considered during inter-RAT handover
from 3G to 2G or from 2G to 3G and inter system direct retry.
During inter-RAT handover from 3G to 2G, the RNC will send the load information of the
source cell to 2G through RELOCATION REQUIRED message and may get the load
information of target cell from RELOCATION COMMAND message. If the load of target
cell is in a high level (over the threshold configured) and the inter-RAT handover from 3G to
2G is triggered not because of coverage, then the inter-RAT handover from 3G to 2G will be
cancelled.
During inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G, the RNC may get the load information of the
source cell from RELOCATION REQUEST message. If the load of source cell is not in a
high level (less than the threshold configured) and the inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G is
triggered not because of coverage, then the inter-RAT handover from 2G to 3G will be
refused.
During inter system direct retry, the procedure and decision is similar to that of inter-RAT
handover from 3G to 2G. If the load of target cell is in a high level (over the threshold
configured), inter system direct retry will be cancelled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
BSS should support this feature.
 CN
CN should support this feature.
 Other features
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT
Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) or
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package or WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover
Phase 2
5.3.9 WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

Model
QW1SIRRBDP00

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Availability
This feature is available from RAN12.0
Summary
If UE initialize a voice call with a long distance to the antenna, UMTS RAN can consider it as
a call attempt in the pilot contaminated area, and redirect it to GSM to avoid handover drop in
the following call procedure.
Benefits
The feature can reduce the drop rate in handover in a 2G/3G co-coverage area, solve the pilot
contamination problem and improve the network performance.
Description
Pilot contamination is a phenomenon that can cause call drop in handover.
For example, in the picture, A' is the pilot contaminated area of Cell A.If UE setup a call in
area A', when it moves to the cells in blue which are not the neighboring cells of cell A, the
call will drop because cell A has no handover relationship with these cells.
For the voice call initiated in the contaminated area which is co-covered by 2G and 3G, RAN
will directly redirect it to GSM.
Operator can configure a distance threshold for each cell by LMT, the UE distance is
measured by RAN when RRC CONNECT REQUEST message is received, if the distance to
the antenna is beyond this threshold, the UE location will be seemed as in the contaminated
area, the system then redirect the call to GSM. In this way, the handover drop in the call
procedure will be reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package
5.3.10 WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry

Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00
Availability
Summary
This feature is related to inter-system direct retry during the RAB assignment.
Benefits
Inter system Directed Retry can decrease the access failure rate, and improve the QoS of the
network.
Description
Inter System Direct Retry is a feature used during Admission Control when a new call fails to
access the network in the admission procedure. This feature is executed in RAB
ASSIGNMENT procedure.
If the RAB ASSIGNMENT procedure fails during admission, the RNC will respond with the
RAB ASSIGNEMNT RESPONSE message with the cause "Direct Retry". Then, a relocation
procedure will be initiated by RNC with the cause of "Direct Retry".
The following procedure is as the same as the normal inter-RAT handover procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
5.3.11 WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect

Model
QW1S0DR&RV00
QW1S0DR&RP00
Availability
Summary
This feature is related to inter-system redirect during the RRC assignment.
Benefits
Inter-system Redirect can decrease the access failure rate, and improve the QoS of the
network.
Description
Redirect feature is used during admission procedure when a new call is failed due to resource
unavailable. It occurs in RRC CONNECTION SETUP procedure.
When a UE initiates a RRC CONNECTION REQUEST and the request is refused in the
original cell. And RRC direct retry fails too. The system will send RRC CONNECTION
REJECT message with Redirection info indicating UE to access to an inter-system cell.
Compared with RRC Direct Retry procedure, UE will perform a new cell-reselection
procedure in inter-system Redirect.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
5.3.12 WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC

Connection Setup
Model
QW1S0SSLSV00
QW1S0SSLSM00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables service and load sharing between different frequencies, bands, or systems
based on the service type and cell load.
Benefits
In the RRC connection setup phase, this feature can implement service steering and shorten
the delay of service setup. In addition, this feature can provide inter-frequency or inter-RAT
load sharing under different coverage and increase the success rate of load sharing.
Description
In the RRC connection setup phase, this feature enables the following functions: (1) inter-
frequency or inter-RAT service steering based on the setup reasons of RRC connections; (2)
inter-frequency or inter-RAT load sharing under different coverage based on the cell load or
redirect proportion.
With this feature, service steering and load sharing are available through RRC redirection in
the RRC connection setup phase. In the RAB setup phase, the direct retry is used for service
steering and load sharing. As the RRC redirection is a cell reselection procedure based on UE
measurement, this feature is more suitable for the scenarios (for example, different frequency
bands are available or no site is shared) to implement service steering and load sharing of two
TRXs.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
 RAN17.1
In RAN17.1, the redirection frequency band can be selected based on the coverage area,
thereby enhancing the application flexibility of this feature in macro and micro
networking as well as multi-band networking and increasing the service setup success
rate.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
None
 Other Network Units
None
 CN
None
 Other Features
5.3.13 WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover

Enhancement Based on Iur-g
Model
QM1SLHIURV00
QM1SLHIURP00
Availability
Summary
This feature is based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-g
interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed through the RRC redirection and load-
based handover from the 3G network to the 2G network on the basis of the service attributes
and the load of the 2G networks when 3G cell enters LDR status. In this manner, the load is
shared by the GSM network when the load of UMTS network is heavy.
Benefits
Based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-g interface, this
feature shares the load of the UMTS network by the GSM network. As a result, the load of the
GSM network and the UMTS network in the same coverage area remains even, the risk of

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
network congestion due to the load imbalance between networks is reduced, and the network
usage is increased.
Description
With this feature, the networks in the same coverage area have nearly the same load.
Therefore, the access failures during the MS access are greatly reduced, and each network has
remaining resources to provide a higher rate for the PS services. If the GSM cell and the
UMTS cell under the same MBSC with co-sited MBTSs have the same-coverage area, 3G-to-
2G handover algorithm enhancement in connection state is available based on the private
information exchange mechanism.
For the load management of the 3G cells, the inter-RAT handover based on load or HCS by
coverage is enhanced on the basis of Huawei private information exchange mechanism over
the Iur-g interface.With this feature, a more proper target cell can be selected for the inter-
RAT handover. In addition, the probability of the ping-pong handover due to the high load of
the neighboring 2G cell can be minimized if the following requirements are met:
 The inter-RAT neighboring cell with the lowest load is selected.
 The difference between the load in the source cell and the load in the target 2G cell
exceeds the configured threshold.
 The handover does not lead to congestion in the target cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
In the BSC6900, the interface board FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc must be configured
to support Iur-g.
In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the Iur-g interface.
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS
(Hierarchical Cell Structure) GBFD-511101 GSM/UMTS Load Handover Enhancement
based on Iur-g

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.3.14 WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on

Iur-g
Model
QW1SGUNACC00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol
stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS
services from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell does not require the information transfer via the
CN.
Benefits
This feature provides a solution that enables the NACC procedure when the CN does not
support the RIM procedure. The simulation results show that this feature helps shorten the
delay of PS handover by two seconds. As the delay is shortened, the user experience can be
improved.
Description
As indicated in the 3GPP specifications, the GERAN (P) SI is obtained through the RIM
procedure during the NACC procedure. The NACC procedure involves the RNC, UMTS
SGSN, GSM SGSN, and BSC. When this feature is applied, the GSM/UMTS GERAN (P) SI
information is transferred over the Iur-g interface between the base station controllers, without
being transferred via the CN.
This feature applies only to the Iur-g interface, which connects different base station
controllers. In such a case, the GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the protocol
stack complying with the 3GPP specifications. If there is no Iur-g interface between UMTS
and GSM, the GERAN (P) SI information can be exchanged only via the CN, and accordingly
the NACC procedure can be implemented only through the CN, as specified in the 3GPP
specifications.
The following figure shows the network topology that supports this feature. As shown in the
figure, the Huawei RNCs and BSCs are connected through the Iur-g interface. This feature
applies to the BSC/RNC of other vendors only if it has passed the interoperability test (IOT).
Otherwise, the CN-involved NACC procedure is applied. For the BSC/RNC of other vendors,
the common cell reselection procedure is performed if the CN does not support the RIM
procedure.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
to support Iur-g. In the BSC6910, only the FG2c, GOUc, or EXOUa board supports the
Iur-g interface.
 NodeB
NA
 UE
UEs must support NACC procedure.
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS
or WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage or WRFD-020305 Inter-
RAT Handover Based on Service or WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on
Load or WRFD-021200 Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS)

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.3.15 WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on

Iur-g
Model
QW1S0GULBV00
Availability
Summary
This feature implements RRC redirection and the load-based GSM/UMTS handover through
the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack
complies with the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the basis
of the service handover indicator and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network
during RRC connection setup or after RAB setup. In this way, a load balance is achieved
between the GSM network and UMTS network.
Benefits
This feature aims at striking a load balance between the GSM network and UMTS network. It
reduces the possibility of congestion in areas covered by both GSM and UMTS. The network
utilization is consequently increased. The simulation results show that this feature reduces the
percentage of invalid handovers between the GSM network and UMTS network by up to 6%
and decreases the access congestion rate during busy hours by up to 4%.
Description
As high-speed PS services are on great demand by a large number of GSM/UMTS dual-mode
handsets in well-established 2G/3G commercial networks, the load of UMTS network has
become increasingly heavy. Facing the situation, network operators focus on reducing the
congestion rate and making full utilization of the present network capacity. This feature can
efficiently address this issue. With this feature, the load balance between the GSM network
and UMTS network can be achieved. This helps reduce the possibility of network congestion
and the percentage of invalid inter-RAT handovers. As a result, the capacity of both the GSM
network and UMTS network can be fully utilized.
The following figure shows the applicable scenario where the GSM cell and UMTS cell have
the same coverage. Through the exchange of load information of the GSM network and
UMTS network over the Iur-g interface, redirection for load-balancing can be performed
during RRC connection setup, and load-based handover can be performed after RAB setup.
Redirection for load-balancing during RRC connection setup
Redirection for load-balancing during RRC connection setup is performed on a number of
UEs requesting CS services in a UMTS cell when the same-coverage GSM cell is lightly
loaded. In such a case, the RNC redirects a number of UEs to the GSM cell according to the
predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a probability rate with respect to the
redirection of a single UE. In this way, a load balance between the UMTS network and GSM
network can be maintained. SHAPE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Load-based handover after RAB setup

Load-based handover from UMTS to GSM after RAB setup is performed on the basis of the
service handover indicator, PS service rate, and load difference between the UMTS network
and GSM network.
If the UE requests only the CS service in a UMTS cell, the RNC decides whether the UMTS
network or GSM network processes the request. The conditions on which the decision is
based are as follows:
 The UE supports GSM services.
 The service handover indicator assigned by the CN or configured at the RNC shows that
the CS service can be handed over to the GSM cell.
 The target GSM cell is lightly loaded.
 The load difference between the source UMTS cell and target GSM cell exceeds the
The GBSC/MBSC determines whether to perform the inter-RAT handover on a number of
UEs according to the predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a probability rate
with respect to the redirection of a single UE. In this way, the load between the GSM network
and UMTS network is balanced.
Network operators can decide which load-balancing scheme to be applied according to the
actual situations. The major differences between the two schemes are as follows:
 As it is difficult to learn the traffic class requested by the UE, the traffic class mapping
needs to be verified before performing redirection for load-balancing. For example,
whether the GSM network supports the conversational service from the UMTS network
should be verified. If the traffic class is not supported, the RNC can decide whether the
UE can be handed over to the GSM network only after RAB setup is complete.
 The redirection function does not require the UE to enable the compressed mode but it
may prolong the delay of service access and also affect user experience. For the
handover performed after RAB setup, the RNC can select a candidate GSM cell as the
target cell, which improves the efficiency of load balancing. In addition, the handover
success rate is higher than the redirection success rate. In contrast to the redirection
process, the inter-RAT handover process requires the UE to enable the compressed

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
mode. Therefore, the handover is a relatively long process, during which the UMTS
network still provides system resources for the UEs steered to the GSM network.
 To guarantee its success rate, the redirection process requires that the source UMTS cell
and the target GSM cell should have the same coverage. Differently, the handover
process only requires that the GSM cell and the UMTS cell should be neighboring cells.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
Iur-g interface.
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based
on Service GBFD-511103 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
5.3.16 WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on

Iur-g
Model
QW1S0GUTSV00
Availability
Summary
This feature supports RRC redirection and GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover based on service.
With this feature, services are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator,
hierarchical network planning, and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network when an
MS accesses the network. Service steering enables UEs requesting speech to access the GSM
network and those requesting PS services to access the UMTS network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Benefits
This feature helps operators to develop network services in hierarchies, which facilitates the
hierarchical network planning. With this feature, the spectrum utilization is increased. The
simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid inter-RAT
handovers by up to 8% and increases the total capacity of the GSM and UMTS networks by
up to 8%.
Description
In the case of evolution from a legacy GSM network to a GSM&UMTS network, the UMTS
network usually has a larger capacity in the early stage. How to fully utilize the UMTS
network to carry high-speed services has become a major concern for network operators. This
feature provides the service steering function for the benefit of network planning. Service
steering helps improve the utilization of resources in each network and divide frequencies and
RATs into different hierarchies.
When a GSM cell and a UMTS cell have the same coverage, considering resource utilization
and QoS requirements, speech services are steered to the GSM cell whereas data services are
steered to the UMTS cell.
In addition to service steering, the selection of RAT for a UE to access also depends on the
network load.
This helps optimize the network performance in the following aspects:
 Tasks of different RATs can be clearly defined, which facilitates the planning of network
capacity.
 Service steering can reduce interference between different traffic classes, increasing the
capacity of the UMTS network.
 The flexible distribution of services to the UMTS and GSM cells can improve the
utilization of system resources, reduce the access congestion rate, and enhance the QoS
of the network.
This feature provides two load-balancing schemes. One is to redirect CS services to the GSM
cell during RRC connection setup, and the other is to perform load-based handovers between
the GSM and UMTS cells after RAB setup.
During the redirection process, if the UE initiating the RRC connection request in the UMTS
cell uses the protocol of R6 or later, the UE carries information about the access domain and
call type when the GSM cell under the same coverage is lightly loaded. If the access domain
is the CS domain and the call type is the speech service, the service is redirected to the GSM
cell. In this way, the UE initiating the request for speech services in the UMTS cell is steered
to the GSM cell. Therefore, more capacity of the UMTS system is reserved for the UEs
requesting high-speed PS services.
The load-based handover between the UMTS and GSM cells after RAB setup is an enhanced
function of the existing handover feature provided by Huawei. This function is determined by
the service handover indicator, PS service rate, and load of the UMTS/GSM system after
RAB setup.
If the UE requests only the CS service in a UMTS cell, the RNC hands the UE over to a
neighboring GSM cell when the following conditions are met:
 The UE supports GSM services.
 The neighboring GSM cell is lightly loaded.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
If the UE requests only the PS service in a GSM cell, the BSC hands the UE over to a
neighboring UMTS cell when the following conditions are met:
 The UE supports UMTS services.
 The neighboring UMTS cell is lightly loaded.
Network operators can decide which load-balancing scheme to be applied according to the
actual situations. The major differences between the two schemes are as follows:
 As it is difficult to learn the traffic class requested by the UE, the traffic class mapping
needs to be verified before performing redirection for load-balancing. For example,
whether the GSM network supports the conversational service from the UMTS network
should be verified. If the traffic class is not supported, the RNC can decide whether the
UE can be handed over to the GSM network only after RAB setup is complete.
 The redirection function does not require the UE to enable the compressed mode but it
may prolong the delay of service access and also affect user experience. For the
handover performed after RAB setup, the RNC can select a candidate GSM cell as the
target cell, which improves the efficiency of service steering. In addition, the handover
success rate is higher than the redirection success rate. In contrast to the redirection
process, the inter-RAT handover process requires the UE to enable the compressed
mode. Therefore, the handover is a relatively long process, during which the UMTS
network still provides system resources for the UEs steered to the GSM network.
 To guarantee its success rate, the redirection process requires that the source UMTS cell
and the target GSM cell should have the same coverage. Differently, the handover
process only requires that the GSM cell and the UMTS cell should be neighboring cells.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
Iur-g interface.
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
NA
 Other features
WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service WRFD-020400 DRD
Introduction Package GBFD-511104 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.4 U2L
5.4.1 WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase1
Model
QW1SMBUL1P00
Availability
Summary
The feature Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 provides the following functions:
 Huawei UMTS supports cell selection/reselection between UMTS and LTE networks.
 Huawei UMTS supports PS handovers from an LTE cell to a UMTS cell.
Benefits
This feature can improve the user experience of fast moving LTE UEs in areas covered by
both UMTS and LTE. In areas where there is no LTE coverage or the LTE network traffic is
heavy, the UMTS network can absorb some LTE traffic.
Description
This feature provides an initial mobility solution for operators who require a network
evolution from UMTS to LTE.
 Supporting cell selection/reselection between UMTS and LTE networks
The RNC allows LTE frequency information and cell selection and reselection parameters to
be broadcast in a cell, so that UEs in idle mode can preferentially camp on an LTE cell. In this
way, on the one hand, in areas covered by the LTE network, LTE-capable UEs can have better
experience of high-speed services in the LTE network; on the other hand, because these UEs
access the LTE network, potential UMTS cell load and network load can be reduced.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Supporting PS handovers from an LTE cell to a UMTS cell

At the initial phase of LTE network deployment, operators may plan LTE network coverage
only in hotspot areas. When a UE leaves the hotspot areas, the UE needs to be handed over
from the LTE network to the UMTS network. If the LTE network load is too high, some UEs
also need to be handed over from the LTE network to the UMTS network. With this feature,
the RNC can process the handover requests sent from the LTE network. This feature does not
support a handover from the UMTS network to the LTE network.
Enhancement
 RAN17.1
This feature supports frequency priority-based cell reselection for UEs in the
CELL_FACH state from RAN17.1.
The RNC allows broadcasting the indication of frequency priority-based cell reselection
for UEs in the CELL_FACH state and the indication of reselection layer in a cell
broadcast message. According to the indications, the UE in the CELL_FACH state
performs frequency priority-based cell reselection. In this way, the UE in the
CELL_FACH state implements reselection from UMTS and LTE, thereby improving the
user experience of UMTS/LTE dual-mode UEs.
Dependency
 RNC
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 NodeB
None
 UE
The UE must support both UMTS and LTE.
To use frequency priority-based cell reselection for UEs in the CELL_FACH state, the
UE must support this function.
None
 CN
LTE should also support this feature.
 Other Features
None
5.4.2 WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from

UMTS to LTE
Model
QW1SPSRFUL00
Availability
Summary
If a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE establishes only PS services in UMTS under the hybrid macro
coverage of UMTS and LTE, the RNC can redirect the UE to the LTE network.
Benefits
This feature provides a substitute for PS service handover from UMTS to LTE, if the UE or
network does not support the PS service handover from UMTS to LTE at the initial stage of
UMTS/LTE hybrid network deployment. With this feature, PS services can be redirected from
UMTS to LTE to improve user experience.
Description
In the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE, if UEs or the UTRAN does not support
PS handovers to the LTE network, operators can use this feature to redirect UEs to the LTE
network where UEs will reestablish their PS services. This feature is applicable only when the
following conditions are met:
 The conditions of PS service handover from UMTS to LTE are met but the UE or
network does not support the PS service handover from UMTS to LTE.
 The UE supports both UMTS and LTE.
 The UE to be handed over processes only PS services that can be established in the LTE
network. In the RAB assignment message from the SGSN, there is no indication that the
PS services processed by the UE cannot be established in the LTE network.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The RNC carries the LTE frequency information in the RRC Connection Release message and
instructs the UE to access the LTE network.
Enhancement
 RAN16.0
During UMTS-to-LTE redirections, the RNC preferentially selects neighboring LTE cells
or frequencies with low loads as target cells.
 RAN17.1
The RNC learns about LTE subscriber information. That is, the RNC records subscribers
who were handed over or redirected from LTE and labels these subscribers as LTE
subscribers. Service-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed
only on these subscribers.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
The UE supports both UMTS and LTE.
None
 CN
The CN must support interoperability between UMTS and LTE. To obtain the loads of
neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure, the CN must support the RIM
procedure between UMTS and LTE.
 Other Features
To obtain the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure, this feature is
dependent on the LOFD-070203 Cell selection based RIM's LTE auxiliary feature.
None
5.4.3 WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to

LTE
Model
QW1SSBPSHUL0
Availability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
If a UMTS and LTE dual-mode UE in a UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area processes
only PS services in the UMTS network, Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
allows the RNC to hand over the PS services to the LTE network.
Benefits
 Improved user experience for PS services
 Reduced service interruption time compared with redirection
 Reduced UMTS network load and increased LTE network utilization
Description
This feature allows the RNC to hand over a UE and its PS service to the LTE network in
either of the following scenarios:
 The UE in the UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area originates a PS service in the
UMTS network.
 For a UE in the UMTS and LTE overlapping coverage area that is handed over from the
LTE network to the UMTS network due to a CS fallback (CSFB), after the UE
terminates the CS voice service in the UMTS network, the UE still has ongoing PS
services.
The implementation is as follows:
1. The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the information
about the target LTE cell.
2. The SGSN forwards the relocation request to the MME.
3. After the LTE side has made preparations for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs
the SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.
4. Upon receipt of the Relocation Command message forwarded by the SGSN from the
MME, the RNC instructs the UE to hand over to the target eNodeB.
To use this feature, both the UMTS network and the UE must support LTE measurement and
UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.
This feature supports interoperability between the UMTS network and the TDD LTE network
and between the UMTS network and the FDD LTE network. The TDD LTE and FDD LTE
networks, however, cannot coexist.
When the MOCN feature is enabled in the target LTE network, Service-Based PS Handover
from UMTS to LTE must not be enabled if the UMTS and LTE networks do not share the
same PLMN. Otherwise, call drops may occur.
Enhancement
 RAN16.0
The UTRAN obtains the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure.
During UMTS-to-LTE handovers, the RNC preferentially selects neighboring LTE cells
 RAN17.1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
subscribers. Service-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
UEs must comply with 3GPP Release 8 or later and support UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers and measurements on neighboring LTE cells in connected mode.
The eNodeB and MME must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.
 CN
The SGSN must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers. To obtain the loads of
 Other Features
To obtain the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure, this feature is
dependent on the LOFD-070201 Cell selection based RIM's LTE auxiliary feature.
None
5.4.4 WRFD-140224 Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

Model
QW1SCSFBRIM0
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain and maintain the system information of the UMTS
cell, including the ID of the target cell and convolutional code, through the RAN Information
Management (RIM) procedure and sends the information to the UE in the RRC Connection
Release message. This can reduce the access time when the UE is redirected from an LTE
network to a UMTS network without reading system information, improving user experience.
Benefits
The LTE-to-UMTS redirection delay can be reduced by up to 1.28s, depending on the size of
SIB11. This improves user experience because the access time is shortened during redirection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Description
Upon receiving a RIM request for the system information of the UMTS cell from the eNodeB,
the RNC sends the system information of the UMTS cell to the eNodeB through the RIM
procedure. If the system information of the UMTS cell changes (except for changes in the
information element UL interference in SIB7), the RNC sends the updated system information
to the LTE network through the RIM update procedure.
The eNodeB receives and maintains the system information of the UMTS cell. With flash
circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) in Release 9, the eNodeB then forwards the system
information of the UMTS cell to the UE in the RRC Connection Release message. Therefore,
the UE does not need to read system information after redirection, which reduces the
redirection delay.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
The UE must support flash CSFB in Release 9.
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
− The mobility management entity (MME) and serving GPRS support node (SGSN)
must support the RIM procedure in 3GPP release 9. − If the core network (CN) is earlier
than 3GPP release 9, it must support eNodeB ID conversion.
 Other Features
None
5.4.5 WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency

Calls
Model
QM1SBASICV00
QM1SBASICP00
Availability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
In the UMTS/LTE overlapping coverage area, if a UE on the LTE network is to fall back to
the UMTS network for an emergency call by using an LTE-to-UMTS PS handover, the UE
can initiate the emergency call on the UMTS network only after its PS connection on the LTE
network has been admitted to the UMTS network. This feature ensures the success of PS
admission caused by circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) for the LTE emergency call, by
decreasing the PS service rate or performing resource preemption.
Benefits
This feature ensures the success of LTE-to-UMTS PS handovers by decreasing the PS service
rate or performing resource preemption, which in turn ensures the setup success rate of LTE
emergency calls.
Description
This feature applies to scenarios where the LTE network does not support voice services
because the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is not available for use. This feature enables a
UE to fall back to the UMTS network when the UE attempts to process voice services
(including emergency calls) on the LTE network. To initiate an emergency call on the LTE
network, the UE in idle mode first needs to transit to connected mode. Then, the UE falls back
to the UMTS network by using CSFB. Each UE in connected mode maintains a default PS
connection on the LTE network, and this PS connection also needs to be handed over or
redirected to the UMTS network. The eNodeB determines whether to perform CSFB by using
an LTE-to-UMTS PS handover or redirection. If an LTE-to-UMTS PS handover is to be
implemented, the eNodeB notifies the RNC that the PS handover is caused by CSFB for an
emergency call. The UE can initiate an emergency call on the UMTS network only after the
PS connection has been admitted to the UMTS network. This feature ensures the success of
PS admission by decreasing the PS service rate or performing resource preemption, which in
turn guarantees successful CSFB for LTE emergency calls.
The PS service admission process is as follows:
 For a PS BE service, its data rate is reduced to 8 kbps before the admission. If the
admission fails, the PS BE service preempts the CS or PS resources of the lowest-
priority user in the UMTS network to guarantee successful PS service admission.
 For a PS non-BE service, its data rate is reduced to the GBR before the admission. If the
admission fails, the PS non-BE service preempts the CS or PS resources of the lowest-
priority user in the UMTS network to guarantee successful PS service admission.
 After the PS service admission succeeds, the PS service rate is gradually increased if
there are available resources in the UMTS network.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The UE must comply with 3GPP Release 8 or later and support LTE-to-UMTS PS
handovers and LTE-to-UMTS CSFB. An emergency call indication can be displayed in
the message that is sent from the UE to the mobility management entity (MME).
The eNodeB must support LTE-to-UMTS PS handovers and LTE-to-UMTS CSFB. The
CSFB High Priority indication can be displayed in the handover request message that is
sent from the eNodeB to the RNC.
 CN
The CN must support LTE-to-UMTS PS handovers and LTE-to-UMTS CSFB.
The MME needs to send the CS Fallback High Priority indication in the INITIAL
CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message to the eNodeB.
 Other Features
NA
5.4.6 WRFD-140226 Fast Return from UMTS to LTE

Model
QW1SFRFULV00
QW1SFRFULP00
Availability
This feature is available from RAN14.0 as a trial feature.
This feature is available from RAN15.0 as a commercial optional feature.
Summary
In a UMTS+LTE hybrid network, a UE initiating a voice service on the LTE network may
shift to the UMTS network through CS fallback (CSFB) when the LTE network does not
support voice services. After the UE finishes its CS service, this feature enables the UE to fast
return to the LTE network.
Benefits
This feature reduces the UMTS-to-LTE cell reselection delay from 8s to at most 480 ms.
If the fast return is based on LTE measurement, the time from the CSFB voice call release to
the return to LTE decreases from 8s to 3.5s or so because LTE measurement requires 2s or 3s.
In addition, this feature can minimize network disconnections due to blind redirection in areas
without LTE coverage.
Description
In a UMTS+LTE hybrid network, a UE is switched to the UMTS network through CS
fallback. After the voice service is terminated, the RNC triggers this feature, including the
following functions:
 Blind Fast Return: Once the voice service is terminated, the RNC directly sends an RRC
release message or a handover command, indicating a UE redirection or handover to
LTE.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 LTE measurement-based Fast Return: Once the voice service is terminated, the RNC
triggers inter-RAT LTE measurement. The RNC sends an RRC release message or a
handover command, indicating a UE redirection or handover to LTE, only when the
measurement result reaches the handover threshold.
 Serving cell's RSCP-based Fast Return: After identifying a CSFB voice call, the RNC
starts periodic measurements of the serving cell's RSCP. When the CSFB voice call is
terminated, the RNC determines whether the RSCP measurement value of the serving
cell meets the RSCP threshold. The RNC sends an RRC release message or a handover
command, indicating a UE redirection or handover to LTE, only if the RSCP meets the
threshold requirements.
 Virtual grid-based fast return: Based on the grid-level UMTS-to-LTE handover and
redirection success rate, the RNC checks the LTE coverage in the grid where the UE is
located and determines whether to perform fast return. In grids with good LTE coverage,
the RNC performs blind handover-based fast return to the LTE. In grids with poor LTE
coverage, the RNC does not perform fast return.
Enhancement
 RAN17.1
After the CSFB voice call is terminated, LTE measurement is started. The CSFB user is
switched back to the LTE network through a Fast Return mode, which can be either
redirection or handover, only if there is LTE coverage. If there is no LTE coverage, Fast
Return is not triggered, which minimizes network disconnections due to no LTE
coverage.
During the CSFB voice call, UMTS serving cell's RSCP measurement is started. If the
RSCP measurement value reaches a specified threshold, the UE can be switched back to
LTE through blind Fast Return after the CSFB voice call is terminated. This mitigates the
impact of LTE measurement in compressed mode in UMTS and LTE co-site co-coverage
networking.
 RAN18.1
A virtual grid is specified by the downlink signal strength (RSCP) of multiple UMTS
cells. In addition, the UMTS-to-LTE redirection and handover success rates are
measured in this area. Based on historical UMTS-to-LTE redirection and handover
success rates of the virtual grid where the UE is located, the RNC determines whether to
trigger a fast return, increasing the fast return success rate.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
The UE supports both UMTS and LTE.
If CS fallback is implemented by means of redirection, the UE must support 3GPP
Release 9.4.0.
 Other NEs
If CS fallback is implemented by means of PS handover, the HANDOVER REQUEST
message sent to the RNC by the MME must carry the IE cause set to "CS Fallback
triggered" or CSFB Information set to "CSFB" or "CSFB High Priority."
 CN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The MSC must support the IU release command message carrying CSFB indication.
 Other Features
None
5.4.7 WRFD-171223 Fast Return to LTE for SRVCC User

Model
QW1S0QSPSV00
QW1S0QSPSP00
Availability
Summary
After an SRVCC user terminates a voice call, if there is LTE coverage, the user will be handed
over or redirected to the LTE network, thereby reducing the time an SRVCC user returns to
the LTE network and improving user experience.
Benefits
The time an SRVCC user takes to return to the LTE network decreases from 5–8 seconds to
about 3 seconds.
Description
In LTE weak coverage areas, an LTE VoIP call is switched to the CS domain of the UMTS
network through SRVCC. After the call is terminated, LTE measurement is started. If there is
LTE coverage, the SRVCC user is switched back to the LTE network through a Fast Return
mode, which can be either redirection or handover. If there is no LTE coverage, the Fast
Return of the SRVCC user is not triggered.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
The UE must support SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.
The eNodeB must be enabled with SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.
 CN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The CN must support SRVCC.

 Other Features
None
None
5.4.8 WRFD-150219 Coverage Based PS Redirection from UMTS

to LTE
Model
QW1S00CBPS00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the RNC to redirect a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when:
 The UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE.
 The UMTS signal quality received at the UE is poor.
 The LTE signal quality received at the UE is good.
When the UMTS signal quality received at the UE is very poor, the RNC can redirect the UE
to the LTE network through blind redirection.
Benefits
 This feature provides an alternative to the PS handover. When UEs, the UMTS network,
or the LTE network does not support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, this feature
enables PS redirection to the LTE network.
 When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, this feature
allows the UE to be redirected to the LTE network to ensure the continuity of PS
services.
 When the UMTS signal quality is very poor, this feature allows blind redirection to the
LTE network, reducing service drops.
 During UE redirection to the LTE network, this feature allows the RNC to obtain the
LTE frequency from the system information or from the neighboring LTE cell. If the
RNC obtains the LTE frequency from the system information, operators can eliminate
the workload for configuring the neighboring LTE cell.
Description
 When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, the RNC
decides whether to initiate measurements on the neighboring LTE cell and whether to

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
redirect a UE to the LTE network by considering the UE capabilities and the redirection
switch status. This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:
o. The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE and supports measurements
on the neighboring LTE cell.
p. The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the processed PS
services can be established on the LTE network.
With this feature, the RNC sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message to
instruct the UE to access the LTE network. This message includes the LTE
frequency information. The RNC obtains the LTE frequency information from the
system information or the neighboring LTE cell, depending on the redirection
switch status.
 When the UMTS signal quality is very poor, the RNC redirects the UE to the LTE
network through blind redirection without measurements on the neighboring LTE cell.
This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:
q. The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE.
r. The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the processed PS
services can be established on the LTE network.
With this feature, the RNC sends the UE an RRC Connection Release message to
instruct the UE to access the LTE network. This message includes the LTE
frequency information. The RNC obtains the LTE frequency information from the
system information or the neighboring LTE cell, depending on the redirection
switch status.
Enhancement
 RAN17.1
subscribers. Coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support both UMTS and LTE and support 3GPP Release 8 or later.
None
 CN
None
 Other Features
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
It is recommended that this feature work with the GUL Co-operation Audit and Optimization
Service.
5.4.9 WRFD-150220 Coverage Based PS Handover from UMTS to

LTE
Model
QW1S0CBPSH00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the RNC to hand over a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when:
 The UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE.
 The UMTS signal quality received at the UE is poor.
 The LTE signal quality received at the UE is good.
Benefits
When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, this feature allows
the UE to be handed over to the LTE network to ensure the continuity of PS services and
avoid service drops. Compared with PS redirection, PS handover shortens the service
interruption duration, improving user experience.
Description
When the UMTS signal quality is poor and the LTE signal quality is good, the RNC decides
whether to initiate measurements on the neighboring LTE cell and whether to hand over a UE
to the LTE network by considering the UE capabilities and the handover switch status. This
feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:
 The UE to be handed over supports both UMTS and LTE and supports measurements on
the neighboring LTE cell.
 The UE to be handed over processes only PS services, and all the processed PS services
can be established on the LTE network.
The procedure for the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is briefed as follows:
1. The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the
information about the target LTE cell.
2. The SGSN forwards the Relocation Required message to the MME.
3. After the LTE network is ready for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs the
SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.
4. Upon receipt of the Relocation Response message from the SGSN, the RNC instructs the
UE to be handed over to the target eNodeB.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
 RAN17.1
subscribers. Coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support the following:
− Both UMTS and LTE
− 3GPP Release 8 or later
− UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers
− Measurements on neighboring LTE cells in connected mode
 CN
The SGSN must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers.
 Other Features
None
It is recommended that this feature work with the GUL Co-operation Audit and Optimization
Service.
5.4.10 WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection from UMTS to

LTE
Model
QW1S0LBPSR00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the RNC to redirect a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when the UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS
and LTE and the serving UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Benefits
This feature reduces the possibility of congestion for a UMTS network by allowing more UEs
in the UMTS network to be redirected to the LTE network. In addition, this feature helps
improve the LTE network resource utilization at the early stage of LTE network deployment.
Description
In the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE, if UEs, the UMTS network, or the LTE
network does not support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, operators can use this feature to
redirect UEs to the LTE network where UEs will reestablish their PS services.
This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are met:
 The serving UMTS cell meets the conditions for load reshuffling (LDR).
 The UE to be redirected supports both UMTS and LTE.
 The UE to be redirected processes only PS services, and all the PS services can be
established on the LTE network. In the RAB assignment message sent from the SGSN,
there is no indication that the PS services processed by the UE cannot be established on
the LTE network.
Redirection is categorized into blind redirection and measurement-based redirection. If the
UE in connected mode does not support measurement on neighboring LTE cells and allows
blind redirection to the LTE network, the RRC Connection Release message sent from the
RNC to the UE will include the LTE frequency information, instructing the UE to perform
redirection. If the UE in connected mode supports measurement on neighboring LTE cells, the
RNC instructs the UE to enter the compressed mode for measurement and the RRC
Connection Release message will include the frequency of the neighboring LTE cell that was
reported by the UE.
Enhancement
 RAN16.0
During UMTS-to-LTE redirections, the RNC preferentially selects neighboring LTE cells
 RAN17.1
subscribers. Load-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed only
on these subscribers.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support both UMTS and LTE.
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 CN
To obtain the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure, the CN must
support the RIM procedure between UMTS and LTE.
 Other Features
To obtain the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure in RAN16.0,
this feature is dependent on the LOFD-070201 Cell selection based RIM's LTE auxiliary
feature.
None
5.4.11 WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE

Model
QW1S0LBPSH00
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the RNC to hand over a UMTS/LTE dual-mode UE processing only PS
services to the LTE network when the UE is located in the hybrid network coverage of UMTS
and LTE and the serving UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.
Benefits
This feature reduces the possibility of congestion for a UMTS network by allowing more UEs
in the UMTS network to be handed over to the LTE network. Compared with PS redirection,
PS handover shortens the service interruption duration, improving user experience. In
addition, this feature helps improve the LTE network resource utilization at the early stage of
LTE network deployment.
Description
In the hybrid network coverage of UMTS and LTE, if UEs, the UMTS network, and the LTE
network support the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover, operators can use this feature to hand over
UEs to the LTE network. This feature is applicable only when the following conditions are
met:
 The serving UMTS cell meets the conditions for LDR.
 The UE to be handed over supports both UMTS and LTE.
 The UE to be handed over processes only PS services, and all the PS services can be
established on the LTE network. In the RAB assignment message sent from the SGSN,
there is no indication that the PS services processed by the UE cannot be established on
the LTE network.
 The neighboring LTE cell meets the conditions for the UMTS-to-LTE handover.
The procedure for the UMTS-to-LTE PS handover is briefed as follows:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
1. The RNC sends the SGSN a Relocation Required message, which contains the
information about the target LTE cell.
2. The SGSN forwards the Relocation Required message to the MME.
3. After the LTE network is ready for the inter-RAT handover, the MME instructs the
SGSN to send a Relocation Response message to the RNC.
4. Upon receipt of the Relocation Response message from the SGSN, the RNC instructs the
UE to be handed over to the target eNodeB.
Enhancement
 RAN16.0
During UMTS-to-LTE handovers, the RNC preferentially selects neighboring LTE cells
 RAN17.1
subscribers. Load-based UMTS-to-LTE redirections or handovers can be performed only
on these subscribers.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
UEs must comply with 3GPP Release 8 or later and support UMTS-to-LTE PS
handovers and measurements on neighboring LTE cells in connected mode.
 CN
The SGSN must support UMTS-to-LTE PS handovers. To obtain the loads of
 Other Features
To obtain the loads of neighboring LTE cells through the RIM procedure in RAN16.0,
this feature is dependent on the LOFD-070201 Cell selection based RIM's LTE auxiliary
feature.
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.4.12 WRFD-150215 SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with PS

Handover
Model
QW1SSFLTUV00
QW1SSFLTUP00
Availability
Summary
This feature is part of the UMTS/LTE interoperability solution. This feature must be
supported by the UEs, radio access network (RAN), and core network (CN). Huawei RAN
supports the single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) from LTE to UMTS with PS
handover.
Benefits
With this feature, SRVCC is supported from the RAN side.
This feature ensures voice service continuity by allocating VoIP services and PS services (or
default PS bearers) from the LTE network to the UMTS network.
Description
In the initial phase of LTE network construction, the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) is not
deployed and IMS VoIP cannot be used to provide emergency and common voice call service.
Therefore, it is required that the UE fall back to the UMTS network through the circuit
switched fallback (CSFB) with PS handover.
After deployed with IMS, the LTE network supports Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
services. When a UE performing VoIP services on the LTE network moves out of the LTE
coverage, if there is UMTS coverage, the UE should be handed over to the UMTS network
for voice service continuity. When a UE is performing VoIP services on the LTE network,
there must be at least one PS bearer. The reason is that there must be a default PS bearer for a
UE in connected mode on the LTE network, even if the UE is not performing PS services.
When SRVCC from LTE to UMTS is being performed, the PS bearers will also be handed
over to the UMTS network.
Based on network configuration, the LTE network selects one handover scheme to perform an
LTE-to-UMTS handover. Candidate handover schemes are as follows:
 CS-only SRVCC, which is called SRVCC from LTE to UMTS without PS handover.
That is, VoIP services are first handed over to the CS domain of the UMTS network
through the switchover of the core network, while PS bearers are transferred to the
UMTS network through a routing area update (RAU) procedure. From the perspective of
UMTS RAN, the process is only an inter-RAT CS handover.
 PS+CS SRVCC, which is called SRVCC from LTE to UMTS with PS handover. That is,
through the switchover of the core network, VoIP and PS services are handed over to the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
CS and PS domains of the UMTS network, respectively. From the perspective of UMTS
RAN, the process is an inter-RAT CS+PS handover.
The first handover scheme has already been supported by Huawei RAN. The last handover
scheme will be implemented by this feature.
Enhancement
 RAN16.0
For an emergency-call SRVCC handover, this feature improves its admission priority and
supports resource preemption, thereby preferentially guaranteeing the continuity of
emergency calls.
 RAN17.1
For a combined-service SRVCC handover, the following is true:
− The RNC preferentially allocates the PS bearer of an incoming PS handover request
to HSPA+ channels. If the admission fails, the RNC performs channel fallback to
HSPA or R99, thereby ensuring a high PS service rate and a high incoming
handover preparation success rate.
− If the RNC receives an incoming CS handover request and a PS incoming handover
request expires, the RNC separately admits the incoming CS handover request to
increase the SRVCC handover preparation success rate.
Dependency
 RNC
None
 NodeB
None
 UE
The UE must support 3GPP Release 8 or later and also support SRVCC.
The eRAN must support SRVCC.
 CN
The CN must support SRVCC.
 Other Features
None
5.4.13 WRFD-150231 RIM Based UMTS Target Cell Selection for

LTE
Model
QW1S0RBUTC00
Availability

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain the load information of the UMTS cells through the
RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure and select the target UMTS cell base on the
cell load during redirection or handover from LTE to UMTS. This can increase the success
rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS and reduce inter-RAT ping-pong
handover.
Benefits
This feature can increase the success rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS and
reduce inter-RAT ping-pong handover.
Description
The redirection or handover from LTE to UMTS, such as CS fallback or LTE to UMTS PS
handover based on load, may fail when the target UMTS cell is congested. This will impact
the success rate of redirection and handover from LTE to UMTS, bring unnecessary signaling
process for handover preparing in eNodeB and delay the handover.
This feature enables the eNodeB to obtain the load information of the UMTS cells through the
RIM procedure. Therefore the eNodeB is able to select the proper target UMTS cell according
to the cell load.
Upon receiving a RIM request for the UMTS cells load information from the eNodeB, the
RNC sends the UMTS cells load information to the eNodeB through the RIM procedure. If
the UMTS cell load changes, the RNC sends the updated cell load information to the LTE
network through the RIM update procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 RNC
NA
 NodeB
NA
 UE
NA
 Other NEs
NA
 CN
The CN must support the RIM procedure in 3GPP release 9.
 Other Features
NA

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.5 L2G
5.5.1 LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN
and GERAN
Model
LT1SPIRHLG00
Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from eRAN1.0
 applicable to Micro from eRAN3.0
 applicable to LampSite from eRAN6.0
Summary
PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN provides the function of Inter-RAT
cell selection and reselection between E-UTRAN and GERAN, and the function that the UE
can handover to an Inter-RAT GERAN cell for the reasons of limited cell coverage. If the PS
handover is not supported by the current network, the PS redirection between E-UTRAN and
GERAN is provided to realize the Inter-RAT mobility. Moreover, the blind handover is
provided if Inter-RAT measurements may be skipped (to save time and resources) or can be
unavailable.
PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN supports also the function that the UEs can be
handed over to an Inter-RAT GERAN cell when there is uplink coverage restriction on E-
UTRAN.
PS handover based on uplink power is supported. When UE's service QoS is limited in uplink,
eNodeB can trigger an Inter-RAT handover to GERAN to guarantee the service QoS.
Benefits
The feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables the seamless mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN
 Guarantees smooth evolution from legacy wireless systems to LTE systems
 Provides supplementary coverage for E-UTRAN in early phase using the legacy wireless
systems to prevent call drop, thus, seamless overage for the UE
 Improves the network performance and end user experience
Description
1. PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN
Handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN is a critical feature to allow a seamless co-
existence and a smooth evolution from the legacy wireless communication systems to
LTE systems. It is one type of the Inter-RAT handover. It exists in the early phase of E-
UTRAN when a UE moves into an area where E-UTRAN does not have coverage but
GERAN has.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
In Huawei eNodeB, handover is based on the coverage by evaluating the cells' DL

reference signals which can be RSRP, RSRQ of E-UTRA, and carrier Received Signal
Strength Indicator (carrier RSSI) of GSM .
When a UE is moving out of E-UTRAN coverage, the eNodeB can decide whether to
handover it from E-UTRA to GERAN according to its reported measurement. The UE
performs handover to the target GERAN cell after receiving the handover command
from the eNodeB.
The Inter-RAT measurement of the target cell is gap-assisted for UE with one RF
receiver. In the serving cell, the Inter-RAT measurement is triggered by an event A2 that
means the quality of E-UTRAN DL reference signal becomes worse than the absolute
threshold, and stopped by an event A1 that means the quality of E-UTRAN DL reference
signal is better than absolute threshold.
The Inter-RAT handover is triggered by an event B1 that means the carrier RSSI of GSM
becomes better than absolute threshold. After receiving the measurement report from
UE, the eNodeB decides to hand over the UE to GERAN.
Generally speaking, LTE system is limited in uplink. Sometimes, QoS can be guaranteed
in downlink, but in uplink it is not satisfied even UE has transmitted its full power. To
guarantee UE's service QoS in this scenario, Huawei eNodeB supports uplink
transmission power based Inter-RAT handover to GERAN.
While eNodeB detected UE's QoS is limited, eNodeB will send measurement control
message to UE. When UE reports B1 event to eNodeB, eNodeB decides whether to
handover to GERAN.
Huawei eNodeB also supports the PS handover between GERAN and E-UTRAN. In
addition to PS handover, Huawei eNodeB also supports Cell Change Order (CCO) with
or without NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change).
In some specific scenario, Inter-RAT measurements may be omitted (to save time and
resources) or can be unavailable. In such a scenario, Huawei eNodeB provides Blind
Handover solution to realize Inter-RAT handover from E-UTRAN to GERAN. For
example, if an E-UTRAN cell is co-sited with a GERAN cell, and having the same
coverage range, operators can configure the GERAN cell as the E-UTRAN cell's blind
handover target cell. When handover trigger condition (load, service) is met, the eNodeB
can handover the UE to the blind handover target cell without Inter-RAT measurement.
Blind handover, compared to PS handover, features more reduced handover time.
2. PS redirection between GERAN and E-UTRAN
If the legacy GERAN networks or UEs cannot support PS handover, Huawei eNodeB
provides PS redirection functionality to realize Inter-RAT handover between GERAN
and E-UTRAN. There is no update requirement for legacy GERAN networks and UEs to
support PS Redirection.
After a UE accesses a cell, the eNodeB delivers two sets of event A2 configurations. One
is used for triggering measurements, and the other is used for triggering urgent
redirection. The triggering of event A2 for urgent redirection indicates that the signal
quality in the serving cell has become too poor to provide services for the UE.
The procedure of PS redirection is the same as that of RRC connection release procedure
in which the carrier frequency information of the target redirection system will be
included in the RRCConnectionRelease message. After a RRC connection of a UE is
released by the source system, the UE reselects to the target system based on the
received carrier frequency information during the release procedure and re-establishes
the connection with the target system. In summary, the handover mechanism of PS
redirection consists of connection release, carrier frequency re-selection, and connection
re-establishment.
3. Idle Mode Mobility

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Note that the above description refers to a UE in active mode mobility. In idle mode
mobility, Cell Selection and Reselection are procedures used for searching a new serving
cell. The UE will continually perform this procedure when it moves. Cell selection and
reselection for Inter-RAT is usually performed in the following scenarios:
− Cell Selection: procedure of cell selection is invoked when the UE initially turns on.
the cell of which technology is selected by the UE is based on the priority setting.
− E-UTRAN to GERAN Cell Reselection: the UE has initially camped on the LTE
cell. When the UE moves out of E-UTRAN coverage, the UE needs to reselect
GERAN if available.
− GERAN to E-UTRAN Cell Reselection: the UE has camped initially on a GERAN
cell. When the UE enters a cell of E-UTRAN coverage, and if E-UTRAN is
configured with higher priority, the UE will reselect E-UTRAN. The priority
information is broadcasted in cell system information.
When camping on a cell, the UE regularly searches for a better cell according to the cell
reselection criteria. If a better cell is found, that cell is selected.
Enhancement
 In eRAN2.0
PS Redirection and Blind Handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN are supported.
 In eRAN2.1
The Handover based on UL power is supported. It guarantees service continuity in
uplink limited power or limited E-UTRAN coverage when a UE moves to the cell edge.
 In eRAN2.2
Each PLMN id of eNodeB will have its own PLMN list; each PLMN list can contain at
most 8 PLMN Identities; PLMN list is used as an access list for serving cell to judge
whether UE could handover to target cell in Inter-PLMN handover; Other cell, whose
PLMN ids are all different with serving cell PLMN id in which UE is located and at
same time are not in its PLMN list, will not be considered as target cell in handover
process for this UE.
 In eRAN6.0
Blind redirections from E-UTRAN to GERAN can be performed as long as the GERAN
frequency information is configured. This enhancement simplifies the neighboring cell
configurations at the early stage of network construction and reduces the operation and
maintenance (OM) cost.This enhancement applies only during the early stage of network
construction. After neighbor relationships (including blind handover priorities) are
configured, redirections should be performed normally, based on the complete neighbor
relationship configurations rather than the frequency information configured at the early
stage of network construction. This enhancement can be enabled by specifying a
redirection priority for each GERAN frequency.
The urgent redirection function has been provided by this feature. After a UE accesses a
cell, the eNodeB delivers two sets of event A2 configurations. One is used for triggering
measurements, and the other is used for triggering urgent redirection. The triggering of
event A2 for urgent redirection indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell has
become too poor to provide services for the UE. In this case, the eNodeB blindly
redirects the UE to a neighboring GERAN, UTRAN, or E-UTRAN cell. Note that the
UE is preferentially redirected to a neighboring E-UTRAN cell and is redirected to a
neighboring UTRAN or GERAN cell (according to the configured priorities for the
UTRAN and GERAN) only if there is no neighboring E-UTRAN cell.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
 CN
Core network should support this function.
 Others
GERAN should support this function.
5.5.2 LOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN

Model
LT1SSRVCCG00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
SRVCC is voice call continuity between IMS over PS access and CS access for calls that are
anchored in the IMS when the UE is capable of transmitting/receiving on only one of those
access networks at a given time.
Benefits
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN, SRVCC maintains voice call continuity for
the UE.
Description
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN, SRVCC is used to maintain voice call
continuity for the UE.
For facilitating session transfer (SRVCC) of the voice component to the CS domain, the IMS
multimedia telephony sessions need to be anchored in the IMS.
For SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN, the MME first receives the handover request from
E-UTRAN with the indication that this is for SRVCC handling, and then triggers the SRVCC
procedure with the MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC through the Sv reference point if the
MME has SRVCC STN-SR information for this UE. The MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC
then initiates the session transfer procedure to the IMS and coordinates it with the CS
handover procedure to the target cell. The MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC then sends the
Forward Relocation Response to the MME, which includes the necessary CS HO command
information for the UE to access the GERAN.
Handling of any non-voice PS bearer is done by the PS bearer splitting function in the MME.
The MME may suppress the handover of non-voice PS bearer during the SRVCC procedure.
The handover of non-voice PS bearer is performed according to the Inter-RAT handover
procedure defined in 3GPP TS 23.401. The MME is responsible for processing the Forward

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Relocation Response from the MSC Server during the SRVCC and PS-PS handover
procedures.
The following figure shows the SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN
Figure 1.1 SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 CN
IMS multimedia telephony
5.5.3 LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN

Model
LT1S00CFBG00
Availability
This feature is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
When UE is in the E-UTRAN and GERAN coverage overlapped area and E-UTRAN cannot
provide CS-domain services for the UE, we can use CS fallback to GERAN to provide CS-
domain service for the UE.
Benefits
We can use CS fallback to GERAN to provide CS-domain service for the UE which is
camped in the E-UTRAN that cannot provide any CS-domain service for the UE.
Description
The CS fallback in EPS enables the provisioning of CS-domain services by reuse of CS
infrastructure when the UE is served by E-UTRAN. A CS fallback enabled terminal,
connected to E-UTRAN may use GERAN to establish one or more CS-domain services. This
function is only available in case E-UTRAN coverage is overlapped by GERAN coverage.
CS fallback and IMS-based services shall be able to co-exist in the same operator's network.
The CS fallback in EPS function is realized by using the SGs interface mechanism between
the MSC Server and the MME.
Figure 1.1 CS fallback in EPS architecture
The MGW is not shown in the figure since the CS fallback in EPS does not have any impacts
to the U-plane handling<0}.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 UE
UE needs to support CSFB.
 Other features
LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.5.4 LOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to GERAN

Model
LT1S0IRLSG00
Availability
This feature is
 not applicable to Micro
Summary
This feature applies when E-UTRAN and GERAN have the same coverage area and E-
UTRAN is highly loaded.
Benefits
This feature increases resource usage, provides QoS guarantee, reduces the probability of
system overload, and decreases service drop rates.
Description
When an E-UTRAN cell is highly loaded, this feature is triggered to transfer traffic load to
GERAN cells.
The E-UTRAN cell measures and evaluates cell loads. Then, it decides whether to hand over
some UEs to neighboring cells. If the E-UTRAN cell load is higher than a predefined
threshold, load balancing is triggered. The cell load is represented by the PRB usage
according to 3GPP TS 36.314.
This feature applies only to UEs in connected mode. The load balancing procedure includes
the following phases: load measurement and evaluation, triggering of load balancing,
selection of candidate UEs, and handover execution.
This feature requires that E-UTRAN and GERAN have the same coverage area.
Enhancement
 In eRAN2.1,
This feature can be enabled or disabled by users.
Dependency
 Other features
This feature requires LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
GERAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.5.5 LOFD-001046 Service based inter-RAT handover to GERAN

Model
LT1S0SBIRG00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
It is to steer the VOIP service to GERAN and LTE system support PS service during the
service setup phase.
Benefits
It can utilize the legacy network resource and improve LTE system capacity at the same time
that it can guarantee the service QoS. It can reduce the possibility of system overload and
decrease the service dropping rate.
Description
LTE system sends inter-system measurement control message to UE which want to set up
VOIP service and notices it to execute the measurement. When UE reports B1 event to
eNodeB, eNodeB decides whether to setup service in the GERAN based on ERAB (EPS
RAB) QCI handover strategy
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
LOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN
5.5.6 LOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN

Model
LT1S0FCFBG00
Availability
This feature is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Summary
When the RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure is supported by the core network
of LTE as well as that of GERAN, the RAN of LTE as well as that of GERAN and the UE,
Flash CS Fallback will be employed to provide a decreased delay on CS access.
Flash CS Fallback is in compliance with 3GPP R9.
Benefits
Flash CS Fallback to GERAN provides a decrease in CS service access delay to promote user
experience. About 2 seconds delay could be reduced compare with normal R8 CS Fallback.
Description
RIM procedure is accomplished with the MME and the GSM/UMTS core network nodes to
forward the request in a transparent manner to the target GSM/UMTS cell and the target cell
encapsulating the SI and sending back to LTE cell.
eNodeB can get the system information of the GSM/UMTS neighbor cells with RIM
procedure according to 3GPP R9. This information can be sent to UE during CS Fallback
procedure so that the system information requiring and updating activities can be omitted or
partially omitted and the delay can be reduced for CS Fallback.
Whether an UE supports 3GPP R9 or not, it will benefit from employing the Blind CS
Fallback strategy, when the blind HO neighbor cells have been configured to a LTE cell.
Using the blind HO neighbor cells will definitely decrease the time delay from measurement
and SI access.
Enhancement
The following adaptive blind CS fallback function has been introduced in eRAN6.0.
In a GSM+LTE (GL) multi-mode base station, two systems use different antennas. The E-
UTRAN cell edge may not be included in the GERAN cell coverage. If the E-UTRAN
frequency band is lower than the GERAN frequency band, the E-UTRAN cell coverage is
greater than the GERAN cell coverage. In this scenario, eRAN6.0 introduces adaptive blind
CS fallback. With this function, an eNodeB performs blind-handover-based CS fallback and
measurement-based CS fallback for cell center users (CCUs) and cell edge users (CEUs),
respectively. This saves the inter-RAT measurement time for CCUs and increases the CS
fallback success rate for CEUs, both reducing the CS fallback delay.
None
Dependency
 UE
Require R9 UE to support RIM procedure.
 CN
R9 compliant CN to support RIM procedure.
 Other features

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
This feature depends on LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.

 Others
GERAN also needs to support RIM procedure.
5.5.7 LOFD-081283 Ultra-Flash CSFB to GERAN

Model
LT1SUFCSFB20
Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from eRAN8.1.
 applicable to Micro from eRAN8.1.
 applicable to LampSite from eRAN8.1.
Summary
When a UE initiates a voice service request in a VoIP-incapable E-UTRAN cell within the
overlapping area between the E-UTRAN and a GERAN, this feature triggers a single radio
voice call continuity (SRVCC) procedure to have circuit switched (CS) resources prepared in
the GERAN.
Benefits
This feature decreases the CS fallback (CSFB) delay by about 1.5s and improves user
experience.
Description
The following figure shows the procedure for ultra-flash CSFB to GERAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.1 Procedure for ultra-flash CSFB to GERAN
When the core network identifies the Huawei proprietary SRVCC procedure for CSFB, it
sends the BSC a handover request message that contains CS-related parameters. As instructed
by the message, the BSC prepares CS resources.
Compared with standard CSFB procedures, this CSFB procedure does not require
authentication, ciphering, or CS bearer setup after the UE is handed over to the GERAN. As a
result, the CSFB delay decreases.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
 Transport network
None
 Core network
MMEs and MSCs must be Huawei equipment and support ultra-flash CSFB.
 OSS
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Other features
This feature requires the feature LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.
 Others
None
5.5.8 LOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN

Model
LT1S0CSFLG00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
By new defined LAI IE, eNodeB can solve the difference of target RAT selecting between
eNodeB and MME , also can solve the difference of target cell selecting due to the
discrepancy between the TA and LA; The optimized CSFB process of eNodeB can avoid
unnecessary LAU and reduce the CSFB E2E latency;
For the LTE-only operator of whom CSFB must rely on the other 2G operator, the optimized
CSFB process of eNodeB can also avoid the wrong PLMN selecting in such Multi-PLMN
scenario.
Benefits
When LTE to GSM CS fallback happens, this feature could reduce the possibility of Location
Area Update (LAU) during fallback. So that the CS fallback delay due to unnecessary LAU is
reduced. In Multi-PLMN scenario this feature could avoid CSFB fail due to the PLMN
updating.
Description
In the coexistence scenario of GUL, The operator make MME and 2G MSC combined attach
policy when MME receive the UE's attach request for any GUL/GL terminal because MME
doesn't know the capability of UE; MME also maintains the mapping relation between the TA
and LA, the LA belongs to the attached 2G MSC;
MME sends the LA to eNodeB though the new defined LAI IE of S1AP, when eNodeB
receives the CSFB and LAI indication, eNodeB can select the proper RAT and neighbor cell.
The optimized CSFB process of eNodeB can avoid unnecessary LAU and reduce the CSFB
E2E latency
For the LTE-only operators of whom CSFB must rely on the other 2G operator, the optimized
CSFB process of eNodeB can also avoid the wrong PLMN selecting in such Multi-PLMN
scenario and avoid CSFB fail due to the PLMN updating.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 UE
UE supports R8 or R9 CSFB.
 CN
MME needs to support the LAI IE.
 Other features
LOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.
5.5.9 LOFD-001073 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to

GERAN
Model
LT1S0DBIHG00
Availability
This feature is
 not applicable to LampSite
Summary
Huawei LTE eNodeB supports distance based handover from E-UTRAN to GERAN in
Mobility features.
Benefits
Better End user Experience (Always Best Connected)
Description
When moving around away from the serving eNodeB with frequency F1, the user may still
experience a relatively strong signal from F1 so that the condition of A2 event can't be
satisfied to trigger an Inter-RAT handover to GERAN, even though the neighboring GERAN
signal is much better than F1. In order to make the user always keep the best connection, a
distance based handover to GERAN is employed.
When distance based HO algorithm is used, eNodeB should continuously measure the
distance to each UE based on the TA measurement, once the distance exceeds an operator
configured distance threshold, Inter-RAT gap measurements of neighboring GERAN will be
triggered to find an optimal handover candidate to improve user performance

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
This feature depends on LOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
GERAN.
5.5.10 LOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN

Model
LT1S0CFBSG00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
Huawei eNodeB supports CS fallback flexible steering based on the UE state, to select first
target radio access technology (RAT) as GERAN, and different CS fallback mechanism
priorities for UE in each state.
Benefits
This feature allows the UE in idle and active state have separate CS fallback strategy. The
strategy allows the UE to select GERAN as first priority, and select different CS fallback
mechanisms for UE in different state.
Description
CS fallback flexible steering is performed based on UE states, which are idle (supporting CS
only) and active (supporting CS+PS). For each state, CS fall back behavior could be defined
as following:
 Set GERAN as first priority of RAT at CS fallback.
 Set priorities of CS fallback mechanisms, including PS handover, PS redirection, cell
change order/network assisted cell change (CCO/NACC), and flash CS fallback.
After selecting the target RAT, to use blind CSFB or CSFB with measurement is a common
setting for the cell, which is not separated for UE states.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
 Other features
5.5.11 LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Reselection

Availability
This feature is:
 Applicable to macro sites from eRAN1.0.
 Applicable to small cells from eRA3.0.
 Applicable to LampSite from eRAN6.0.
Summary
The cell selection and reselection mechanism allows UEs in idle mode in the LTE system to
select or reselect a cell to camp on for best services.
Benefits
 This feature is used by UEs in idle mode in the LTE system to select or reselect cells to
camp on.
 This feature helps UEs in idle mode automatically select networks without complicated
manual operations.
 This feature allows UEs to camp on cells with good signal qualities for better services.
Description
When a UE transits from the connected mode to the idle mode or after it selects a PLMN, the
UE must select a cell to camp on. The network access server (NAS) determines the RAT for
cell selection based on the RAT related to the selected PLMN, forbidden registration area list,
and equivalent PLMN list. After camping on the cell, the UE monitors system information,
performs measurements on the serving cell and neighboring cells, and selects a better cell to
camp on based on measurement rules and cell reselection criteria.
After camping on a cell, a UE searches for cells with better signal quality regularly based on
cell reselection conditions. Once a cell with better signal quality is searched, the UE in idle
mode will trigger cell reselection.
System messages deliver priorities of different E-UTRAN frequencies to the UE. RRC
connection release messages delivered to the UE may also contain priorities of E-UTRAN
frequencies.
In cell selection and reselection, the priority of a micro eNodeB is higher than that of a micro
eNodeB. Therefore, UEs preferably select to camp on cells of micro eNodeBs.
If cells in the micro eNodeB work at the same frequency with cells in the macro eNodeB, UEs
preferably select to camp on cells of micro eNodeBs.
Enhancement
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
None
5.6 L2U
5.6.1 LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN
and UTRAN
Model
LT1SPIRHLU00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN provides the function of Inter-RAT
cell selection and reselection between E-UTRAN and UTRAN, and the function that the UEs
can be handed over to an Inter-RAT UTRAN cell for the reason of limited cell coverage. If the
PS handover is not supported by the current networks, the PS redirection between E-UTRAN
and UTRAN is used to realize the Inter-RAT mobility. Moreover, the blind handover is
provided if Inter-RAT measurements may be skipped (to save time and resources) or can be
unavailable.
PS handover between E-UTRAN and UTRAN also supports the function that the UEs can be
handed over to an Inter-RAT UTRAN cell when there is uplink coverage restriction on E-
UTRAN.
PS handover based on uplink power is supported. When UE's service QoS is limited in uplink,
eNodeB can trigger an Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN to guarantee the service QoS.
Benefits
The feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables the seamless mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
 Guarantees smooth evolution from legacy wireless systems to LTE systems.
 Provides supplementary coverage for E-UTRAN in the early phase using the legacy
wireless systems to prevent call drop, thus, seamless user coverage
 Improves the network performance and end user experience
Description
1. PS Handover between E-UTRAN and UTRAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Handover between E-UTRAN and UTRAN is a critical feature to allow seamless co-
existence and a smooth evolution from the legacy wireless communication systems to
LTE system. It is one type of inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) handover. It exists in
the early E-UTRAN deployment when a UE moves to an area where E-UTRAN does not
have coverage while UTRAN has.
In Huawei eNodeB, handover is based on the coverage triggered by evaluating the cells'
DL reference signals that can be RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), RSRQ
(Reference Signal Received Quality) of E-UTRAN, and Received Signal Code Power
(RSCP) or Ec/N0 of UTRAN .
When a UE moves out of the area of E-UTRAN, the eNodeB decides whether to
handover it from E-UTRAN to UTRAN according to its reported measurement. The UE
performs handover to the target UTRAN cell when it receives the handover command
from the source eNodeB.
The Inter-RAT measurement of the target cell is gap-assisted for the UE with only one
RF receiver. In the serving cell, the Inter-RAT measurement is triggered by an event A2
that means the DL reference signal quality of E-UTRAN become worse than the absolute
threshold, and stopped by an event A1 that means the DL reference signal quality of E-
UTRAN becomes better than absolute threshold.
The Inter-RAT handover is triggered by an event B1 that means the Common Pilot
Channel (CPICH), RSCP and/or Ec/N0 of UTRAN cells is better than absolute
threshold. After receiving the measurement report from the UE, the eNodeB decides
whether to hand over it to UTRAN.
Generally speaking, LTE system is limited in uplink. Sometimes, QoS can be guaranteed
in downlink, but in uplink it is not satisfied even UE has transmitted its full power. To
guarantee UE's service QoS in this scenario, Huawei eNodeB supports uplink
transmission power based Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN.
While eNodeB detected UE's QoS is limited, eNodeB will send measurement control
message to UE. When UE reports B1 event to eNodeB, eNodeB decides whether to
handover to UTRAN.
Huawei eNodeB also supports PS handover from UTRAN to E-UTRAN.
In some specific scenario, Inter-RAT measurements may be skipped (to save time and
resources) or can be unavailable. In such a scenario, Huawei eNodeB provides Blind
Handover to realize Inter-RAT handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN in eRAN2.0. For
example, if an E-UTRAN cell is co-sited with a UTRAN site, and having the same
coverage range, operators can configure the UTRAN cell as the E-UTRAN cell's blind
handover target cell. When handover trigger conditions (load, service) are met, the
eNodeB can handover the UE to the blind handover target cell without Inter-RAT
measurement. Blind handover, compared to PS handover, features more reduced
handover time.
2. PS Redirection between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
If the legacy UTRAN or UEs cannot support PS handover, Huawei eNodeB provides PS
redirection functionality to realize Inter-RAT handover between UTRAN and E-UTRAN
in eRAN2.0. There is no upgrade requirement for legacy UTRAN and UEs to support PS
Redirection.
After a UE accesses a cell, the eNodeB delivers two sets of event A2 configurations. One
is used for triggering measurements, and the other is used for triggering urgent
redirection. The triggering of event A2 for urgent redirection indicates that the signal
quality in the serving cell has become too poor to provide services for the UE.
The procedure of PS redirection is the same as that of RRC connection release procedure
in which the carrier frequency information of the target redirection system will be
included in the RRCConnectionRelease message. After a RRC connection of a UE is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
released by the source LTE system, the UE reselects the target system based on the
received carrier frequency information during the release procedure and re-establishes
the connection with the target system. In summary, the handover mechanism of PS
redirection consists of connection release, carrier-frequency re-selection, and connection
re-establishment.
3. Idle Mode Mobility
Note that the above description refers to a UE in active mode mobility. In idle mode
mobility, Cell Selection and Reselection are procedures used for searching a new RAT
serving cell. The UE will continually perform this procedure when it moves. Cell
selection and Reselection for Inter-RAT is usually performed in the following scenarios:
− Cell Selection: Procedure of cell selection is invoked when the UE initially turns
on. The cell of which technology is selected by the UE is based on the priority
setting.
− E-UTRAN to UTRAN Cell Reselection: The UE has initially camped on the LTE
cell. When the UE moves out of E-UTRAN coverage, the UE needs to reselect
UTRAN if available.
− UTRAN to E-UTRAN Cell Reselection: The UE has camped initially on a UTRAN
cell. When the UE enters a cell of E-UTRAN coverage, and if E-UTRAN is
configured with higher priority, the UE will reselect E-UTRAN. The priority
information is broadcasted in cell system information.
When camping on a cell, the UE regularly searches for a better cell according to the cell
reselection criteria. If a better cell is found, that cell is selected.
Enhancement
 In eRAN2.0
PS Redirection and Blind Handover between E-UTRAN and UTRAN are supported.
 In eRAN2.1
The Handover based on UL power is supported. It guarantees service continuity in
uplink limited power or limited E-UTRAN coverage when a UE moves to the cell edge.
 In eRAN2.2,
Each PLMN id of eNodeB will have its own PLMN list; each PLMN list can contain at
most 8 PLMN Identities; PLMN list is used as an access list for serving cell to judge
whether UE could handover to target cell in Inter-PLMN handover; Other cell, whose
PLMN ids are all different with serving cell PLMN id in which UE is located and at
same time are not in its PLMN list, will not be considered as target cell in handover
process for this UE.
 In eRAN6.0
Blind redirections from E-UTRAN to UTRAN can be performed as long as the UTRAN
frequency information is configured. This enhancement simplifies the neighboring cell
configurations at the early stage of network construction and reduces the operation and
maintenance (OM) cost. This enhancement applies only during the early stage of
network construction. After neighbor relationships (including blind handover priorities)
are configured, redirections should be performed normally, based on the complete
neighbor relationship configurations rather than the frequency information configured at
the early stage of network construction. This enhancement can be enabled by specifying
a redirection priority for each UTRAN frequency.
The urgent redirection function has been provided by this feature. After a UE accesses a
cell, the eNodeB delivers two sets of event A2 configurations. One is used for triggering
measurements, and the other is used for triggering urgent redirection. The triggering of
event A2 for urgent redirection indicates that the signal quality in the serving cell has

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
become too poor to provide services for the UE. In this case, the eNodeB blindly
redirects the UE to a neighboring GERAN, UTRAN, or E-UTRAN cell. Note that the
UE is preferentially redirected to a neighboring E-UTRAN cell and is redirected to a
neighboring UTRAN or GERAN cell (according to the configured priorities for the
UTRAN and GERAN) only if there is no neighboring E-UTRAN cell.
Dependency
 CN
Core network should support this function.
 Others
UTRAN should support this function.
5.6.2 LOFD-001022 SRVCC to UTRAN

Model
LT1SSRVCCU00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) is voice call continuity between IMS over PS
access and CS access for calls that are anchored in the IMS when the UE is capable of
transmitting/receiving on only one of those access networks at a given time.
Benefits
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to UTRAN, SRVCC maintains voice call continuity for
the UE.
Description
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to UTRAN, SRVCC is used to maintain voice call
continuity for the UE.
For facilitating session transfer (SRVCC) of the voice component to the CS domain, the IMS
multimedia telephony sessions need to be anchored in the IMS.
For SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN, the MME first receives the handover request from
E-UTRAN with the indication that this is for SRVCC handling, and then triggers the SRVCC
procedure with the MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC through the Sv reference point if the
MME has SRVCC STN-SR information for this UE. The MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC
then initiates the session transfer procedure to the IMS and coordinates it with the CS
handover procedure to the target cell. The MSC Server enhanced for SRVCC then sends the

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Forward Relocation Response to the MME, which includes the necessary CS HO command
information for the UE to access the UTRAN.
Handling of any non-voice PS bearer is done by the PS bearer splitting function in the MME.
The MME may suppress the handover of non-voice PS bearer during the SRVCC procedure.
The handover of non-voice PS bearer is performed according to the Inter-RAT handover
procedure defined in 3GPP TS 23.401. The MME is responsible for processing the Forward
Relocation Response from the MSC Server during the SRVCC and PS-PS handover
procedures.
The following figure shows the SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN
Figure 1.1 SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 CN
IMS multimedia telephony.
5.6.3 LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN

Model
LT1S00CFBU00
Availability
This feature is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN

Summary
When UE is in the E-UTRAN and UTRAN coverage overlapped area and E-UTRAN cannot
provide CS-domain services for the UE, we can use CS fallback to UTRAN to provide CS-
domain service for the UE.
Benefits
We can use CS fallback to UTRAN to provide CS-domain service for the UE which is
camped in the E-UTRAN that cannot provide any CS-domain service for the UE.
Description
The CS fallback in EPS enables the provisioning of CS-domain services by reuse of CS
infrastructure when the UE is served by E-UTRAN. A CS fallback enabled terminal,
connected to E-UTRAN may use UTRAN to establish one or more CS-domain services. This
function is only available in case E-UTRAN coverage is overlapped by UTRAN coverage.
CS fallback and IMS-based services shall be able to co-exist in the same operator's network.
The CS fallback in EPS function is realized by using the SGs interface mechanism between
the MSC Server and the MME.
Figure 1.1 CS fallback in EPS architecture
The MGW is not shown in the figure since the CS fallback in EPS does not have any impacts
to the U-plane handling.
Enhancement
 In eRAN6.0
eNodeB can perform circuit switched (CS) fallback to Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System (UMTS) cells based on UMTS cell load information, which
is shared with LTE cells by using the RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure.
Cell load information shared by a radio network controller (RNC) with an eNodeB is
used in target cell selection for CS fallback. This increases the success rate of CS
fallback to the universal terrestrial radio access network (UTRAN), prevents unnecessary
delay and signaling overhead, and improves user experience.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Dependency
 UE
UE needs to support CSFB.
 Other features
UTRAN.
 Others
Target load based CS fallback to UTRAN requires core network and RNC support RIM-
based load information transfer to eUTRAN.
5.6.4 LOFD-001043 Service based inter-RAT handover to UTRAN

Model
LT1S0SBIRU00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
It is to steer the VOIP service to UMTS and LTE system support PS service during the service
setup phase.
Benefits
It can utilize the legacy network resource and improve LTE system capacity at the same time
that it can guarantee the service QoS. It can reduce the possibility of system overload and
decrease the service dropping rate.
Description
LTE system sends inter-system measurement control message to UE which want to set up
VOIP service and notices it to execute the measurement. When UE reports B1 event to
eNodeB, eNodeB decides whether to setup service in the UMTS based on RAB QCI handover
strategy.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN or LOFD-
001022 SRVCC to UTRAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.6.5 LOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN

Model
LT1S0IRLSU00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
In an LTE and UMTS co-coverage scenario, this feature can transfer load from an E-TURAN
cell to neighboring UTRAN cells when the load status of the E-UTRAN cell is high.
Benefits
This feature achieves better utilization of network resources of LTE and UMTS network and it
is based on UE capability. In addition, it reduces the probability of system overload and
increases the access success rate.
Description
In a commercial LTE network, LTE cells have high load because of the differentia of UE
services. In this situation, MLB is triggered to share traffic load to UMTS.
An LTE cell measures and evaluates its cell load. Then it decides whether to transfer some
UEs to neighboring UTRAN cells. The triggering variable of inter-RAT MLB can be the PRB
usage, number of UEs, or either of them. If the triggering variable is PRB usage, an eNodeB
triggers PRB-usage-based MLB to UTRAN when the PRB usage of a cell and the number of
RRC_CONNECTED UEs in the cell meet certain conditions. In this case, the eNodeB
transfers some RRC_CONNECTED UEs and idle UEs to neighboring UTRAN cells through
handover and redirection, respectively. A UE in the RRC connection release procedure is
regarded as an idle UE. If the triggering variable is the number of UEs, an eNodeB triggers
user-number-based MLB to UTRAN when the number of RRC_CONNECTED UEs in a cell
meets certain conditions. In this case, the eNodeB transfers some RRC_CONNECTED UEs
to neighboring UTRAN cells through handover. If the triggering variable is either the PRB
usage or the number of UEs, the eNodeB triggers the corresponding type of MLB to UTRAN
when the PRB usage or the number of UEs meets certain conditions.
The MLB to UTRAN procedure includes the following steps: load measurement and
evaluation, load balance triggering, load information exchange (optional), target
cell/frequency selection, UE selection, UE dedicated priority update (optional), and load
transfer.
This feature is used in the LTE and UMTS co-coverage scenarios.
Enhancement
 eRAN2.1

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
The Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN feature is enhanced with the following
administration functions:
Operators can enable or disable the Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN function.
 eRAN3.0
Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN for UEs releasing to Idle Mode is introduced. When
the number of UEs in an LTE cell and the PRB usage of an LTE cell are both higher than
the thresholds, eNodeB will select some UEs in normal RRC Release procedure to re-
select and camp on UMTS, by using Dedicated Priority contained RRC Connection
Release message.
 eRAN7.0
Frequency-priority-based MLB is supported.
 eRAN8.1
User-number-based MLB to UTRAN is now supported. In a scenario where the number
of UEs in a cell is large but the PRB usage of a cell is small, user-number-based MLB
can be triggered when the number of RRC_CONNECTED UEs in the cell meets certain
conditions.
Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 CN
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
 Others
None
5.6.6 LOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN

Model
LT1S0FCFBU00
Availability
This feature is

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Summary
When the RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure is supported by the core network
of LTE as well as that of UTRAN, the RAN of LTE as well as that of UTRAN and the UE,
Flash CS Fallback will be employed to provide a decreased delay on CS access.
Flash CS Fallback is in compliance with 3GPP R9.
Benefits
Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN provides a decrease in CS service access delay to promote user
experience. About 1 second delay could be reduced compare with normal R8 CS Fallback.
Description
RIM procedure is accomplished with the MME and the GSM/UMTS core network nodes to
forward the request in a transparent manner to the target GSM/UMTS cell and the target cell
encapsulating the SI and sending back to LTE cell.
eNodeB can get the system information of the GSM/UMTS neighbor cells with RIM
procedure according to 3GPP R9. This information can be sent to UE during CS Fallback
procedure so that the system information requiring and updating activities can be omitted or
partially omitted and the delay can be reduced for CS Fallback.
Whether an UE supports 3GPP R9 or not, it will benefit from employing the Blind CS
Fallback strategy, when the blind HO neighbor cells have been configured to a LTE cell.
Using the blind HO neighbor cells will definitely decrease the time delay from measurement
and SI access.
Enhancement
The following adaptive blind CS fallback function has been introduced in eRAN6.0.
In a UMTS+LTE (UL) multi-mode base station, two systems use different antennas. The E-
UTRAN cell edge may not be included in the UTRAN cell coverage. If the E-UTRAN
frequency band is lower than the UTRAN frequency band, the E-UTRAN cell coverage is
greater than the UTRAN cell coverage. In this scenario, eRAN6.0 introduces adaptive blind
CS fallback. With this function, an eNodeB performs blind-handover-based CS fallback and
measurement-based CS fallback for cell center users (CCUs) and cell edge users (CEUs),
respectively. This saves the inter-RAT measurement time for CCUs and increases the CS
fallback success rate for CEUs, both reducing the CS fallback delay.
None
Dependency
 UE
Require R9 UE to support RIM procedure.
 CN
R9 compliant CN to support RIM procedure.
 Other features
LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN.
 Others
UTRAN also needs to support RIM procedure.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.6.7 LOFD-070202 Ultra-Flash CSFB to UTRAN

Model
LT1SUFCSFB00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
This feature applies to areas where UMTS and LTE networks are deployed and LTE networks
do not support VoIP services.
When a UE initiates a CS service setup request in an LTE cell, this feature enables the RNC to
prepare CS resources before a CS fallback through the SRVCC handover procedure. This
shortens the access delay for the CS fallback and improves user experience.
Benefits
This feature shortens the access delay for CS fallbacks by around 1 second and improves user
experience.
Description
This feature works as follows:
1. When a UE initiates a CS service setup request in an LTE cell, the eNodeB triggers an
LTE-to-UMTS SRVCC handover.
2. Upon identifying the proprietary SRVCC-based CS fallback procedure, the CN sends the
RNC a RELOCATION REQUEST message that includes parameter indications
instructing the RNC to prepare CS resources before a CS fallback.
3. Based on the indications, the RNC prepares the required CS resources. The RNC then
performs special operations to ensure that the CS fallback succeeds.
4. After the CS fallback, the UE and CN skip the authentication and encryption procedures
required by the standard CS fallback procedure.
Figure 1.1 illustrates how this feature works.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
Figure 1.1 Working principle of CSFB based on SRVCC
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support the LTE-to-UMTS SRVCC handover procedure.
 Transport Network
None
 CN
The MME and MSC are provided by Huawei and both support this feature.
 OSS
None
 Other Features
This feature requires the following features:
− LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
− WRFD-160271 Ultra-Flash CSFB
 Others
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.6.8 LOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN

Model
LT1S0CSFLU00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
By using new defined LAI IE, the optimized CSFB process of eNodeB can avoid unnecessary
LAU and reduce the CSFB E2E latency
For the LTE-only operators of whom CSFB must rely on the other UMTS operator, the
optimized CSFB process of eNodeB can also avoid the wrong PLMN selecting in such Multi-
PLMN scenario.
Benefits
When LTE to UMTS CS fallback happens, this feature could reduce the possibility of
Location Area Update (LAU) during fallback. So that the CS fallback delay due to
unnecessary LAU is reduced. In Multi-PLMN scenario this feature could avoid CSFB fail due
to the PLMN updating.
Description
In the coexistence scenario of GUL, The operator make MME and 3G MSC combined attach
policy when MME receive the UE's attach request for any GUL/UL terminal because MME
doesn't know the capability of UE; MME also maintains the mapping relation between the TA
and LA, the LA belongs to the attached 3G MSC;
MME sends the LA to eNodeB through the new defined LAI IE of S1AP, eNodeB can select
the proper RAT and neighbor cell with it. Target cell selection is optimized to avoid
unnecessary LAU, which reduced the CSFB E2E latency.
For the LTE-only operators, their CSFB must rely on the other UMTS operators, The
optimized CSFB process of eNodeB can also avoid the wrong PLMN selecting in such Multi-
PLMN scenario and avoid CSFB fail due to the PLMN updating.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 UE
UE supports R8 or R9 CSFB.
 CN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
MME needs to support the LAI IE.

 Other features
LOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN.
5.6.9 LOFD-001072 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to

UTRAN
Model
LT1S0DBIHU00
Availability
This feature is
 not applicable to LampSite
Summary
Huawei LTE eNodeB supports distance based handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN in
Mobility features.
Benefits
Better End user Experience (Always Best Connected)
Description
When moving around away from the serving eNodeB with frequency F1, the user may still
experience a relatively strong signal from F1 so that the condition of A2 event can't be
satisfied to trigger an Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN, even though the neighboring UTRAN
signal is much better than F1. In order to make the user always keep the best connection, a
distance based handover to UTRAN is employed.
When distance based HO algorithm is used, eNodeB should continuously measure the
distance to each UE based on the TA measurement, once the distance exceeds an operator
configured distance threshold, Inter-RAT gap measurements of neighboring UTRAN will be
triggered to find an optimal handover candidate to improve user performance
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
UTRAN.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.6.10 LOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering

Model
LT1SEUCSPS00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
HUAWEI eNodeB supports the prioritized inter-RAT frequency selection based on the
provisioned CS and/or PS service-type priority during handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.
This feature applies to Coverage-based and CS Fallback triggered E-UTRAN to UTRAN
Handover.
Benefits
This feature is an enhanced LTE mobility feature by providing a kind of flexible prioritized
frequency selection method for E-UTRAN to UTRAN handover, with which, UEs with
different CS and/or PS services can be steered from E-UTRAN to the designated high-priority
frequencies of UTRAN according to the operator's network planning and load-balancing
preferences.
Description
When Coverage-based or CS Fallback triggers E-UTRAN to UTRAN handover, the eNodeB
initiates the inter-RAT blind handover process to the UE which is incapable of inter-RAT
measurement. HUAWEI eNodeB can prioritize UTRAN frequencies based on UE's existing
CS-domain or PS-domain service type and each frequency's CS/PS priority configuration, and
then send the UE the highest priority frequency for either blind handover or blind redirection
if the UE doesn't support inter-RAT handover.
When Coverage-based triggers E-UTRAN to UTRAN handover, the eNodeB initiates the
inter-RAT measurement process to the UE which is capable of inter-RAT measurement.
HUAWEI eNodeB can prioritize UTRAN frequencies based on UE's existing CS-domain or
PS-domain service type and each frequency's CS/PS priority configuration, and then send the
UE the highest priority frequency for measurement
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
LOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN or LOFD-
001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
5.6.11 LOFD-070203 RIM Based LTE Target Cell Selection

Model
LT1SRBLTCS00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
This feature applies to areas jointly covered by UMTS and LTE.
During service- or load-based UMTS-to-LTE handovers or redirections, this feature sends
LTE cell load information to UTMS cells through the RAN information management (RIM)
procedure and the RNC preferentially selects LTE cells or frequencies with low loads as target
cells. By preferentially selecting low-load cells or frequencies, this feature increases the
UMTS-to-LTE handover or redirection success rate and prevents ping-pong inter-RAT
handovers or redirections.
Benefits
 Increases the UMTS-to-LTE handover or redirection success rate
 Prevents ping-pong inter-RAT handovers or redirections
Description
When this feature is not activated, the UTRAN cannot obtain LTE cell load information. In
this case, the RNC performs service- or load-based UMTS-to-LTE handovers or redirections
without considering LTE cell loads. This results in handover preparation failures, increased
signaling overheads, and ping-pong inter-RAT handovers or redirections.
When this feature is activated, the RNC sends LTE cell load queries to the eNodeB through
the RIM procedure. In turn, the eNodeB sends the required cell load information to the RNC
through the RIM procedure. When the loads of the related LTE cells change, the eNodeB
actively informs the RNC of the changes. In this case, the RNC can perform service- or load-
based UMTS-to-LTE handovers or redirections based on LTE cell loads.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 eNodeB
None

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 UE
None
 Transport Network
None
 CN
NEs on the CN side must support the RIM procedure that complies with 3GPP Release
9.
 OSS
None
 Other Features
At least one of the following features has been activated on the UTRAN side:
− WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE
− WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
− WRFD-150216 Load Based PS Redirection from UMTS to LTE
− WRFD-150217 Load Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE
 Others
The UTRAN can obtain LTE cell load information through the RIM procedure.
5.6.12 LOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN

Model
LT1S0CFBSG00
Availability
This feature is
Summary
Huawei eNodeB supports CS fallback flexible steering based on the UE state, to select first
target radio access technology (RAT) as GERAN, and different CS fallback mechanism
priorities for UE in each state.
Benefits
This feature allows the UE in idle and active state have separate CS fallback strategy. The
strategy allows the UE to select GERAN as first priority, and select different CS fallback
mechanisms for UE in different state.
Description
CS fallback flexible steering is performed based on UE states, which are idle (supporting CS
only) and active (supporting CS+PS). For each state, CS fall back behavior could be defined
as following:

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
 Set GERAN as first priority of RAT at CS fallback.

 Set priorities of CS fallback mechanisms, including PS handover, PS redirection, cell
change order/network assisted cell change (CCO/NACC), and flash CS fallback.
After selecting the target RAT, to use blind CSFB or CSFB with measurement is a common
setting for the cell, which is not separated for UE states.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
 Other features
5.6.13 LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Reselection

Availability
This feature is:
 Applicable to macro sites from eRAN1.0.
 Applicable to small cells from eRAN3.0.
 Applicable to LampSite from eRAN6.0.
Overview of Features
The cell selection and reselection mechanism allows UEs in idle mode in the LTE system to
select or reselect a cell to camp on for best services.
Benefits
 This feature is used by UEs in idle mode in the LTE system to select or reselect cells to
camp on.
 This feature helps UEs in idle mode automatically select networks without complicated
manual operations.
 This feature allows UEs to camp on cells with good signal qualities for better services.
Description
When a UE transits from the connected mode to the idle mode or after it selects a PLMN, the
UE must select a cell to camp on. The network access server (NAS) determines the RAT for
cell selection based on the RAT related to the selected PLMN, forbidden registration area list,
and equivalent PLMN list. After camping on the cell, the UE monitors system information,
performs measurements on the serving cell and neighboring cells, and selects a better cell to
camp on based on measurement rules and cell reselection criteria.
After camping on a cell, a UE searches for cells with better signal quality regularly based on
cell reselection conditions. Once a cell with better signal quality is searched, the UE in idle
mode will trigger cell reselection.

Copyright © Huawei
SRAN
System messages deliver priorities of different E-UTRAN frequencies to the UE. RRC
connection release messages delivered to the UE may also contain priorities of E-UTRAN
frequencies.
In cell selection and reselection, the priority of a micro eNodeB is higher than that of a micro
eNodeB. Therefore, UEs preferably select to camp on cells of micro eNodeBs.
If cells in the micro eNodeB work at the same frequency with cells in the macro eNodeB, UEs
preferably select to camp on cells of micro eNodeBs.
Enhancement
None
Dependencies
None

Copyright © Huawei

SR@N12.0 GUL - Interoperability - Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SR@N12.0 GUL - Interoperability - Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SRAN

GUL Multimode Collaboration

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

2 Technological Foundation of Multi-RAT Collaboration.......................................................3

3 Multi-RAT and MultiBand Collaborative Solution.............................................................29

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

3.1.4.4.3 III. Solutions to GSM Service Steering.............................................................................................................141

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

3.1.6.1.4 IV. Solutions to Camping of UEs in Idle Mode in a GSM Network.................................................................254

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

3.2.2.2.3 Setting the Threshold for 3A Event...................................................................................................................397

4 Typical Scenarios of the Live Network.................................................................................452

5 Principles of GUL Interoperability Features.......................................................................464

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

5.3.14 WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g..........................................................................530

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

5.6.13 LBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Reselection..................................................................................................590

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

1.1 Overview of This Engineering Guide

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.2 Problems to be Solved by the Guide

Figure 1.1 Recommended service bearer policies of GUL services

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

2 Technological Foundation of Multi-RAT

2.2 Mode and Spectrum Development

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Figure 1.2 Spectrum development process of GUL

E-UTRA Uplink Downlink Duplex Channel Alias Region

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

6 830 MHz 875 MHz FDD 5, 10 UMTS800 Japan

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

MHz MHz 10, 15

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

to 3600 to 3600 10, 15, 20

Table 2.1 Mapping between frequency bands and supported modes

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8

Figure 1.4 Intra-RAT and inter-RAT networking scenarios

 Intra-RAT special networking scenarios are not covered in this document.

2.3 Subscriber Distribution

2.4 SRAN Feature Design Objectives

Version Version Positioning

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9

Version Version Positioning

of UMTS networks, more and more customers want to implement GU

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10

Version Version Positioning

enabled on live networks.

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11

Version Version Positioning

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12

Version Version Positioning

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13

Version Version Positioning

guarantee voice quality. SRAN10.1 version positioning is as follows:

Issue 01 (2016-07-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14

Version Version Positioning

2.5 Version Requirements for the RAN and CN